Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Trades Handbook
Europa-No 1910X
uj(/-?JLEHRMITTEL
Ulrich Fischer
Roland Gomeringer
Max Heinzler
Roland Kilgus
Friedrich Naher
Stefan Oesterle
Heinz Paetzold
Andreas Stephan
Mechanical and
Metal Trades
Handbook
2nd English edition
Europa-No.: 1910X
Original title:
Ulrich Fischer
Roland Gomeringer
Max Heinzler
Roland Kilgus
Friedrich Naher
Stefan Oesterle
Heinz Paetzold
Andreas Stephan
Dipl.-lng. (FH)
Dipl.-Gwl.
Dipl.-lng. (FH)
Dipl.-Gwl.
Dipl.-lng. (FH)
Dipl.-lng.
Dipl.-lng. (FH)
Dipl.-lng. (FH)
Reutlingen
MeBstetten
Wangen im Allgau
Neckartenzlingen
Balingen
Amtzell
Muhlacker
Kressbronn
Editor:
ISBN 13 978-3-8085-1913-4
Cover design includes a photograph from TESA/Brown & Sharpe, Renens, Switzerland
All rights reserved. This publication is protected under copyright law. Any use other than those permitted by law
must be approved in writing by the publisher.
2010 by Verlag Europa-Lehrmittel, Nourney, Vollmer GmbH & Co. KG, 42781 Haan-Gruiten, Germany
http://www.europa-lehrmittel.de
Translation: Techni-Translate, 72667 Schlaitdorf, Germany; www.techni-translate.com
Eva Schwarz, 76879 Ottersheim, Germany; www.technische-uebersetzungen-eva-schwarz.de
Typesetting: YellowHand GbR, 73257 Kongen, Germany; www.yellowhand.de
Printed by: Media Print Informationstechnologie, D-33100, Paderborn, Germany
2 Physics
p
33-56
3 Technical
drawing
TD
57-114
4 Material science
MS
115-200
5 Machine
elements
ME
201-272
6 Production
Engineering
PE
273-344
7 Automation and
Information Technology
345-406
8 International material
comparison chart,
Standards 407-416
Table of Contents
9
1 Mathematics
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Numerical tables
Square root, Area of a circle
Sine, Cosine
Tangent, Cotangent
Trigonometric Functions
Definitions
Sine, Cosine, Tangent, Cotangent . . . .
Laws of sines and cosines
Angles, Theorem of intersecting
lines
Fundamentals of Mathematics
Using brackets, powers, roots
Equations
Powers often, Interest calculation . . . .
Percentage and proportion
calculations
Symbols, Units
Formula symbols, Mathematical
symbols
SI quantities and units of
measurement
Non-SI units
1.5
10
11
12
1.6
13
13
14
14
1.7
15
16
17
18
19
1.8
1.9
20
22
Lengths
Calculations in a right triangle
Sub-dividing lengths, Arc length
Flat lengths, Rough lengths
Areas
Angular areas
Equilateral triangle, Polygons,
Circle
Circular areas
Volume and Surface area
Cube, Cylinder, Pyramid
Truncated pyramid, Cone,
Truncated cone, Sphere
Composite solids
Mass
General calculations
Linear mass density
Area mass density
Centroids
Centroids of lines
Centroids of plane areas
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Motion
Uniform and accelerated motion
Speeds of machines
Forces
Adding and resolving force vectors . . .
Weight, Spring force
Lever principle, Bearing forces
Torques, Centrifugal force
Work, Power, Efficiency
Mechanical work
Simple machines
Power and Efficiency
Friction
Friction force
Coefficients of friction
Friction in bearings
Pressure in liquids and gases
Pressure, definition and types
Buoyancy
Pressure changes in gases
Strength of materials
Load cases, Load types
Safety factors, Mechanical
strength properties
Tension, Compression,
Surface pressure
Shear, Buckling
26
27
28
29
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
33
2 Physics
2.1
23
24
25
34
35
36
36
37
37
38
39
40
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
44
45
46
2.7
2.8
Bending, Torsion
Shape factors in strength
Static moment, Section modulus,
Moment of inertia
Comparison of various
cross-sectional shapes
Thermodynamics
Temperatures, Linear
expansion, Shrinkage
Quantity of heat
Heat flux, Heat of combustion
Electricity
Ohm's Law, Conductor resistance . . . .
Resistor circuits
Types of current
Electrical work and power
47
48
49
50
51
51
52
53
54
55
56
Table of Contents
57
3 Technical drawing
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Machine elements
Gear types
84
Roller bearings
85
Seals
86
Retaining rings, Springs
87
3.7 Workpiece elements
Bosses, Workpiece edges
88
Thread runouts, Thread undercuts . . . 89
Threads, Screw joints
90
Center holes, Knurls, Undercuts
91
3.8 Welding and Soldering
Graphical symbols
93
Dimensioning examples
95
3.9 Surfaces
Hardness specifications in drawings .. 97
Form deviations, Roughness
98
Surface testing, Surface indications .. 99
3.10 ISO Tolerances and Fits
Fundamentals
102
Basic hole and basic shaft systems .. 106
General Tolerances, Roller
bearing fits
110
Fit recommendations
111
Geometric tolerancing
112
GD&T (Geometric
Dimensioning & Tolerancing)
113
115
4 Materials science
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Materials
Material characteristics of solids
116
Material characteristics of liquids
and gases
117
Periodic table of the elements
118
Designation system for steels
Definition and classification of steel . 120
Material codes, Designation
121
Steel types, Overview
126
Structural steels
128
Case hardened, quenched and tempered, nitrided, free cutting steels . . . 132
Tool steels
135
Stainless steels, Spring steels
136
Finished steel products
Sheet, strip, pipes
139
Profiles
143
Heat treatment
Iron-Carbon phase diagram
153
Processes
154
Cast iron materials
Designation, Material codes
158
Classification
159
Cast iron
160
Malleable cast iron, Cast steel
161
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
Foundry technology
Patterns, Pattern equipment
162
Shrinkage allowances,
Dimensional tolerances
163
Light alloys, Overview of Al alloys .. 164
Wrought aluminum alloys
166
Aluminum casting alloys
168
Aluminum profiles
169
Magnesium and titanium alloys
172
Heavy non-ferrous metals,
Overview
173
Designation system
174
Copper alloys
175
Other metallic materials
Composite materials,
Ceramic materials
177
Sintered metals
178
Plastics, Overview
179
Thermoplastics
182
Thermoset plastics, Elastomers
184
Plastics processing
186
Material testing methods,
Overview
188
Tensile testing
190
Hardness test
192
Corrosion, Corrosion protection . . 196
Hazardous materials
197
Table of Contents
201
5 Machine elements
5.1
Threads (overview)
202
Metric ISO threads
204
Whitworth threads, Pipe threads
206
Trapezoidal and buttress threads
207
Thread tolerances
208
5.2 Bolts and screws (overview)
209
Designations, strength
210
Hexagon head bolts & screws
212
Other bolts & screws
215
Screw joint calculations
221
Locking fasteners
222
Widths across flats, Bolt and
screw drive systems
223
5.3 Countersinks
224
Countersinks for countersunk
head screws
224
Counterbores for cap screws
225
5.4 Nuts (overview)
226
Designations, Strength
227
Hexagon nuts
228
Other nuts
231
5.5 Washers (overview)
233
Flat washers
234
HV, Clevis pin, Conical spring washers . 235
5.6 Pins and clevis pins (overview) . . . 236
Dowel pins, Taper pins, Spring pins . 237
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Quality management
Standards, Terminology
274
Quality planning, Quality testing
276
Statistical analysis
277
Statistical process control
279
Process capability
281
Production planning
Time accounting according to REFA . 282
Cost accounting
284
Machine hourly rates
285
Machining processes
Productive time
287
Machining coolants
292
Cutting tool materials, Inserts,
Tool holders
294
Forces and power
298
Cutting data: Drilling, Reaming,
Turning
301
Cutting data: Taper turning
304
Cutting data: Milling
305
Indexing
307
Cutting data: Grinding and honing .. 308
Material removal
Cutting data
313
Processes
314
Separation by cutting
Cutting forces
315
239
240
241
242
244
247
251
253
256
259
260
261
262
263
265
269
270
271
272
273
6 Production Engineering
6.1
238
6.6
6.7
6.8
Shearing
316
Location of punch holder shank
317
Forming
Bending
318
Deep drawing
320
Joining
Welding processes
322
Weld preparation
323
Gas welding
324
Gas shielded metal arc welding
325
Arc welding
327
Thermal cutting
329
Identification of gas cylinders
331
Soldering and brazing
333
Adhesive bonding
336
Workplace safety and environmental
protection
Prohibitive signs
338
Warning signs
339
Mandatory signs,
Escape routes and rescue signs
340
Information signs
341
Danger symbols
342
Identification of pipe lines
343
Sound and noise
344
Table of Contents
345
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
8.2
International material
comparison chart
DIN, DIN EN, ISO etc. standards
Subject index
7.6
7.7
7.8
407
407
.412
417
Example
Explanation
Standard
DIN 7157
A standard is the published result of standardization, e.g. the selection of certain fits
in DIN 7157.
Part
DIN 30910-2
The part of a standard associated with other parts with the same main number. DIN
30910-2 for example describes sintered materials for filters, while Part 3 and 4
describe sintered materials for bearings and formed parts.
Supplement
DIN 743
Suppl. 1
A supplement contains information for a standard, however no additional specifications. The supplement DIN 743 Suppl. 1, for example, contains application
examples of load capacity calculations for shafts and axles described in DIN 743.
Draft
E DIN 6316
(2007-02)
Preliminary
standard
DIN V 66304
(1991-12)
A preliminary standard contains the results of standardization which are not released
by DIN as a standard, because of certain provisos. DIN V 66304, for example, discusses a format for exchange of standard part data for computer-aided design.
Issue date
DIN 76-1
(2004-06)
Date of publication which is made public in the DIN publication guide; this is the
date at which time the standard becomes valid. DIN 76-1, which sets undercuts
for metric ISO threads has been valid since June 2004 for example.
Abbreviation
Explanation
International
Standards
(ISO standards)
ISO
European
Standards
(EN standards)
EN
DIN
DIN EN
German
Standards
(DIN standards)
DIN ISO
DIN EN ISO
DIN VDE
VDI Guidelines
VDI
VDE printed
publications
VDE
DGQ publications
DGQ
REFA sheets
REFA
Table of Contents
1 Mathematics
d
id
1
2
3
1.0000
1.4142
1.7321
1.1
A
0.7854
3.1416
7.0686
opposite side
hypotenuse
sine
cosine
tangent
cotangent
1.2
adjacent side
hypotenuse
opposite side
adjacent side
adjacent side
opposite side
1.3
- + - = - ( 3 + 5)
X X X
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Numerical tables
Square root, Area of a circle
Sine, Cosine
Tangent, Cotangent
10
11
12
Trigonometric Functions
Definitions
Sine, Cosine, Tangent, Cotangent
Laws of sines and cosines
Angles, Theorem of intersecting lines
13
13
14
14
Fundamentals of Mathematics
Using brackets, powers, roots
Equations
Powers of ten, Interest calculation
Percentage and proportion calculations
15
16
17
18
Symbols, Units
Formula symbols, Mathematical symbols
SI quantities and units of measurement
Non-SI units
19
20
22
Lengths
Calculations in a right triangle
Sub-dividing lengths, Arc length
Flat lengths, Rough lengths
23
24
25
Areas
Angular areas
Equilateral triangle, Polygons, Circle
Circular areas
26
27
28
29
30
31
Mass
General calculations
Linear mass density
Area mass density
31
31
31
Centroids
Centroids of lines
Centroids of plane areas
32
32
10
i/T
r!
Li
lId
1ia
rj
lId
1
2
3
4
5
1.0000
1.4142
1.7321
2.0000
2.236 1
3.1416
7.0686
12.5664
51
52
53
54
19.6350
55
7.1414
7.2111
7.2801
7.3485
7.4162
8011.85
8171.28
8332.29
8494.87
8659.01
151
152
153
154
12.2882
155
12.4499
6
7
8
9
10
2.4495
2.6458
2.8284
3.0000
3.1623
28.2743
38.4845
50.2655
63.6173
78.5398
56
57
58
59
60
10.2956
10.3441
10.3923
10.4403
10.4881
8824.73
8992.02
9160.88
9331.32
9503.32
156
157
158
159
160
12.4900
12.5300
12.5698
12.6095
12.6491
19359.3
19606.7
19855.7
20106.2
11
12
13
14
15
3.3166
3.4641
3.6056
3.7417
3.8730
95.0332
113.097
132.732
153.938
176.715
61
62
63
64
111
112
113
114
115
10.5357
10.5830
10.6301
10.6771
10.7238
9676.89
9852.03
10028.7
10207.0
10386.9
161
162
163
164
165
12.6886
12.7279
12.7671
12.8062
12.8452
20358.3
20612.0
20867.2
21124.1
21382.5
16
17
18
19
20
4.0000
4.1231
4.2426
4.3589
4.4721
3421.19
3525.65
3631.68
3739.28
3848.45
116
117
118
119
120
10.7703
10.8167
10.8628
10.9087
10.9545
10568.3
10751.3
10935.9
11122.0
11309.7
166
167
168
169
170
12.8841
12.9228
12.9615
13.0000
13.0384
21642.4
21904.0
22167.1
22431.8
22698.0
21
22
23
24
25
4.5826
4.6904
8.4261
8.4853
8.5440
8.6023
8.6603
3959.19
4071.50
4185.39
4300.84
4417.86
121
122
123
124
125
11.0000
11.0454
11.0905
11.1355
11.1803
11499.0
11689.9
11882.3
12076.3
12271.8
171
172
173
174
175
13.0767
13.1149
13.1529
13.1909
13.2288
22965.8
23235.2
23506.2
23778.7
24052.8
76
77
78
79
80
8.7178
8.7750
8.8318
8.8882
8.9443
4536.46
4656.63
4778.36
4901.67
5026.55
126
127
128
129
130
11.2250
11.2694
11.3137
11.3578
11.4018
12469.0
12667.7
12868.0
13069.8
13273.2
176
177
178
179
180
13.2665
13.3041
13.3417
13.3791
13.4164
24328.5
24605.7
24884.6
25164.9
25446.9
81
82
83
84
85
9.0000
9.0554
9.1104
9.1652
9.2195
5153.00
5281.02
11.4455
11.4891
11.5326
11.5758
11.6190
13478.2
13684.8
13892.9
14102.6
14313.9
181
182
183
184
185
13.4536
13.4907
13.5277
13.5647
13.6015
25730.4
5410.61
5541.77
5674.50
131
132
133
134
135
1017.88
1075.21
1134.11
1194.59
1256.64
86
87
88
89
90
9.2736
9.3274
9.3808
9.4340
9.4868
5808.80
5944.68
6082.12
6221.14
6361.73
136
137
138
139
140
11.6619
11.7047
11.7473
11.7898
11.8322
14526.7
14741.1
14957.1
15174.7
15393.8
186
187
188
189
190
13.6382
13.6748
13.7113
13.7477
13.7840
27171.6
27464.6
27759.1
28055.2
28352.9
6.4031
6.4807
6.5574
6.6332
6.7082
1320.25
1385.44
1452.20
1520.53
1590.43
91
92
93
94
95
9.5394
9.5917
9.6437
9.6954
9.7468
6503.88
6647.61
6792.91
6939.78
7088.22
141
142
143
144
11.8743
11.9164
191
192
193
194
145
11.9583
12.0000
12.0416
15614.5
15836.8
16060.6
16286.0
16513.0
195
13.8203
13.8564
13.8924
13.9284
13.9642
28652.1
28952.9
29255.3
29559.2
29864.8
6.7823
6.8557
6.9282
7.0000
7.0711
1661.90
1734.94
96
97
12.0830
12.1244
14.0000
14.0357
30171.9
148
149
150
12.1655
12.2066
12.2474
16741.5
16971.7
17203.4
17436.6
17671.5
196
197
98
99
100
7238.23
7389.81
7542.96
7697.69
7853.98
146
147
1809.56
1885.74
1963.50
9.7980
9.8489
9.8995
9.9499
10.0000
198
199
200
14.0712
14.1067
14.1421
ri
lId
2042.82
2123.72
2206.18
2290.22
2375.83
101
102
103
104
105
10.049 9
10.0995
10.1489
10.1980
10.2470
7.4833
7.5498
7.6158
7.6811
7.7460
2463.01
2551.76
2642.08
2733.97
2827.43
106
107
108
109
110
65
7.8102
7.8740
7.9373
8.0000
8.0623
2922.47
3019.07
3117.25
3216.99
3318.31
201.062
226.980
254.469
283.529
314.159
66
67
68
69
70
8.1240
8.1854
8.2462
8.3066
8.3666
4.7958
4.8990
5.0000
346.361
380.133
415.476
452.389
490.874
71
72
73
74
75
26
27
28
29
30
5.0990
5.1962
5.2915
5.3852
5.4772
530.929
572.555
615.752
660.520
706.858
31
32
33
34
35
5.5678
5.6569
5.7446
5.8310
5.9161
754.768
804.248
855.299
907.920
962.113
36
37
38
39
40
6.0000
6.0828
6.1644
6.2450
6.3246
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
4
0.7854
12.3288
12.3693
12.4097
17907.9
18145.8
18385.4
18626.5
18869.2
19113.4
26015.5
26302.2
26590.4
26880.3
30480.5
30790.7
31102.6
31415.9
degrees
sine 45 to 90
degrees
Co
0'
15'
30'
45'
60'
0
1
2
3
4
0.0000
0.0175
0.0349
0.0523
0.0698
0.0044
0.0218
0.0393
0.0567
0.0741
0.0087
0.0262
0.0436
0.0610
0.0785
0.0131
0.0305
0.0480
0.0654
0.0828
0.0175
0.0349
0.0523
0.0698
0.0872
89
88
87
86
85
45
46
47
48
49
0.7071
0.7193
0.7314
0.7431
0.7547
5
6
7
8
9
0.0872
0.1045
0.1219
0.1392
0.1564
0.0915
0.1089
0.1262
0.1435
0.1607
0.0958
0.1132
0.1305
0.1478
0.1650
0.1002
0.1175
0.1349
0.1521
0.1693
0.1045
0.1219
0.1392
0.1564
0.1736
84
83
82
81
80
50
51
52
53
54
10
11
12
13
14
0.1736
0.1908
0.2079
0.2250
0.2419
0.1779
0.1951
0.2122
0.2292
0.2462
0.1822
0.1994
0.2164
0.2334
0.2504
0.1865
0.2036
0.2207
0.2377
0.2546
0.1908
0.2079
0.2250
0.2419
0.2588
79
78
77
76
75
15
16
17
18
19
0.2588
0.2756
0.2924
0.3090
0.3256
0.2630
0.2798
0.2965
0.3132
0.3297
0.2672
0.2840
0.3007
0.3173
0.3338
0.2714
0.2882
0.3049
0.3214
0.3379
0.2756
0.2924
0.3090
0.3256
0.3420
20
21
22
23
24
0.3420
0.3584
0.3746
0.3907
0.4067
0.3461
0.3624
0.3786
0.3947
0.4107
0.3502
0.3665
0.3827
0.3987
0.4147
0.3543
0.3706
0.3867
0.4027
0.4187
25
26
27
28
29
0.4226
0.4384
0.4540
0.4695
0.4848
0.4266
0.4423
0.4579
0.4733
0.4886
0.4305
0.4462
0.4617
0.4772
0.4924
30
31
32
33
34
0.5000
0.5150
0.5299
0.5446
0.5592
0.5038
0.5188
0.5336
0.5483
0.5628
35
36
37
38
39
0.5736
0.5878
0.6018
0.6157
0.6293
40
41
42
43
44
0'
30'
45'
60'
0.7102
0.7224
0.7343
0.7461
0.7576
0.7133
0.7254
0.7373
0.7490
0.7604
0.7163
0.7284
0.7402
0.7518
0.7632
0.7193
0.7314
0.7431
0.7547
0.7660
44
43
42
0.7660
0.7771
0.7880
0.7986
0.8090
0.7688
0.7799
0.7907
0.8013
0.8116
0.7716
0.7826
0.7934
0.8039
0.8141
0.7744
0.7853
0.7960
0.8064
0.8166
0.7771
0.7880
0.7986
0.8090
0.8192
39
38
37
36
35
55
56
57
58
59
0.8192
0.8290
0.8387
0.8480
0.8572
0.8216
0.8315
0.8410
0.8504
0.8594
0.8241
0.8339
0.8434
0.8526
0.8616
0.8266
0.8363
0.8457
0.8549
0.8638
0.8290
0.8387
0.8480
0.8572
0.8660
34
33
32
31
30
74
73
72
71
70
60
61
62
63
64
0.8660
0.8746
0.8829
0.8910
0.8988
0.8682
0.8767
0.8850
0.8930
0.9007
0.8704
0.8788
0.8870
0.8949
0.9026
0.8725
0.8809
0.8890
0.8969
0.9045
0.8746
0.8829
0.8910
0.8988
0.9063
29
28
27
26
25
0.3584
0.3746
0.3907
0.4067
0.4226
69
68
67
66
65
65
66
67
68
69
0.9063
0.9135
0.9205
0.9272
0.9336
0.9081
0.9153
0.9222
0.9288
0.9351
0.9100
0.9171
0.9239
0.9304
0.9367
0.9118
0.9188
0.9255
0.9320
0.9382
0.9135
0.9205
0.9272
0.9336
0.9397
24
23
22
21
20
0.4344
0.4501
0.4656
0.4810
0.4962
0.4384
0.4540
0.4695
0.4848
0.5000
64
63
62
61
60
70
71
72
73
74
0.9397
0.9455
0.9511
0.9563
0.9613
0.9412
0.9469
0.9524
0.9576
0.9625
0.9426
0.9483
0.9537
0.9588
0.9636
0.9441
0.9497
0.9550
0.9600
0.9648
0.9455
0.9511
0.9563
0.9613
0.9659
19
18
17
16
15
0.5075
0.5225
0.5373
0.5519
0.5664
0.5113
0.5262
0.5410
0.5556
0.5700
0.5150
0.5299
0.5446
0.5592
0.5736
59
58
57
56
55
75
76
77
78
79
0.9659
0.9703
0.9744
0.9781
0.9816
0.9670
0.9713
0.9753
0.9790
0.9825
0.9681
0.9724
0.9763
0.9799
0.9833
0.9692
0.9734
0.9772
0.9808
0.9840
0.9703
0.9744
0.9781
0.9816
0.9848
14
13
12
11
10
0.5771
0.5913
0.6053
0.6191
0.6327
0.5807
0.5948
0.6088
0.6225
0.6361
0.5842
0.5983
0.6122
0.6259
0.6394
0.5878
0.6018
0.6157
0.6293
0.6428
54
53
52
51
50
80
81
82
83
84
0.9848
0.9877
0.9903
0.9925
0.9945
0.9856
0.9884
0.9909
0.9931
0.9950
0.9863
0.9890
0.9914
0.9936
0.9954
0.9870
0.9897
0.9920
0.9941
0.9958
0.9877
0.9903
0.9925
0.9945
0.9962
9
8
7
6
5
0.6428
0.6561
0.6691
0.6820
0.6947
0.6461
0.6593
0.6724
0.6852
0.6978
0.6494
0.6626
0.6756
0.6884
0.7009
0.6528
0.6659
0.6788
0.6915
0.7040
0.6561
0.6691
0.6820
0.6947
0.7071
49
48
47
46
45
85
86
87
88
89
0.9962
0.9976
0.9986
0.9994
0.99985
0.9966
0.9979
0.9988
0.9995
0.99991
0.9969
0.9981
0.9990
0.9997
0.99996
0.9973
0.9984
0.9992
0.9998
0.99999
0.9976
0.9986
0.9994
0.99985
1.0000
4
3
2
1
0
60'
45'
30'
15'
0'
60'
45'
30'
15'
0'
minuies
cosine 45 to 90
degrees
15'
minuies
cosine 0 to 45
Table values of the trigonometric functions are rounded off to four decimal places.
41
40
t
degrees
12
degrees
0'
111111 u ic;
30'
15'
tangent 45 to 90
degrees
45'
60'
0'
1 1 III IUICC
30'
15'
60'
45'
1.0088
1.0446
1.0818
1.1204
1.1606
1.0176
1.0538
1.0913
1.1303
1.1708
1.0265
1.0630
1.1009
1.1403
1.1812
1.0355
1.0724
1.1106
1.1504
1.1918
44
48
49
1.0000
1.0355
1.0724
1.1106
1.1504
84
83
82
81
80
50
51
52
53
54
1.1918
1.2349
1.2799
1.3270
1.3764
1.2024
1.2460
1.2915
1.3392
1.3891
1.2131
1.2572
1.3032
1.3514
1.4019
1.2239
1.2685
1.3151
1.3638
1.4150
1.2349
1.2799
1.3270
1.3764
1.4281
39
38
37
36
35
0.1944
0.2126
0.2309
0.2493
0.2679
79
78
77
76
75
55
56
57
58
59
1.4281
1.4826
1.5399
1.6003
1.6643
1.4415
1.4966
1.5547
1.6160
1.6808
1.4550
1.5108
1.5697
1.6319
1.6977
1.4687
1.5253
1.5849
1.6479
1.7147
1.4826
1.5399
1.6003
1.6643
1.7321
34
33
32
31
30
0.2820
0.3010
0.3201
0.3395
0.3590
0.2867
0.3057
0.3249
0.3443
0.3640
74
73
72
71
70
60
61
62
63
64
1.7321
1.8040
1.8807
1.9626
2.0503
1.7496
1.8228
1.9007
1.9840
2.0732
1.7675
1.8418
1.9210
2.0057
2.0965
1.7856
1.8611
1.9416
2.0278
2.1203
1.8040
1.8807
1.9626
2.0503
2.1445
29
28
27
26
25
0.3739
0.3939
0.4142
0.4348
0.4557
0.3789
0.3990
0.4193
0.4400
0.4610
0.3839
0.4040
0.4245
0.4452
0.4663
69
68
67
66
65
65
66
67
68
69
2.1445
2.2460
2.3559
2.4751
2.6051
2.1692
2.2727
2.3847
2.5065
2.6395
2.1943
2.2998
2.4142
2.5386
2.6746
2.2199
2.3276
2.4443
2.5715
2.7106
2.2460
2.3559
2.4751
2.6051
2.7475
23
22
21
20
0.4716
0.4931
0.5150
0.5373
0.5600
0.4770
0.4986
0.5206
0.5430
0.5658
0.4823
0.5040
0.5261
0.5486
0.5715
0.4877
0.5095
0.5317
0.5543
0.5774
64
63
62
61
60
70
71
72
73
74
2.7475
2.9042
3.0777
3.2709
3.4874
2.7852
2.9459
3.1240
3.3226
3.5457
2.8239
2.9887
3.1716
3.3759
3.6059
2.8636
3.0326
3.2205
3.4308
3.6680
2.9042
3.0777
3.2709
3.4874
3.7321
19
18
17
16
15
0.5774
0.6009
0.6249
0.6494
0.6745
0.5832
0.6068
0.6310
0.6556
0.6809
0.5890
0.6128
0.6371
0.6619
0.6873
0.5949
0.6188
0.6432
0.6682
0.6937
0.6009
0.6249
0.6494
0.6745
0.7002
59
58
57
56
55
75
76
77
78
79
3.7321
4.0108
4.3315
4.7046
5.1446
3.7983
4.0876
4.4194
4.8077
5.2672
3.8667
4.1653
4.5107
4.9152
5.3955
3.9375
4.2468
4.6057
5.0273
5.5301
4.0108
4.3315
4.7046
5.1446
5.6713
14
13
12
11
10
35
36
37
38
39
0.7002
0.7265
0.7536
0.7813
0.8098
0.7067
0.7332
0.7604
0.7883
0.8170
0.7133
0.7400
0.7673
0.7954
0.8243
0.7199
0.7467
0.7743
0.8026
0.8317
0.7265
0.7536
0.7813
0.8098
0.8391
54
53
52
51
50
80
81
82
83
84
5.6713
6.3138
7.1154
8.1443
9.5144
5.8197
6.4971
7.3479
8.4490
9.9310
5.9758
6.6912
7.5958
8.7769
10.3854
6.1402 6.3138
6.8969 7.1154
7.8606 8.1443
9.1309 9.5144
10.8829 11.4301
9
8
7
6
5
40
41
42
0.8391
0.8693
0.9004
0.9325
0.9657
0.8466
0.8770
0.9083
0.9407
0.9742
0.8541
0.8847
0.9163
0.9490
0.9827
0.8617
0.8925
0.9244
0.9573
0.9913
0.8693
0.9004
0.9325
0.9657
1.0000
49
48
60'
45'
30'
15'
0'
0
1
2
3
4
0.0000
0.0175
0.0349
0.0524
0.0699
0.0044
0.0218
0.0393
0.0568
0.0743
0.0087
0.0262
0.0437
0.0612
0.0787
0.0131
0.0306
0.0480
0.0655
0.0831
0.0175
0.0349
0.0524
0.0699
0.0875
89
88
87
86
85
45
46
5
6
7
8
9
0.0875
0.1051
0.1228
0.1405
0.1584
0.0919
0.1095
0.1272
0.1450
0.1629
0.0963
0.1139
0.1317
0.1495
0.1673
0.1007
0.1184
0.1361
0.1539
0.1718
0.1051
0.1228
0.1405
0.1584
0.1763
10
11
12
13
14
0.1763
0.1944
0.2126
0.2309
0.2493
0.1808
0.1989
0.2171
0.2355
0.2540
0.1853
0.2035
0.2217
0.2401
0.2586
0.1899
0.2080
0.2263
0.2447
0.2633
15
16
17
18
19
0.2679
0.2867
0.3057
0.3249
0.3443
0.2726
0.2915
0.3105
0.3298
0.3492
0.2773
0.2962
0.3153
0.3346
0.3541
20
21
22
23
24
0.3640
0.3839
0.4040
0.4245
0.4452
0.3689
0.3889
0.4091
0.4296
0.4505
25
26
27
28
29
0.4663
0.4877
0.5095
0.5317
0.5543
30
31
32
33
34
43
44
minuies
cotangent 45 to 90
47
46
45
degrees
47
60'
45'
30'
15'
minuies
cotangent 0 to 45
Table values of the trigonometric functions are rounded off to four decimal places.
14.3007
19.0811
28.6363
57.2900
00
0'
43
42
41
40
24
3
2
1
0
t
degrees
13
<3 opposite
side of a
7
b adjacent side of
c hypotenuse
Application
Definitions of the
ratios of the sides
a adjacent
side of ft
for < 0
sine
opposite side
hypotenuse
sin a =
sin (i =
cosine
adjacent side
hypotenuse
cos a =
cos/3 =
tangent
opposite side
adjacent side
tan a = -=-
tan/8 =
adjacent side
opposite side
cot a =
cot/? =
cotangent
opposite side of fi
for < a
The values of the trigonometric functions of angles > 90 can be derived from the values of the angles between 0 and
90 and then read from the tables (pages 11 and 12). Refer to the graphed curves of the trigonometric functions for
the correct sign. Calculators with trigonometric functions display both the value and sign for the desired angle.
Example: Relationships for Quadrant II
Relationships
cos 30 =+0.8660
cos (90 + a) = - s i n a
-sin 30 = -0.5000
-cot 30 = -1.7321
90
180
270
360
Function
90
180
270
360
sin
+1
-1
tan
00
00
cos
+1
-1
+1
cot
00
00
00
sin or
sin 2 a + cos 2 a = 1
tan a cot a = 1
tan a = sin a
cos a
cot a = cos a
sin a
cos or
Example: Calculation of tana from sina and cosa for a = 30:
tana = sina/cosa = 0.5000/0.8660 = 0.5774
14
Law of sines
a2 = b2 + c2 - 2 b c cos a
b2 = a2 + c2 - 2 a c cos/3
c2 = a2 + b2 - 2 a - b cos y
csina
sin/
c-sin/3
siny
bsiny
sin/3
a = jb2 + c2 - 2 b c cosa
b = yja2 + c2 - 2 a c cos /3
c = yja2 + b2 - 2 a b cos /
Calculation of angles
using the Law of sines
using the Law of cosines
a sin/3 _ a - s i n /
sina =
b
"
c
6-sina _ b-siny
sin/3 =
a
c
c-sina c - s i n ^
sin/ =
cos a =
b2+c2 -a2
2-b- c
a2 +c2-b2
cos/3 =
2 a- c
cos y =
a2 + b2-c2
2-ab
Types of angles
Corresponding angles
If two parallels g-\ and g2 are intersected
by a straight line g, there are geometrical
interrelationships between the corresponding, opposite, alternate and adjacent angles.
a = P
Opposite angles
p = d
Alternate angles
a = d
Adjacent angles
a + y = 180 c
a + /3 + y = 180 c
Theorem of intersecting
lines
a
b~
b_
by
Cl
b
c
Cl
Mathematics: 1.
nts
Explanation
Example
Factoring out
3 x + 5 x = x ( 3 + 5) = 8 x
!+I-!.<3+5)
X X X
a+b , .
.. h
-/? = (a + b 2
2
A bracketed term is multiplied by a value (number, variable, another bracketed term), by multiplying each term
inside the brackets by this value.
5 (b + c) = 5b + 5c
(a + b) (c - d) = ac - ad + be - bd
(a +b):c = a:c
a-b
a b
5 ~ 5~ 5
Binomial
formulae
(a + b)2 = a 2 + lab + b2
(a - b)2 = a2 - 2ab + b2
(a + b)(a-b)
= a2 - b2
Multiplication/division and
addition/subtraction calculations
a base;
a* = y
+b:c
= a (-2x) - b 10 y
= -lax - 10by
Powers
Definitions
x exponent;
y exponential value
a a a a = a4
4 4 4 4 = 4 4 = 256
Addition
Subtraction
Powers with the same base and the same exponents are
treated like equal numbers.
3a 3 + 5 a 3 - 4 a 3
= a 3 (3 + 5 - 4 ) = 4a3
Multiplication
Division
a4 a2 = a a-a-a
a a = a6
I 4 I2 = 2 ( 4 + 2 ) = 2 6 = 64
3 2 -r 3 3 = 3 ( 2 - 3 ) = 3 _ 1 = 1/3
Negative
exponent
=7
rrr
1
a-3 =
a3
4
Fractions in
exponents
Zero in
exponents
(m + n) = 1
a4 + a4 = a ( 4 _ 4 ) = a 0 = 1
2= 1
Definitions
x root's exponent;
y/a = y or a 1 / x = y
Signs
\/9 = 3
\/8 = l
Addition
Subtraction
\la+3\la-l\[a=l\[a
Multiplication
Division
a3=fc
Roots
a radicand;
y root value
= + 3i
yf-8=-l
ra
Ji"
16
Mathematics: 1.
nts
Explanation
Example
Variable
equation
Equivalent terms (formula terms of equal value ) form relationships between variables (see also, Rules of transformation).
v = ji d n
Compatible units
equation
p_M-n
Single variable
equation
x +3= 8
x =8- 3= 5
Function
equation
y = f (x)
Constant function
y = f (x) = b
jf
p jnkW
9550
n in 1/min and M in Nm
* real numbers
y = f (x) = mx
y= 2x
Linear function
y = f (x) = mx + b
y= 0.5x+ 1
Quadratic function
Every quadratic function
(example below).
y = f (x) = X 2
example:
linear
function
y= mx+b
graphs
as
parabola
quadratic
function
y=x2
y = a 2 x 2 + a-|X+ a 0
\ t
\ I
-2
example:
~y= 0.5-x 2 /
2"
-1
-1 -
f^H
1
x
1
2
1
3
Rules of transformation
Equations are usually transformed to obtain an equation in which the unknown variable stands alone on the left side
of the equation.
The same number can be added or subtracted from both
sides.
In the equations X+ 5 = 1 5 and x + 5 - 5 = 15 - 5, x has the
same value, i.e. the equations are equivalent.
x +5
=15
x + 5 - 5 =15-5
x = 10
y-c
- d
y-c + c =d + c
y =d+c
Multiplication
Division
ax = b
ax
b
a
a
b
x =
a
Powers
Addition
Subtraction
|-5
|+c
| "r a
s/x=a + b
|()2
Roots
x2=a
2
(\[x)
+b
= -Ja + b
x -\ja + b
\yf
Mathematics: 1.
nts
Mathematics
Power of
Name
ten
18
10
10 1 5
10 12
109
106
103
102
101
10
1
10"
10-2
10"3
10"6
10"9
10" 12
10-15
1 0
- 1 8
SI units
Prefix
Multiplication factor
Character
Unit
E
P
T
G
M
k
h
da
Em
Pm
TV
GW
MW
kN
hi
dam
m
10 1 8
10 1 5
10 1 2
109
106
103
102
101
10
dm
cm
mV
HA
nm
pF
fF
am
10~1 meters
10"2 meters
10"3 volts
10"6 ampere
10"9 meters
10- 12 farad
10" 15 farads
10" 18 meters
quintillion
quadrillion
trillion
billion
million
thousand
hundred
ten
one
exa
peta
tera
giga
mega
kilo
hecto
deca
tenth
hundredth
thousandth
millionth
billionth
trillionth
quadrillionth
quintillionth
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.000 001
0.000 000 001
0.000 000 000 001
0.000 000 000 000 001
0.000 000 000 000 000 001
deci
centi
milli
micro
nano
pico
femto
atto
<1
values
- f -
1
1
1000 100
-Hh-
Examples
Name
d
c
m
Mn
P
f
a
Meaning
meters
meters
volts
watts
watts
newtons
liters
meters
meter
Numbers greater than 1 are expressed with positive exponents and numbers less than 1 are expressed with negative exponents.
>1
10 100 1000
0 0 7 =
i^o =
1 0 - 2
Simple interest
P
A
principle
amount accumulated
I
r
interest
interest rate per year
Interest
time in days,
interest period
1st example:
P = $2800.00; r = 6 - ; t= 1/2a;
a
/ =?
$2800.00-6- -0.5a
-t=$84.00
100%
2nd example:
P = $4800.00; r =5.1 ,0 -\ t = 50d; / = ?
I
$4800.00-5.1 % 50d
^
= $ 34.00
100%-360 d
a
principle
amount accumulated
I
r
interest
interest rate per year
n
q
time
compounding factor
Amount accumulated
A=P-<7n
Example:
P = $8000.00; n = 7 years; r = 6.5%; A = ?
6.5%
= 1.065
q =1 +
100%
A = P- qn = $ 8000.00 1.0657 = $ 8000.00 1.553986
= $12431.89
Compounding factor
18
Mathematics: 1.
nts
The percentage rate gives the fraction of the base value in hundredths.
The base value is the value from which the percentage is to be calculated.
The percent value is the amount representing the percentage of the base value.
P r percentage rate, in percent
P v percent value
v base value.
1st example:
100%
Percentage rate
Pr =
Pm * r\r\ n/
150kg-126kg
100% =
100% = 16%
B,
150 kg
Proportion calculations
Three steps for calculating direct proportional ratios
Example:
|bow pjpe
35 elbow pipes?
6Q e
s w e
100
200 kg 300
weight
3rd step:
330 kg
60
330 kg 35
bO
= 1 9 2 5
R g
U 6 8 10 12 14
workers
3rd step:
Ittakes12 workers
Using the three steps for calculating direct and inverse proportions
Example:
660 workpieces are manufactured by 5 machines in 24 days.
How much time does it take for
9 machines to produce
312 workpieces of the same
type?
24 5
days
9 660
24 5 312
'
= 6.3 days
9 660
19
Meaning
Meaning
Formula
symbol
Meaning
w
h
s
Length
Width
Height
Linear distance
r, R
d,D
A, S
V
Radius
Diameter
Area, Cross-sectional area
Volume
F
F\n, IN
M
T
Mb
a
X
Force
Gravitational force, Weight
Torque
Torsional moment
Bending moment
Normal stress
Shear stress
Normal strain
Modulus of elasticity
Q
A
Planar angle
Solid angle
Wave length
Mechanics
m
rri
rri'
Q
J
P
Pabs
Pamb
Pg
Mass
Linear mass density
Area mass density
Density
Moment of inertia
Pressure
Absolute pressure
Ambient pressure
Gage pressure
G
M,f
W
I
W,E
Wp,Ep
Wk,Ek
P
Shear modulus
Coefficient of friction
Section modulus
Second moment of an area
Work, Energy
Potential energy
Kinetic energy
Power
Efficiency
Time
t
T
n
Time, Duration
Cycle duration
Revolution frequency,
Speed
f,v
V, u
0)
Frequency
Velocity
Angular velocity
a
a
9
a
V, qy
Acceleration
Gravitational acceleration
Angular acceleration
Volumetric flow rate
Reactance
Impedance
Phase difference
Number of turns
Electricity
Q
E
C
I
L
R
Q
Inductance
Resistance
Specific resistance
Electrical conductivity
y,x
z
<p
N
Heat
Thermodynamic
temperature
AT, At, Ad Temperature difference
Celsius temperature
Coefficient of linear
<*\,a
expansion
T,Q
a
k
0,Q
a
c
Hiet
Heat flow
Thermal diffusivity
Specific heat
Net calorific value
Luminous intensity
Radiant energy
Illuminance
f
n
Focal length
Refractive index
LP
I
Q, W
Acoustics
P
Acoustic pressure
Acoustic velocity
N
Ln
Mathematical symbols
Math,
symbol
00
Spoken
approx. equals, around,
about
equivalent to
and so on, etc.
infinity
equal to
not equal to
is equal to by definition
less than
Ix I
tt
U
Ax
minus
times, multiplied by
over, divided by, per, to
sigma (summation)
def
<
Loudness
Loudness level
_L
VI A AL
<
A
%
%0
Spoken
Math,
symbol
Spoken
proportional
a to the n-th power, the n-th
power of a
square root of
n-th root of
log
ig
In
e
logarithm (general)
common logarithm
natural logarithm
Euler number (e = 2.718281...)
absolute value of x
perpendicular to
is parallel to
parallel in the same direction
sin
cos
tan
cot
sine
cosine
tangent
cotangent
(),[],{}
AB
AB
a', a"
ava2
parentheses, brackets
open and closed
pi (circle constant =
3.14159...)
line segment AB
arc AB
a prime, a double prime
a sub 1, a sub 2
20
Base
quantity
Length
Mass
Time
Electric
current
Thermodynamic
temperature
Amount of
substance
Luminous
intensity
Base
units
meter
kilogram
second
ampere
kelvin
mole
candela
kg
mol
cd
Unit
symbol
1)
The units for measurement are defined in the International System of Units SI (Systeme International d'Unites). It
is based on the seven basic units (SI units), from which other units are derived.
Unit
Name
Symbol
Symbol
Relationship
Remarks
Examples of application
=10 dm = 100 cm
= 1000 mm
1mm = 1000 (jm
1km = 1000 m
1 inch = 25.4 mm
In aviation and nautical applications
the following applies:
1 international nautical mile = 1852 m
Area
Volume
A S
1/
Plane
angle
(angle)
meter
1m
square meter
m2
1m2
are
hectare
a
ha
cubic meter
m3
liter
I, L
radian
rad
degrees
minutes
seconds
Solid angle
= 1000 dm 3
= 1000000 cm 3
11 = 1 L = 1 dm 3 = 10 dl = Mostly for fluids and gases
0.001 m 3
1 ml
= 1 cm 3
1 rad = 1 m/m = 57.2957... 1 rad is the angle formed by the intersection of a circle around the center of
= 180%t
1 m radius with an arc of 1 m length.
1
=
rad = 60'
In technical calculations instead of
180
a = 33 17' 27.6", better use is a =
1'
=1760 = 60"
33.291.
1"
= 1760 = 173600
steradian
sr
1 sr
kilogram
gram
kg
1kg
1g
megagram
metric ton
Mg
t
=1 m2/m2
Mechanics
Mass
= 1000 g
= 1000 mg
1 metric t = 1000 kg = 1 Mg
Mass for precious stones in carat (ct).
0.2 g
= 1 ct
Linear mass
density
m'
kilogram
per meter
kg/m
1 kg/m = 1 g/mm
Area mass
density
m"
kilogram
per square
meter
kg/m 2
Density
kilogram
per cubic
meter
kg/m 3
21
Unit
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Examples of application
Relationship
Symbol
I Mechanics
Moment
of inertia, 2nd
Moment of
mass
kilogram x
square
meter
Force
newton
newton x
meter
N m
Weight
Torque
Bending mom.
Torsional
Fg,G
M
Mb
T
1N
Momentum
kilogram x
meter
per second
kg m/s 1 kg m/s = 1 N s
Pressure
pascal
Pa
1 m 4 = 100000000 cm 4
1 J = 1 N m = 1 W- s
= 1 kg m 2 /s 2
O, T
newton
per square
millimeter
N/mm 2
Second
moment of
area
meter to the
fourth power
centimeter
to the fourth
power
m4
E, W joule
cm 4
P
<P
watt
Time,
Time span,
Duration
seconds
minutes
hours
day
year
s
min
h
d
a
1 min = 60 s
1 h =60 min = 3600 s
1 d = 24 h = 86400 s
Frequency
f,v
hertz
Hz
1 Hz = 1/s
Power
Heat flux
Mechanical
stress
Energy, Work,
Quantity of
heat
I Time
Rotational
speed,
Rotational
frequency
Velocity
Angularvelocity
Acceleration
CD
3,9
1 Hz = 1 cycle in 1 second.
1 per second
1/s
1 per minute
1/min
= 60/min = 60 m i n
1
1/min = 1 m i n - 1 = 7^
60 s
meters per
second
meters per
minute
kilometers per
hour
1 per second
radians per
second
m/s
1 m/s
m/m in
1 m/min =
meters per
second
squared
m/s 2
km/h
1/s
rad/s
1/s
= 60 m/min
= 3.6 km/h
1
60s
1 km/h = 1
3.6 s
a) = 2 tc n
1m/s 2 = \ m /
1s
-1
22
Symbol
Quantity
Symbol
Remarks
Examples of application
Relationship
I
E
ampere
volt
A
V
1 V = 1 W/1 A = 1 J/C
ohm
1 Q = 1 V/1 A
siemens
1 S = 1 A/1 V = 1/Q
ohm x
meter
siemens
per meter
Q m 10"6 Q m = 1 Q mm 2 /m
Y,
Q =
1 . Q mm 2
in
x
S/m
1 .
= in
Q mm 2
Frequency of public electric utility:
EU 50 Hz, USA/Canada 60 Hz
x
Frequency
hertz
Hz
1 Hz
= 1/s
1000 Hz = 1 kHz
Electrical energy
joule
1J
= 1 W s = 1 N m In atomic and nuclear physics the unit
1 kW h = 3.6 MJ
eV (electron volt) is used.
1 W h = 3.6 kJ
Phase
difference
<P
ih
E
Q
C
L
V/m
C
F
H
Power
Effective power
watt
1 W = 1 J/s = 1 N m/s
= 1 V-A
OK = -273.15C
degrees
Celsius
0C =273.15 K
0C = 32 F
0F = -17.77 C
joule
1J = 1 W s = 1 N m
1 kcal s 4.1868 kJ
1 kW-h = 3600000 J = 3.6 MJ
joule per
kilogram
Joule per
cubic meter
J/kg
J/m 3
1 M J / m 3 = 1000000 J/m 3
1 C = 1 A 1 s; 1 A h = 3.6 kC
1 F = 1 C/V
1 H = 1 V s/A
Q=1 t
T,e kelvin
Quantity of
heat
Net calorific
value
Kiet
Non-SI units
Length
Area
1 inch = 25.4 mm
1 foot = 0.3048 m
1 yard = 0.9144 m
1 nautical
mile = 1.852 km
1 mile = 1.609 km
Volume
2
Mass
=16.39
= 28.32
= 764.6
= 3.785
= 4.536
=158.8
cm
dm 3
dm 3
dm 3
dm 3
dm 3
Energy, Power
1 oz
1 lb
1 metric t
1 short ton
1 carat
= 28.35 g
= 453.6 g
= 1000 kg
= 907.2 kg
= 0.2 g
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PSh
PS
kcal
kcal
kpm/s
Btu
hp
= 0.735 kWh
= 735 W
= 4186.8 Ws
= 1.166 Wh
= 9.807 W
= 1055 Ws
= 745.7 W
pico
nano
micro
milli
centi
deci
deca
hecto
kilo
mega
giga
tera
M
10-6
da
Prefix symbol
Power of ten
1 0
- 1 2
10-
10"
10"
io-
Factor
3
1 mm = 10" m = 1/1000 m,
1 km = 1000 m,
10
10
10
10
10
10 12
Multiple
1 kg = 1000 g,
Mathematics: 1.
23
en
a
b
side
side
hypotenuse
c 2 = a2 + b2
1st example:
c = 35 mm; a = 21 mm; b = ?
2
b = >/c -a
Length of the
hypotenuse
c = \la2
+b2
2nd example:
CNC program with R= 50 mm and 1= 25 mm.
K=?
c2
=a2+b2
2
2
R = I + K2
K = Vfl 2 - 1 2 = V502 mm 2 - 25 2 mm 2
K = 43.3 mm
P2
a = yjc2
-b2
\lc2
-a2
b =
hypotenuse
p, q hypotenuse segments
b2
Example:
a2 = c p
= c q
b/
f
a, b
c
C'P
c-q
/
/
Example:
q
P
p.q
Right triangle
p = 6 cm; q = 2 cm; h = ?
h2 = p q
h = Vp Q = 76 cm 2 cm = Vl2 cm 2 = 3.46 cm
24
Mathematics: 1.
n t s
- A
i
n number of holes
Spacing
P=
Example:
n +1
1 = 2 m; n = 24 holes; p = ?
/
2000 mm
= 80 mm
P = n +1
24+1
I total length
p spacing
/ total length
p spacing
n
number of holes
a, b edge distances
Spacing
P =
Example:
eeeee
l-(a + b)
n-1
_
75 mm
/ bar length
s saw cutting width
z number of pieces / r remaining length
/ s piece length
/
Ir
Number of pieces
Example:
/ = 6000mm; l s = 230 mm; s = 1.2 mm; z = ?; / r = ?
z =
/
6000 mm
_ _
.
=
= 25.95 = 25 pieces
/ s + s 230 m m + 1.2 mm
Remaining length
| /r = / - z - ( /
Arc length
Example: Torsion spring
a angle at center
d diameter
l a arc length
r radius
Arc length
Example:
r = 36 mm; a = 120; L = ?
n-r-a
x- 36 mm -120
'a =
180
180
= 75.36 mm
Composite length
D
dm
/i, l 2
a
outside diameter
mean diameter
section lengths
angle at center
d inside diameter
t thickness
L composite length
=360 mm - 5 mm = 355 mm
=
+ /o
360
ji 355 mm 270+ 70 mm = 906.45 mm
360
Composite length
L = lA
+ l 2 + ...
25
D
d
dm
t
I
a
outside diameter
inside diameter
mean diameter
thickness
effective length
angle at center
Effective length
of a circular ring
/=nd
m
Effective length of a
circular ring sector
l =
j i - d
- a
360
Circular ring sector
Mean diameter
drn
dm
t
d+t
/
effective length of the helix
D m mean coil diameter
/
number of active coils
Effective length
of the helix
I = JT D /
2 n D,
m
M
(1 + 2)
1=71- Dm.
Example:
D,
I = ji D m /' + 2 it D m
= 71-16 mm 8.5 + 2 Jt 16 mm = 528 mm
scaling loss
Av I, = A 2
'1 =
(1 + q)
/ 2 - f l + g)
/ 2 - d + g)
A
Va-Ve
Volume with scaling
loss
Va=Ve
va=ve
(1 +
A| /<| =^2
q
q)
H + q)
26
Mathematics: 1.
Angular areas
Square
d
A area
/
/
/
/ '
length of diagonal
Area
length of side
A = l2
Example:
/ '
Length of diagonal
/ = 14 mm; A = 7; d=?
A =l2 = (14 mm) 2 = 196 mm 2
d = / 2 / = {2 14 mm = 19.8 mm
/t
d=fZ
Rhombus (lozenge)
A
/
area
length of side
Area
w width
A=l w
Example:
/ = 9 mm; w= 8.5 mm; A = ?
A = I w= 9 mm 8.5 mm = 76.5 mm 2
Rectangle
A
I
w width
d length of diagonal
area
length
Area
A=I w
Example:
Length of diagonal
\~l~7i
+ w2
Rhomboid (parallelogram)
A
/
area
length
Area
w width
A=I w
Example:
/ = 36 mm; w= 15 mm; A = ?
A =1 -w= 36 mm 15 mm = 540 mm 2
Trapezoid
A
/I
l2
area
longer length
shorter length
/ m average length
w width
Area
>1
Example:
/-i = 23 mm; l2 = 20 mm; w= 17 mm; A = 7
A.bk
23 mm + 20 mm
w=
+ /
'm
17 mm
Triangle
w width
Example:
ly = 62 mm; w = 29 mm; A = ?
U-w 62 mm 29 mm
_
M
A=J
=
899 mm 2
2
2
Average length
= 365.5 mm 2
>4 area
I
length of side
A = -2
Area
1 +
Mathematics: 1.
27
rea
area
diameter of inscribed circle
length of side
height
diameter of circumscribed
circle
Example:
I = 42 mm; A = 7;
Diameter of
circumscribed circle
Area
D = yj3 I = 2- d
3
Diameter of
inscribed circle
A =--V3-/2=-V3-(42mm)2
4
4
- 763.9 mm 2
Triangle height
Regular polygons
Diameter of
area
inscribed circle
length of side
diameter of circumscribed
d = ^D2-12
circle
diameter of inscribed circle
Diameter of
no. of vertices
circumscribed
circle
angle at center
vertex angle
A
/
D
d
n
a
Example:
Area
>4 =
n-l-d
Length of side
Angle at center
f180 ^
a=
(180 ^
= 80mm-sin^ J = 40 mm
360c
n
Corner angle
= V D
- /
n - l - d 6 40 mm 69.282 mm
,
>4 = - =
4156.92 mm 2
P=
180-a
0.325 D2
0.500 D2
10
12
Diameter of
circumscribed circle D
Area A
0.595
0.649
0.707
0.735
0.750
2
1.299 d
2
1.000 d
0.433 I 2
D2 0.908 d2
1.721 / 2
2.598 I 2
4.828 I 2
7.694 / 2
11.196-1 2
D
D2
D2
D2
0.866
d
0.829 d2
0.812 d2
0.804 d2
1.000 - I 2
1.154
1.414
1.702
Diameter of
inscribed circle d
Length of side I
2.000
1.414
0.578 /
1.000 /
0.500
0.707
0.867
0.707
1.732
1.000
1.236
1.155
1.082
1.052
1.035
1.376
1.732
2.414
3.078
3.732
0.809
0.588
0.500
0.383
0.309
0.259
0.727
0.577
0.414
0.325
0.268
2.000
2.614
3.236
3.864
/
/
/
I
/
0.866
0.924
0.951
0.966
Circle
A
d
area
diameter
circumference
Area
Example:
d = 60 mm; A = ?; C = ?
. ji-d2
A=
4
C = JI d =
JT (60 mm) 2
= 2827 mm 2
4
60 mm = 188.5 mm
Circumference
C=K- d
28
Mathematics: 1.
area
diameter
arc length
/
r
a
chord length
radius
angle at center
Area
Example:
d= 48 mm; a = 110; la = ?;A = ?
,
n-r-a
JI- 24 mm -110
L =
=
= 46.1 mm
180
L r
A = Ji=
2
180
46.1 mm-24 mm
_
- = 553 mm 2
2
Circular segment
Circular segment with a < 180c
A area
d diameter
/ a arc length
/ chord length
Example:
w width of segment
r radius
a angle at center
Area
=?
. a 0
. 120
/ =2-r-sin- = 2-30mm-sin
= 51.96 mm
2
/
a 51.96 mm
120 ^ ^
w = - - t a2 n - =
tan
14.999 mm = 15 mm
ji-d 4 a l-(r-w)
2
4
A =2
""4~ 360
2
2
n (60 mm) 1203 _ 51.96 mm (30 mm - 15 mm) Height of segment
4
360
2
I
a
= 552.8 mm2
w = - tan
Radius
Arc length
w
I2
r = +
JI
r-a
w = r-
180
8-w
I * - * -
Circular ring
A
area
outside diameter
d m mean
diameter
inside diameter
Area
A = n-dm w
width
Example:
A = -- (D2 - d2)
4
Ellipse
A area
D length
Example:
d
C
diameter
Circumference
D = 65 mm; d = 20 mm; A = ?
D
Area
Jt D-d
Circumference
D+d
C Jt
29
V volume
>4S surface area
JL_
Volume
length of side
V=l3
Example:
1 = 20 mm; V=?;AS
Surface area
=?
As = 6 I2
Square prism
V volume
As surface area
/
length of side
Volume
h height
w width
V= I w h
Surface area
Example:
Ar = 2 [I w + I h + w h)
Cylinder
V volume
d diameter
As surface area
h height
Ac cylindrical surface area
Volume
Example:
Surface area
d= 14 mm; h = 25 mm; V= ?
jt-(14mm) 2
TC-d2
= Ji d /l + 2
Cylindrical surface area
25 mm
Ac = J I d h
= 3848 mm 3
Hollow cylinder
V volume
As surface area
D, d
diameter
h
height
Volume
Example:
D = 42 mm; d = 20 mm; h = 80 mm;
V=?
V=
-(D2-d2)
4
re 80 mm ( J _ 0
0
0.
=
(422 mm 2 - 2 0 2 mm 2 )
4
= 85703 mm 3
Surface area
A; = n-(D + d)
-(D-d)
+h
Pyramid
V volume
h height
hs slant height
/ length of base
li edge length
w width of base
Volume
v =
Edge length
Example:
/ = 1 6 m m ; w = 2 1 mm;/? = 45 mm; V= ?
V =
l-w-h
l-w-h
3
hs 2
16 mm 21 mm 45 mm
= 5040 mm 3
Slant height
, 2 I2
s=y h h
4
30
hs
slant height
h
height
w 1( w2 widths
Volume
Example:
/i = 40 mm; l 2 = 22 mm; w-\ = 28 mm;
w2 = 15 mm; h = 50 mm; V=?
Slant height
3
50 mm
= 34299 mm
=Jh2+l
'-'
Cone
V
Ac
d
volume
conical surface area
diameter
height
slant height
Volume
V=
n-d2
Example:
=n-d-hs
V =
Ti-d
h
4 *3
^(52 mm) 2 110 mm
Slant height
"s=JT
= 77870 mm 3
"2
Truncated cone
V
Ac
D
volume
conical surface area
diameter
of base
diameter
of top
height
slant height
Volume
.(D2+d2+D-d)
V =
12
Example:
D = 100 mm; d= 62 mm; h = 80 mm; V= ?
2
V = --(D +d
12
tt 80 mm
12
Ac=K'h*.
(D + d)
c
2
Slant height
+ Dd)
0
= \jh
hs
= 419800 mm 3
+j
i2
Sphere
V
As
volume
surface area
diameter of sphere
Volume
Example:
d =9 mm; V=?
y_Tc-d3
jt-(9mm) 3
Surface area
= 382 mm 3
A, = Jt d2
Spherical segment
V volume
A\ lateral surface area
A s surface area
Example:
d
h
= 226 mm 3
Volume
V = ii-h2- d_h
2
Surface area
d = 8 mm; h = 6 mm; V= ?
o?
? ( 8 mm
= it 6 Z m m z
diameter of sphere
height
6 mm
3
I As = 7i h (2 d - h)
Lateral surface area
A\ = k d h
Mathematics: 1.
31
Total volume
V= V, +
V2+...-V3-Vt
Example:
Tapered sleeve; D = 42 mm; d= 26 mm;
d-i = 16 mm; h = 45 mm; V= ?
tt =
7
J.(D*+d2+Dd)
12
jt 45 mm ( J _ 0 __0 t n
0
(422 + 262 + 42 26) mm 2
12
..
= 41610 mm 3
JI -DF
Vj =
JI-16 2 m m 2
45 mm = 9048 m m J
2
4
4
V = Vy-V2 = 41610mm 3 -9048 mm 3 = 32562mm 3
Calculation of mass
Mass, general
m
V
mass
volume
density
Mass
m = V q
Example:
Workpiece made of aluminum;
V= 6.4 dm 3 ; e = 2.7 kg/dm 3 ; m = ?
kg
m = V g = 6A dm 3 2.7 3
dm
= 17.28 kg
length
m' I
Example:
Steel bar with d = 15 mm;
m' = 1.39 kg/m; / = 3.86 m; m = ?
ka
= r 39 -3.86m
m = m'.l
Application: Calculating
the mass of profile sections, pipes, wires, etc.
using the table values for
m'
= 5.37 kg
Area mass density
m mass
A area
m" area mass density
m= m" A
Example:
<
Steel sheet
f =1.5 mm; m" = 11.8 kg/m 2 ;
A = 7.5 m 2 ; m = ?
m = m"->4 = 11.8 ^ -2- 7 . 5 m 2
- 88.5 kg
Application: Calculating
the mass of sheet metal,
foils, coatings, etc using
the table values for m"
32
Mathematics: 1.
n t s
Table of Contents
33
2 Physics
30
m
20
10
2.1
A/JI
L// J
A
Motion
Uniform and accelerated motion
Speeds of machines
34
35
Forces
Adding and resolving force vectors
Weight, Spring force
Lever principle, Bearing forces
Torques, Centrifugal force
36
36
37
37
38
39
40
Friction
Friction force
Coefficients of friction
Friction in bearings
41
41
41
42
42
42
Strength of materials
Load cases, Load types
Safety factors, Mechanical strength properties ..
Tension, Compression, Surface pressure
Shear, Buckling
Bending, Torsion
Shape factors in strength
Static moment, Section modulus, Moment of inertia .
Comparison of various cross-sectional shapes ..
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Thermodynamics
Temperatures, Linear expansion, Shrinkage
Quantity of heat
Heat flux, Heat of combustion
51
51
52
Electricity
Ohm's Law, Conductor resistance
Resistor circuits
Types of current
Electrical work and power
53
54
55
56
0
1
2
time t
4 s 5
2.2
7><7i
2.3
F = Fr
2.4
Fu
fR
'
1 E
2.5
2.6
2.7
/1
A/
2.8
34
30
1m
1 20
to
1
cz 10
QJ
E
ai
CJ
u
"a. 0(
XJ
h
j t
>
v
t
velocity
time
displacement
S
V =
t
Example:
v = 4 8 km/h; s = 12 m; t= ?
_
km 48000 m 0 0 0 m
Conversion: 48 =
= 13.33
h
3600 s
s
12m
t=* =
= 0.9 s
v 13.33 m/s
vl*
1
2
time t
Velocity
4 s 5
-m
m o c km
1 =60
=3.6
s
min
h
1k m
ic cc-7 m
1 = 16.667
h
min
= 0.2778
s
Circular motion
v
circumferential velocity,
cutting speed
a) angular velocity
rotational speed
radius
diameter
Circumferential
velocity
ji d n
Example:
Pulley, d = 250 mm; n= 1400 m i n - 1 ;
v = ?; a) = ?
1400
Conversion: n = 1400 min - 1 =
= 23.33 S"1
60s
v
m
=ji . d n = n 0.25 m 23.33 S"1 = 18.3
V = co r
Angular
velocity
... 2 ii
1
= min-1 =
min
60 s
tl
*
t M
n
ia = 3 -.2
/
s
The increase in velocity per second is called acceleration; and a decrease is deceleration. Free fall is
uniformly accelerated motion on which gravitational
acceleration g is acting.
\ \V
t^r-
V
2
time t
4 s 5
1st example:
Terminal or initial
velocity
V =a-t
V = ^'2-a-s
Displacement-time diagram
s
a
12
m
a = g = 9.81
s2
2
V = V2 a s = yjl 9.81 m/s 3 m = 7.7
s
Displacement due to
acceleration/
deceleration
1
2
2nd example:
1
2
time t
1
S =
f 2
2
V2
s =
2 a
Speeds of machines
Feed rate
Feed rate
for drilling, turning
Vf feed rate
n rotational speed
Turning
Milling
feed
fx
N
P
Vf = n f
Feed rate
for milling
1st example:
Cylindrical milling cutter, z= 8; ft = 0.2 mm;
n = 45/min; v f = ?
0.2 mm 8 = 72
v . =rr t N = 45
min
min
Screw
drive
2nd example:
Feed drive with threaded spindle,
P = 5 mm; n = 112/min; v f = ?
__ .
1 n
.
mm
v< n P 112
5 mm = 560
min
min
Threaded spindle
with pitch P
Rack and
pinion
vf = n ft N
Feed rate
for screw drive
= n -P
3rd example:
Feed of rack and pinion,
n = 80/min; d = 75 mm; v f = ?
1
Vf = Ji d n = ji 75 mm 80
min
m
= 18850
=18.85
min
min
Vf = 71 'd n
vc cutting speed
v circumferential velocity
d
n
Cutting speed
diameter
rotational speed
vc = n d
Example:
Turning, n = 1200/min; d= 35 mm; vc = ?
1
vc = n-d n = it 0.035 m 1200
min
= 132 m
min
Circumferential
velocity
Circumferential
velocity
v= it d n
va = 2 - s n= 2 - 0.28 m 45
min
= 25.2 m
min
Average speed
Va = 2 S n
36
Physics: 2.
Types of forces
Adding and resolving forces
Chosen for the following
examples /ty = 10
vector magnitude
(length)
Vector magnitude
/=
s c a l e o f f o r c e s
Representing forces
Forces are represented by vectors.
The length / of the vector corresponds to the
magnitude of the force F.
F:
Fr
Sum
Example: F 1 = 80N; F 2 = 1 6 0 N ; Fr = ?
Fx = ^ + F2 = 80 N + 160 N = 240 N
Fr=F1
Addition
F2
Difference
Example: F 1 = 240 N; F 2 = 90 N; F r = ?
Fr = ^ - F 2 = 240 N - 90 N = 150 N
Fr
X V
M<
Fr=F,-F2
Required
trigonometric
function
F=?
Acceleration force
F= m a
4 H 4 1
m
1 N = 1 kg
F = m a = 50 k g 3 ^ = 150 k g ^ = 150 N
s2
s2
Weight
m =1kg
' F w = 9,81 N
Weight
|
Fw=
m ~
~ rn m
<7 = 9.81r10r-2
s2
s
Calculation
page 31
of
mass:
Spring force
F = R S
Example:
Compression spring, R = 8 N/mm; s = 12 mm; F = ?
0 10 20 mm 40
spring
displacement s
F = R s= 8 12 mm = 96 N
mm
AF= /? As
Physics: 2.
37
orce
F2- l:
Bearing forces
Example of bearing forces
Lever principle
|
2My = !Mr
Example:
TF
Bearing force at A
m2
m2
Example:
Gears, /'= 12; M^ = 60 N m; M2 = ?
M2 = / M-i = 12 60 N m = 720 N m
MI
m
n2
Centrifugal force
Centrifugal force F c when a mass is made to move
along a curvilinear path, e.g. a circle.
Centrifugal force
F c centrifugal force w angular velocity
m mass
v circumferential velocity
Fr= m r o):
r radius
Example:
m v'
Fc =
kg_m
s2
38
Work
Fr
Fn
Lifting work
friction force
normal force
s, h height of lift
/j
coefficient of
friction
1st example:
W= Fw h
Frictional work
F= 300 N; s = 4 m; W = ?
W= F- s=300 N - 4 m = 1200 N m = 1200 J
Krl
I
W= F s
F = FR
FR
2nd example:
1J=1 N 1 m
kg m 2
= 1W s=1
Energie of position
Energy of
position
Wn
FG
Spring energy
R
spring constant
s, h travel, lift or fall
height, spring
displacement
Example:
Energy of position
|
Wp-fw-s'
Kinetic energy
Linear motion
m
Kinetic
E, l/l/k
co
J
Kinetic energy
of linear motion
Example:
Drop hammer, m = 30 kg; s = 2.6 m; W k = ?
v = j2-g-s
m,
'
v 2
30kg-(7.14m/s)2
W^ = =
= /bo J
Kinetic energy
of rotational motion
l/K =
J-co2
input work
input force
displacement of
force Ft
weight
height of lift
W 2 output work
F 2 output force
s 2 displacement of
force F 2
rj
efficiency
Example:
Lifting device, Fw = 5 kN; h = 2 m; F= 300 N; s = ?
F w -/7
s=
5000 N 2 m
= 33.3 m
300 N
"Golden Rule"
of Mechanics
W<\
W2
^ ST = F 2 . s2
FT St = F\N h
Allowing for
friction
W2
ri
39
Simple machines
Movable pulley11
Fixed pulley1)
F-\ = Fw
Fi =
c
s-i = h
St = 2 h
i o)
W2 =
FSN-h
11
Fi~-F
wi
Inclined plane
n
W2 = Fw h
11
no. of load-bearing
ropes, pulleys
a angle of inclination
F2=Fvj
Ft ST = Fw h
[
F 2 = Fw L . U
s<\ = n h
w2 =
Wedge 11
F2=FW
Bolt 11
P thread pitch
/ lever arm
For 1 full turn
angle of inclination
tan/3 incline
jy* 'Vi
iy xi
., i
q|K
[
|
Wo = Fo h
w 2 = F2 P
Gear winch 11
Hoisting winch 11
/
d
nD
crank length
drum
diameter
number of turns
of the drum
Fi / =
fw-d
h = j i d Hp
l
d
/
crank length
drum
diameter
gear
ratio
Fi / / =
F^-d
/ =
F2 = F w
W2 =
1)
St = 2 jt /
W i = Fi 2 j i /
s 2 = s-i tan/?
II
Fi 2 j i / = Fo P
FSN-h
W2 = F\m h
The formulae apply to a hypothetical frictionless condition, wherein the output work 14/-! is equal to the input work
W2.
40
work
velocity
displacement in
the force direction
time
1st example:
Forklift, F = 15 kN; v= 25 m/min; P= ?
P = F v - 15000 N-
60s
= 6250
= 6250 W = 6.25 kW
2nd example:
Crane lifts a machine, m = 1.2 t; s = 2.5 m;
f = 4.5 s; P = ?
J
1 W =1 s
Nm
=1
1 kW = 1.36 PS
power
torque
tangential force
velocity
s
t
n
cu
Power
F> =F- V
P= F- 7i d - n
Example:
Belt drive, F= 1.2 kN; d= 200 mm; n = 2800/min; P= ?
P=
M 2-:rc
P = F-n-d-n
= 1.2 k N . * . 0 . 2 m - ^ = 3 5 . 2 ^ = 35.2 kW
60s
s
Numerical equation:
Enter > M in N m, n in 1/min
Result > P in kW
P = M w
or:
Power
P =
For cutting power in machine tools see pages 299 and 300.
M-n
9550
Efficiency
input
power
output
power
PQ2 = P2
-ffl-
'1
n1 =
gearbox
motor
Efficiency
Example:
Belt drive, Py = 4 kW; P 2= 3 kW;
12
1 =
rj = rjvi72
P22 3 kW
_
=
= 0.75,
Pi 4kW
T/o =
2
n
^
= 85%; rj = ?;rj2 = ?
=
0.75
_
=0.88
0.85
Fotal efficiency
1
M7 = ^71 -V2-V3---
0.32
0.41
0.50
0.38
0.45
0.85
0.75
Gasoline engine
Automobile diesel engine (partial load)
Automobile diesel engine (full load)
Large diesel engine (partial load)
Large diesel engine (full load)
Three phase AC motor
Machine tools
0.27
0.24
0.40
0.33
0.55
0.85
0.75
Screw thread
Pinion gear
Worm gear,/'= 40
Friction drive
Chain drive
Wide V-belt drive
Hydrostatic transmission
0.30
0.97
0.65
0.80
0.90
0.85
0.75
Physics: 2.
41
ricin
IF*
'N
Rolling friction
2nd example:
Crane wheel on steel rail, Fn = 45 kN; d = 320 mm;
f = 0.5 mm; F F = ?
f F n 0.5 mm -45000 N
Fc =
= 140.6 N
r
160 mm
1)
caused by elastic
deformation between roller body
and rolling surface
Example of application
steel/steel
steel/cast iron
steel/Cu-Sn alloy
steel/Pb-Sn alloy
lubricated
dry
vise guide
machine guide
shaft in solid plain bearing
shaft in multilayer plain bearing
0.20
0.10
0.20
0.15
0.20
0.10
0.10
0.15
0.18
0.10
0.10
0.10-0.05
0.10-0.08
0.06-0.03 2 '
0.05-0.03 2 '
steel/polyamide
steel/PTFE
steel/friction lining
steel/wood
0.30
0.04
0.15
0.04
0.30
0.55
0.10
0.30
0.04
0.55
0.35
0.12-0.03 2 '
0.04 2)
0.3-0.2
0.05
wood/wood
cast iron/Cu-Sn alloy
rubber/cast iron
rolling element/steel
underlay blocks
adjustment gib
belts on a pulley
anti-friction bearing3', guideway 3 '
0.50
0.28
0.50
0.20
0.30
0.10
0.16
0.20
0.20-0.10
2>
3)
0.15
0.60
lubricated
0.003-0.001
The significance of the material pairing decreases with increasing sliding speed and presence of mixed and viscous
friction.
Calculation performed in spite of rolling movement, because it is typically similar to calculations of static or sliding
friction.
Example of application
steel/steel
plastic/concrete
rubber/asphalt
4)
Data on coefficients
of rolling friction can
vary considerably in
technical literature.
friction moment
normal force
friction power
coefficient
of friction
diameter
rotational speed
Example:
Steel shaft in a Cu-Sn plain bearing, /x = 0.05;
F N = 6kN; d= 160 mm; M= ?
FF = /Y-FN
M=
fx-FN-d
Friction moment
d
2
Friction power
d-n
42
Types of pressure
Pressure
p
F
Pressure
area
P =
Example:
5 2 1
pressure
force
Units of pressure
b a r
r
For calculations on hydraulics and pneumatics see page 370.
1 Pa
= 1-^=0.00001
bar
2
1 bar
=10 r- = 0.1 r-
mm"
cm'
+1
bar
bar
Q.
pabs
<D
i-
gj
O) m
(0 t0 _ o) a
air
pressure
W
qj
> a>
0-L-1
Gage pressure
a r
Pamb
Pe ~ P a b s
Example:
~ Q- Ci.P a m b
O) O)
cu to 3
CO)t/3 -vacuum
Pamb
+ Pamb
F B buoyant force
V displaced volume
h depth of liquid
Hydrostatic pressure
Pe = 9- Q- h
gravitational acceleration
IBuoyant force
Example:
density q
pressure
p.= g e- /I =9.81
= 98100
kg
22
1000 39 10 m
m
m
F* = 9 e V
_ _ m
m
g = 9.81 - r 10-r-
= 98100 Pa 1 bar
m s"
Compression
condition 1
condition 2
Pabs 2
l/ 2
T2
Pabsi
Pabsi
7"i
Condition 2
absolute pressure
volume
absolute
temperature
Pabs2
V2
T2
absolute pressure
volume
absolute
temperature
dm3 5
T2
| Pabsi
constant volume
Pabs2 "
1 2 3
volume V
T-,
>
P a b s 2 ' V2
Pabsi '
Special cases:
constant temperature
Example:
Boyle's Law
5
bar
i 4
Pabsi - V r
T2
TVV2
1 bar 30 m 3 423 K
= 12.6 bar
288 K 3.5 m 3
= P a b s 2 V2
Pabsi
Pabs2
T,
T2
constant pressure
T,
T2
Physics: 2.
43
o e r i
dynamic loading
pulsating
alternating
Load case II
The load increases to a maximum
value and then falls back to zero,
e.g. for crane cables and springs.
stationary
time
Load case I
Magnitude and direction of the load
remain the same, e.g. for a weight
load on columns.
Tension
'///////<
Stress
tensile
stress
Material properties
Limit values
Deformation
Strength
for plastic
deformation
tensile
strength
Rm
M
Compression
compression
stress
Or
yield strength
elongation
Re
0.2%-yield
point
R,p0.2
elongation
at fracture
compression
strength
natural
compression
yield point
cB
cF
Y77777Z
Bending
bending
stress
bending
strength
m .
tfb
ObB
compression set
0.2%-offset compressive
yield strength
failure
OcO.2
cB
bending
deflection
limit
II
III
material
ductile brittle
(steel)
(cast
iron)
Rn
Ra
Rp0.2
pulsating
tensile
fatigue
strength
alternating
tensile
fatigue
strength
material
ductile brittle
(steel)
(cast
iron)
pulsating
compression
fatigue
strength
cB
tfcO.2
bending
limit
t>F
^tpuls
alternating
compression
fatigue
strength
^cpuls
pulsating
bending
fatigue
strength
a
alternating
bending
fatigue
strength
bpuls
tfbA
pulsating
torsional
fatigue
strength
alternating
torsional
fatigue
strength
m
Shear
shear
stress
shear
strength
shear
strength
T
sB
rSB
Torsion
torsional
stress
torsional
strength
torsional
limit
*tF
angular
deflection
torsional
limit
*tF
tpuls
Mt
Buckling
buckling
stress
buckling
strength
^bu
buB
buckling
strength
rtA
44
Tension, Compression
I
II
Rp0.2
cF> c0.2
Shear
III
Bending
^tpuls
tfbF
cpuls
Torsion
II
III
b puis
bA
*tF
III
II
T
tpuls
tA
Material
S235
S275
E295
E335
E360
235
275
295
335
365
235
275
295
335
365
150
180
210
250
300
290
340
390
470
550
330
380
410
470
510
290
350
410
470
510
170
200
240
280
330
140
160
170
190
210
140
160
170
190
210
120
140
150
160
190
C15
17Cr3
16MnCr5
20MnCr5
18CrNiMo7-6
440
510
635
735
835
440
510
635
735
835
330
390
430
480
550
600
800
880
940
960
610
710
890
1030
1170
610
670
740
920
1040
370
390
440
540
610
250
290
360
420
470
250
290
360
420
470
210
220
270
310
350
340
490
580
650
800
900
1050
340
490
580
630
710
760
870
220
280
325
370
410
450
510
400
560
680
720
800
880
1000
490
700
800
910
1120
1260
1470
410
520
600
670
750
820
930
240
310
350
390
440
480
550
245
350
400
455
560
630
735
245
350
480
455
510
560
640
165
210
240
270
330
330
375
GS-38
GS-45
GS-52
GS-60
200
230
260
300
200
230
260
300
160
185
210
240
300
360
420
480
260
300
340
390
260
300
340
390
150
180
210
240
115
135
150
175
115
135
150
175
90
105
120
140
EN-GJS-400
EN-GJS-500
EN-GJS-600
EN-GJS-700
250
300
360
400
240
270
330
355
140
155
190
205
400
500
600
700
350
420
500
560
345
380
470
520
220
240
270
300
200
240
290
320
195
225
275
305
115
130
160
175
C22E
C45E
C60E
46Cr2
41Cr4
50CrMo4
30CrNiMo8
1)
Values were determined using cylindrical samples having d < 16 mm with polished surface. They apply to structural steels in normalized condition; case hardened steels for achieving core strength after case hardening and
grain refinement; heat treatable steels in tempered condition.
The compression strength of cast iron with flake graphite is o c b 4 R m .
Values according to DIN 18800 are to be used for structural steelwork.
Allowable stress
(preliminary design)
Example:
What is the allowable tensile stress fallow for a hexagonal bolt ISO 4017 - M12 x 50 10.9, if a safety factor of 1.5 is required with static loading?
N
N
a|im
a m - / ? e - 1 0 . 9 . 1 0 - - = 900
- ; a,f,allow =
mm'
mm'
v
v
allow
900 N/mm 2
N
= 600 3
1.5
1.5
mm
1 (static)
ductile materials,
e.g. steel
1.2-1.8
brittle materials,
e.g. cast iron
2.0-4.0
ductile materials,
e.g. steel
3-4 1 >
brittle materials,
e.g. cast iron
3-61)
The high margins of safety in part sizing relative to the stress limits are intended to compensate for yet unknown
strength-reducing effects due to part shape (for shape-related strength factors see page 48).
Physics: 2.
45
o e r i
3 0
N/mm 2
13700N
=
a
t , allow
130 N / m m
m m 2
2
for
steel
t , allow
Re
for
For mechanical strength properties Re and R m see pages 130 cast
iron
to 138. For calculation of elastic elongation see page 190.
t , allow
Compressive stress
The calculation of allowable stress only applies to static
loading (Load case I).
compressive force
tfcF compression yield point F
^aiiowallowable comp. force
compressive stress
cross-sectional area
fallow allowable comp. stress S
R m tensile strength
v
safety factor
Compressive stress
Allowable
compressive force
Example:
Rack made of EN-GJL-300; S= 2800 mm 2 ;
=
?
v = 2.5; F.
allow
Fallow
c, allow " ^
4-a S
4-300N/mm 2
2800 mm 2 =1 344000 N
2.5
For mechanical strength properties see page 44 and pages 160-161
Allowable
compressive stress
for
steel
for
cast
iron
"cF
c, allow
4-a
c, allow
Surface pressure
A'l-b
force
surface pressure
contact surface,
projected area
Example:
Two metal sheets, each 8 mm thick, are joined with a
bolt DIN 1445-1 Oh 11 x 16 x 30. How great a force may
be applied given a maximum allowable surface pressure of 280 N/mm 2 ?
N
F = p. A = 280
8 mm 10 mm
mm'
22400 N
Surface pressure
bolt
III
10
10
10
15
15
10
46
shear strength
cross-sectional area
safety factor
Example:
Allowable
shear stress
s,allow
singleshear
allow
doubleshear
v
Ti-d2
=S T
sB
s, allow
-130
3
mm'
jt (6 mm) 2
= 28.3 mm 2
= 28.3 mm 2 -130 N
s, allow
= 3679 N
mm"
For mechanical strength properties r s B and safety factors see page 44.
Cutting of materials
The loaded cross-section must be sheared.
T
k\\\\y
Example:
S3
V\KV
S shear area
F
cutting force
Maximum
shear strength
Cutting force
S=C-s
F= S r sBmax
S = ji d s = ji 16 mm 3 mm = 150.8 m m 2
F = S r sB max = 150.8 m m 2 376 N/mm 2 = 56701 N
= 56.7 kN
f = nI'd
max1or
II
III
IV
/
/bU
v
length
/ Moment of inertia
free buckling length
safety factor (in machine construction 3-10)
Example:
Beam IPB200, / = 3.5 m; clamped at both ends;
v = 10; F b u a i i o w = ?; E = 210000 N/mm 2 = 21 106 N/cm 2
(table below); 71* = 2000 cm 4
2
21 106 -ilL 2000 cm 4
n 2 o i rc
c
b u , allow
cm'
= 1.35 - 10 6 N= 1.35 MN
MJ
"
/gu v
1)
EN-GJL150
EN-GJL300
EN-GJS400
GS-38
EN-GJMW350-4
CuZn40
Al alloy
T1 alloy
196-216
80-90
110-140
170-185
210
170
80-100
60-80
112-130
Physics: 2.
47
o e r i
F
f
bending force
deflection
Bending stress
Example:
Beam IPE-240, W= 324 cm 3 (page 149); clamped at
one end; concentrated load F= 25 kN; / = 2.6 m; a b = ?
(^
N
200
*NUI
mnr
* jf l r tu n
324 cm 3
Allowable bending
stress a b anow
from page 44
cm"
F -F' I
/Wk=F-/
f =
F /3
Mk =
F /3
f =
3 EI
F /
E I
5 F I3
f =
384 E I
fixed at both ends
F /
Mk =
r =r i
F -/3
f =
192 E /
y W j i yJJ
fI
F /
12
/3
384 E /
E Modulus of elasticity; values: page 46 / 2nd moment of inertia; formulae: page 49; values: pages 146 to 151.
F' Distributed load (load per unit length, e.g. N/cm)
Torsional stress
Mt torsional moment
Wp polar section modulus
r t torsional stress
Torsional stress
Example:
Shaft, d =32 mm; Mt = 420 N m; r t = ?
3
rc-d
Wn
n-(32 mm)
= 6434 mm 3
16
16
N
_ M t _ 420000 N mm _
= 65.3
6434 mm 3
mm"
For polar section moduli see pages 49 and 151
Tt =
48
Shape-related strength
(dynamic loading)
^ w b
b 2
280NW.0.8.0.8
^allow ~
1 0 5 N / m m 2
allow
Is
1 7
Pk
v
b2
lim
Allowable stress
(dynamic loading)
b2
^s
Unnotched cross-sections have an uninterrupted distribution of forces and therefore a uniform stress distribution. Changes in cross-sections lead to concentrations
of lines of force where stresses are concentrated. The ensuing reduction of strength
is primarily influenced by the notch shape, but also by the notch sensitivity of the
material.
Notch shape
Material
S185-E335
S185-E335
S185-E335
1.5-2.0
1.5-2.2
2.5-3.0
1.3-1.8
1.3-1.8
2.5-3.0
S185-E335
C45E+QT
50CrMo4+QT
1.9-1.9
1.9-2.1
2.1-2.3
1.5-1.6
1.6-1.7
1.7-1.8
S185-E335
S185-E335
2.0-3.0
2.0-3.0
1.6-1.8
S185-E335
2.0
1.5
S185-E335
1.4-1.7
1.4-1.8
S185-E335
1.3-1.5
tensile loading
1.6-1.8
*
F T
stress
concentration in
notched part
\
\
t"
I 0.9
(SI
-Q
o 0.8
t_)
ro
.t )endirig/to rsion
0.7
0.6
400
600
800
1000 1200 1400
tensile stength Rm in N/mm2
*
25
Physics: 2.
49
o e r i
Shape of the
cross-section
-4-4- ^
/=
ji-d4
64
W =
jt-(P4-d4)
64
/=
W =
Torsion
Polar section
modulus l/Vn
ji-d3
p
32
ji-(D 4 - d 4 )
32 D
16
16 D
1=0.05 D 4 - 0.083 d D 3
W=0.1 D 3 - 0.17 d D2
W p = 0.2 D3 - 0.34 d D2
1= 0.003 (D+ d) 4
W= 0.012 (D+ d) 3
W p = 0.2 d
/= 0.003 (D+ d) 4
W = 0.012 (D+ d) 3
W n = 0.024 (D+ d) 3
x -c:
x
1 2
Wz =
M
x\
5-V3-S4
I
4 -j
/ x
/ y
X ~tD
Wy
-X -c
144
5 V3 d 4
"
256
w-h3
x =
5 s3 = 5-V3-d3
48 ~
128
5 s3
5 -d3
Wyv =
24-V3
64
Wy =
B H3 -w-h3
=
12
m
1)
= 0.123 d 3
Wp = 17 w2 h
/7-W2
Values for rj
see table below
B H3 - w h3
Wx =
6H
t-(H + h)-(B + w)
%=
H B3 - h w3
Wy =
6 B
H-B -h-w
/
y =
12
W p = 0.188 s 3
12
12
h
Wx =w6
/7-W3
4 \-x
4
Wp = 0.208 h 3
V2-/73
Wx =
x-1
h3
6
2nd moments of inertia and axial section moduli for profiles see pages 146 to 151.
1.5
0.208
0.231
0.246
0.267
0.282
0.299
10
0.307
0.313
0.333
50
Shape
Standard
designation
Linear
mass (tensity
nn'
kg/m factor11
V
cm
factor
11
cm
Innin
1
factor '
cm
factor
11
U"P
cm
factor11
3
y,
x-r
j-*
V
-ti
round bar
EN 10060100
61.7
1.00
98
1.00
98
1.00
491
1.00
196
1.00
square bar
EN 10059100
78.5
1.27
167
1.70
167
1.70
833
1.70
208
1.06
pipe
EN 10220114.3x6.3
16.8
0.27
55
0.56
55
0.56
313
0.64
110
0.56
hollow
structural
section
EN 10210-2
100 x 100x6.3
18.3
0.30
67.8
0.69
67.8
0.69
339
0.69
110
0.56
hollow
structural
section
EN 10210-2
120x60x6.3
16.1
0.26
59
0.60
38.6
0.39
116
0.24
77
0.39
flat bar
EN 10058100 x 50
39.3
0.64
83
0.85
41.7
0.43
104
0.21
T-section
EN 10055T100
16.4
0.27
24.6
0.25
17.7
0.18
88.3
0.18
U-Channel
section
EN 1026U100
10.6
0.17
41.2
0.42
8.5
0.08
29.3
0.06
I-beam section
DIN 10251100
8.3
0.13
34.2
0.35
4.9
0.05
12.2
0.02
I-beam section
DIN 1025IPB100
20.4
0.33
89.9
0.92
33.5
0.34
167
0.34
<v
+i - I - X
+
X--
-X
t
-h
X- i
i
c=
X
)V
xJr
J/
c
x -
-X
)rP
)t
cz
" p x
X
1=
J
11
Physics: 2.
51
52
Heat of vaporization
heat of fusion
heat of evaporation
specific heat of fusion
specific heat
of evaporation
m mass
Heat of vaporization
Q = r- m
Example:
kJ
Copper, m = 6.5 kg; qr = 213 ; Q = ?
kg
Q = q m = 213 6.5 kg = 1384.5 k J * 1.4 MJ
kg
quantity of heat Q
Heat flux
The heat flux <Z> continually occurs within a substance Heat flux with
thermal conduction
with movement from higher to lower temperatures.
The heat transmission coefficient k also compensates,
along with the thermal conductivity of a part, for the heat
transmission resistance on the surfaces of the part.
<P heat flux
A thermal conductivity
k heat transmission
coefficient
/*2< t\
<Z>
Example:
(p = k - A At
W
Heat protection glass, k = 1.9 2
; 4 = 2.8 m 2 ;
m C
Af = 32C; <Z> = ?
W
2.8 m 2 32C = 170 W
<P = k - A At = 1.92
m C
Heat of combustion
The net calorific value H n e t (H) of a substance refers
to the heat quantity released during the complete
combustion of 1 kg or 1 m 3 of that substance.
heat of combustion
Q
^net' H net calorific value
mass of solid and liquid fuels
m
volume
of fuel gas
V
Example:
MJ
Natural gas, V = 3.8 m 3 ; Hnet=3b
m-
Q = Hnet
Net calorific value Hnet
Heat of combustion of
solid and liquid substances
Q=Hnet-m
Heat of combustion of
gases
Q=?
Q=H, net V
MJ
l/= 35 ^ 3.8 m 3 = 133 MJ
m3
Heat transmission coefficients k
for construction materials and parts
Solid
fuels
MJ/kg
Liquid
fuels
MJ/kg
Gaseous
fuels
MJ/m 3
Construction
elements
s
mm
wood
biomass (dry)
brown coal
coke
pit coal
15-17
14-18
16-20
30
30-34
alcohol
benzene
gasoline
diesel
fuel oil
27
40
43
41-43
40-43
hydrogen
natural gas
acetylene
propane
butane
10
34-36
57
93
123
50
12
365
125
80
Qnet
Qnet
Qnet
* m 2 C
5.8
1.3
1.1
3.2
0.39
Physics: 2.
53
ericiy
Unit
Symbol
Name
Symbol
electrical voltage
volt
electric current
ampere
electrical resistance
ohm
electrical conductance
Siemens
electrical power
watt
Ohm's Law
Electric current
E voltage in V
/ electric current in A
R resistance in Q
Example:
R = 88 Q; E = 230 V; / = ?
E 230 V
1 = - = ^ = 2.6A
R 88 Q
R resistance in Q
G conductance in S
\
ce
Example:
R = 20 Q; G = ?
'<QJ
/> 0
0.5
1.5
2 S 2.5
G = = - = 0.05 S
R 20 Q
conductance 0 -
Electrical resistivity
m m
m
100m
0.0179
R =V ' _
m
A
1.5 mm 2
;R = ?
Conductor resistance
R =
= 1.19 a
g-l
Tk value a in 1/K
aluminum
0.0040
lead
0.0039
gold
0.0037
copper
0.0039
silver
0.0038
tungsten
0.0044
tin
0.0045
zinc
graphite
0.0042
-0.0013
constantan
0.00001
AR
R2o
Rt
a
At
change in resistance in Q
resistance at 20C in Q
resistance at the temperature t in Q
temperature coefficient (7"k value) in 1/K
temperature difference in K
Change in resistance
AR
a /?2o Af
Resistance at
temperature t
Example:
Resistance of Cu; R20 = 150 Q; t = 75C; Rx = ?
a =0.0039 1/K; At = 75C - 20C = 55C = 55 K
Rx= R20 (1 +a At)
= 150 Q (1 + 0.0039 1/K 55 K) = 182.2 n
RT = R2Q + A R
Rt = R20.(
1 +cc-At)
54
Current density
j - L
- A = 2.5 mm ; / = 4 A; J = ?
A
j_l _
4A
= 1.6
2
A 2.5 mm
mm'
Ed/2
E
Ez
'I
Voltage drop
Ed
E
Ed/2
Eri = 2 / line
/?,i
Voltage at load
EC = E-EC
Rline
R1
R
total resistance, equivalent resistance in Q
I
total current in A
E
total voltage in V
R-\, R2 individual resistances in Q
/i, / 2 partial current in A
E-i, E2 voltage drop across Ry & R2 in V
Total resistance
/?=/?! + R 2 +
Total voltage
= Ei + o +
Example:
/?! = 10 Q; R2 = 20 Q; E =12 V;/7 =?; / = ?;
Ei= ?; E 2 = ?
Total current
/=/i
=/,=
R-
Voltage drops
/?
30 Q
=
-/ = 10n-0.4A= 4 V
E 2 = / ? 2 . / = 20Q0.4A = 8V
fl
ff2
Total voltage
fl, = 15 Q; R2 = 30 Q; E = 12 V; R = ?; I = ?;
=?;/2 = ?
/?i
15Q-30Q
/?,+/?2
'
15Q + 30Q
-1011
E = Ei = E? =.
Total current
/ = /-, + / 2 +
- I - S S -
12V
Ro
1)
Total resistance
30 n
= 0.4 A
Partial currents
/1 _r2
Use this formula if there are only two parallel
resistors in the circuit.
/2
Types of current
Direct current (DC; symbol -), DC voltage
Direct current flows in one direction only and main- Electric current
tains a constant level of current. The voltage is also
constant
constant.
/ electric current in A
E voltage in V
Voltage
t time in s
constant
Alternating current (AC); symbol
AC voltage
0) = 2 n f
Frequency 50 Hz; T = ?
T = = 0.02 s
50 1
s
(0 =
2 71
T
1 Hertz = 1 Hz = 1/s =
1 period per second
Example:
{2E( eff
Eeff = 2 3 0 V ; E m a x = ?
f m a x = / 2 230 V = 325 V
Three-phase current
120
Y
Uj
120
120
LI
/13
L2
X
T (360)
voltage in V
period in s
phase 1
phase 2
phase 3
effective voltage between phase wire and
neutral wire = 230 V
Eeff effective voltage between two phase wires
= 400 V
= 1(2-E,eff
56
fF
10000HH
A
I
>
Electrical work
W = P t
Example:
Hot plate, P= 1.8 k W ; f = 3 h ;
W= ? in kW h and MJ
C^D CZJ CD
No i
1
1 kW h = 3.6 MJ
= 3600000 W - s
Electrical power with direct current and alternating or three-phase current with non-reactive load1)
Direct or alternating current
P
E
/
R
1st
electrical power in W
voltage (phase-to-phase voltage) in V
electric current in A
resistance in Q
example:
P= E I
P=I2-R
Light bulb, E = 6 V; / = 5 A; P = ?; R = ?
2nd example:
Csl m
I i
Ry
ff
I
/? = - = = 1.2ft
/ 5A
Three-phase current
p=
P = E / = 6 V 5A=30W
'
R
1)
12000 W
73 E
73 400 V
= 17.3 A
Power with
three-phase current
E-I
P = / 3 -
Electrical power with alternating and three-phase current with reactive load component l 2 )
Alternating current
P
E
I
cos<p
P= E I cos(p
Example:
Three-phase current
CNI
P=F3-E-I-cos
<p
Transformers
Input
side
(primary coil)
/i
Output
side
(secondary
coil)
Example:
Voltages
E2
N2
A/i
A/,
2
Ey
j
2
E r A / 2 = 230V.100
N,
2875
_/1/Vl_0.25A.2875_7OA
N2
100
Electric current
/1_/v2
N,
Table of Contents
57
3 Technical drawing
3.1
3.2
temperature
3.3
3.4
3.5
A
/ /
17
20
3.6
3.7
Flare-V
groove
weld
3.8
))))))))))
3.9
h-tolerance zone
\
h-tolerance zone
es=0
zero line
\
El=0
c
.2 <32(0
E.E
E .5
- pE
T3
E
hole
shaft
58
59
60
61
Graphs
Cartesian coordinate system
Graph types
62
63
Drawing elements
Fonts
Preferred numbers, Radii, Scales
Drawing layout
Line types
64
65
66
67
Representation
Projection methods
Views
Sectional views
Hatching
69
71
73
75
Entering dimensions
Dimensioning rules
Diameters, Radii, Spheres, Chamfers, Inclines,
Tapers, Arc dimensions
Tolerance specifications
Types of dimensioning
Simplified presentation in drawings
78
80
81
83
Machine elements
Gear types
Roller bearings
Seals
Retaining rings, Springs
84
85
86
87
Workpiece elements
Bosses, Workpiece edges
Thread runouts, Thread undercuts
Threads, Screw joints
Center holes, Knurls, Undercuts
88
89
90
91
93
95
Surfaces
Hardness specifications in drawings
Form deviations, Roughness
Surface testing, Surface indications
97
98
99
76
102
106
110
110
111
112
58
Parallels to a line
Given: Line segment AB and point P on the desired parallel line g'
1. Arc with radius r about A results in intersecting point C.
2. Arc with radius r about P.
3. Arc with radius r about C results in intersecting point D.
4. Connecting line segment PD is parallel line g' to AB.
Bisecting an angle
Given: Angle a
1. Any arc 1 about S yields intersecting points A and B.
2. Arc 2 with radius r about A;
AB.
Dividing a line
Given: Line AB should be divided into 5 equal parts.
1. Construct a ray from A at any desired angle.
2. Mark 5 equal lengths with a compass on the ray from A.
3. Construct a line from point 5' to B.
4. Construct parallels to 5' B through the other division points 1'-4'.
60
Inscribed and circumscribed circles for triangles, Circle center point, Ellipse, Spiral
Circle inscribed in a triangle
Given: Triangle A, B, C
1. Bisect angle a.
2. Bisect angle ft (intersecting at point M).
3. Inscribed circle about M.
na| -j-
intersection point of
auxiliary circle 5 with
parallel line 5
^ l ^ U 5.
Cycloid
Given: Rolling circle of radius r
1. Subdivide the pitch circle into any number of equal sized parts, e.g. 12.
2. Divide the base line (= extent of the pitch circle = n d) into equal parts,
in this case 12.
3. Vertical lines from segment points 1-12 on the base line to the extended vertical center line of the rolling circle yield the midpoints
M-|-M 1 2 .
4. Construct auxiliary circles about the midpoints M-|-M 1 2 with radius r.
rolling
circle
base line
C-n-d
extended
horizontal
center line
Involute
4n
12
s/\.
1. Subdivide the circle into any desired number of equal sized parts,
e.g. 12.
2. Construct tangents to the circle at each section.
1
\
Given: Circle
- " " m o
Parabola
Given: Orthogonal parabola axes and parabola point P
1. Parallel g to vertical axis through point P gives P'.
2. Divide distance OP' on the horizontal axis into any desired number of
parts (e.g. 5) and construct parallels to the vertical axis.
3. Subdivide distance PP' into the same number of segments and connect
to origin at 0.
4. Intersecting points of the lines with the matching number yield points
on the parabola.
Hyperbola
92
Given: Orthogonal asymptotes through M and point P on the hyperbola.
p2
/
r
9i
p,
62
Technical drawing: 3.
ra
Coordinate axes
abscissa (horizontal axis; x-axis)
ordinate (vertical axis; y-axis)
P1 (x4,y2)
o
Values to be plotted
positive: from the origin towards the right, or up
negative: from the origin towards the left, or down
Marking the positive axis direction with
arrow heads on the axes, or
arrows parallel to the axes
Formula symbols are entered in italics on the
abscissa below the arrow point
ordinate to the left next to the arrow point
P2(x-2.y-1)
200
N/mm2
150
characteristic
curve
200
N/mm2
150
curve
| 100
o
\ g r i c I lines
50
/
0.2
0.1
0.4 % 0.5
0.3
0.3
0.6
Spring force F
in N
600
1.0
1.3
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
spring displacement s
1.0
1.2 mm 1.4
63
1600
N/mm2
_ Re
1200
1000
\
kv
800
600
400
200
\
Ni
Example:
Using a measuring machine, the roundness of a turned bushing is checked to see if it lies within the required tolerance.
The out-of-roundness found was probably caused by clamping the bushing forcefully in the chuck.
Area graphs
Bar graphs
In bar graphs the quantities to be represented are drawn as horizontal or vertical columns of equal width.
E **
a .
Pie charts
2005
2006
2007
2008
360 x %
100%
Example:
What is the central angle for the percentage of lead in the
alloy CuPb15Sn8?
_ 360 15%
Solution:
1 0 0
/ o
= 54
64
Fonts
Lettering, fonts
cf. DIN EN ISO 3098-0 (1998-04) and DIN EN ISO 3098-2 (2000-11)
The lettering of technical drawings can be done using type style A (close-spaced) or type style B. Both styles may be
drawn vertical (V) or slanted by 15 to the right (I = italics). To ensure good legibility, the distance between the characters should be two line widths. The distance may be reduced to one line width if certain characters are together,
e.g. LA, TV, Tr.
JHttt
Dimensions
am
H k
<;n i n Q f f
R!h~
MH6
Ml
BTT
Ecrifure
1.8
2.5
1)
10
3.5
Type style
b.
25
19 .
10
2 1
14
15 .
10
bs
20
14
b2
17
C2
10 .
14*
13 .
10
C3
> >
>
>
^10
Greek alphabet
6
10
>
A
B
a
p
alpha
beta
Z
H
gamma
A
E
6
e
delta
epsilon
e
i
K
lambda
mu
n
p
JI
ri
zeta
eta
Pi
rho
ft
theta
nu
sigma
iota
kappa
Z!
xi
omicron
X
V
tau
upsilon
<t>
cp
phi
chi
to
omega
psi
Roman numerals
I
=1
X = 10
C = 100
M = 1000
n
=2
XX =20
=3
IV = 4
XL = 40
CD = 400
CC = 200
XXX = 30
CCC = 300
MM = 2000
Examples: MDCLXXXVE
V =5
L = 50
D = 500
1687
VI = 6
vn
LX = 60
LXX = 70
DCC == 700
DC = 600
=: 7
MCMXCIX = 1999
vm
=8
LXXX = 80
DCCC = 800
M M V m = 2008
IX = 9
XC = 90
CM = 900
Technical drawing: 3.
eents
65
drawing
R5
R 10
R 20
R 40
R5
R 10
R 20
R 40
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
1.06
1.12
4.25
1.12
4.50
4.50
1.18
1.25
1.25
4.75
1.25
5.00
5.00
5.00
1.32
1.40
5.30
1.40
5.60
5.60
6.00
1.50
1.60
1.60
1.60
1.60
6.30
6.30
6.30
6.30
1.70
1.80
6.70
1.80
7.10
7.10
1.90
2.00
2.00
7.50
2.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
2.12
2.24
8.50
2.24
9.00
9.00
2.36
2.50
2.50
2.50
9.50
10.00
2.50
2.65
2.80
Series
3.15
3.15
3.35
3.55
Multiplier
R 5
q5
= /TO - 1.6
R 10
Q10 =
R 20
920
R 40
q40
10
/ T o * 1.25
20
= /To * 1.12
3.55
3.75
40
= /To
Radii
1.06
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.6
10
12
16
18
20
22
160
180
200
100
10.00
2.80
3.00
3.15
10.00
10.00
110
125
140
2.5
25
28
32
36
40
45
50
Scale factors21
63
70
80
90
Actual size
1: 1
56
Reduction factors
1:2
1:5
1 : 10
1 : 20
1 : 50
1 : 100
1 : 200
1 : 500
1 :1000
Enlargement factors
1 : 2000
1 : 5000
1 : 10000
2: 1
5: 1
20: 1
50 : 1
10: 1
1)
Preferred numbers, e.g. for length dimensions and radii. Their usage prevents arbitrary graduations. In the series
of preferred numbers (base series R 5 to R 40), each number of the series is obtained by multiplying the previous
number by a constant multiplier for that series. Series 5 (R 5) is preferred over R 10, R 10 over R 20 and R 20 over
R 40. The numbers of each series can be multiplied by 10, 100, 1000, etc. or divided by 10, 100, 1000, etc.
2)
For special applications the given enlargement and reduction factors can be expanded by multiplying by whole
multiples of 10.
66
Drawing layout
Paper sizes (ISO)
Format
Format
dimensions 1 ' in mm
Drawing area
dimensions in mm
1)
cf. DIN EN ISO 5457 (1999-07) and DIN EN ISO 216 (2002-03)
AO
AI
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
841 x1189
594 x 841
420 x 594
297 x 420
210x297
148x210
105x148
821 x1159
574x811
400 x 564
277 x 390
180x277
The height: width aspect ratio of the drawing papers are 1 : f2 (= 1 : 1.414).
3:
o o
A2 420x594
CO <o
EI5 H
TJ
O
2! CMC
\J
190
20
title block
2nd fold
^ 4th fold
title block
Title block
The width of the title block is 180 mm. The sizes of the individual data fields (field widths and heights) are no longer
stipulated, in contrast to the previous standard. The table at the bottom of this page has examples of possible field sizes.
Example of a title block:
Resp. dept.
AB 131
Created by
Technical reference
11
Susan Miller
12
Approved by
Kristin Brown
13
John Davis
14
10
15
Document status
Type of document
Assembly drawing
released
A225-03300-012
Circular saw s h a f t /
L.
7
2008-01-^5 de
Sheet
8
1/3
Drawing specific callouts, such as scale, projection symbol, tolerances and surface specifications should be indicated
on the drawing outside of the title block.
rieio name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Max. no. of
characters
Field name
required
optional
not specified
25
25
yes
yes
Drawing number
Change symbol (drawing version)
Issue date of the drawing
16
2
10
yes
4
4
30
10
11
12
Document status
Responsible department
Technical reference
20
10
20
13
14
15
Drawing originator
Authorizing person
Classification/key words
20
20
not specified
yes
-
yes
-
yes
yes
-
yes
-
yes
-
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
yes
-
yes
27
18
1o
51
7
25
10
9
60
51
26
43
44
43
24
Technical drawing: 3.
eents
67
drawing
Line types
Lines in mechanical engineering drawings
No.
Name, representation
01.1
Break line, t h i n 1 )
preferably automated drawing representing border of partial or broken views and sections, provided that the border is not a line of symmetry or a center line
'V
01.2
02.1
hidden edges
02.2
04.1
Dot-dash line
(long dash), thin
center lines
lines of symmetry
04.2
Dot-dash line
(long dash), thick
05.1
1)
hidden contours
Free-hand and break line types should not be used together in the same drawing.
Line element
Length
long dashes
24 d
gaps
short dashes
12 d
points
Line element
<0.5 -d
Length
02.1,02.2, 04.1,
04.2 and 05.1
3 d
2W
m
3-d^ IJL40.5-d
mff | ^
3.d
68
Line types
Line thicknesses and line groups
Line widths. Normally two line types are used in drawings. They are in a ratio of 1:2.
Line groups. The line groups are ordered in a ratio of 1:
(1: 1.4).
Selection. Line thicknesses and line groups are selected corresponding to the type and size of drawing, as well as to
the drawing scale and the requirements of microfilming and/or method of reproduction.
Associated line thicknesses (dimension in mm) for
Thin lines
Thick lines
Line group
0.25
0.25
0.13
0.18
0.35
0.35
0.18
0.25
0.5
0.5
0.25
0.35
0.7
0.7
0.35
0.5
0.5
0.7
1.4
1.4
0.7
1.4
identification of
section plane (04.2)
dimension line
(01.1)
visible contours
(01.2)
extension
line (01.1)
A-A
crests of threads
(01.2)
hatching
line (01.1)
visible
contour (01.2)
center line
(04.1)
root of
threads (01.1),
root of
thread (01.1)
border
lines (01.1)
imaginary
intersections
(01.1)
surface structure
(knurl)
(01.2)
hidden
edge (02.1)
fully
v ^ hardened
hole circle
(04.1)
visible contours
(01.2)
hidden
contour (02.1)
designation
of (heat) treatment (04.2)
69
cf. DIN ISO 128-30 (2002-05) and DIN ISO 5456-2 (1998-04)
Selection of the front view. The view that is selected for the front view is the one which provides the most information regarding shape and dimensions.
Other views. If other views are necessary for clear representation or for complete dimensioning of a workpiece, the
following should be observed:
The selection of the views should be limited to those most necessary.
Additional views should contain as few hidden edges and contours as possible.
Position of other views. The position of other views is dependent upon the method of projection. For drawings based
on the first- and the third-angle projection methods (page 70) the symbol for the projection method must be given in
the title block.
Axonometric representation11
Isometric projection
Diametric projection
X : Y : Z = 0,5:1:1
X : Y :Z = 1 : 1 : 1
circle as an
ellipse
circle as an ellipse
circle as an
ellipse
ellipse as a circle
Construction of ellipses:
1. Construct an auxiliary circle with radius r= d/2.
2. Subdivide height d into any desired number of equal
segments and construct grids (1to 3).
3. Subdivide the diameter of the auxiliary circle into the
same number of grids.
4. Transfer the segment lengths a, b etc. from the auxiliary circle to the rhombus.
auxiliary circle
Cavalier projection
Cabinet projection
X : Y : Z = 0.5:1:1
X : Y : Z = 1:1:1
circle as an
ellipse
ellipse as
a circle
circle as an
ellipse
ellipse as a circle
70
Projection methods
Arrow projection method
At
1
i
_r
First-angle projection
Locations with respect to front view F:
1_
RS
top view
below F
LS
view from
the left side
right of F
RS
view from
the right side
left of F
bottom view
above F
rear view
left or right
of F
LS
Symbol
Third-angle projection11
Locations with respect to front view F:
LS
top view
above F
LS
view from
the left side
left of F
RS
view from
the right side
right of F
bottom view
below F
rear view
left or right
of F
RS
Symbol
Application in
English speaking countries,
e.g. USA/Canada
71
Views
Partial views
Application. Partial views are used to avoid unfavorable
projections or shortened representations.
Position. The partial view is shown in the direction of the
arrow or rotated. The angle of rotation must be given.
Boundary. This is identified with a break line.
Adjacent parts
Application. Adjacent parts are drawn if it aids in understanding the drawing.
Representation. This is done with thin two-dot dash-dot
lines. Sectioned adjacent parts are not hatched.
housing
Simplified penetrations
-Sl
Application. If the drawing remains clearly understandable, rounded penetrating lines may be replaced by
straight lines.
-a
*FP5zzz3J)
J
T9l
n_r
Broken views
-LO
i
f
rir^
72
Views
Application. For geometric elements which repeat regularly, the individual element only needs to be drawn
once.
Representation. For geometric elements which are not
drawn,
the positions of symmetrical geometric elements are
shown with thin dot-dash lines.
asymmetrical geometric elements of the area in which
they are found are drawn with thin solid lines.
12
r /
Z (10:1)
Minimal inclines
~L
fX
\I
Application. Minimal inclines on slopes, cones or pyramids which cannot be shown clearly, do not have to be
drawn in the corresponding projection.
Representation. The edge representing the projection of
the smaller dimension is drawn with a thick solid line.
\ f
Moving parts
Surface structures
Representation. Structures such as knurls and embossing are represented with thick solid lines. Partial representation of the structure is preferable.
73
Sectional views
Section types
full section
view
V////
'/////.
half section
partial section
1/
Definitions
section
line
Hatching of sections
Hatching. The hatching is drawn with parallel solid lines,
preferably at an angle of 45 to the centerline or to the
main outlines. The hatching is interrupted for lettering.
Hatching is used for
individual parts - all hatch lines for cross-section areas
should be in the same direction and at the same spacing.
parts adjacent to each other - hatch lines for the different parts should be in different directions or at different spacing.
large cross-section areas - hatching preferably only
near boundaries or edges.
74
Sectional views
Special sections
Profile sections. They may be
drawn rotated in a view (revolved section).
The contour lines of the section are represented with
thin solid lines and are drawn within the interior of the
part.
taken out of a view (removed section).
The section must be connected with the view by a thin
dot-dash line.
/ / / / /
Sections with intersecting planes. If two planes intersect, one cutting plane may be rotated in the projection
plane.
Details of rotated parts. Uniformly arranged details outside of the cross-section area, e.g. holes, may be rotated
in the cutting plane.
Notes on drawing
circumferential
edges
/
V////
edge on the
w
Y
A
/Vl
/ /'.J
//////.
.J
/ / / w i
Tool edges
Circumferential edges. Edges exposed by sectioning
must be represented.
Hidden edges. In sections the hidden edges are not
represented.
Edges on the center line. If an edge falls on a centerline by sectioning, it is represented.
Half-sections in symmetrical workpieces
Section halves of symmetrical workpieces are preferably
drawn in relation to the center line,
below, with horizontal center lines
to the right, for vertical center lines.
75
Section areas are generally marked with basic hatching without consideration of the material.
Parts whose material should be emphasized can be identified using specific section lining.
Basic hatching (without considering the material)
Liquids
Gases
foo o o 6~o~o 61
loooooooo;
[ooooooooj
Natural materials
Plastics
Metals
Ferrous
metals
Non-ferrous
metals
water
^yZTf/Ty//1
light alloys
wooc
_y //////
oil
Iooo
//A
l-oooor
glass
{.A
alloyed steel
ceramic
cast iron
WA
heavy metals
jooo|
thermoset plastics
grease
elastomers, rubber
012 d9
m l
012 H8
55 0.01
20 0.01
Dimensioning based on fabrication
i
012 H8
i H H
!
i
+0.04
47 -0.01
+0.01
14 -0.02^
I
m
012 H8
m m
-0.01
23 -0.02
i
j
i
76
Dimensioning drawings
Dimension lines, dimension line terminators, extension lines, dimension numbers cf. DIN 406-11 (1992-12)
Dimension lines
extension line dimension number ^ dimension line
20
i
Ln
00
xd
35
012
010
Special features
Symmetrical elements. Centerlines may be used as
extension lines within symmetrical elements.
Breaks in extension lines may be used e.g. for entering dimensions.
Within a view the extension lines may be drawn to
spatially separate elements of the same or similar
shape.
16
50
Dimension numbers
Entry. Dimension numbers are entered
35
20
2.5 2 2.5
(10) 6 \
[L&
40
11
77
Dimensioning drawings
Dimensioning rules, leader and reference lines, angle dimensions,
square and width across flats
Dimensioning rules
Entering dimensions
oo
7,5
12
-J5 ^
50
70
(15)
10
15
15
t =5
in the view or
near the view.
leader line
Reference lines. Reference lines are drawn in the reading direction with thin solid lines. They may be connected to leader lines.
Angular dimensions
Extension lines. The extension lines point toward the
vertex of the angle.
Dimension numbers. Normally these are entered tangentially to the dimensioning line so that their lower
edge points to the vertex of the angle if they are above
the horizontal center line and with their upper edge if
they are below it.
78
Technical drawing: 3.
Dimensioning drawings
Diameters, radii, spheres, chamfers, inclines, tapers, arc dimensions
Diameter
Symbol. For all diameters the symbol 0 is placed before the dimension number. Its overall height corresponds
to the height of the dimensioning number.
Limited space. In the case of limited space the dimension references the workpiece feature from the outside.
Radius
Symbol. For radii the lower case letter r is placed before
the dimensioning number.
Dimension lines. Dimension lines should be drawn
from the center of the radius or
from the direction of the midpoint.
Sphere
Symbol. For spherical shape workpiece features the
capital letter S is placed before the diameter or radius
symbol.
Chamfers, countersinks
45 chamfers and countersinks of 90 can be simply
dimensioned by indicating the angle and the chamfer
width. Both drawn and undrawn chamfers may be
dimensioned using an extension line.
2x45 o
Other chamfer angles. For chamfers with an angle deviating from 45 the
angle and the chamfer width or
the angle and the chamfer diameter
0.6x45
are to be entered.
Inclines, tapers
t ^
Incline
Symbol. The symbol C^ is entered before the dimension numbers.
Orientation of the symbol. The symbol is oriented so that
its incline matches the incline of the workpiece. Preferably
the symbol is connected to the inclined surface with a
reference line or a leader line.
30%
1:10
Taper
Symbol. The symbol O is entered before the dimension numbers on a reference line.
Orientation of the symbol. The orientation of the symbol
must match the direction of the workpiece taper. The
reference line of the symbol is connected to the outline
of the taper with a leader line.
Arc dimensions
r\32
32
79
Dimensioning drawings
Slots, threads, patterns
Slots
10P9
10N9
Csji
<=>
1
n-
J k
(h + 4\
Cvl 1
032h9
closed slot
open slot
open slot
10N9x5+0.2
/? = 5+0.2
I
Qs .
z
o
>H
s.
>
>
tQli ii
36+0.3
^ II
II
36+0.3
1.1 H13x023 H11
1.3 H13x021h11
f / /
A/
-UJL.
U-
Threads
Code designation. Code designators are used for standard threads.
V/
'1
/////,
/ / / / / .
vt
//
17
20
20 x 16 (= 320)
Identical design elements. The following data is given
for spacing of identical design elements having the
same distance or angle between them
the number of elements
the distance between the elements
the overall length or overall angle (in parentheses).
80
Technical drawing: 3.
Dimensioning drawings
Tolerance specifications
cf. DIN 406-12 (1992-12), DIN ISO 2768-1 (1991-06) and DIN ISO 2768-2 (1991-04)
CM
C+D C
+D
cd
+
LTl
+0.15
35-0.10
CD
20 0J
LTl
40 -0.1/-0.3
+0 30'
30+0 15'
+ 0 0' 45'
30+0 0' 30'
7777777
Csl 1
Si
r
L
1
zn
Is
///
Cy
r*-
cd"' '
C +1 - CQ
D
CD
scale:
drawn by:
date:
company:
sheet no.:
1:1
ISO 2768
10
5x 45
Ra 3.2
NO
LTl
m
S
2x45(
cn
LTlCsl
Si
16
40
53
bolts
10 SPb 20
ISO 2768-m
81
Dimensioning in drawings
Dimensions
Types of dimensioning
basic dimension
positional
dimensions
shape
dimensions
basic
dimensions
Special dimensions
Rough dimensions
Function. Rough dimensions might be used to give
information about, for example, the dimensions of cast
or forged workpieces before machining.
Auxiliary dimensions
Function. Auxiliary dimensions give additional information. They are not necessary to geometrically define the workpiece.
Labeling. Auxiliary dimensions are
put in parentheses
entered without tolerances.
30
[35]
rough dimension
t =2
25
20
Control dimensions
Function. It should be noted that these dimensions are
especially checked by the purchaser. If necessary a 100%
check will be performed.
Labeling. Control dimensions are set in frames with
rounded ends.
W////////A
z:
(42-0.1100%
82
Technical drawing: 3.
Types of dimensioning
Parallel dimensioning, running dimensioning, coordinate dimensioning1* cf. DIN 406-11 (1992-12)
Stack dimensioning
t = 12
Running dimensioning
Coordinate dimensioning
Item X
Y
d
1
50 50 040
2 180 190 030
3 220 115 075
4 325 50
X = 180 - f
X = 220
Y = 190 1
i Y = 115
030
X = 50 i 075
X = 325
_l_ Y = 50
040 t = 12 ' Y = 5 0
X
Item r
d
V
1* ' 140 0 030
140 30 030
2
3 I 100 60 030
140 90 030
4
1)
Parallel dimensioning, running dimensioning and coordinate dimensioning may be combined with each other.
83
T e c h n i c a l d r a w i n g : 3.5 E n t e r i n g d i m e n s i o n s
010
01Ox14U
01Ox14U
z:
010x1411
01Ox14U
01Ox14U
Hole base
The shape of the hole base is given by a symbol
if necessary.
The symbol U for example means a flat hole
base (cylindrical end bore).
Line widths
For holes depicted in simplified form, the positions of holes should be drawn as:
simply the intersecting axes in the top view
the position of the holes in thick solid lines in
parallel axis representation.
011x6.5U
011x6.5U
06.6
06.6
A1
011x6.51)
06.6
Stepped holes
For holes with two or more steps the dimensions
are written under each other. Here the largest
diameter is written on the first line.
011x6.5U
06.6
v
012.4x90
012.4x90
06.6
06.6
/ X
'A Ya
M10x15/20
M1Qx15/20
V
Internal threads
The thread length and the hole depth are separated by a slash. Holes without depth specification are drilled through.
012x90
01OH7
012x90
01OH7
01OH7
Hole 0 10H7
Through hole
Chamfer 1 x 45c
2
M10-LH
M10-LHx12
M10-LHx12
4L
08x0.3
08x90
04.3
08x0.3
08x90
04.3
Cylindrical countersink 0 8
Bore depth 0.3 mm
Through hole 0 4 . 3 with
cone shaped counterbore 90
Countersink diameter 0 8
84
Technical drawing: 3.
a c e
nts
Gear types
Representation of gears
Spur gear
Bevel gear
Worm gear
EZZ
zzzz
77Z
righfy hand
c
Worm and worm gear
Sprockets
L___r
Positive drive belts
Technical drawing: 3.
a c e
nts
Roller bearings
Representation of roller bearings
Representation
simplified
graphical
cf. DIN ISO 8826-1 (1990-12) and DIN ISO 8826-2 (1995-10)
element
explanation, application
Circle; for the representation of roller bearing elements (balls, roller, needle rollers)
which are drawn perpendicular to their axis.
Z2l
Radial-deep
groove ball
bearings,
cylindrical roller
bearings
simplified
Angular-contact
ball bearing,
tapered roller
bearing
/ /
Needle bearing,
needle roller
assembly
FR
f-
Spherical roller
bearing, radialspherical
roller bearing
Angular-contact
ball bearings
Needle bearing,
needle roller
assembly
Axial-deep grooved
ball bearing,
axial-roller bearing
Axial-deep grooved
ball bearing,
dual action
Axial-spherical
roller bearing
Axial-deep grooved
ball bearing with
spherical seating,
dual action
designation
Radial-deep
groove ball
bearings,
cylindrical roller
bearings
++
Radial spherical
roller bearing
(barrel-shaped
bearing)
graphical
Combined
radial-needle
bearing with
angular-contact
ball bearing
Combined
axial-ball bearing
with radial needle
bearing
86
Technical drawing: 3.
a c e
nts
cf. DIN ISO 9222-1 (1990-12) and DIN ISO 9222-2 (1991-03)
Representation
simplified
graphical
element
explanation, application
Long diagonal line; for the dynamic sealing element; e.g. the sealing lip. The
sealing direction can be given by an
arrow.
Short diagonal line; for dust lip seal,
scraper rings.
Short lines pointing to the middle of the
symbol; for the static parts of U-rings
und V-rings, packing.
f=
graphical
designation for
rotation
linear
motion
Shaft seal
without dust
lip seal
Rod seal
without
stripper
Shaft seal
with dust lip
seal
Rod seal
with stripper
Shaft seal,
dual action
Rod seal,
dual
action
detailed
simplified
detailed
simplified
graphical
>-
Packing set2*
1)
2)
>
graphical
Technical drawing: 3.
a c e
nts
t n
\
Retaining
rings for
shafts
(page 269)
Deviations
Assembly dimension
Representation
<i
reference plane
for dimensioning 1 '
___
_
mH13
i
m
a = roller bearing
width + retaining
ring width
im
reference plane
for dimensioning 1 '
Retaining
rings for
holes
(page 269)
1)
Deviations for d 2 :
upper deviation: 0 (zero)
lower deviation: negative
Deviations for a:
upper deviation: positive
lower deviation: 0 (zero)
For functional reasons the reference plane for the dimensioning of slots is the locating face of the part to be secured.
Representation of springs
Representation
section
view
Name
Name
Cylindrical
helical compression
spring (round
wire)
Cylindrical
helical tension spring
Cylindrical
helical tension spring
Cylindrical
helical compression
spring (square
wire)
Disk spring
(simple)
Shaft
Symbol:
Symbol
Splines or
spline hubs
with straight
flanks.
Joint
J~L
- S b
JT
Toothed shafts
or toothed
hubs with
involute
splines or
serrations.
section
Disk spring
assembly
(disks layered
in alternating
directions)
Symbol:
Representation
view
IP*
ir _n
s\\\\l
Splines ISO 14-6 x 26 f7 x 30: Spline profile with straight flanks according to ISO 14, number of
splines N = 6, inner diameter d= 26f7, outer diameter D= 30 (page 241)
88
Technical drawing: 3.
o r e
nts
boss
r- 00.5
in mm
/r
Example
max
0.3
0.5
0.8
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.5
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.2
2.0
3.0
0.3
Drawing
entry
'max
in mm
1> 00.5x0,3
Edge or
corner
outer
edge
burr
material removal
a.
a
sharp edged
J
<0
13
fa
material removal
inner
edge
LL
u r
transition
a
ft, '
Dim. a (mm)
]/
OJ
-0.1;-0.3;-0.5;-1.0;-2.5
Symbol for
labeling workpiece
edges/corners
Symbol
element
1)
\II
'
|\
+0.1;+0.3;+0.5;+1.0;+2.5
Meaning for
outer edge
Burr allowed,
material removal
not allowed
sharp edged
-0.05;-0.02;+0.02;+0.05
inner edge
Transition allowed,
material removal not
allowed
Specification
allowed
for
Example
Burr or transition
allowed
Meaning
Material removal or
transition allowed
outer edge
inner edge
Burr
Material
removal
+1
L
Collective indications
t0.3
^0.5
- t U
Collective indications apply to all edges for which an
edge condition is not given.
Edges for which the collective indication does not
apply must be marked in the drawing.
The exceptions are placed after the collective indication
in parentheses or indicated by the base symbol.
Collective indications which are
only valid for outside or inside
edges are given by the corresponding symbols.
J=+0.3
XL
-0.1
L05
XKT
[0.02
IKT
Technical drawing: 3.
o r e
nts
Pitch
1)
ISO
standard
thread
--t
-
J
r
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.6
M2
M2.5
M3
0.7
0.75
0.8
1
Internal thread
1)
2)
Ml
-
M1.6
M4
-
M5
M6
Pitch
1)
ISO
standard
thread
max.
0.5
0.6
0.75
0.9
i
max.
0.6
0.75
0.9
1.05
1.3
1.5
1.8
2.1
1.25
1.5
1.75
2
1
1.1
1.25
1.5
1.2
1.35
1.5
1.8
2.3
2.6
2.8
3.4
1.75
1.9
2
2.5
2.1
2.25
2.4
3
3.8
4
4.2
5.1
M8
M10
M12
M16
*1
max.
3.2
3.8
4.3
5
max.
3.75
4.5
5.25
6
6.2
7.3
8.3
9.3
2.5
3
3.5
4
M20
M24
M30
M36
6.3
7.5
9
10
7.5
9
10.5
12
11.2
13.1
15.2
16.8
4.5
5
5.5
6
M42
M48
M56
M64
11
12.5
14
15
13.5
15
16.5
18
30 min
Internal thread
form C and form D
Lx!
x / / / V
/ ,
18.4
20.8
22.4
24
For fine threads the dimension of the thread runout is chosen according to the
pitch P.
As a rule; applies if no other entries are given.
If a shorter thread runout is necessary, this applies:
x2 0.5 x-|," 32*0.67-3-,; e2 0.625 e^
If a longer thread runout is necessary, this applies:
a3 1.3 ay, e3 *> 1.6
ei
Pitch
1)
ISO
standard
thread
Internal threads
Form C 2 ' Form D 3 '
01
92
01
92
H13 min. max. min. max.
d + 0.1
0.8 1.2 0.5 0.9
1
1.4 0.6 1
d + 0.1
1.2 1.6 0.75 1.25
d+0.1
d+0.2
1.4 1.9 0.9 1.4
d
Q
h13
0.1
0.12
0.16
0.16
d-0.3
of-0.4
d-0.5
d-0.6
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.4
d-0.7
d-0.7
d-0.8
d- 1
0.8
1
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.75
2.1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.6
1
1.1
1.25
1.5
d+0.2
d+0.2
d+0.3
d+0.3
1.6
1.8
2
2.4
2.2
2.4
2.7
3.3
1
1.1
1.25
1.5
1.6
1.7
2
2.4
M5
M6
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.6
d-1.1
d- 1.2
d-1.3
d-1.6
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.1
2.45
2.6
2.8
3.5
0.8
0.9
0.9
1.1
1.75
1.9
2
2.5
d + 0.3
d + 0.3
d+0.3
d+0.5
2.8
3
3.2
4
3.8
4
4.2
5.2
1.75
1.9
2
2.5
2.75
2.9
3
3.7
1.25
1.5
1.75
2
M8
M10
M12
M16
0.6
0.8
1
1
d-2
d-2.3
d - 2.6
d-3
2.7
3.2
3.9
4.5
4.4
5.2
6.1
7
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.5
3.2
3.8
4.3
5
d+0.5
d+0.5
d+0.5
d+0.5
5
6
7
8
6.7
7.8
9.1
10.3
3.2
3.8
4.3
5
4.9
5.6
6.4
7.3
2.5
3
3.5
4
M20
M24
M30
M36
1.2
1.6
1.6
2
d-3.6
d - 4.4
d-5
d - 5.7
5.6 8.7
6.7 10.5
7.7 12
14
9
3.2
3.7
4.7
5
6.3
7.5
9
10
d+0.5
d+0.5
d+0.5
d+0.5
10
12
14
16
13
6.3 9.3
15.2 7.5 10.7
17.7 9
12.7
14
20 10
4.5
5
5.5
6
M42
M48
M56
M64
2
2.5
3.2
3.2
d - 6.4 10.5 16
6-1
11.5 17.5
d-7.7 12.5 19
d-8.3 14
21
5.5
6.5
7.5
8
11
12.5
14
15
d + 0.5
d + 0.5
d + 0.5
d+0.5
18
20
22
24
23
26
28
30
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.6
M2
M2.5
M3
0.7
0.75
0.8
1
M1
-
M1.6
M4
-
11
12.5
14
15
16
18.5
20
21
30 min.
2)
3)
For fine thread screws the dimension of the thread undercut is chosen according
to the pitch P.
as a rule; always applies if no other entries are made
Only in cases where a shorter thread undercut is required.
90
Technical drawing: 3.
o r e
nts
V/s
V T V
T/
-f+4-
Bolt thread
Thread undercut
graphical
DIN76-D
DIN76-A
simplified
h2
h3
e
s
d
Screw joint w i t h
cap screw
h 2 0.8 t/
e
*2-d
s ^ 0.87 e
Screw joint
w i t h stud
Technical drawing: 3.
o r e
nts
form A
Form
,!
2.12
2.5
1.25 1.6
2
2.65 3.35 4.25 5.3
1.9
2.3
d,
d2
CM
"ta
2.9
4.6
3.7
3.15 4
6.7
8.5
7.4
5.8
1.9
2.3
2.9
3.7
4.6
5.9
7.4
11
'min
2.2
2.7
3.4
4.3
5.4
3.5
4.5
5.5
6.6
8.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
6.3
3.15
^mir
Form
10
1.9
2.3
2.9
3.7
4.6
3.5
4.5
5.5
6.6
8.3
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.9
0.9
4.5
5.3
6.3
7.5
7.1
8.5
12.7
1.2
12.5
5.9
10
7.4
12.7
1.1
1.7
9.2
11.4
14.7
22
18
11.5
14.8
14
18
22
10.8
12.9
16.4
15.6 20
1.6
16
9.2
1.6
1.4
18
22.4
11.5
14.8
15.6 20
1.7
25
25
2.3
14
18
22.4 28
12.5 16
20
25
11.2
10
8.6
0.9
10
31.5
6.8
9.2
14
11
6.3 8
5
10.6 13.2 17
< ISO 6411 - A4/8.5: center hole ISO 6411: a center hole is required on the finished part.
Form and dimensions of the center hole according to DIN 332: form A; d-\ = 4 mm; d2 = 8.5 mm.
Knurls
Representation
RAA
dy nominal diameter
d2 initial diameter
t
spacing
Standard spacing values
f: 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0; 1.2; 1.6 m m
RBR
RBL
RGE
RGV
RKE
RKV
-30(
i i
Name
Point
shape
Initial
diameter d2
Knurls with
axially parallel
grooves
do = d^ - 0.5 t
Right-hand
knurl
d2 = d<l- 0.5 t
Left-hand knurl
do = di - 0.5 t
Left-hand/righthand knurls
Axial and circumferential
knurl
raised
do = di - 0.67 t
recessed
d? = d-i- 0.33 t
raised
do = d^- 0.67 t
recessed
d2 = dy- 0.33 t
92
Technical drawing: 3.
o r e
nts
Undercuts
Undercuts1}
form E
for cylindrical surface to
be further machined
form F
for shoulders and cylindrical
surfaces to be further machined
z
form G
form H
for small transition for planar and cylindrical surfaces
(for low loading)
to be further machined
z
Zv Z 2 = machining allowances
Undercut DIN 509 - E 0.8 x 0.3: form E, radius r= 0.8 mm, undercut depth f, = 0.3 mm
Undercut dimensions and countersink dimensions
2)
Form
:i 0.1
t2
normal
loading
R0.4
2)
3)
(0.9)
> 0 1.6-03
0.2x0.1
0.2
> 0 3 - 0 18
0.4x0.2
0.3
R0.6
0.2
0.1
> 0 1 0 - 0 18
0.6x0.2
0.5
0.15
R0.6
0.3
0.2
2.5
(2.1)
> 0 1 8 - 0 80
0.6x0.3
0.4
> 0 1 8 - 0 80
0.8 x 0.3
0.6
0.05
1.0x0.2
0.9
0.45
1.0x0.4
0.7
1.2x0.2
1.1
0.6
1.2x0.4
0.9
0.1
1.6x0.3
1.4
0.6
0.3
0.2
2.5
(2.3)
R1
0.2
0.1
2.5
(1.8)
R1
0.4
0.3
(3.2)
0.2
0.1
2.5
(2)
> 0 1 8 - 0 50
> 0 80
> 0 1 8 - 0 50
0.4
0.3
(3.4)
R1.6
0.3
0.2
(3.1)
> 0 5 0 - 0 80
R2.5
0.4
0.3
(4.8)
> 0 8 0 - 0 125
2.5 x 0.4
2.2
1.0
R4
0.5
0.3
(6.4)
> 0 125
4.0x0.5
3.6
2.1
R0.4
0.2
0.2
(0.9)
(1.1)
R0.8
0.3
0.05
(2.0)
R1.2
0.3
0.05
(2.4)
(1.1)
(1.5)
> 0 80
> 0 3 - 0 18
0.4x0.2
> 0 1 8 - 0 80
0.8 x 0.3
0.35
1.2x0.3
0.65
> 0 1 8 - 0 50
4)
1)
Fo rm
F
G
R1.2
0.1
R1.2
0.1
Undercut
r x f-|
(1.1)
(1.4)
R0.8
E
and
F
0.1
0.2
increased
fatigue strength
Countersink dimension a on
opposing piece
l
o I
CN
simplified entry
simplified entry
77m
0.1+0.05 2.5+0.2
complete entry
complete entry
93
Basic terms
weld symbol
tail
joint
(e.g. butt joint)
Weld information
symbolic
V P *
a3 17"
a
a4
"arrow side"
/
//
"other
side"
I7I
arrow line
>
"arrow side"
"other side"
'other side'
Other side. The other side of the joint that is opposite the
arrow side.
arrow line
"arrow side'
/
,
<^23
jf
JO
graphical
Representation
symbolic
graphical
Representation
symbolic
I
iiiiiiiiiiiii
SL
Butt
weld
II
jTT
V groove
weld
V
R
94
Representation
graphical
Weld type/
symbol
symbolic
Flare-V
groove
weld
graphical
Representation
symbolic
f * -
j/
J/
TV
T\
X.
Bevel
groove weld
Plug
welding
I f
Si-
Y-butt
weld
Frontal
flush weld
Steepflanked weld
\L
r>r\
AL
\i
Build-up
weld
[77
IMmI I
Fold weld
J-groove
weld
= = = =
U-groove
weld
ar
1
f
HY-weld
aB
Weld all
around
b-
Spot weld
Fillet weld
Line weld
5BM03SB
aB
Field weld
with 3 mm
seam
thickness
aBjs^
Surface weld
r ~ i
alb,
Vssss/A
95
Representation
Symbol
D(ouble)V-weld
(X-weld)
D(ouble)bevel weld
Weld type
Symbol
D(ouble)HY-weld
D(ouble)U-weld
1)
D(ouble)Y-weld
Convex
double
V-weld
Y-weld
with
backing run
symbolic
Weld type
Symbol
Flat
reworked
V-weld
Representation
Flat
V-weld with
flat backing
run
Hollow fillet
weld, weld
transfer
unnotched
Dimensioning examples
Weld type
graphical
Representation
Symbol
Representation
s4
l-weld
(penetrating)
(7
7 K
s3
l-weld
(non-penetrating)
Flare-V
groove
weld
V-weld
(penetrating
weld) with
backing run
/ /.
\
-S2_JL
31
111/IS0 5817-C/
w
- V - < ( ISO 69A-7-PA/
EN 499-E 42 0 RR12
-Zl
1)
96
Fillet weld
(continuous)
Fillet weld,
weld leg thickness z = 4 mm
(side length of the isosceles
triangle)
/
^30
^30
Fillet weld
(interrupted)
')))))] mmi
20
a5|\2x20(10)
20
\
(10)
Double
fillet weld
(interrupted)
a4|\ 3x30(10)
/ aA-^j x30 (10)
Double
fillet weld
(interrupted,
staggered)
30
I))))
30
z5 k 2 X 2 0 " 7(30)
' z5 ^ 3 x 2 0 / -(30)
25
i)))):
))))).
')))).
20
20
20
))).
30
20
Weld type/
symbol
Meaning/
drawing entry
Type of
joint
Fillet weld,
weld leg thickness a = 3 mm
(height of the isosceles triangle)
Meaning/
drawing entry
20
Surface
seam 1 )
Folded
seam
6x7<?
5x20=
e>
Adhesive
bondedseams
7
05
Slant
seam 1 )
z :
Pressed
seam
Pressed
seam
5 x4H
Z S
$
1)
1
u
NO
Folded
seam
97
hardness
value
HRC
HV
HB
rockwell hardness
vickers hardness
brinell hardness
hardness
indentation
Eht
Nht
Rht
carburizing depth
nitride white layer thickness
HTA
WL
annealed
nitrided
Possible additions
y , , , , ,
v / / / / / \
Area must be
heat treated.
Area may be
heat treated.
\Z////y\
n o t b e
h e a t
treated.
Method
Quenching
and tempering,
3K
Hardening,
Hardening
and
tempering
TTi
'
J
60
Heat treatment
localized
T|
r
75 + 10
hardened and tempered
58+ 4 HRC 4 0 + 5 HRC
" "rTo + 5
hardened and entire
part tempered 60 + 3 HRC
Nitriding,
Case
hardening
1_
nitrided
>900 HV 10
Nht = 0.3+ 0.1
Surfaced
hardening
surface hardened
620 + 120 HV 50
Rht 500 = 0.8 + 0.8
case-hardened and
tempered 700 + 100 HV 10
Eht = 1.2 + 0.5
surface hardened
and entire part tempered
5 4 + 6 HRC = 35 HRC
<30 HRC
surface hardened
and tempered
6 1 + 4 HRC Rht 600 = 0.8 + 0.8
0.05+0.03
0.1+0.1
0.3+0.2
0.5+0.3
0.8+0.4
1.2+0.5
1.6+0.6
0.05+0.02
0.1+0.05
0.15+0.02
0.2+0.1
0.25+0.1
0.3+0.1
0.35+0.15
0.2+0.2
0.4+0.4
0.6+0.6
0.8+0.8
1.0+1.0
1.3+1.1
1.6+1.3
0.2+0.1
0.4+0.2
0.6+0.3
0.8+0.4
1.0+0.5
1.3+0.6
1.6+0.8
550 HV 1
98
Form deviations are deviations of the actual surface (surfaces ascertainable by measurement) from the
geometrically ideal surface, whose standard shape is defined by the drawing.
Degrees of form deviation (Profile secExamples
tion repres. with vertical exaggeration)
1st degree: form deviation
Possible causes
deviation in
straightness,
roundness
Deflection of the workpiece or the machine during fabrication of the part, malfunction or wear in the guides of the
machine tool.
waves
grooves
scoring,
scales,
bumps
matrix
structure,
lattice structure
zi
cf. DIN EN ISO 4287 (1998-10) and DIN EN ISO 4288 (1998-04)
Surface profile
Parameters
Explanations
Total height of
the profile Pt
The primary profile represents the foundation for calculating the parameters of the primary profile and forms the
basis for the waviness and roughness profiles.
The total height of the profile Pt is the sum of the height of
the highest profile peak Zp and the depth of the lowest profile trough 2V within the evaluation length / n .
Total height of
the profile Wt
Total height of
the profile Rt
Rp, Rv
Highest peak
of the profile
Arithmetic
mean of the
profile ordinates fla1)
Material ratio
of the profile
Rmr
Center line
(x-axis) x
in
Roughness profile (R-profile)
o/ 100
Rmr in %
Z(x) height of the profile at any position x; ordinate value
/n
/r
evaluation length
single evaluation length
1) For parameters defined over a single evaluation length, the arithmetic mean of 5 single
evaluation lengths to DIN EN ISO 4288 is used for determining the parameters.
99
Non-periodic
profiles
(e.g. grinding and
lapping profiles)
Limit
wavelength
Single/
Periodic
total
profiles
evaluation (e.g. turning
length
profiles)
Limit
wavelength
Single /
total
evaluation
length
Groove width
RSm mm
Rz
pm
Ra
pm
pm
'n
mm
groove width
RSm mm
Rz
pm
Ra
pm
pm
/r,/n
mm
>0.01-0.04
up to 0.1
up to 0.02
0.08
0.08/0.4
>0.13-0.4
>0.5-10
>0.1-2
0.8
0.8/4
>0.04-0.13
>0.1-0.5
>0.02-0.1
0.25
0.25/1.25
>0.4-1.3
> 10-50
>2-10
2.5
2.5/12.5
Meaning
\ /
v-/
D
Material removal not allowed
or the surface remains in delivered condition.
_/
V
eVd
c manufacturing process
d symbol for the required
groove direction
(table page 100)
/
V
e machining deviation in mm
Examples
Symbol
Meaning
10
/ Ra 3.5
^/Rz
V
r/ Rzmax
^
11
21
31
41
51
61
0.5
Symbol
^
P Ra
Meaning
material removal machining
Ra = 8 pm (upper limit)
standard transfer
characteristic31
standard evaluation length 41
"16% rule" 5 1
applies all around the contour
ground
/0.008-4/Ra
0.5 Vl0.008-/f/Ra
1.6
0.8
surface parameter, e.g. Rz, consists of the profile (here the roughness profile R) and the parameters (here: z).
transfer characteristic: wavelength range between the short wavelength filter As and the long wavelength filter
Ac. The wavelength of the long wavelength filter corresponds to the single evaluation length / r . If no transfer characteristic is entered, then the standard transfer characteristic applies 31 .
standard transfer characteristic: the limit wavelength for measurement of the roughness parameters is dependent
upon the roughness profile and is taken from tables.
standard evaluation length / n = 5 x single evaluation length / r .
"16% rule": only 16% of all measured values may exceed the chosen parameter.
"max. rule" ("highest value rule"): no measured value may exceed the specified highest value.
100
Technical drawing: 3.
races
Representation
of groove
direction
EZI
JU
rai
Symbol
Groove
direction
1
parallel
to the
projection
plane
perpendicular to
the projection plane
crossed
in two
angular
directions
multidirectional
approximately concentric to
the center
non-grooved
surface, nondirectional or
troughs
approximately
radial to
the center
3.5
10
14
20
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.4
2.0
0.25 0.35
Hi
3.5
10
14
20
28
H2
11
15
21
30
42
60
Rz 5
Legibility
from below or from the right
Layout
directly on the surface or with reference and
leader lines
Ra 6
A-A
i / / 0.05 A
Ra 3.5
s/
Rz 10
Rz 1.5
El
Rz 6.5
x/7
Rz 6
101
Roughness of surfaces
Recommended assignment of roughness values to ISO tolerance specifications1'
Nominal size
range
from-to
mm
Recommended
values of
Rz and Ra
pm
Rz
1-6
Ra
Rz
Ra
Rz
6-10
10-18
18-80
80-250
250-500
10
11
2.5
0.4
6.3
0.8
6.3
10
25
1.6
10
1.6
10
1.6
16
3.2
16
3.2
16
3.2
0.8
4
2.5
0.4
4
0.8
4
0.8
6.3
6.3
0.8
6.3
0.8
10
Ra
Rz
0.8
4
Ra
Rz
0.8
10
1.6
16
Ra
Rz
0.8
6.3
0.8
6.3
1.6
10
1.6
16
Ra
0.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
16
3.2
25
3.2
25
3.2
16
3.2
25
3.2
40
6.3
25
6.3
25
6.3
40
6.3
40
12.5
40
12.5
63
6.3
40
6.3
63
12.5
63
12.5
100
12.5
25
Cutting operations
Forming
Primary forming
Manufacturing process
Casting:
Die casting
10-100
160
10
25
-
25-160
63-250
2.5-10
1.6-7
250
1000
Sintering:
Extrusion
25-100
0.8
3.2-12.5
25
Closed-die forming
Rod extrusion
10
4
63-400
400
1000
0.8
25-100
400
0.4
16
10
Material
removal:
0.8
4-10
0.5-6.3
2.8-10
2.5-12.5
3.2-12.5
1-3.2
25
25
0.8
0.2
0.025
0.1
0.06-1.6
0.4-1
1.5
16
5-10
31
0.2
40-100
1000
3.2
0.45
8-16
Calibrated smooth
0.1
Wire EDM
Diesinking
Cutting
Oxyacetylene cutting
operations: Laser cutting
Plasma cutting
Shearing
Water jet cutting
1)
10-100
6-280
10-63
16-100
40-160
2.5-25
10-25
4-10
400
2.5
4-63
10-63
250
250
1.6
0.04
0.04
10-63
0.1-1
1-11
0.04
0.25-1.6
0.04-0.25
1.6-4
16
0.1
6.3
0.4
1
0.1
6.3
2
3.2
6.3
50
1-10
1-10
1.6-12.5
1.6
1.6
0.05
0.8
0.2
6.3-25
6.3-12.5
0.4-3.2
1.6-6.3
0.8-2
0.8-12.5
1.6-12.5
160
0.2
0.4
0.4
2.5
0.006
15
10
0.4
0.006
0.006
25
0.012
250
40
40
25
3.2-50
12.5-50
0.4-1.6
0.3-0.8
16
0.8-30
50
25
12.5
12.5
6.3
50
50
1.6-12.5
0.02-0.17
25
0.34
0.13-0.65
0.025-0.2
0.005-0.035
1.6
0.21
0.05
0.2-0.8
6.3
Roughness values, as long as they are not contained in DIN 4766-1 (cancelled) are according to specifications of the industry.
Read-out example:
reaming (for surface
characteristic Rz)
fjnjshjng
^min = 0A
Rz =
^
=1 0 .
\
.
conventional timshing
r o u g h
o c
/?z m a x = 25
finishing
102
Hole
N
nominal size
Guh hole max. dimension
G
\H hole min. dimension
hole upper deviation
ES
hole
lower deviation
El
hole tolerance
to
kj
hole
zero line
/
\9 .C r
shaft
lo
TH
I
02OH7
nominal dimension
tolerance class
rz
tolerance grade
fundamental deviation
Designation
shaft
N
Gus
G\s
es
ei
Ts
02Os6
Explanation
Designation
I!
nominal dimension
shaft max. dimension
shaft min. dimension
shaft upper deviation
shaft lower deviation
shaft tolerance
nominal dimension
tolerance class
tolerance grade
fundamental deviation
Explanation
Zero line
It represents the nominal dimension that is Fundament. A group of tolerances assigned to same
referenced by the deviations and tolerances. tolerance
level of precision, e.g IT7.
grade
Fundamental
deviation
Tolerance
Fundamental
tolerance
Hole
-Uj
<o
to
Shaft
GUH=N+ES
GuS
Gih =N+EI
Gis
Tu
= ES - El
TH =
GuH - GIH
Ts
ei
= Gus -
is
Fits
Clearance fit
Fcmax max. clearance
Fc m j n min. clearance
= N + ei
7~q = es-
to
= N + es
'((((({
LJ
U.
Transition fit
^cmax max. clearance
F | m a x max. interference
'
X
Interference fit
F | m a x max. interference
F| m j n min. interference
1
ur
E
UF
1
LU
UT
c
2
ur
LC
VZZ/ZA
| fCmin = Qh ~ GuS
= ?;
| ^Imin = ^uH ~ Q s
F
= G - G|
Fcmni =
G
Technical drawing: 3.
l n
and
103
Fit system: basic hole system (all hole dimensions have the fundamental deviation H)
Examples for nominal dimension 25,
Fundamental deviations for shafts
tolerance grade 7
IJ
H hole
jm
l r ^ j h
I T
clearance
A
fits
+40
pm
Hzb
_za
+20
+10
T y
v
25n6
-zero line
25H7
25s6
25H7
25H7
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
interference
fits
transition
fits
25f 7
transition
fit
clearance
fit
interference
fit
Fit system: basic shaft system (all shaft dimensions have the fundamental deviation h)
Examples for nominal dimension 25,
Fundamental allowances for holes
tolerance grade 6
+50
pm
+30
UU
zero line
25F8
+20
+10
25h6
-10
h-shaft
-20
JKMN^il||||zAzB
clearance
fits
-30
-40
-50
Bra
interference
'
fits
transition
fits
up to 3
30-50
1.5
250-315
315-400
400-500
2.5
3.5
4.5
6
7
8
500-630
630-800
9
10
800-1000 11
1000-1250
1250-1600
interference
fit
I T 4IT5
IT6
pm
10-18
18-30
50-80
80-120
120-180
180-250
transition
fit
clearance
fit
Fundamental tolerance5S
0.8
1
1
1.2
1.5
3-6
6-10
25h6
25S7
Fundamental tolerances
Nominal
dimension
range
over-to
mm
25h6
25N7
1.2
1.5
2.5
2.5
1.5
2
2.5
2.5
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
13
15
13
15
18
21
1600-2000 18
2000-2500 22
2500-3150 26
25
30
36
3
4
10
12
6
j8
9
11
9
11
13
15
18
21
16
19
22
25
29
32
25
30
35
40
46
3 | r ,5
4
6
4
7
5
6
8
10
12
13
15
16
18
21
24
29
35
41
50
"8
10
12
14
13
15
18
20
16
18
23
20
22
25
27
32
25
28
36
40
33
39
47
55
46
55
68
65
78
96
36
40
44
50
56
52
57
63
70
80
90
14
25
40
18
22
27
33
39
30
36
43
52
48
58
70
84
100
81
62
74
87
100
115
130
210
89
97
140
155
230
250
110
175
200
280
320
230
360
260
310
370
440
540
420
500
600
700
860
46
54
63
72
125
140
66 105 165
78 125 195
92 150 230
110 175 280
135 210 330
120
140
160
185
1.3
1.4
0.4
0.6
0.48
0.75
0.58
0.7
0.84
0.9
1.1
1
1.2
1.4
1.3
1.6
1.9
2.2
1.6
1.85
2.1
2.5
2.9
3.2
2.3
3.6
4
4.4
1.55 2.5
1.75 2.8
3.2
500 0.8
1.25 2
1.4 2.3 3.6
560 0.9
660 1.05 1.65 2.6 4.2
780 1.25 1.95 3.1 5
6
920 1.5 2.3 3.7
1100 1.75 2.8 4.4 7
5.4 8.6
1350 2.1 3.3
5
5.6
6.6
7.8
9.2
11
13.5
1
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.6
5.2
5.7
6.3
7
8
1.4
1.8
2.2
2.7
3.3
3.9
4.6
5.4
6.3
7.2
8.1
8.9
9.7
11
12.5
14
9
10.5 16.5
12.5 19.5
15
23
17.5 28
21
33
The limit deviations of the tolerance grade for the fundamental deviations h, js, H and JS can be derived from the
fundamental tolerances: h: es = 0; ei = - IT js: es = + IT/2; ei = - IT/2 H: ES = + IT; El = 0JS: ES = + IT/2; / = - IT/2
104
ISO fits
Fundamental deviations for shafts (selection)
Fundamental
deviations
Fundamental
tolerance
grade
IT9
to
IT13
IT8
to
IT12
IT5
to
IT13
IT5
to
IT10
IT3
to
IT10
IT3
to
IT10
IT1
to
IT18
IT5
to
IT8
IT3
to
IT13
IT3
to
IT9
IT3
to
IT9
Table
applies to
Nominal
dimension
over-to mm
up to 3
IT7
IT4
to
IT7
over
IT7
Upper deviation es in pm
-270
3-6
IT3 to IT10
Lower deviation ei in pm
-60
-20
-14
-6
-2
-4
+2
+4
+6
+10
+14
-70
-30
-20
-10
-4
-4
+1
+4
+8
+12
+15
+19
-80
-40
-25
-13
-5
-5
+1
+6
+10
+15
+19
+ 23
6-10
-280
10-18
-290
-95
-50
-32
-16
-6
-6
+1
+7
+ 12
+18
+ 23
+ 28
-65
-40
-20
-7
-8
+2
+8
+15
+ 22
+ 28
+ 35
-80
-50
-25
-9
-10
+2
+9
+ 17 + 26
+ 34
+ 43
-100
-60
-30
-10
-12
+2
+11
+ 20 + 32
+ 41
+ 53
+ 43
+ 59
-120
-72
-36
-12
-15
+3
+13
+ 23 + 37
+ 51
+71
+ 54
+79
+ 63
+ 92
+ 65
+ 100
18-30
-300
-110
30-40
-310
-120
40-50
-320
-130
50-65
-340
-140
65-80
-360
-150
80-100
-380
-170
100-120
-410
-180
120-140
-460
-200
140-160
-520
-210
160-180
-580
-230
+ 68
+108
180-200
-660
-240
+ 77
+122
200-225
-740
-260
+ 80
+130
225-250
-820
-280
+ 84
+140
250-280
-920
-300
+ 94
+158
280-315
-1050
-330
+ 98
+170
315-355
-1200
-360
+108
+190
355-400
-1350
-400
+114
+ 208
400-450
-1500
-440
+126
+ 232
450-500
-1650
-480
+132
+ 252
-145
-170
-85
-100
-43
-14
-50
-15
-18
-21
+3
+4
+15
+17
+ 27 + 43
+ 31 + 50
-190
-110
-56
-17
-26
+4
+ 20
+ 34 + 56
-210
-125
-62
-18
-28
+4
+ 21
+ 37 + 62
-230
-135
-68
-20
-32
+5
+ 23
+ 40 + 68
ei = es - IT
es = ei + IT
es (table above) = - 9 pm
IT5 (table page 103) = 11 pm
ei = es - IT = - 9 pm - 11 pm = -20 pm
zero line
40
EI=ES-IT
ES=EI+
es
ei
IT
tolerance
zone for shaft
100
IT
(fundamental
tolerance
= tolerance T)
i ^ zero line
ESi
EL
tolerance
zone for hole
IT
" (fundamental
tolerance
' ^tolerance T)
Technical drawing: 3.
l n
105
and i
ISO fits
Fundamental deviations for holes (selection)1'
Fundamental
deviations
Fundamental
tolerance
grade
IT9
to
IT13
IT8
to
IT13
IT6
to
IT13
IT5
to
IT10
Table
applies to
Nominal
dimension
over-to; mm
Lower deviation EL in pm
up to 3
+270
3-6
IT6
to
IT8
IT3
to
IT10
IT3
to
IT10
IT3
to
IT11
IT8
P,R,
S
IT3 to IT10
to
IT7
IT3 to IT8
IT 8 to IT10
Upper deviation ES in pm
-6
-10
-14
-12
-15
-19
-15
-19
-23
-18
-23
-28
-22
-28
-35
-26
-34
-43
-41
-53
-43
-59
-51
-71
-54
-79
-63
-92
-65
-100
-68
-108
-77
-122
-80
-130
-84
-140
-94
-158
-98
-170
-108
-190
-114
-208
-126
-232
-132
-252
250
to
315
315
to
400
400
to
500
+60
+20
+ 14
+6
+2
+6
-2
-4
+70
+30
+20
+ 10
+4
0 + 10
-1 +A
-4 + A
-8 + A
-6 + A -10 + A cK_o
u>
-7 + A - 1 2 + A 03
O
c
-8 + A - 1 5 + A CI_D
6-10
+280
+80
+40
+25
+ 13
+5
0 + 12
- 1 +A
10-18
+290
+95
+50
+32
+ 16
+6
0 + 15
-1 +A
18-30
+300
+ 110
+65
+40
+ 20
+7
0 + 20
-2+A
03
"O
CD
30-40
+310
+ 120
+80
40-50
+320
+ 130
50-65
+340
+ 140
+50
+360
+9
0 + 24
-2+A
-9 + A -17 + A
O
03
c
03
+ 100
65-80
+ 25
+60
+ 30
+ 10
0 + 28
-2+A
+ 150
-11 + A - 2 0 + A E
03
T3
-32
80-100
+380
+ 170
+ 120
100-120
+410
120-140
+72
+ 36
+ 12
0 + 34
+ 180
+460
V.> V)
03
-37
CD Q_
3
03 O
+ 200
C/3
cut
140-160
+520
160-180
180-200
+660
+ 240
200-225
+740
+ 260
+820
250-280
+85
+ 43
+920
+ 330
315-355
+1200
+ 360
+ 170 + 100 + 50
+ 15
0 + 47
+ 17
+ 18
0 + 55
0 + 60
-50
Q_
Q.
D
-56
CD
-->
C
o
>+
- 4 + A - 2 1 + A -37 + A V)
03
-62
2
+ 230 + 135 + 68
+ 20
0 + 66
- 5 +A - 2 3 + A - 4 0 + A
-68
+480
Values for A
3
to
6
6
to
10
10
to
18
18
to
30
IT3
IT4
IT5
1.5
1
1.5
2
1
2
3
1.5
2
3
1.5
3
4
IT6
IT7
3
4
6
3
7
9
IT8
3
6
7
5
9
14
8
12
1)
in pm
Fundamental
tolerance
grade
1)
-4 + A -20+A -34+A
+440
+1650
V)
c.
o
C
D
- 4 + A -17+A -31 + A >
03
CD
+400
+1500
-43
T3
+ 210 + 125 + 62
+1350
LU
+ 300
+1050
450-500
-3 + A -15+A -27+A
+ 280
280-315
400-450
0 + 41
c>j oo
+ 190 + 110 + 56
355-400
+ 14
+ 230
+580
225-250
+ 145
+ 210
2
3
5
6
11
16
2
4
5
3
4
6
3
4
6
4
7
5
7
5
7
7
15
23
9
17
9
20
26
29
11
21
32
13
23
34
13
19
106
ISO fits
Basic hole system
up to 3
? FI
6-10
10-14
14-18
18-24
24-30
30-40
40-50
50-65
65-80
80-100
100-120
for shafts
for
hole
OICAI AI ^C,
II II AI LAIUUI I, II IICI
ICI CI IOC
m
LIIJJ
h5
k6
n5
r5
j5
(fa
(ft
315-355
355-400
400-450
450-500
1)
ge
h6
j6
k6
m6
fit
I
n6
r6
s6
+14
+10
+20
+15
+25
+19
+ 10
0
+12
0
+15
0
-6
-16
-10
-22
-13
-28
-2
-8
-4
-12
-5
-14
0
-6
0
-8
0
-9
+4
+6
+8 +10
-2
0
+2
+4
+6
+9 + 12 +16
-2
+ 1 +4 + 8
+7 +10 + 15 +19
-2
+ 1 +6 +10
+ 16
+ 10
+23
+ 15
+28
+19
+20
+14
+27
+19
+32
+23
+11
0
0
-8
+5 +12 +20
+1 +12
-3
+31
+23
+18
0
-16
-34
-6
-17
0
-11
+8 + 12 + 18 +23
-3
+ 1 +7 +12
+34
+23
+39
+28
+13
0
0
-9
+5 + 15 +24
-4
+2 +15
+37
+28
+21
0
-20
-41
-7
-20
0
-13
+9 + 15 +21 +28
-4
+2
+8 +15
+41
+28
+48
+35
+16
0
0
-11
+6 + 18 +28
+2 +17
-5
+45
+34
+25
0
-25
-50
-9
-25
+50
+34
+59
+43
+19
0
0
-13
+6 +21 +33
-7
+2 +20
+30
0
-30
-60
-10
-29
+22
0
0
-15
+6 +25 +38
-9
+3 +23
+35
0
-36
-71
-12
-34
+25
0
0
-18
+7 +28 +45
-11
+3 +27
+40
0
-43
-83
-14
-39
+29
0
0
-20
+ 7 +33 +51
+4 +31
-13
+46
0
-50
-96
-15
-44
+32
0
0
-23
+7 +36 +57
+4 +34
-16
+52
0
-56
-108
-17
-49
+36
0
0
-25
+7 +40 +62
-18
+4 +37
+57
0
-62
-119
-18
-54
+40
0
0
-27
+7 +45 +67
-20
+5 +40
+63
0
-68
-131
-20
-60
+60
+41
+62
+43
+73
+51
+76
+54
+88
+63
+90
+65
+93
+68
+106
+77
+109
+80
+113
+84
+126
+94
+130
+98
+144
+ 108
+150
+114
+ 166
+126
+172
+132
+72
+53
+78
+59
+93
+71
+101
+79
+117
+92
+125
+100
+133
+108
+151
+122
+159
+130
+169
+140
+190
+ 158
+202
+170
+226
+190
+244
+208
+272
+232
+292
+252
225-250
280-315
f7
interference
+6
+8
Z.
+4
0
+3
+9 + 13
-2
+1
+8
+4 + 10 +16
-2
+1 +10
180-200
250-280
transition
fit
clearance
fit
0
-4
0
-5
0
-6
160-180
200-225
for shafts
Paired with an H7 hole
results in a
+6
0
+8
0
+9
0
120-140
140-160
for
hole
Paired with an
H6 hole results in a
+54
+41
+56
+43
+66
+51
+69
+54
+81
+63
+83
+65
+86
+68
+97
+77
+100
+80
+104
+84
+117
+94
+121
+98
+133
+ 108
+139
+114
+153
+126
+ 159
+ 132
The tolerance classes in bold print correspond to row 1 in DIN 7157; their use is preferable.
Technical drawing: 3.
l n
107
and i
ISO fits
Basic hole system
Nominal
dimension
range
mm
up to 3
3-6
6-10
10-14
14-18
18-24
24-30
30-40
40-50
50-65
65-80
80-100
100-120
for
hole
315-355
355-400
400-450
450-500
1)
2)
+34
+20
+46
+28
+56
+34
+67
+40
+72
+45
+87
+54
+97
+64
+119
+80
+136
+97
+168
+122
+192
+146
+232
+178
+264
+210
+311
+248
+343
+280
+373
+310
+422
+350
+457
+385
+497
+425
+556
+475
+606
+525
+679
+590
+749
+660
+837
+740
+917
+820
f7
h9
+ 14
0
+18
0
+22
0
-20
-45
-30
-60
-40
-76
-14
-28
-20
-38
-25
-47
-6
-16
-10
-22
-13
-28
0
-25
0
-30
0
-36
+32
+18
+41
+23
+50
+28
+27
0
-50
-93
-32
-59
-16
-34
0
-43
+60
+33
+33
0
-65
-117
-40
-73
-20
-41
0
-52
+39
0
-80
-142
-50
-89
-25
-50
0
-62
+46
0
-100
-174
-60
-106
-30
-60
0
-74
+54
0
-120
-207
-72
-126
-36
-71
0
-87
+63
0
-145
-245
-85
-148
-43
-83
0
-100
+72
0
-170
-285
-100
-172
-50
-96
0
-115
+81
0
-190
-320
-110
-191
-56
-108
0
-130
+89
0
-210
-350
-125
-214
-62
-119
0
-140
+97
0
-230
-385
-135
-232
-68
-131
0
-155
225-250
280-315
x8 )
e8
180-200
250-280
fiit
d9
160-180
200-225
for shafts
Paired with an H11 hole
results in a
fiit
120-140
140-160
for
hole
for shafts
u8 >
+74
+41
+81
+48
+99
+60
+109
+70
+133
+87
+148
+102
+178
+124
+198
+144
+233
+170
+253
+190
+273
+210
+308
+236
+330
+258
+356
+284
+396
+315
+431
+350
+479
+390
+524
+435
+587
+490
+637
+540
a11
c11
d9
d11
h9
h 11
+60
0
+75
0
+90
0
-270
-330
-270
-345
-280
-370
-60
-120
-70
-145
-80
-170
-20
-45
-30
-60
-40
-76
-20
-80
-30
-105
-40
-130
0
-25
0
-30
0
-36
0
-60
0
-75
0
-90
+110
0
-290
-400
-95
-205
-50
-93
-50
-160
0
-43
0
-110
+130
0
-300
-430
-110
-240
-65
-117
-65
-195
0
-52
0
-130
-310
-470
-320
-480
-340
-530
-360
-550
-380
-600
-410
-630
-460
-710
-520
-770
-580
-830
-660
-950
-740
-1030
-820
-1110
-920
-1240
-1050
-1370
-1200
-1560
-1350
-1710
-1500
-1900
-1650
-2050
-120
-280
-130
-290
-140
-330
-150
-340
-170
-390
-180
-400
-200
-450
-210
-460
-230
-480
-240
-530
-260
-550
-280
-570
-300
-620
-330
-650
-360
-720
-400
-760
-440
-840
-480
-880
-80
-142
-80
-240
0
-62
0
-160
-100
-174
-100
-290
0
-74
0
-190
-120
-207
-120
-340
0
-87
0
-220
-145
-245
-145
-395
0
-100
0
-250
-170
-285
-170
-460
0
-115
0
-290
-190
-320
-190
-510
0
-130
0
-320
-210
-350
-210
-570
0
-140
0
-360
-230
-385
-230
-630
o
-155
0
-400
+160
0
+190
0
+220
0
+250
0
+290
0
+320
0
+360
0
+400
0
The tolerance classes in bold print correspond to row 1 in DIN 7157; their use is preferable.
DIN 7157 recommends: nominal dimensions up to 24 mm: H8/x8; nominal dimensions over 24 mm: H8/u8.
108
ISO fits
Basic shaft system
Nominal
dimension
range
over-to
mm
for
shafts
3-6
6-10
10-18
18-30
30-40
40-50
50-65
65-80
80-100
100-120
for
shafts
Paired with an h5
shaft results in a
for holes
Paired with an h6 shaft
results in a
n l o o r o n r o
a i a u v y
t r o n o i t i r v n
i i a u c >1 I H J I 1
i n f n r f o r o n r Q
I h o i i t< 1 C I I w C
fiit
fiit
0
-4
0
-5
0
-6
0
-8
0
-9
a nee
fit
H6
+6
0
+8
0
+9
0
+11
0
+13
0
0
-11
+ 16
0
+10
-6
-4
-20
-12
-28
-21
-37
0
-16
0
-13
+19
0
+13
-6
-5
-24
-14
-33
-26
-45
0
-19
0
-15
+22
0
+16
-6
- 6 -28
-16
-38
-30
-52
0
-22
0
-18
+25
0
+18
-8
- 7 -33
-20
-45
-36
-61
0
-25
0 -12
-40 -52
0
-20
+29
0
+22
-7
-8
-37
-22
-51
-41
-70
0
-29
0 -14
-46 -60
0
-23
+32
0
+25
-9
-7 -41
-25
-57
-47
-79
0
-32
0 -14
-52 -66
0
-25
+36
0
+29
-7
-10
-46
-26
-62
-51
-87
0
-36
0
-27
+40
0
+33
-7
-10
-50
-27
-67
-55
-95
0
-40
0
up to 3
for holes
ft
J6
ft
M6
N6
P6
+2
-2
-4
-8
+5
-1
-3
-9
+5
-3
- 4 -12
-4
+6
- 5 -15
-4
+8
- 5 -17
-4
-10
-5
-13
-7
-16
-9
-20
-11
-24
-6
-12
-9
-17
-12
-21
-15
-26
-18
-31
fit
F8
G7
H7
J7
0
-6
0
-8
0
-9
0
-11
0
-13
+20
+6
+28
+ 10
+35
+13
+43
+16
+53
+20
+12
+2
+ 16
+4
+20
+5
+24
+6
+28
+7
+4
+10
0
-6
+12
+6
0
-6
+15
+8
0
-7
+18 +10
0
-8
+21 + 12
0
-9
K7
M7
N7
R7
S7
0
-10
+3
-9
+5
-10
+6
-12
+6
-15
-2
-12
0
-12
0
-15
0
-18
0
-21
-4
-14
-4
-16
-4
-19
-5
-23
-7
-28
-10
-20
-11
-23
-13
-28
-16
-34
-20
-41
-14
-24
-15
-27
-17
-32
-21
-39
-27
-48
-25
-50
-34
-59
-30
-60
-32
-62
-38
-73
-41
-76
-48
-88
-50
-90
-53
-93
-60
-106
-63
-109
-67
-113
-74
-126
-78
-130
-87
-144
-93
-150
-103
-166
-109
-172
-42
-72
-48
-78
-58
-93
-66
-101
-77
-117
-85
-125
-93
-133
-105
-151
-113
-159
-123
-169
-138
-190
-150
-202
-169
-226
-187
-244
-209
-272
-229
-292
+9
-21
0
-9
-30 -39
120-140
140-160
160-180
180-200
200-225
225-250
250-280
280-315
315-355
355-400
400 -450
450-500
1>
The tolerance classes in bold print correspond to row 1 in DIN 7157; their use is preferable.
Technical drawing: 3.
l n
109
and i
ISO fits
Basic shaft system
Nominal
dimension
range
for
shafts
for holes
bis 3
3-6
6-10
10-18
18-30
30-40
40-50
50-65
65-80
80-100
100-120
0
-25
0
-30
0
-36
0
-43
0
-52
0
-62
0
-74
0
-87
120-140
140-160
0
-100
160-180
180-200
200-225
0
-115
225-250
250-280
280-315
315-355
355-400
400-450
450-500
1)
2)
3)
0
-130
0
-140
0
-155
Pairing with an
h 11 shaft results in a
tra nsition f it
mm
for holes
for
shafts
2)
N9
3)
C11
D10
E9
F8
H8 J9/JS9
+ 120
+ 60
+ 145
+ 70
+ 170
+ 80
+ 205
+ 95
+ 240
+ 110
+ 280
+ 120
+ 290
+ 130
+ 330
+ 140
+ 340
+ 150
+ 390
+ 170
+ 400
+ 180
+ 450
+ 200
+ 460
+ 210
+ 480
+ 230
+ 530
+ 240
+ 550
+ 260
+ 570
+ 280
+ 620
+ 300
+ 650
+ 330
+ 720
+ 360
+ 760
+ 400
+ 840
+ 440
+ 880
+ 480
+ 60
+ 20
+ 78
+ 30
+ 98
+ 40
+ 120
+ 50
+ 149
+ 65
+ 39
+ 14
+ 50
+ 20
+ 61
+ 25
+ 75
+ 32
+ 92
+ 40
+ 20
+ 06
+ 28
+ 10
+ 35
+ 13
+ 43
+ 16
+ 53
+ 20
+ 14
0
+ 18
0
+ 22
0
+ 27
0
+ 33
0
+ 12,5
-12,5
+ 15
-15
+ 18
-18
+ 21,5
-21,5
+ 26
-26
-4
-29
0
-30
0
-36
0
-43
0
-52
-6
-31
-12
-42
-15
-51
-18
-61
-22
-74
0
-60
0
-75
0
-90
0
-110
0
-130
+ 180
+ 80
+ 112
+ 50
+ 64
+ 25
+ 39
0
+ 31
-31
0
-62
-26
-88
0
-160
+ 220
+ 100
+ 134
+ 60
+ 76
+ 30
+ 46
0
+ 37
-37
0 -32
- 7 4 -106
0
-190
+ 260
+ 120
+ 159
+ 72
+ 90
+ 36
+ 54 + 43,5
0 -43,5
0 -37
- 8 7 -124
0
-220
+ 305
+ 145
+ 185
+ 85
+ 106
+ 43
+ 63
0
+ 50
-50
0 -43
-100 -143
0
-250
+ 355
+ 170
+ 215
+ 100
+ 122
+ 50
+ 72 + 57,5
0 -57,5
0 -50
-115 -165
0
-290
+ 400
+ 190
+ 240
+ 110
+ 137
+ 56
+ 81
0
+ 65
-65
0 -56
-130 -186
0
-320
+ 440
+ 210
+ 265
+ 125
+ 151
+ 62
+ 89
0
+ 70
-70
0 -62
-140 -202
0
-360
+ 480
+ 230
+ 290
+ 135
+ 165
+ 68
+ 97 + 77,5
0 -77,5
0 -68
-155 -223
0
-400
A11
C11
D10
+ 330
+ 270
+ 345
+ 270
+ 370
+ 280
+ 400
+ 290
+ 430
+ 300
+ 470
+ 310
+ 480
+ 320
+ 530
+ 340
+ 550
+ 360
+ 600
+ 380
+ 630
+ 410
+ 710
+ 460
+ 770
+ 520
+ 820
+ 580
+ 950
+ 660
+ 1030
+ 740
+ 1110
+ 820
+ 1240
+ 920
+ 1370
+ 1050
+ 1560
+ 1200
+ 1710
+ 1350
+ 1900
+ 1500
+ 2050
+ 1650
+ 120
+ 60
+ 145
+ 70
+ 170
+ 80
+ 205
+ 95
+ 240
+ 110
+ 280
+ 120
+ 290
+ 130
+ 330
+ 140
+ 340
+ 150
+ 390
+ 170
+ 400
+ 180
+ 450
+ 200
+ 460
+ 210
+ 480
+ 230
+ 530
+ 240
+ 550
+ 260
+ 570
+ 280
+ 620
+ 300
+ 650
+ 330
+ 720
+ 360
+ 760
+ 400
+ 840
+ 440
+ 880
+ 480
+ 60 + 60
+ 20
0
+ 78 + 75
+ 30
0
+ 98 + 90
+ 40
0
+ 120 + 110
+ 50
0
+ 149 + 130
0
+ 65
H11
+ 180 + 160
+ 80
0
+ 220 + 190
+ 100
0
+ 260 + 220
+ 120
0
+ 305 + 250
+ 145
0
+ 355 + 290
+ 170
0
+ 400 + 320
+ 190
0
+ 440 + 360
+ 210
0
+ 480 + 400
+ 230
0
The tolerance classes in bold print correspond to row 1 in DIN 7157; their use is preferable.
The tolerance zones J9/JS9, J10/JS10 etc. are all identical in size and are symmetrical to the zero line.
Tolerance class N9 may not be used for nominal dimensions ^ 1mm.
110
Linear dimensions
Tolerance
class
f
m
c
v
0.5
to 3
0.05
0.1
0.2
(fine)
(medium)
(coarse)
(very coarse)
Tolerance
class
f
m
c
v
(fine)
(medium)
(coarse)
(very coarse)
0.2
0.5
1.2
2.5
0.15
0.3
0.8
1.5
0.3
0.5
0.8
1.2
2
3
4
6
Angular dimensions
2
4
8
0.5
to 3
over 3
to 6
0.2
0.5
0 30'
0 20'
0 10'
0 5'
0.4
1 30'
3
1
2
0 30'
1
0 15'
0 30'
0 10'
0 20'
Tolerances in mm for
perpendicularity
symmetry
nomin al dim. ranges in mm nomin al dim. ranges in mm
(silorter ingle le>g)
(ishorter feature 3)
over over
over over over
over over over
300 1000 up to 100
300 1000 up to 100
300 1000
to
to
to
to
to
100
100
to
to
to
300 1000 3000
1000 3000
300 1000 3000
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.4
0.6
0.8
0.6
0.8
1
0.6
0.8
1
1
1
1.2
1.6
0.6
1.5
2
0.6
2
1.5
Tolerance
class
up to
10
0.02
0.05
0.1
H
K
L
1)
over 2000
to 4000
over
10
to
30
0.05
0.1
0.2
over
30
to
100
0.1
0.2
0.4
over
100
to
300
0.2
0.4
0.8
run
0.1
0.2
0.5
General tolerances apply to dimensions without individual tolerance entry. Drawing entry page 80.
Radial bearing
Inner ring (shaft)
Load
case
circumferential
loadx
Fit
Fundamental deviations
for shafts1* with
ballbearing roller bearing
transition
or
interference
fit
required
low
h, k
k, m
medium
j, k, m
k, m, n, p
high
m, n
n, p, r
point load
clearance
fit
allowed
arbitrarily
large
j, h, g, f
Load
case
Fit
Load
Fundamental deviations
for housings1* with
ball bearing | roller bearing
point load
clearance
arbitrarily
fit
large
allowed
circumferential
loadt
transition
or interference
fit
required
J, H, G, F
low
medium
M, N
K, M
high
N, P
Thrust bearing
Load type
Bearing construction
Combined
radial/axial load
ball bearing
roller bearing
H, G, E
* Fundamental tolerance grades: for shafts typically IT6, for bores typically IT7. If the smoothness and accuracy of
running must satisfy increased requirements, also smaller tolerance grades are specified.
Technical drawing: 3.
l n
111
and i
From row 1 C11/h9, D10/h9, E9/h9, F8/h9, H8/f7, F8/h6, H7/f7, H8/h9, H7/h6, H7/n6, H7/r6, H8/x8 or u8
From row 2
C11/h11, D10/h11, H8/d9, H8/e8, H7/g6, G7/h6, H11/h9, H7/j6, H7/k6, H7/s6
Clearance fits
Loose running fit
0j|H8_j
H8/d9
I d9
H8/e8
I e8
0 |H8 j
H8/f7
H7/f7
I n
E9/h9
Close running fit: Clearance allows for parts to be easily assembled by hand while maintaining location accuracy.
F8/h9
F8/h6
.
I
g6
H7/g6
H7 1
mm
H7/h6
h6
I h9 I
I E9 |
0
I h9 |
| F8 |
A
I h9 |
| F8 |
A
J G7 j
0
1 1
h6
H8/h9
n
I H8 I
0
H7/h6
h6 |
G7/h6
I. H8 I
H8/h9
I h9 |
0 - ^
nf
I f?
D10/h9
q iHSSi
o-MHLd
1 D10 I
I H7 I
I h9 |
h6
Transition fits
H7/j6
J6
Locational transition fit - clearance: For accurate location allowing more clearance than interference.
(i.e. gears on shafts)
not specified
n6
H7/n6
t H? | rt
1
oFnn
H7/r6
1
s6
H7/s6
Medium drive fit: For ordinary steel parts or shrink fits of light
sections. Tightest fit possible for cast iron,
(i.e. plain bearing bushings)
H8/u8
Force fit: For parts fitting that can withstand high mechanical
pressing force or shrink fitting,
(i.e. wheel on axle)
not specified
1 u8 |
0MJ
1x8 1
H8/x8
0
imJ
1)
2)
Extreme force fit: For parts that can only be assembled by stretching or shrinking.
(i.e. turbine blade on shaft)
Deviations from these fit recommendations should only be made in exceptional cases, e.g. installation of roller bearings.
The fits in bold print are tolerance combinations according to row 1. Their use is preferred.
112
Geometric tolerancing
Tolerances of geometry, orientation, location and run-out
Toleranced element
Identification
datum letterbox
Identification
datum letter
Datum element
\
datum letter
Symbol of
tolerance type
datum line
datum base
Datum is the
A
toleranced
element
datum line
with datum
arrow
center plane
midplane
axis
axis
E=
I1
surface
surface
line
surface
+line
surface
E
Indications in drawings of datum specifications and toleranced elements
Datum
Simple datum
l P
Example
Multiple datum
(two or three elements)
Common datum
j
1A
zzzzzzzz
/ |0O.O21A-B
h
H B. -
EYZZZZZA
Datum in feature
control frame
Examples
16+0.3/+0.1
0.1
0.05
2 ^
01OH7
_L 00.04
USfl
The center plane of the slot
must run symmetrically
to the center plane of the
exterior surface (tolerance
value 0.1 mm).
vO
cn''
-Jrsj
"Qi
"
o
l
v.*.,
II o
II CNI
SL
Representation
in drawing
(examples)
wi
Explanation
Z7 0.03
0.06
0.02
Straightness
Flatness
//
025h6.
Geometric tolerances
CJ
A U
i k
Indication in drawings
Geometric
characteristic
symbols
18P9
Tolerance zone
Technical drawing: 3.
l n
113
and i
Representation
in drawing
Tolerance zone
r \
Circularity
Cylindricity
Profile
of
line
Profile
of
surface
every cone
cross section
Orientation tolerances
//lo.oilA
//
Parallelism
datum plane B
I//100.031A
0
zzzzz
- I - L | 00.11A
_L
Perpendicularity
VZ&
'///*-fj_|0.03|A
Angularity
datum
plane A
114
Representation
in drawing
Tolerance zone
Tolerances of location
]-$-|0O.O5|A|B|C~l
Position
datum
plane A 0 / v
datum"
datum
^vO
rzzz
Concentricity
The center of the hole must lie in a circle of diameter t = 0.1 mm that is concentric to the datum
point A in the cross section.
Coaxial ity
Symmetry
Radial
circular
runout
/
/ 0.04 A
-T&
A
-
T&
I U 0.03 A-B
B
-T9L
datum line A - B
datum
plane A
zy o.i A
every
cross seci
every
cross section
every diameter
u
Total
axial
S E
runout
,datum
ine B
datum
point A
Runout tolerances
Total
radial
runout
'
datum
plane A
Axial
circular
runout
01
Bh
||0O.l|Ah
datum
line A
Table of Contents
Tungsten (W)
Zinc (Zn)
Tin (Sn)
19.27
7.13
7.29
3390
419.5
231.9
115
4.1
Materials
Material characteristics of solids
116
Material characteristics of liquids and gases . . . 117
Periodic table of the elements
118
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
120
121
126
128
132
135
136
139
143
Heat treatment
Iron-Carbon phase diagram
Processes
153
154
158
159
160
161
4.7
Foundry technology
Patterns, Pattern equipment
162
Shrinkage allowances, Dimensional tolerances . 163
4.8
164
166
168
169
172
4.9
173
174
175
177
178
179
182
184
186
188
190
192
196
197
116
Materials science: 4.
tels
Density
Material
Melting
temperature
Boiling
temperature
Latent
heat of
fusion
Thermal
conductivity
Mean
specific
heat
Specific
electrical
resistivity
Coefficient
of linear
expansion
Materials science: 4.
tels
Melting
temperature
Boiling
temperature
Latent
heat of
fusion
Thermalconductivity
Mean
specific
heat
Specific
electrical
resistivity
at 20 C at 0-100 C at 20 C
A
c
20
W/(m K) kJ/(kg K) Q mm2/m
126
0.04
1.3
48-58
0.14-0.18
0.49
14
0.7
0.51
Sodium (Na)
Steel, unalloyed
Steel, alloyed
C
kg/dm3
0.97
97.8
7.85 1500
7.9
* 1500
C
890
2500
kJ/kg
113
205
Sulfur (S)
Tantalum (Ta)
Tin (Sn)
2.07
16.6
7.29
113
2996
231.9
344.6
5400
2687
49
172
59
0.2
54
65.7
0.70
0.14
0.24
Titanium (Ti)
Tungsten (W)
Uranium (U)
4.5
19.27
19.1
1670
3390
1133
3280
5500
3800
88
54
356
15.5
130
28
0.47
0.13
0.12
1890
* 3380
343
907
101
0.50
2.1-2.9
0.4
0.2
419.5
31.4
0.06-0.17
113
Thermalconductivity
Specific
heat
Vanadium (V)
6.12
Wood (air dried) 0.20-0.72
Zinc (Zn)
7.13
Coefficient
of linear
expansion
0-100C
1/C or 1/K
0.000071
0.0000119
0.0000161
0.124 0.0000065
0.114 0.000023
0.42
0.055
0.0000082
0.0000045
* 0.000 042
0.000029
0.06
Liquid materials
Freezing
Ignition or melting
temp- temperature
erature
Density
Material
Boiling
temperature
at 20C
Q
kg/dm3
Alcohol 95 %
0.81
Diesel fuel
0.81-0.85
Ethyl ether (C2H5)20
0.71
&
C
520
220
170
C
-114
-30
-116
78
150-360
35
Fuel oil EL
Gasoline
Machine oil
* 0.83
0.72-0.75
0.91
220
220
400
-10
-30- -50
-20
> 175
25-210
>300
Mercury (Hg)
Petroleum
Water, distilled
357
13.5
-39
> 150
0.76-0.86 550
-70
100
1.003)
0
2)
at boiling temperature and 0.013 bar
1)
above 1000C
d
C
Latent
heat of
vaporization^
r
kJ/kg
854
628
377
at 20C
A
at 20 C
Coefficient
of volume
expansion
628
419
0.14
0.13
0.13
2.07
2.02
2.09
0.00096
0.001 1
0.00093
285
314
2256
3>
at4C
10
0.13
0.60
0.14
2.16
4.18
0.00018
0.001
0.00018
Gaseous materials
Density
Material
Specific
Melting
Boiling
Thermal
Coefficient
e/ei
Specific
heat
C
C
AMa
W/(m K)
-84
-82
Acetylene (C2H2)
0.905
0.021
0.81
3
Air
-220
-191
0.026
1.293
1.0
1.00
kg/m
0.024
0.77
-78
-33
Ammonia (NH3)
0.596
0.92
-0.5
0.016
0.62
Butane (C4H10)
2.70
2.088
-135
Carbon diox. (C02)
-57 5)
-78
0.016
0.62
0.82
1.98
1.531
0.63
Carbon monox. (CO)
-205
1.05
-190
0.025
0.96
0.75
1.25
0.967
Freon (CF2CI2)
5.51
4.261
-140
-30
0.010
0.39
Hydrogen (H2)
-253
0.09
0.07
-259
0.180
6.92
14.24
10.10
-162
Methane (CH4)
2.19
0.72
0.557
-183
0.033
1.27
1.68
Nitrogen (N2)
1.04
0.74
1.25
0.967
-210
-196
0.026
1.00
Oxygen (02)
1.43
1.106
-219
-183
0.026
1.00
0.91
0.65
Propane (C3H8)
2.00
1.547
-190
-43
0.018
0.69
1)
Specific gravity = density of a gas Q divided by the density of air QA.
2)
Coefficient of thermal conductivity
= the thermal conductivity
A of a gas divided by the thermal conductivity Aa of air.
3)
4)
5)
at constant pressure
at constant volume
at 5.3 bar
Q
1.17
Period
Main groups
IA
Main groups
Atomic number
(= proton number)
II A
1H
q a .
Relative atomic mass
Hydrogen
1.008
3
Letter symbols
Li
Lithium
O O O Q Q
22.989
Radioactive elements
.
0 0
in red, e.g. 0222
o . .
,
Synthetic elements
in parentheses, e.g. (261)
Be
III A
6.941
9.012
11 Na
12 Mg
liquid:
H
gaseous:
3
Sodium Magnesium
22.989
24.305
19 K
Potassium
39.102
20 Ca
Calcium
40.078
37 Rb
Rubidium
85.468
55
38
Sr
Strontium
87.620
Cs
56
Cesium
Ba
Barium
132.905 137.340
87 Fr
Francium
223
88
Ra
Radium
226.025
VB
VI B
22 Ti
23 V
Chromi- ManScanVanaTitanium
um
ganese
dium
dium
44.950 47.880 50.942 51.996 54.938
39
VIII B
VII B
Iron
71 Lu 72 Hf
73 Ta
TantaHafnium
lum
Nickel
Copper
Zinc
Rhodium
Palladium
Silver
Cadmium
8O
Tungsten
Gold
Meitne- * Element
rium* * Element
(266) * Element
* Element
* Element
Lanthanides
57-71
89 Ac 90 Th 91 Pa
Precious metals
Actinides
89-103
92 U
Samarium
10 Ne
Neon
10.811
12.011
14.007
15.999
18.998
20.179
13 Al
Aluminum
26.982
14
Si
15 P
Phosphorus
30.974
16 S
17
CI
18 Ar
Silicon
28.086
Gallium
GermaArsenic
nium
75.590 74.922
Indium
Tin
Sulfur
Chlorine
Mercury Titanium
Lead
Argon
35.453 39.948
32.066
34 Se 35 Br
36 Kr
SeleniBromine Krypton
um
78.960 79.904 83.800
52 Te
53 I
54 Xe
Antimo- TelluriIodine Xenon
ny
um
121.750 127.600 126.905 131.290
84 Po 85 At
PoloBismuth nium Astatine
208.980 210
210
174.967 178.490 180.948 183.850 186.207 190.200 192.200 195.080 196.967 200.590 204.383 207.200
103 Lr 104 Rf 105 Ha 106 Sg 107 Ns 108 Hs 109 Mt * Only name suggestions exist for elements 104 to 109.
Heavy metals1'
Noble gases
Cobalt
VIII A
Boron
86 Rn
Radon
222
57 La 58 Ce 59 Pr 60 Nd 61 Pm 62 Sm 63 Eu 64 Gd 65 Tb
Metalloids
Nonmetals
Halogens
II B
6C
Lutecium
IB
24 Cr 25 Mn 26 Fe 27 Co 28 Ni 29 Cu 30 Zn 31 Ga 32 Ge 33 As
21 Sc
VII A
4.002
IV B
VIA
Helium
black print
brown print
blue print
Transition elements
III B
VA
2 He
Beryllium
1)
IV A
Europium
66 Dy 67 HO
Holmium
68
Er
69 Tm 70 Yb
Erbium Thulium
Ytterbium
Plutonium
244
Americium Curium
(243)
(247)
Berkelium
(247)
Califor- EinsteiniMendeFermium
levium
nium
um
(257)
(251)
(252)
(258)
Nobelium
(260)
Materials science: 4.
tels
Chemical
designation
Acetone
Acetone
(propanone)
Acetylene,
Ethane
Various
surfactants
Acetylene
Aqueous
cleaner
Formula
Properties
(CH3)2CO
C2H2
coooso3so 3 co2
Carbon
tetrachloride
Cleaning
agent
Copper vitriol
Carbon
tetrachloride
Organic
solvent
Copper sulfate
Corundum
Aluminum oxide Al 2 0 3
Ethyl alcohol
Ethyl alcohol,
denatured
Hydrochloric
acid
Nitric acid
C 2 H 5 OH
Na2C03
Spirits of
ammonia
Sulfuric acid
Sodium
carbonate
Ammonium
hydroxide
Sulfuric acid
Table salt
Hydrochloric
acid
Nitric acid
Soda
CCI4
C n H 2 n +2
CuS04
HCI
HNO 3
NH 4 OH
H 2 SO 4
Use
Carbide
=C
Carbonate
=co3
Chloride
-CI
Hydroxide
-OH
Nitrate
Nitride
-N0 3
=N
Oxide
=0
Sulfate
= S04
Sulfide
=S
Description
Example
Designation
Formula
Silicon carbide
SiC
Calcium carbonate
CaC03
Sodium chloride
NaCI
Calcium hydroxide
Ca(OH)2
Potassium nitrate
Silicone nitride
KN03
SiN
Aluminum oxide
AI2O3
Copper sulfate
CuS04
Iron(ll) sulfide
FeS
pH value
Type of aqueous
solution
pH value
Concentration
H+ in mol/l
<
neutral
increasingly acidic
10
10-1
IO- 2
>
increasingly basic
8
1 0
-8
9
10-9
10
1 0
-io
11
12
10- 11 10- 12
13
10"13
14
1 0
-14
120
Influenced by
Steel manufacture
Composition
-carbon content
- alloying elements
Classification
Degree of purity
- non-metallic
inclusions
- phosphorus and
sulfur content
Subsequent processing
For example:
Forming: rolling, stamping,
drawing, bending etc.
Heat treatment: quenching and tempering, surface hardening etc.
Annealing: normalizing,
spheroidizing, full annealing etc.
Joining: welding, brazing etc.
Coating: galvanizing etc.
Deoxidation
rimmed,
semi-killed or
killed
cast
Classification1'
Quality steels
High-grade steels
Al
Bi
Co
Cu
Cr
0.30
0.10
0.30
0.40
0.30
Element
Mn
Mo
Nb
Ni
Pb
1.65
0.08
0.06
0.30
0.40
Element
Se
Si
Ti
V
W
0.10
0.60
0.05
0.10
0.30
Main grades
Example
R0900Mn
M390-50E
H400M
H180P
Example
42CrMo4
16MnCr5
34CrAINi7
X40Cr14
HS6-5-2-5
' The main grade "Basic steels" was omitted. All previous basic steels are produced as quality steels.
The stainless steels have their own group. They are alloy steels, so they are not classified as quality or high-grade
steels.
2)
Material numbers
Steel designations (page 122) or material numbers are used to identify and differentiate steels.
Material number
Designation
Designation of
steel (examples):
42CrMo4+N
1.7225+N
The material numbers consist of a 6-character number (five numeric characters and a decimal point). They are better suited for data processing than designations.
1)
2)
The material numbers remained unchanged with the conversion from DIN 17007 to DIN EN 10027-2.
C carbon, R m tensile strength
Values for tensile strength R m and for carbon content C are mean values.
122
Designation by application
The codes for steels are composed of main and supplemental symbols. Main symbols reflect the application or
chemical composition. Supplemental symbols depend on to the steel or product group.
Example: Pinion shaft
Main
symbol
Suppl.
symbol
S355JR+AR
Material
flIB
(examples)
Designation
1
DIN EN 10027-1
Steel group
DIN EN 10025-2
42CrMo4+N
Designation
according to the
chemical composition (page 124)
Material blank
Application
2)
235
360 2)
265 2)
360 2 '
500 2)
S550 2)
Application
Main symbol1'
Prestressing steels
Y
17703'
Flat rolled products for cold working
D
X52 4 '
Rail steels
R
260 5 '
Flat products of high-strength steels
H
C4006'
Magnetic steel, sheet and strip
M
400-50 7 '
To identify cast steel, the main symbol is preceded by the letter G.
6)
=> S235JR+N:
Steel-construction steel Re = 235 N/mm2, notch impact energy 27 J at-20C, normalized (+N)
Designation example:
I
Code letter for
machine construction
E 355 +AR
J
Yield strength for the
smallest product thickness
Standard
Hot-rolled unalloyed
structural steels
Steels for bright
steel products
DIN EN
10025-2
DIN EN
10277-1,2
Supplemental symbols
Supplemental symbols
Standard
Supplemental symbols
Surface type and finish
DIN EN
10130
DIN EN
10327
B improved finish
=> DC04 - A - m:
A typical finish
C best finish
Flat product for cold working (D), cold-rolled (C), steel type 04 (page 141), surface type A,
surface finish dull (m)
Standard
Supplemental symbols
DIN EN
10268
124
Main
symbol
Suppl.
symbol
Material
EB
(examples)
42CrMo4+N
Quenched and
tempered steel
Designation
Steel group
DIN EN 10027-1
DIN EN 10083-1
S355JR+AR
Designation
according to the
application
(page 122)
Material blank
DIN EN 10060
Alloy steels
cutting steels
manganese content < 1 %
average content of
except
unalloyed steels with a individual alloying element
free-cutting steels
manganese content > 1 %
above 5%
C15i
42CrMo4
X12CrNi18-8
Application examples:
Application examples:
unalloyed case-hardening
steels,
unalloyed quenched and
tempered steels,
unalloyed tool steels
free-cutting steels,
case-hardening alloy steels,
quenched and tempered
alloy steels,
tool alloy steels,
spring steels
1)
Application examples:
Stainless steels
corrosion-resistant,
heat-resistant, hightemperature steels
Tool steels:
High-speed steels
HS 10-4-3-10
~ r
Code letter
for high-speed
steel
Content of alloying elements
in percent in the following
order W-Mo-V-Co
10 - 10% tungsten (W)
4 - 4% molybdenum (Mo)
3 3% vanadium (V)
10^ 10% cobalt (Co)
To identify cast steel, the main symbol is preceded by the letter G; to identify powder metallurgical steel, the
main symbol is preceded by the letters PM.
C45E+S+BC: quenched
and tempered unalloyed steel, C content 0.45% , prescribed max. sulphur content (E), treated
for shearability (+S), blasted (+BC) (supplemental symbols on page 125, quenched & tempered steels)
Alloy steels, free-cutting steels, unalloyed steels with a manganese content > 1 %
Designation example:
18CrNiMo7-6 +TH+BC
Main symbols
18 code number for the carbon content
C m e d i u m = 18/100 = 0.18%
Cr, Ni, Mo alloying elements
(in the order of their mass portion)
7-6 Alloy contents
C r m e d i u m = 7/4 =1.75%
N i e d i u m = 6/4=1.5%
Mo = low content
m
=> 17CrNiMo6-4+TH+BC:
Supplemental symbols
Refer to such aspects as special applications, heat treatment states, quenching
stress, surface finish, degree
of deformation. The definition
of the supplemental symbols
varies according to the steel
group (page 125).
Case-hardening alloy steel, C content 0.17% (17), Cr content of 1.5% (6), Ni content
1.0% (4), low Mo content, treated for quenching stress (+TH) and blasted (+BC)
(supplemental symbols on page 125, case-hardening steels)
Standard
Supplemental symbols
DIN EN
10084
Hot-worked quenched
and tempered steels
DIN EN
10083-1
10083-2
DIN EN
10087
DIN EN
Bright steel products made of
case-hardening steel, quenched & 10277-1
tempered steel, free-cutting steel 10277,3..5
Seamless steel tubes made of
case-hardening steels and
quenched & tempered steels
DIN EN
10297-1
+SH peeled
+PL polished
+A soft-annealed
+AR as rolled
+N normalized
+FP treated for ferrite-pearlite microstructure and quenching stress
+QT quenched & tempered +TH treated for quenching stress
=> 16MnCr5+A: Case-hardening alloy steel, C content 0.16% (16), Mn content 1.25% (5), low Cr content, soft-annealed (+A)
Alloy steels, the content of at least one alloying element is above 5% (without high-speed steels)
| Designation example:
Main symbols
X4CrNi18-12 +2D
I
_JI
L
Supplemental symbols
Hot-rolled corrosion-resistant
sheets and strips
Cold-rolled corrosion-resistant
sheets and strips
Standard
DIN EN
10088-2
DIN EN
10088-2
hot-rolled products
not heat-treated, not descaled
heat treated, not descaled
heat treated, mechanically descaled
heat treated, pickled, smooth
ground
cold-rolled products
E, D, G as with hot-rolled products
like D but cold-rolled in addition
bright-annealed
hardened and tempered, scale-free
strain-hardened (with different
hardness stages), bright surface
=> X2CrNi18-9+AT+2D: Alloy steel, C content 0.02% (2), Cr content 18%, Ni content 9%, solution annealed (+AT),
cold-rolled (+2), hot-treated, pickled, smooth surface (D)
126
Steels - Overview
Subgroups,
delivery conditions
Areas of application
Product forms11
S | B | P | W
good machinability
weldable, except for S185
DIN EN cold and hot workable
10025-2 machinable
not weldable
cold and hot workable
Steels for
machine
construction
page 130
Welded constructions in steel
and machine construction,
simple machine parts
page 131
Weldments with high toughness, resistance to brittle
fracture and aging stability
in machine and steel construction
Alloy steels
page 131
High-strength weldments in
machine and steel constructions
Dynamically stressed
parts with wear-resistant
surface
in spheroidized condition
DIN EN
good machinability
Unalloyed high- 10083-2 hot workable
grade steels
hardenable (uncertain
results with unalloyed
DIN EN
quality steels)
Alloy steels
10083-3
page 133
Parts with high strength,
which are not hardened
Alloy steels
DIN EN
10083-2,
DIN EN
10083-3
in spheroidized condition
good machinability
hot workable
directly hardenable; possible
to harden individual workpiece areas, e.g. tooth faces
quenching and tempering of
workpieces before hardening
page 134
Parts with low core strength
but hardening of specific areas
Nitriding steels
Alloy steels
page 134
in spheroidized condition
good machinability
Spring steels
DIN EN
10270 cold or hot workable
Leaf springs, helical springs,
DIN EN high elastic formability
disc
springs, torsion bars
10089 high fatigue strength
Product forms:
S sheets, strips
B bars, e. g. flat, square and round bars
W wires
P profiles, e.g. channels, angles, tees
Unalloyed and
alloy steels
1>
page 132
in spheroidized condition
good machinability
DIN EN
hot workable
10084
after surface carburization
surface hardenable
Alloy steels
page 138
t e
Steels - Overview
Subgroups,
delivery conditions
Standard
Main characteristics
Areas of application
Product forms11
S | B | P | W
page 134
DIN EN
10087 optimal machinability
(short chipping)
DIN EN non-weldable
10087 might not respond uniformly
to heat treatment with case
hardening or quench
and tempering
DIN EN
10087
Free cutting
case hardened
steels
Free cutting
quenched and
tempered steels
page 135
Tool steels
Cold work
steels,
unalloyed
in spheroidized condition
good machinability
DIN EN non-cutting cold and hotISO 4957 workable
full hardening up to max.
10 mm diameter
Cold work
steels,
alloy
in spheroidized condition
machinable
workable
DIN EN hot
larger
hardening depth,
ISO 4957 higher case
strength, more wearresistant than unalloyed cold
work steels
Hot work
steels
in spheroidized condition
DIN EN machinable
workable
ISO 4957 hot
hardens over the entire
cross section
High-speed
steels
in spheroidized condition
DIN EN machinable
workable
ISO 4957 hot
hardens over the
entire cross section
DIN EN
10088-2,
DIN EN
10088-3
machinable
good cold-workable
weldable
heat treatment does not
increase strength
Austenitic
steels
DIN EN
10088-2,
DIN EN
10088-3
machinable
very good cold workability
weldable
no increase in strength
through heat treatment
Martensitic
steels
machinable
DIN EN in spheroidized condition
10088-2,
cold-workable
DIN EN with low carbon content
10088-3
weldable
heat treatable
1>
Product forms:
S sheets, strip
W wires
128
Materials science: 4.
Steels,
t e
Minimum
Steel group
requirements
Quenched and
tempered steels
Case hardened
heat
steels
treatment
with proven Quenched and
values
tempered steels
C10E
C15E
C35E
C60E
Case hardened
steels3'
no
or
Composition
Purity grade
Deoxi carbon (C) manganese (Mn) phosphorus (P) dation
silicon (Si)
sulfur (S)
DO2'
other alloying elements (L)
Designation
C10
C15
C35
C60
heat
treatment
page 128
yes
C in % Mn in % Si in % L1' in % P m a x i n %
0.10
0.45
0.15
0.45
0.40
0.045
0.35
0.65
0.63
0.60
0.75
Smax in
DO
FN
FN
FN
FN
0.10
0.15
0.35
0.60
0.45
0.45
0.65
0.75
0.045
FN
FN
FN
FN
0.40
0.035
0.035
0.63
Further requirements
1)
2)
3
(selection)
Properties influenced
by alloying elements
Tensile strength
Yield strength
Impact toughness
Wear-resistance
Hot workability
Cold workability
Machinability
High-temperature strength
Corrosion resistance
Hardening temperature
Hardenability, temperability
Nitridability
Weldability
increase
Alloy steels
O decrease
Al
Cr
Ni
o
o
o
Alloying elements
V
Mo
Co
Si
Mn
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
-
- no significant effect
Example: Gears, case hardened, rough parts drop forged, reliable heat treatment is required
Wanted: Suitable steels
Solution: Heat treatment (case hardening) provided -> case hardened steel, C < 0.2 %
The properties of unalloyed quality and high-grade steels are insufficient -* alloy steels
Increase of hot workability: Mn, V; increase of hardenability: Cr, Ni
Steel selection: 16MnCr5, 20MnCr5, 15NiCr13 (page 132)
S
-
o
o
o
o
130
Steel type
Material DO1'
Designation number
at
C
Tensile
strength
KV
R 2)
M
N/mm2
290-510
185
175
175
175
18
Non-weldable, simple
steel constructions
27
360-510
235
225
215
215
26
20
0
-20
27
410-560
275
265
255
245
23
FN
FN
FF
20
0
-20
27
470-630
355
345
335
325
22
FF
FF
-20
0
40
27
470-630
550-720
355
450
345
430
335
410
325
390
22
17
S185
1.0035
S235JR
S235J0
S235J2
1.0038
1.0114
1.0117
FN
FN
FF
20
0
-20
S275JR
S275J0
S275J2
1.0044
1.0143
1.0145
FN
FN
FF
S355JR
S355J0
S355J2
1.0045
1.0553
1.0577
S355K2
S450J0
1.0596
1.0590
E295
1.0050
FN
470-610
295
285
275
265
20
Axles, shafts,
bolts
E335
1.0060
FN
570-710
335
325
315
305
16
E360
1.0070
FN
670-830
360
355
345
335
11
Wear parts;
pinion gears, worms,
spindles
1)
Weldability
Cold workability
The additional C or GC symbol is appended to the designation of a steel type suitable for cold working (edge folding, roll forming, cold-drawing), and these types are also assigned their own material number.
Steel types for cold working
Material
Designation number
S235JRC
S235J0C
S235J2C
1.0122
1.0115
1.0119
1.0533
E295GC
11
Forming process:
Suit:able 1:or1'
F
Material
Designation number
S275JRC
S275J0C
S275J2C
1.0128
1.0140
1.0142
E335GC
1.0543
F edge folding:
R roll forming:
-
Suiltable i:or1'
F
Material
Designation number
S355J0C
S355J2C
S355K2C
1.0554
1.0579
1.0594
E360GC
1.0633
C cold drawing:
well-suited
-
Suiltable for1'
F
-unsuitable
Materials science: 4.
Steels,
t e
S275N
S275M
1.0490
1.8818
N
M
55
47
40
370-510
370-530
275
265
255
24
S355N
S355M
1.0545
1.8823
N
M
55
47
40
470-630
355
345
335
22
S420N
S420M
1.8902
1.8825
N
M
55
47
40
520-680
420
400
390
19
S460N
S460M
1.8901
1.8827
N
M
55
47
40
550-720
540-720
460
440
430
17
High toughness,
brittle fracture and
aging resistant;
weldments in machinery, crane and bridge
construction, automotive manufacturing,
conveyors
1)
2)
DC Delivery condition:
N normalized/normalizing rolled
M thermomechanically rolled
Values apply to V-notch longitudinal test pieces.
Assignment of steels: DIN EN 10025-3 S275N, S355N, S420N, S460N
DIN EN 10025-4 S275M, S355M, S420M, S460M
Technical properties
Weldability
Hot workability
Cold workability
Quenched and tempered struc. steels with higher yield strength (selection) cf. DIN EN 10025-6 (2005-02),
replaces DIN EN 10137-2
th Re ElongaYielcI strengi
Notch impact energy
2
Steel type
Tensile
N/mm
tion
for
in
I
iW i n J ait
al
thicki
strength
at
frac- Properties,
nesses
nomin
eraturej
in mm
Desig- 1
Material temp
ture application
Am 2
> in C
nation '
number
A
N/mm
>3
>50 > 100
-20
%
<50 < 100 < 150
0
-40
S460Q
1.8908
40
30
550-720
460 440 400
17
S460QL
1.8906
50
40
30
High toughness, high
resistance to brittle
S500Q
1.8924
40
30
17
590-770
500 480 440
fracture and aging
40
S500QL
1.8909
50
30
stability;
S620Q
1.8914
40
30
highly stressed weld700-890
620
580 560
15
S620QL
1.8927
50
40
ments in machinery,
30
crane and bridge
S890Q
1.8940
40
30
construction, auto940-1100
890 830
11
S890QL
1.8983
50
40
30
motive manufacturing,
conveyors
1.8941
S960Q
40
30
980-1150
960
10
1.8933
S960QL
50
40
30
-
1>
Q quenched and tempered; QL quenched and tempered, guaranteed minimum values for notched bar
impact values to -40 C
Technical properties
Weldability
Hot workability
Cold workability
132
HareJness HB in
delive
ry condition2'
Material
Designation1' number +A
+ FP
Re
A
D S
N/mm2
N/mm2
%
C10E
C10R
1.1121
1.1207
131
90-125
49-640
295
C15E
C15R
1.1141
1.1140
143
103-140
590-780
355
700-900
450
16
-
17Cr3
17CrS3
1.7016
1.7014
174
28Cr4
28CrS4
1.7030
1.7036
217
156-207
>700
16MnCr5
16MnCrS5
1.7131
1.7139
207
140-187
780-1080
780-1080
16NiCr4
16NiCrS4
1.5714
1.5715
217
156-207
>900
18CrMo4
18CrMoS4
1.7243
1.7244
207
140-187
>900
20MoCr3
20MoCrS3
1.7320
1.7319
217
145-185
>900
20MoCr4
20MoCrS4
1.7321
1.7323
207
140-187
880-1180
17CrNi6-6
22CrMoS3-3
1.5918
1.7333
229
217
156-207
152-201
>1100
15NiCr13
10NiCr5-4
1.5752
1.5805
229
192
166-207
137-187
20NiCrMo2-2
20NiCrMoS2-2
1.6523
1.6526
212
17NiCrMo6-4
1.6566
17NiCrMoS6-4 1.6569
20NiCrMoS6-4 1.6571
20MnCr5
20MnCrS5
18NiCr5-4
14NiCrMo13-4
18CrNiMo7-6
1)
2)
3>
4)
590
590
11
-
10
10
590
10
920-1230
>900
785
10
149-194
780-1080
590
10
229
149-201
149-201
154-207
> 1000
> 1000
>1100
1.7147
1.7149
217
152-201
980-1270
1.5810
1.6657
1.6587
223
241
229
156-207
166-217
159-207
>1100
1030-1390
1060-1320
685
785
10
8
Parts subject to
alternating stresses,
e.g. in gearbox;
gears, bevel and ring
gears, driving pinions,
shafts, propellershafts
Steel types with added sulfur, e.g. 16MnCrS5, have an improved machinability.
Delivery condition: +A spheroidized; +FP treated for ferrite-pearlite microstructure and hardness range
Strength values are valid for test pieces with 30 mm nominal diameter.
Hardening methods:
D Direct hardening: The workpieces are quenched directly from the carburizing temperature.
S Simple hardening: After carburizing the workpieces are usually left to cool at room temperature. For hardening they are reheated.
well-suited o conditionally suitable - unsuitable
Materials science: 4.
Steels,
t e
Steel typ)e
Designation
Material
number
T1'
1.1151
C35
C35E
C45
C45E
C55
C55E
C60
C60E
1.0501
1.1181
1.0503
1.1191
1.0535
1.1203
1.0601
1.1221
28Mn6
1.1170
+N
+QT
+N
+QT
+N
+QT
+N
+QT
+N
+QT
+N
+QT
410
470-620
520
600-750
580
650-800
640
750-900
670
800-950
600
700-850
210
290
270
380
305
430
330
490
340
520
310
490
210
270
320
305
370
330
420
340
450
310
440
25
22
19
19
16
16
12
14
11
13
18
15
25
19
20
16
17
12
15
11
14
18
16
38Cr2
46Cr2
1.7003
1.7006
+QT
700-850
800-950
600-750
650-800
450
550
350
400
15
14
17
15
34Cr4
37Cr4
1.7033
1.7034
+QT
800-950
850-1000
700-850
750-900
590
630
460
510
14
13
15
14
25CrMo4
25CrMoS4
1.7218
1.7213
+QT
800-950
700-850
600
450
14
15
41Cr4
41CrS4
1.7035
1.7039
+QT
900-1100
800-950
660
560
12
14
34CrMo4
34CrMoS4
1.7220
1.7226
+QT
900-1100
800-950
650
550
12
14
42CrMo4
42CrMoS4
1.7225
1.7227
+QT
1000-1200
900-1100
750
650
11
12
50CrMo4
51CrV4
1.7228
1.8159
+QT
1000-1200
900-1100
780
800
700
10
12
30NiCrMo16-6
34CrNiMo6
1.6747
1.6582
+QT
1080-1230
1100-1300
1080-1230
1000-1200
880
900
880
900
10
10
11
36NiCrMo16
30CrNiMo8
1.6773
1.6580
+QT
1250-1450
1100-1300
1050
900
10
20MnB5
30MnB5
1.5530
1.5531
+QT
750-900
800-950
27MnCrB5-2
39MnCrB6-2
1.7182
1.7189
+QT
900-1150
1050-1250
1)
800-1000
1000-1200
600
650
750
850
700
800
15
13
14
12
15
12
> Unalloyed quenched and tempered steels C35, C45, C55 and C60 are quality steels, steels C22E, C35E, C45E, C55E
and C60E are produced as high-grade steels.
For heat treatment of quenched and tempered steels, see page 156
134
Nitriding steels. Steels for flame and induction hardening, Free cutting steels
Nitriding steels (selection)
Steeltyp)e
SpherMaterial oidized
Designation number hardness
HB
Tensile
strength1'
Am
N/mm2
31CrMo12
31CrMoV9
1.8515
1.8519
248
248
980-1180
1000-1200
785
800
11
10
34CrAIMo5-10
40CrAIMo7-10
34CrAINi7-10
1.8507
1.8509
1.8550
248
248
248
800-1000
900-1100
850-1050
600
720
650
14
13
12
Elongation1
Yield
strength1* at fracture ' Properties,
EL
applications
Re
N/mm2
%
1)
Strength values: The values for tensile strength flm, yield strength Re and elongation at fracture EL apply to material thicknesses from 40 to 100 mm in the quenched and tempered condition.
For heat treatment of nitriding steels, see page 157
cf. DIN EN 100831>
Spheroidized
Material hardness
number
HB
C45E11)
C60E '
T2'
207
241
+QT
37Cr4
46Cr2
1.1191
1.1221
1.7034
1.7006
255
+QT
41Cr4
42CrMo4
1.7035
1.7225
255
+QT
YielcI strengith Re
Elonlominal gation at
in N/mim2 for n
thickrlesses iin mm fracture
Am
2
EL
< 16 > 16 >40
N/mm
%
<40 < 100
650-800
490 430 370
16
800-950
580 520 450
13
14
850-1000
750 630 510
800-950
650 550 400
13
Tensile
strength2'
900-1100
1000-1200
800
900
660
750
560
650
12
11
Properties,
applications
1)
The previous standard DIN 17212 was withdrawn without replacement. For flame and induction hardenable steels,
see quenched and tempered steels DIN EN 10083-3 (page 133). For unalloyed high-quality steels acc. to DIN EN
10083-2, hardness results are only assured if the steels are ordered with austenite grain size <; 5.
2)
T treatment condition: +QT quenched and tempered
For heat treatment of steels for flame and induction hardening, see page 156
Free cutting steels (selection)
11SMn30
11SMnPb30
1.0715
1.0718
+U
11SMn37
11SMnPb37
1.0736
1.0737
+U
10S20
10SPb20
1.0721
1.0722
1.0725
1.0726
1.0756
1.0762
1.0763
1.0727
1.0757
+U
107-156
360-530
+U
+U
+QT
+U
+QT
+U
+QT
128-178
154-201
430-600
520-680
600-750
630-800
700-850
590-760
650-800
Steel typ)e
Designation1'
15SMn13
35S20
35SPb20
44SMn28
44SMnPb28
46S20
46SPb20
1)
2
Material T2'
number
187-238
175-225
380
16
420
16
430
13
Steel types with lead additives, e.g. 11SMnPb30, have better machinability.
' T treatment condition: +U untreated; +QT quenched and tempered
All free cutting steels are unalloyed quality steels. It is not possible to guarantee a uniform response to case
hardening or quench and tempering.
For heat treatment of free cutting steels, see page 157
Materials science: 4.
Steels,
t e
Material
number
C45U
1.1730
190
800-830
180-300
C70U
1.1520
190
790-820
180-300
C80U
1.1525
190
780-810
180-300
C105U
1.1545
213
770-800
180-300
21MnCr5
1.2162
215
810-840
150-180
60WCrV8
1.2550
230
880-930
180-300
90MnCrV8
1.2842
220
790-820
150-250
102Cr6
1.2067
230
820-850
100-180
X38CrMo16
1.2316
250
1000-1040
650-700
40CrMnNiMo8-6-4 1.2738
235
840-870
180-220
45NiCrMo16
1.2767
260
840-870
X153CrMoV12
1.2379
250
X210CrW12
1.2436
255
950-980
55NiCrMoV7
1.2714
250
840-870
X37CrMoV5-1
1.2343
235
1020-1050 O, A 550-650
32CrMoV12-28
1.2365
230
1020-1050 O, A 500-670
X38CrMoV5-3
1.2367
235
HS6-5-2C
1.3343
250
1190-1230 O, A 540-560
HS6-5-2-5
1.3243
270
1210-1250 O, A 550-570
HS10-4-3-10
1.3207
270
1210-1250 O, A 550-570
HS2-9-2
1.3348
250
1190-1230 O, A 540-580
O, A 160-250
1020-1050 O, A 180-250
O, A 180-250
400-650
High-speed steels
1)
2)
Delivery condition: annealed
QM Quenching medium; W water; 0 oil; A air
For designations of tool steels, see page 125; for heat treatment of tool steels, see page 155
136
Stainless steels
Corrosion-resistant steels (selection)
Steel type
Designation
D 1)
DC2) Thickness
Material
number
mm
S| B
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm2
ElongaYield
tion at
strength fracture Properties,
applications
EL
N/mm2
%
Austenitic steels
X10CrNi18-8
X2CrNi18-9
1.4310
1.4307
X2CrNiN19-11
1.4306
1.4311
1.4301
X6CrNiTi18-10
1.4305
1.4541
X5CrNiMo17-12-2
1.4303
1.4401
1.4435
1)
Household containers,
chemical and food industry
< 160
500-700
175
45
< 8
< 75
520-700
500-700
220
200
45
< 160
460-680
180
45
< 8
< 75
550-750
540-750
290
270
40
< 160
550-760
270
40
< 8
< 75
540-750
230
210
45
< 160
< 75
< 160
500-700
500-700
500-750
190
190
190
45
35
35
< 8
< 75
520-720
500-700
220
200
40
< 160
< 8
< 160
500-700
500-650
500-700
190
220
190
40
45
45
< 8
< 75
530-680
520-670
240
220
40
45
s 160
500-700
200
40
< 8
< 75
540-690
520-670
240
220
40
< 160
500-700
200
40
< 8
== 75
550-700
520-670
240
220
40
45
< 160
500-700
200
40
< 8
< 75
580-780
300
280
35
40
< 160
580-800
280
35
< 8
< 75
580-780
290
270
35
40
< 160
580-800
280
35
< 8
< 75
530-730
520-720
240
220
35
< 160
700-800
200
35
cp
cp
cp
cp
cp
2>
45
cp
X1 NiCrMoCu25-20-5 1.4539
220
200
X2CrNiMoN17-13-5 1.4439
520-700
500-650
cp
X2CrNiMoN17-13-3 1.4429
< 8
< 75
X2CrNiMo18-14-3
C
P
cp
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 1.4571
X4CrNi18-12
40
40
X8CrNiS18-9
250
195
X5CrNi18-10
600-950
500-750
X2CrNi18-10
< 8
< 40
Materials science: 4.
Steels,
t e
Stainless steels
Corrosion-resistant steels (continued)
Steel type
D1)
DC 2)
Thickness
Material
number
Designation
mm
S| B
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm2
ElongaYield
tion at
strength fracture Properties,
applications
EL
N/mm2
%
Ferritic steels
X2CrNi12
1.4003
X6Cr13
1.4113
< 100
450-600
260
20
< 8
< 25
400-600
240
220
19
< 25
400-630
230
20
< 8
< 25
450-600
260
240
20
<
<
<
<
100
8
8
100
400-630
450-650
450-630
440-660
240
280
260
280
20
23
18
18
X6CrMo17-1
20
18
1.4016
1.4512
280
250
X2CrTi12
450-650
1.4000
X6Cr17
< 8
< 25
c
c
X3CrTi17
1.4510
< 8
450-600
260
20
Welded parts in
food industry
X2CrMoTi18-2
1.4521
cp
< 8
< 12
420-640
420-620
300
280
20
Bolts, nuts,
heaters
1)
2)
Martensitic steels
Steel type
Designation
D1)
Mat.
no.
DC2) Thickness
d
mm
S B
X12Cr13
1.4006
X20Cr13
1.4021
X30Cr13
1.4028
1.4034
X39CrMo17-1 1.4122
X3CrNiMo13-4 1.4313
1)
2)
3)
450
20
12
650-850
450
15
A
QT750
QT800
<700
750-950
550
15
10
800-950
600
12
<740
800-1000
600
15
10
< 160
A
QT800
QT850
850-1000
650
10
< 8
< 160
A
QT800
<780
850-1000
245
650
12
10
< 8
< 60
<900
900-1100
280
800
12
11
Shafts, spindles,
armatures up to 600C
< 75
A
QT900
QT900
900-1100
800
11
< 160
A
QT900
< 1100
900-1100
320
800
12
High toughness;
pumps, turbine wheels,
reactor construction
< 160
C
P
< 8
- 75
< 160
<=600
650-850
< 8
< 75
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm2
A
QT650
QT650
C
P
cp
X46Cr13
H 3)
< 8
< 75
Resistant to water
and steam, food industry
Axles, shafts,
pump parts,
propellers
Bolts, nuts, springs,
piston rods
138
Spring steel
Steel wire for springs, patented drawn
Wire
type
SL
SM
SH
DM
DH
0.8
2200
2480
2200
2480
2050
2310
2050
2310
1.0
1720
1980
2330
1980
2230
Wire diameter d in mm
all
types,
except
SL1>
1)
1.5
1600
1850
2090
1850
2090
2.0
1510
1740
1970
1740
1970
2.5
1460
1690
1900
1690
1900
3.4
1370
1590
1790
1590
1790
3.0
1410
1630
1840
1630
1840
4.0
1320
1530
1740
1530
1740
4.5
1290
1500
1690
1500
1690
5.0
1260
1460
1660
1460
1660
6.0
1210
1400
1590
1400
1590
8.0
1120
1310
1490
1310
1490
10.0
1060
1240
1410
1240
1410
15.0 20.0
-
1110
1270
1110
1270
1020
1160
1020
1160
(selection)
0.34 0.90 2.40 5.60 -
0.36 - 0.38 - 0.40 - 0.43 - 0.48 - 0.50 - 0.53 - 0.56 - 0.60 - 0.63 - 0.65 - 0.70
1.00 - 1.10 - 1.20 - 1.25 - 1.30 - 1.40 - 1.50 - 1.60 - 1.70 - 1.80 - 1.90 - 2.00
2.50 - 2.60 - 2.80 - 3.00 - 3.20 - 3.40 - 3.60 - 3.80 - 4.00 - 4.25 - 4.50 - 4.75
6.00 - 6.30 - 6.50 - 7.00 - 7.50 - 8.00 - 8.50 - 9.00 - 9.50 - 10.00
Wire
type
Applications
SL
SM
SH
DM
DH
Tension springs,
compression springs,
torsion springs in equipment and
machine construction,
wire type DH is also suitable
for shaped springs.
Designation
ph
cu
Wire
surfaces
Letter
symbol
phosphatize
copper coated
ZA
Wire
surfaces
Delivery forms
Steel type
Designation
38Si7
46Si7
55Cr3
54SiCr6
61SiCr7
51CrV4
Explanation
Hotrolled
1.5023
1.5024
1.7176
1.7102
1.7108
1.8159
1)
240
270
>310
310
310
>310
217
248
248
248
248
248
in coils or on spools
straightened rods in bundles
Properties, applications
Round bar EN 10089 - 20 x 8000 - 51CrV4+A: Bar diameter d = 20 mm, bar length / = 8000 mm,
steel type 51CrV4, delivery condition spheroidized (+A)
Wire diameter d in mm
(selection)
5.0 - 5.5 - 6.0 - 6.5 - 7.0 - 7.5 - 8.0 - 8.5 - 9.0 - 9.5 - 10.0 - 10.5 - 11.0 11.5 - 12.0 - 19.0 - 19.5 - 20.0 - 21.0 - 22.0 - 23.0 - 27.0 - 28.0 - 29.0 - 30.0
Delivery forms
directional rods
wire coils
139
Delivery form
Type
Fabrication method
Commercial formats
Sheet
Usually rectangular plates in
small format: w x /= 1000 x 2000 mm
med. format: w x l = 1250 x 2500 mm
large format: w x l = 1500 x 3000 mm
Sheet thicknesses: s = 0,14-250 mm
Strip
Process
Remarks
Hotrolled
Cold rolled
Cold-rolled
with surface
finishing
Standard
St | thickness range
DIN EN 10130
0.35-3 mm
DIN EN 10207
< 10 mm
DIN EN 10268
< 3 mm
DIN EN 10209
< 3 mm
DIN EN 10327
< 3 mm
DIN EN 10152
0.35-3 mm
DIN EN 10169-1
< 3 mm
DIN EN 10205
0.14-0.49 mm
DIN EN 10202
0.14-0.49 mm
sheet up to
25 mm thickness,
strip up to
10 mm thickness
high
yield strength
DIN EN 10025-6
3-150 mm
cold
workability
DIN EN 10149-1
1)
sheet up to
20 mm thickness
Designation
Type of
surface
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm 2
Yield
strength
Re
N/mm 2
Elongation
at fracture
EL
Lack
of flowlines 1 '
Properties,
Application
DC01
1.0330
A
B
270-410
140
280
28
DC03
1.0347
A
B
270-370
140
240
34
6 months
DC04
1.0338
A
B
270-350
140
210
38
6 months
DC05
1.0312
A
B
270-330
140
180
40
6 months
DC06
1.0873
A
B
270-350
120
180
38
unlimited
time
Delivery forms
(standard
values)
Sheet thicknesses: 0.25 - 0.35 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 1.0 - 1.2 - 1.5 - 2.0 - 2.5 - 3.0 mm
Metal sheet dimensions: 1000 x 2000 mm, 1250 x 2500 mm, 1500 x 3000 mm, 2000 x 6000 mm
strip (coils) up to approx. 2000 mm wide
1)
Explanation
In subsequent non-cutting processes, e. g. deep drawing, no flow lines appear within the given time
period. The time period begins at the agreed upon delivery date.
Surface finish
Type of surface
Description of the surface
Designation
3 months
Designation
Finish
Average roughness Ra
Defects, e.g. pores, scoring, may not influence the workability and the adhesion of surface coatings.
very smooth
smooth
m
r
matt
rough
Sheet EN 10130 - DC06 - B - g: Sheet metal from DC06 material, surface type B, smooth surface
=>
Material
number
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm 2
Yield
strength
Re
N/mm 2
HC180Y
HC220Y
HC260Y
1.0922
1.0925
1.0928
340-400
350-420
380-440
180-230
220-270
260-320
36
34
32
HC180B
HC220B
HC300B
1.0395
1.0396
1.0444
300-360
320-400
400-480
180-230
220-270
300-360
34
32
26
HC180P
HC260P
HC300P
1.0342
1.0417
1.0448
280-360
360-440
400-480
180-230
280-320
300-360
34
29
26
HC260LA
HC380LA
HC420LA
1.0480
1.0550
1.0556
350-430
440-560
470-590
260-330
380-480
420-520
26
19
17
Designation
Forms of
delivery,
surface
finishes
141
Material
number
Guarantee
for strength
values 1 '
Yield
strength
Ke
N/mm 2
Elongation
at fracture
EL
Lack
of flow
lines 2 '
Cold working
grade
22
1 month
machine seamed
quality
drawing grade
DX51D+Z
DX51D+ZF
1.0226+Z
1.0226+ZF
8 days
270-500
DX52D+Z
DX52D+ZF
1.0350+Z
1.0350+ZF
8 days
270-420
140-300
26
1 month
DX53D+Z
DX53D+ZF
1.0355+Z
1.0355+ZF
6 months
270-380
140-260
30
6 months
DX54D+Z
DX54D+ZF
1.0306+Z
1.0306+ZF
6 months
260-350
120-220
36
34
6 months
extra deep
drawing grade
DX56D+Z
DX56D+ZF
1.0322+Z
1.0322+ZF
6 months
270-350
120-180
39
37
6 months
special deep
drawing grade
Delivery forms
(standard
values)
Sheet thicknesses: 0.25 - 0.35 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 1.0 - 1.2 - 1.5 - 2.0 - 2.5 - 3.0 mm
Metal sheet dimensions: 1000 x 2000 mm, 1250 x 2500 mm, 1500 x 3000 mm, 2000 x 6000 mm
strip (coils) up to approx. 2000 mm wide
Explanation
1)
2)
Values for tensile strength ffm, yield strength Re and elongation at fracture EL are only
guaranteed within the given time period. The time period begins at the agreed upon delivery date.
In subsequent working, e.g. deep drawing, no flow lines appear within a given period. The time
period begins at the agreed upon delivery date.
+ZF
Composition, properties
Designation
Coatings of pure zinc, shiny flower patterned surface, protection against atmospheric corrosion
Abrasion resistant coating of a zinc-iron
alloy, uniform matt gray surface, corrosion
resistant like +Z
N
M
R
Structure
Zinc flowers in different sizes
Small zinc flowers, often not visible.
Uniform matt gray surface
(texture information only combined with
coating +ZF)
Type of surface
Designation
A
B
C
Meaning
No surface defects are allowed, e.g. dots, stripes
Improved surface compared to A
Best surface, high-quality painting must be assured on one side of the sheet
Sheet EN 10142 - DX53D+ZF100-R-B: Sheet of DX53D material, coating of
iron-zinc alloy with 100 g/m 2 , uniform matt gray (R) and improved (B) surface
Delivery forms
(standard values)
Standard
Page
Structural steels
Case hardened steels
Quenched and tempered steels
DIN EN 10025
DIN EN 10084
DIN EN 10083
130
132
133
DIN EN 10113
DIN EN 10137
131
131
Stainless steels
Pressure vessel steels
DIN EN 10088
DIN EN 10028
136
Properties and
applications of the
steels are given on
the pages for the
individual steel.
Sheet thicknesses: 0 . 5 - 1 . 0 - 1 . 5 - 2 . 0 - 2 . 5 - 3 . 0 - 3 . 5 - 4 . 0 - 4 . 5 - 5 . 0 - 6 . 0 - 8 . 0 - 1 0 . 0 - 1 2 . 0 - 1 5 . 0
18.0 - 20.0 - 25.0 mm. Sheet and strip dimensions see DIN EN 10142.
Sheet EN 10051 - 2,0 x 1200 x 2500: Sheet thickness 2,0 mm, sheet dimensions 1200 x 2500 mm
Steel EN 10083-1 - 34Cr4: Carbon quenched and tempered steel 34Cr4
142
x-
outside diameter
wall thickness
cross-sectional area
linear mass density
axial section
modulus
axial geometrical
moment of inertia
- y ,
-x
VJ
dx s
S
cm 2
m'
kg/m
Wx
cm 3
/x
cm 4
26.9 x 2.3
26.9 x 2.6
26.9 x 3.2
1.78
1.98
2.38
1.40
1.55
1.87
1.01
1.10
1.27
1.36
1.48
1.70
35 x 2.6
35 x 4.0
35 x 6.3
2.65
3.90
5.68
2.08
3.06
4.46
2.00
2.72
3.50
3.50
4.76
6.13
40x4
40x5
40x8
4.52
5.50
8.04
3.55
4.32
6.31
3.71
4.30
5.47
44.5 x 4
44.5x5
44.5 x 8
5.09
6.20
9.17
4.00
4.87
7.20
51 x 5
51 x 8
51 x 10
7.23
10.81
12.88
5.68
8.49
10.11
s
L1
Material,
annealing
condition
dx s
S
cm 2
m'
kg/m
cm 3
/x
cm4
54 x 5.0
54 x 8.0
54 x 10.0
7.70
11.56
13.82
6.04
9.07
10.85
8.64
11.67
13.03
23.34
31.50
35.18
60.3 x 8
60.3 x 10
60.3 x 12.5
13.14
15.80
18.77
10.31
12.40
14.73
15.25
17.23
19.00
45.99
51.95
57.28
7.42
8.59
10.94
70x8
70 x 12.5
70 x 16
15.58
22.58
27.14
12.23
17.73
21.30
21.75 76.12
27.92 97.73
30.75 107.6
4.74
5.53
7.20
10.54
12.29
16.01
82.5 x 8
82.5 x 12.5
82.5 x 20
18.72
27.49
39.27
14.70
21.58
30.83
31.85 131.4
42.12 173.7
51.24 211.4
7.58
10.13
11.25
19.34
25.84
28.68
88.9 x 10
88.9 x 16
88.9 x 20
24.79
36.64
43.29
19.46
28.76
33.98
44.09 196.0
57.40 255.2
62.66 278.6
Steel group
Quenched and
tempered steels
Annealing condition1*
+AR or +N
+N
+N or +QT
+QT
+A or +N
outside diameter
wall thickness
cross-sectional area
linear mass density
axial section
modulus
axial geometrical
moment of inertia
fex
L
f
KV
I
A~
I
S
d
-X
dx s
S
cm 2
m'
kg/m
Wx
cm 3
/x
cm4
dx s
10 x 1
10x 1.5
10x2
0.28
0.40
0.50
0.22
0.31
0.39
0.06
0.07
0.09
0.03
0.04
0.04
12 x 1
12 x 1.5
12x2
0.35
0.49
0.63
0.27
0.38
0.49
0.09
0.12
0.14
15x2
15x2.5
15x3
0.82
0.98
1.13
0.64
0.77
0.89
20 x 2.5
20x4
20x5
1.37
2.01
2.36
25x2.5
25 x 5
25x6
30x3
30x5
30x6
Materials,
surface,
annealing
condition
S
cm 2
m'
kg/m
cm3
/x
cm4
35x3
35x5
35x8
3.02
4.71
5.53
2.37
3.70
4.34
2.23
3.11
2.53
3.89
5.45
3.79
0.05
0.07
0.08
40x4
40 x 5
40 x 8
4.52
5.50
8.04
3.55
4.32
6.31
3.71
4.30
5.47
7.42
8.59
10.94
0.24
0.27
0.29
0.18
0.20
0.22
50x5
50x8
50 x 10
7.07
10.56
12.57
5.55
8.29
9.87
7.25
9.65
10.68
18.11
24.12
26.70
1.08
1.58
1.85
0.54
0.68
0.74
0.54
0.68
0.74
60 x 5
60x8
60 x 10
8.64
13.07
15.71
6.78
10.26
12.33
10.98
15.07
17.02
32.94
45.22
51.05
1.77
3.14
3.58
1.39
2.46
2.81
0.91
1.34
1.42
1.13
1.67
1.78
70 x 5
70 x 10
70 x 12
10.21
18.85
21.87
8.01
14.80
17.17
15.50
24.91
27.39
54.24
87.18
95.88
2.54
3.93
4.52
1.99
3.08
3.55
1.56
2.13
2.31
2.35
3.19
3.46
80x8
80 x 10
80 x 16
18.10
21.99
32.17
14.21
17.26
25.25
29.68
34.36
43.75
118.7
137.4
175.0
Steel group
Surfaces
Unalloyed structural
steels, free cutting
steels, quenched and
tempered steels
Annealing condition1'
+C or
+A or +N
Explanation
+ A spheroidized;
+C cold-rolled;
Designation,
dimensions
Square
tube
a = 40-400
fO
Rectangular
tubes
Standard,
page
DIN EN
10060
page 144
DIN EN
10059
page 144
DIN EN
10058
page 144
DIN EN
10210-2
page 151
DIN EN
10210-2
ax b =
50 x 25 to 500 x 300
mbm
page 151
Circular tube
DIN EN
Dx s =
21.3x2.3 to 1219x25
Equal leg
tee
b=h = 30-140
-c:
Steel channel
b
1
Z profile steel
h = 30 200
Equal leg
steel angle
a = 20-250
Unequal leg
steel angle
ax b =
3 0 x 2 0 to 200 x 150
Narrow I-beam
I series
h = 80-160
Wide I-beam
IPB series 1 '
10210-1
h = 100-1000
DIN EN
10055
page 146
Wide I-beam
light duty
IPBI series 1 '
h = 1001000
DIN
1026-1
h = 30-400
Designation,
dimensions
Cross-section
Wide I-beam
reinforced design
IPBv series 1 '
page 146
h = 100-1000
143
144
Material:
Type of delivery: Manufactured lengths (M) > 3 m < 13 m, normal lengths (F) < 13 m 100 mm,
precision lengths (E) < 6 m 25 mm, > 6 m < 13 m 50 mm
Diameter d
in mm
10 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 22 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 30 - 32 - 35 - 36 - 38 - 40 42 - 45 - 48 - 50 - 52 - 55 - 60 - 63 - 65 - 70 - 73 - 75 - 80 - 85 - 90 - 95 - 100 - 105 - 110 - 115 120 - 125 - 130 - 135 - 140 - 145 - 150 - 155 - 160 - 165 - 170 - 175 - 180 - 190 - 200 - 220 - 250
Diameter d
in mm
Limit
deviations
in mm
Diameter d
in mm
Limit
deviations
in mm
Diameter d
in mm
Limit
deviations
in mm
Diameter d
in mm
Limit
deviations
in mm
10-15
0.4
36-50
0.8
105-120
1.5
220
3.0
16-25
0.5
52-80
1.0
125-160
2.0
26-35
0.6
85-100
1.3
165-200
2.5
250
4.0
Round bar EN 10060 - 40 x 6000 F steel EN 10025-S235JR: Hot-rolled round steel bar,
d = 40 mm, normal length 6000 mm, made of S235JR
Material:
Type of delivery: Manufactured lengths (M) > 3 m < 13 m, normal lengths (F) < 13 m 100 mm,
precision lengths (E) < 6 m 25 mm, > 6 m < 13 m 50 mm
Length of side a
in mm
Limit
Limit
Limit
Length of side a
Length of side a
Length of side a
deviations
deviations
deviations
in mm
in mm
in mm
in mm
in mm
in mm
Limit
Length of side a
deviations
in mm
in mm
8-14
0.4
26-35
0.6
55-90
1.0
110-120
1.5
15-25
0.5
40-50
0.8
100
1.3
130-150
1.8
Square bar EN 10059 - 60 x 6000 F steel EN 10025-S235JR: Hot-rolled square steel bar,
a = 2.36 in, normal length 6000 mm, made of S235JR
w
Nominal width w
in mm
Nominal thickness s in mm
Type of delivery: Manufactured lengths (M) > 3 m < 13 m, normal lengths (F) < 13 m 100 mm,
precision length (E) < 6 m 25 mm, > 6 m < 13 m 50 mm
1 0 - 1 2 - 1 5 - 1 6 - 2 0 - 2 5 - 3 0 - 3 5 - 4 0 - 4 5 - 5 0 - 6 0 - 7 0 - 8 0 - 9 0 - 1 0 0 - 120-150
5 _ 6 - 8 - 10- 12- 1 5 - 2 0 - 2 5 - 3 0 - 3 5 - 4 0 - 5 0 - 6 0 - 8 0
Limit deviations
in mm
Nominal width w
in mm
Limit deviations
in mm
10-40
0.75
85-100
1.5
45-80
1.0
120
2.0
Nominal width w
in mm
Limit deviations
in mm
150
2.5
Limit deviations
in mm
Nominal thickness s in mm
Limit deviations
in mm
Nominal thickness s in mm
Limit deviations
in mm
5-20
0.5
25-40
1.0
50-80
1.5
Flat steel bar EN 10058-20 x 5 x 6000 F steel EN 10025-S235JR: Hot-rolled flat steel bar,
b = 20 mm, s = 5 mm, normal length 6000 mm, made of S235JR
145
Nominal dimensions
Width w, height h in mm
w
h
w
h
5
6
8
10
2-3
2-4
2-6
2-8
12
14
15
16
2-10
2-10
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-16
2-12
2-20
18
20
22
25
2-20
2-25
2-20
2-32
28
32
36
40
45
50
56
63
2-32
2-32
3-32
3-40
70
80
90
100
4-40
5-25
5-25
5-25
4
4.5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
2.5
3
3.2
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
7.5
8
8.5
9
9.5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
36
40
45
50
63
70
80
100
27
30
32
36
38
41
46
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
38
40
42
45
48
50
52
55
58
60
63
65
70
75
80
85
90
100
110
120
125
130
140
150
Side length s in mm
17
19
21
22
24
Diameter d in mm
(v j\
N
22
25
28
16
18
20
27
28
29
30
32
34
35
36
160
180
200
1 mm to 13 mm
> 13 mm to 25 mm
> 25 mm to 50 mm
0.5 mm
1 mm
5 mm
cf. DIN EN 10278(1999-12)
+SL
+PL
Delivery conditions
+C
+SH
cold drawn
peeled
Code
Finished condition
ground
polished
Round EN 10278 - 20 h9 x mill length 6000 EN 10277-3 - 44SMn28+C - Class 3: Round bright steel bar, d= 20 mm
Tolerance class h9, mill length 6000 mm, free cutting steel 44SMn28, cold drawn, surface quality class 3
Material groups and assigned delivery conditions
Material groups
+SH
+C
+C+QT
+QT+C
+A+SH
+A+C
Length in mm
Limit deviations in mm
Order information
500
length
Mill length
3000-6000
0/+200
Precision length
up to 9000
146
cross-sectional area
second moment of inertia
Material:
r= s
Designation
Dimensions
in mm
b=h
30
35
40
50
60
70
80
100
120
140
S
cm2
s=t
4
4.5
5
30
35
40
50
60
70
80
100
120
140
m
kg/m
1.77
2.33
2.96
4.44
6.23
8.23
10.7
16.4
23.2
31.3
2.26
2.97
3.77
5.66
7.94
10.6
13.6
20.9
29.6
39.9
9
11
13
15
Distance
For the bending axis
of the
y - y
x- x
xaxis
e
x
cmc
cnr
cm
cm
cm
0.80
0.85
1.72
0.87
0.58
1.23
0.99
0.90
3.10
1.04
1.84
1.12
1.29
5.28
2.58
1.39
12.1
3.36
2.42
6.06
1.66
23.8
5.48
12.2
4.07
1.94
44.4
8.79
22.1
6.32
73.7
12.8
37.0
9.25
2.22
17.7
179
24.6
88.3
2.74
29.7
366
42.0
179
3.28
47.2
660
64.7
330
3.80
Tracing dimension
accord, to DIN 997
Wi
mm
17
19
21
30
34
38
45
60
70
80
di
mm
4.3
4.3
6.4
6.4
8.4
w2
mm
17
19
22
30
35
40
45
60
70
75
11
11
13
17
21
Tee profile EN 10055 - T50 - S235JR: Structural steel tee, h = 50 mm, from S235JR
cross-sectional area
second moment of inertia
Material:
*
U
30 x 15
30
40x20
40
50x25
50
60
80
100
120
160
200
260
300
350
400
-c
r1
Designation
r ~ *
Dimensions
in mm
h
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
80
100
120
160
200
260
300
350
400
15
33
20
35
25
38
30
45
50
55
65
75
90
100
100
110
4.5
7
5.5
7
6
7
6
8
8.5
9
10.5
11.5
14
16
17.5
18
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7.5
8.5
10
10
14
14
12
10
18
11
25
20
35
46
64
82
115
151
200
232
276
324
S
cm 2
2.21
5.44
3.66
6.21
4.92
7.12
6.46
11.0
13.5
17.0
24.0
32.2
48.3
58.8
77.3
91.5
m'
kg/m
1.74
4.27
2.87
4.87
3.86
5.59
5.07
8.64
10.6
13.4
18.8
25.3
37.9
46.2
60.6
71.8
r 3 < 0,3 f
Distance
For the bending axis
to the
x- - X
/axis
y-- y
e
WX
/x
V
Wv
y
cm
cm 4
cm 3
cm 4
cm 3
0.52
2.53
1.69
0.38
0.39
1.31
6.39
4.26
5.33
2.68
0.67
3.97
1.14
7.58
0.86
14.1
1.33
7.05
6.68
3.08
0.81
16.8
6.73
2.49
1.48
26.4
1.37
10.6
9.12
3.75
0.91
31.6
10.5
2.16
4.51
19.4
1.45
106
26.5
6.36
41.2
1.55
206
29.3
8.49
364
60.7
1.60
43.2
11.1
1.84
925
116
85.3
18.3
2.01
1 910
191
148
27.0
371
317
2.36
4 820
Ml
2.70
8 030
535
495
67.8
734
2.40 12 840
570
75.0
102
2.65 20 350
1020
846
Channel DIN 1026 - U100 - S235J0: Steel channel, h = 100 mm, from S235J0
Tracing
dimensions
DIN 997
W-| c/i
mm mm
10
4.3
8.4
20
11
6.4
8.4
20
8.4
16
20 11
8.4
18
25 13
30 13
30 17
35 21
40 23
50 25
55 28
58 28
60 28
147
Steel angle
Unequal leg steel angle, hot-rolled (selection)
t
S
/
cross-sectional area
second moment of inertia
- "Cj
Material:
5
W3
Designation
Dimensions
in mm
a
b
t
L
30 x
30 x
40 x
40 x
45 x
50 x
60 x
60 x
60 x
65 x
70 x
75 x
75 x
80 x
80 x
80 x
100 x
100 x
100 x
100 x
100 x
100 x
100 x
100 x
120 x
120 x
120 x
125 x
125 x
125 x
135 x
135 x
150 x
150 x
150 x
150 x
150 x
150 x
150 x
150 x
200 x
200 x
20 x
20 x
20 x
25 x
3
4
4
4
30
30
40
40
30 x 4 45
30 x 5 50
30 x 5 60
40 x 5 60
40 x 6 60
50 x 5 65
50 x 6 70
50 x 6 75
50 x 8 75
40 x 6 80
40 x 8 80
60 x 7 80
50 x 6 100
50 x 8 100
65 x 7 100
65 x 8 100
65x 10 100
75 x 8 100
75x 10 100
75x 12 100
80 x 8 120
80x 10 120
80x 12 120
75 x 8 125
75x 10 125
75x 12 125
65 x 8 135
65x 10 135
75 x 9 150
75x 10 150
75x 12 150
75x 15 150
90x 12 150
90x 15 150
100 x 10 150
100 x 12 150
100 x 10 200
100 x 15 200
20
20
20
25
30
30
30
40
40
50
50
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
5
6
6
8
6
8
7
S
cm 2
m'
kg/m
1.43
1.86
2.26
2.46
2.87
3.78
4.28
4.79
5.68
5.54
6.89
1.12
1.46
1.77
1.93
2.25
2.96
3.36
3.76
4.46
4.35
5.41
Distances
to axes
e
e
x
y
cm
cm
8.77
9.94
12.3
10.6
13.0
15.4
8
10
12
8
10
12
15.5
19.1
22.7
15.5
19.1
22.7
65
65
75
75
75
75
8
10
15.5
19.1
9
10
12
15
12
15
10
12
19.6
21.7
25.7
31.7
27.5
33.9
24.2
28.7
29.2
43.0
12.2
15.0
17.8
12.2
15.0
17.8
12.2
15.0
15.4
17.0
20.2
24.8
3.83
3.92
4.00
4.14
4.23
4.31
4.78
4.88
5.26
5.30
5.40
5.52
21.6
26.6
19.0
22.5
23.0
33.8
5.08
5.21
4.81
4.89
6.93
7.16
90
90
100
100
100 10
100 15
0.44
0.55
0.60
1.16
2.05
2.51
2.63
6.11
7.12
0.88
0.96
1.52
44.9
57.6
59.0
8.73
11.4
10.7
7.59
9.61
28.4
1.05
1.13
89.9
116
13.8
18.2
15.4
19.7
3.89
5.08
1.51
1.55
1.63
1.87
1.95
2.03
1.87
1.95
2.03
1.68
1.76
1.84
113
127
154
133
162
189
226
276
323
247
302
354
16.6
18.9
23.2
19.3
23.8
28.0
27.6
34.1
40.4
1.34
1.42
1.57
1.61
1.69
1.81
2.12
2.23
2.34
2.42
2.01
2.22
291
356
455
501
588
713
627
761
553
651
1220
1758
37.6
42.2
51.0
64.1
77.6
90.2
80.8
98.1
114
67.6
82.1
95.5
45.2
54.7
77.9
85.6
99.6
119
171
205
199
233
210
299
0.68
0.97
1.01
1.25
1.25
1.21
1.29
11.2
12.7
15.6
13.5
16.6
19.7
0.62
0.81
1.42
1.47
40.5
52.0
3.59
3.89
5.78
9.36
8.71
11.4
cm 3
11.9
14.2
14.4
18.4
0.48
0.62
0.74
0.74
6
8
7
8
10
8
10
12
cm 4
1.91
2.86
4.07
4.25
5.03
5.14
7.01
8.01
10.4
1.25
1.59
50
50
65
65
65
75
75
75
80
80
80
75
75
75
6.89
9.01
9.38
cm 3
0.29
0.38
0.39
0.69
0.91
1.11
1.14
2.02
2.38
3.19
3.78
3.81
4.95
2.44
3.16
6.34
0.50
0.54
2.85
2.94
2.51
3.51
3.60
3.23
3.27
3.36
3.10
3.19
3.27
7.19
9.41
/x
cm 4
0.99
1.03
1.47
1.36
1.48
1.73
2.17
1.96
2.00
1.99
2.23
2.44
2.52
5.65
7.39
5.41
7.07
7.36
6.84
8.97
50
50
40
40
60
15.6
17.2
20.1
23.2
33.4
29.6
36.5
43.2
33.4
41.3
46.7
51.6
61.3
75.2
63.3
77.7
54.2
64.4
93.2
137
Tracing dimension
accord, to DIN 997
w-i
w2 w 3
di
mm mm mm mm
17
17
22
22
25
30
35
35
35
35
40
40
40
45
45
45
7.53
8.54
10.5
11.4
14.0
16.5
13.2
16.2
19.1
11.6
14.3
16.9
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
50
50
50
50
50
50
8.75
10.8
50
50
13.1
14.5
17.1
21.0
60
60
60
60
24.8
30.4
25.9
30.7
60
60
60
60
65
65
26.3
38.5
80
80
80
-
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
150
150
12
12
12
15
17
17
17
22
22
30
30
30
30
22
22
35
30
30
35
35
35
40
40
40
45
45
45
40
40
40
35
35
40
40
40
40
50
50
55
55
55
55
8.4
8.4
11
11
13
13
17
17
17
21
21
21
23
23
23
23
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
148
Steel angle
Equal leg steel angle, hot-rolled (selection)
Designation
Dimensions
in mm
20 x 3
25 x 3
25 x 4
30 x 3
30 x 4
35 x 4
40 x 4
40 x 5
45x4.5
60 x 60 x 5
60 x 60 x 6
60 x 60 x 8
20
25
25
30
30
35
40
40
45
50
50
50
60
60
60
65 x 65 x 7
70 x 70 x 6
70 x 70 x 7
65
70
70
20 x
25 x
25 x
30 x
30 x
35 x
40 x
40 x
45 x
50 x 50 x 4
50 x 50 x 5
50 x 50 x 6
75 x
75 x
80 x
80 x
90 x
90 x
90 x
90 x
100 x
100 x
100 x
120 x
75 x 6
75 x 8
80 x 8
80x 10
90 x 7
90 x 8
90 x 9
90x 10
100 x 8
100 x 10
100 x 12
120 x 10
75
75
80
80
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
120
120 x
130 x
150 x
150 x
150 x
160 x
180 x
200 x
200 x
120 x
130 x
150 x
150 x
150 x
160 x
180 x
200 x
200 x
12
12
10
12
15
15
18
16
20
120
130
150
150
150
160
180
200
200
200 x 200 x 24
250 x 250 x 28
200
250
=>
t
3
3
4
3
4
4
4
5
4.5
4
5
6
5
6
8
7
6
7
6
8
8
10
7
8
9
10
8
10
12
10
12
12
10
12
15
15
18
16
20
24
28
S
cm 2
1.12
1.42
1.85
1.74
2.27
2.67
3.08
3.79
3.90
3.89
4.80
5.69
5.82
6.91
9.03
8.70
8.13
9.40
8.73
11.4
12.3
15.1
12.2
13.9
15.5
17.1
15.5
19.2
22.7
23.2
27.5
30.0
29.3
34.8
43.0
46.1
61.9
61.8
76.3
90.6
133
m'
kg/m
Distances
to
axes
e
cm
0.882
1.12
1.45
1.36
1.78
2.09
2.42
2.97
3.06
3.06
3.77
4.47
4.57
5.42
7.09
0.598
0.723
0.762
0.835
0.878
1.00
1.12
1.16
1.25
1.36
1.40
1.45
1.64
1.69
1.77
6.83
6.38
7.38
1.85
1.93
1.97
6.85
8.99
9.63
11.9
9.61
10.9
12.2
13.4
12.2
15.0
17.8
18.2
2.05
2.14
2.26
2.34
2.45
2.50
2.54
2.58
2.74
2.82
2.90
3.31
45.8
59.1
72.2
87.5
92.6
104
21.6
23.6
23.0
27.3
33.8
36.2
48.6
48.5
59.9
3.40
3.64
4.03
4.12
4.25
4.49
5.10
5.52
5.68
5.84
7.24
368
472
624
71.1
104
x - xand v- v
/x = /y
cm 4
0.39
0.80
1.02
1.40
1.80
2.95
4.47
5.43
7.14
8.97
11.0
12.8
19.4
22.8
29.2
33.4
36.9
42.3
116
127
145
177
207
313
737
898
1100
1870
2340
2850
3330
7700
Wx= Wy
cm 3
0.28
0.45
0.59
0.65
0.85
1.18
Tracing dimension
accord, to DIN 997
l/Vl
mm
w2
mm
di
mm
1.55
1.91
2.20
2.46
3.05
3.61
12
15
15
17
17
18
22
22
25
30
30
30
4.45
5.29
6.89
7.18
7.27
8.41
35
35
35
35
40
40
8.41
11.0
12.6
15.4
14.1
16.1
17.9
19.8
19.9
24.6
29.1
36.0
42.7
50.4
56.9
67.7
83.5
95.6
145
162
199
235
433
40
40
45
45
50
50
50
50
55
55
55
50
50
50
60
80
23
23
23
23
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
80
90
105
25
25
28
60
60
60
65
65
65
70
75
105
105
115
135
150
150
150
150
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
4.3
6.4
6.5
8.4
8.4
11
11
11
13
13
13
13
17
17
17
21
21
21
149
cross-sectional area
second moment of inertia
Delivery type:
Dimensions in mm
IPE
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
270
300
360
400
500
600
s
4.1
4.4
4.7
5.0
5.3
5.6
6.2
6.6
7.1
8.0
8.6
10.2
12.0
b
55
64
73
82
91
100
120
135
150
170
180
200
220
Material:
Designation
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
270
300
360
400
500
600
t
5.7
6.3
6.9
7.4
8.0
8.5
9.8
10.2
10.7
12.7
13.5
16.0
19.0
S
cm 2
10.3
13.2
16.4
20.1
23.9
28.5
39.1
45.9
53.8
72.7
84.5
116
156
r
7
7
7
9
9
12
15
15
15
18
21
21
24
m'
kg/m
8.1
10.4
12.9
15.8
18.8
22.4
30.7
36.1
42.2
57.1
66.3
90.7
122
I-profile DIN 1025 - S235JR - IPE 300: Medium width I-beams with parallel flange surfaces,
h = 300 mm, from S235JR
cross-sectional area
second moment of inertia
Material:
Delivery type:
3 s
Designation
x -
v-- y
IPBI
100
120
140
160
180
200
h
96
114
133
152
171
190
b
100
120
140
160
180
200
s
5
5
5.5
6
6
6.5
t
8
8
8.5
9
9.5
10
S
cm 2
21.2
25.3
31.4
38.8
45.3
53.8
m'
kg/m
16.7
19.9
24.7
30.4
35.5
42.3
'x
cm 4
349
606
1030
1670
2510
3690
wx
cm 3
72.8
106
155
220
294
389
cm 4
134
231
389
616
925
1340
Wv
cm 3
26.8
38.5
55.6
76.9
103
134
240
280
320
230
270
310
240
280
300
7.5
8
9
12
13
15.5
76.8
97.3
124.0
60.3
76.4
97.6
7760
13670
22930
675
1010
1480
2770
4760
6990
231
340
466
400
500
600
800
390
490
590
790
300
300
300
300
19
23
25
28
159.0
198.0
226.0
286.0
125.0
155.0
178.0
224.0
45070
86970
141200
303400
2310
3550
4790
7680
8560
10370
11270
12640
571
691
751
843
11
12
13
15
I-profile DIN 1025 - S235JR - IPBI 320: Wide I-beams light duty from S235JR
Designation according to EURONORM 53-62: HE 320 A
Tracing dimension
accord, to DIN 997
W-1
56
66
76
86
100
110
w2
w3
d-i
13
17
21
23
25
25
94
110
120
35
45
45
25
25
28
120
120
120
130
45
45
45
40
28
28
28
28
150
Wide I-beams
Wide I-beams (IPB), hot-rolled (selection)
S
I
cross-sectional area
second moment of inertia
Material:
Designation
IPB
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
280
320
400
500
600
800
2 S
Dimensions in mm
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
280
320
400
500
600
800
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
280
300
300
300
300
300
s
6
6.5
7
8
8.5
9
10
10.5
11.5
13.5
14.5
15.5
17.5
t
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
20.5
24
28
30
33
S
cm 2
26.0
34.0
43.0
54.3
65.3
78.1
106
131
161
198
239
270
334
m'
kg/m
20.4
26.7
33.7
42.6
51.2
61.3
83.2
103
127
155
187
212
262
Tracing dimension
according to DIN 997
Wi
w3
vv2
dy
mm mm mm mm
56
13
66
17
21
76
86
23
100
25
110
25
35
96
25
110
45
25
45
28
120
45
28
120
120
45
28
45
28
120
130
40
28
I-profile DIN 1025 - S235JR - IPB 240: Wide I-beam with parallel flange faces, h = 240 mm, made of S235JR,
designation according to EURONORM 53-62: HE 240 B
HEEFT3
cross-sectional area
second moment of inertia
Material:
x
ttt
Designation
IPBv
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
280
320
400
500
600
800
Wj
Dimensions in mm
120
140
160
180
200
220
270
310
359
432
524
620
814
106
126
146
166
186
206
248
288
309
307
306
305
303
i>
i rrr
N W2
s
12
12.5
13
14
14.5
15
18
18.5
21
21
21
21
21
t
20
21
22
23
24
25
32
33
40
40
40
40
40
S
cm 2
53.2
66.4
80.5
97.1
113
131
200
240
312
319
344
364
404
m'
kg/m
41.8
52.1
63.2
76.2
88.9
103
157
189
245
250
270
285
317
Tracing dimension
according
to DIN 997 in mm
Wi
di
w2 w3
60
13
17
68
21
76
86
23
100
25
110
25
25
100
35
45
25
116
47
126
28
47
28
126
45
28
130
45
28
130
42
132
28
I-profile DIN 1025 - S235JR - IPBv 400: Wide I-beam, reinforced version, made of S235JR, designation
according to EURONORM 53-62: HE 400 M
151
Tubes
Material:
Wall
thickness
s
mm
3.0
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
3.0
4.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
4.0
5.0
Linear
mass density
m'
kg/m
3.41
4.39
3.68
4.35
5.29
6.90
8.42
3.41
4.39
4.35
5.64
6.90
8.42
9.87
8.78
10.8
Cross
section
S
cm 2
4.34
5.59
4.68
5.54
6.74
8.79
10.7
4.34
5.59
5.54
7.19
8.79
10.7
12.6
11.2
13.7
k
cm 4
9.78
11.8
17.5
20.2
36.2
45.4
53.3
13.6
16.5
26.5
32.8
68.2
80.3
90.5
140
167
for torsion
y-- y
X-- X
/p
crrr\
4.89
5.91
6.99
8.08
12.1
15.1
17.8
3.96
4.72
6.95
8.52
11.1
12.9
14.2
18.5
21.7
cm
9.78
11.8
17.5
20.2
36.2
45.4
53.3
5.94
7.08
13.9
17.0
22.2
25.7
28.5
46.2
54.3
c m 44
15.7
19.5
27.5
32.1
56.9
72.5
86.4
13.5
16.6
29.2
36.7
55.2
65.1
73.4
113
135
crrr
7.10
8.54
10.2
11.8
17.7
22.0
25.7
6.51
7.77
11.2
13.7
18.9
21.9
24.2
31.4
36.9
40x40
80x80
40x20
60 x 4 0
80x40
100x40
Wall
thickness
s
mm
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
Linear
mass density
m'
kg/m
1.68
2.03
2.36
2.31
2.82
3.30
4.20
7.07
9.22
11.3
1.68
2.03
2.36
4.25
5.45
6.56
5.19
6.71
8.13
6.13
7.97
9.70
Cross
section
S
cm 2
2.14
2.59
3.01
2.94
3.59
4.21
5.35
9.01
11.7
14.4
2.14
2.59
3.01
5.41
6.95
8.36
6.61
8.55
10.4
7.81
10.1
12.4
y-- y
Wx
cm 3
1.81
2.10
2.34
3.47
4.11
4.66
5.54
22.0
27.8
32.9
2.02
2.35
2.60
8.46
10.3
11.8
13.1
16.2
18.8
18.5
23.1
27.1
cm4
2.72
3.16
3.50
6.94
8.22
9.32
11.1
87.8
111
131
1.34
1.54
1.68
13.4
16.3
18.4
17.6
21.5
24.6
21.7
26.7
30.8
/ p
crrr
1.81
2.10
2.34
3.47
4.11
4.66
5.54
22.0
27.8
32.9
1.34
1.54
1.68
6.72
8.14
9.21
8.78
10.7
12.3
10.8
13.3
15.4
c m 44
4.54
5.40
6.15
11.3
13.6
15.8
19.4
140
180
218
3.45
4.06
4.57
29.3
36.7
42.8
43.9
55.2
65.0
59.0
74.5
87.9
crrr
2.75
3.20
3.58
5.23
6.21
7.07
8.48
33.0
41.8
49.7
2.36
2.72
3.00
11.2
13.7
15.6
15.3
18.8
21.7
19.4
24.0
27.9
a length of side
Steel wire
d
mm
m'
kg/1000 m
d
mm
m'
kg/1000 m
d
mm
m'
kg/1000 m
0.10
0.062
0.55
1.87
1.1
1.2
0.16
0.158
0.60
2.22
0.20
0.247
0.65
2.60
0.25
0.385
0.70
3.02
0.30
0.555
0.75
0.35
0.755
0.40
d
mm
m'
kg/m
d
mm
m'
kg/m
d
mm
m'
kg/m
7.46
0.055
18
2.00
60
22.2
8.88
0.099
20
2.47
70
30.2
1.3
10.4
0.154
25
3.85
80
39.5
1.4
12.1
0.222
30
5.55
100
61.7
3.47
1.5
13.9
0.395
35
7.55
120
88.8
0.80
3.95
1.6
15.8
10
0.617
40
9.86
140
121
0.986
0.85
4.45
1.7
17.8
12
0.888
45
12.5
150
139
0.45
1.25
0.90
4.99
1.8
20.0
15
1.39
50
15.4
160
158
0.50
1.54
1.0
6.17
2.0
24.7
16
1.58
55
18.7
200
247
a
mm
m'
kg/m
a
mm
m'
kg/m
a
mm
m'
kg/m
SW
mm
m'
kg/m
SW
mm
m'
kg/m
SW
mm
m'
kg/m
0.283
20
3.14
40
12.6
0.245
20
2.72
40
10.9
0.502
22
3.80
50
19.6
0.435
22
3.29
50
17.0
10
0.785
25
4.91
60
28.3
10
0.680
25
4.25
60
24.5
12
1.13
28
6.15
70
38.5
12
0.979
28
5.33
70
33.3
14
1.54
30
7.07
80
50.2
14
1.33
30
6.12
80
43.5
16
2.01
32
8.04
90
63.6
16
1.74
32
6.96
90
55.1
18
2.54
35
9.62
100
78.5
18
2.20
35
8.33
100
68.0
Page
Profile
Page
Tee
EN 10055
146
Tubes
EN 10210-2
151
EN 10056-1
148
Tubes
EN 10219-2
151
EN 10056-1
147
DIN 1798
169
Steel channel
DIN1026-1
146
DIN 1796
169
I-beams IPE
DIN 1025-5
149
DIN 1769
170
I-beams IPB
DIN 1025-2
149
DIN 1795
171
DIN 1025-1
150
Aluminum channel
DIN 9713
171
I-beams, narrow
1
Area mass density ' (Table values for steel with density g = 7.85 kg/dm 3 )
Sheet
s sheet thickness
s
mm
m"
kg/m 2
s
mm
m"
kg/m 2
s
mm
m"
kg/m 2
s
mm
0.35
2.75
0.70
5.50
1.2
9.42
0.40
3.14
0.80
6.28
1.5
0.50
3.93
0.90
7.07
0.60
4.71
1.0
7.85
m"
kg/m 2
s
mm
m"
kg/m 2
s
mm
m"
kg/m 2
3.0
23.6
4.75
37.3
10.0
78.5
11.8
3.5
27.5
5.0
39.3
12.0
94.2
2.0
15.7
4.0
31.4
6.0
47.1
14.0
110
2.5
19.6
4.5
35.3
8.0
62.8
15.0
118
Table values can be calculated for a different material by taking a ratio of its density to the density of steel
(7,85 kg/dm 3 ).
Example: Sheet metal with s = 4.0 mm of AIMg3Mn (density 2.66 kg/dm 3 ). From the table: m" = 31.4 kg/m 2 for steel.
AIMg 3 Mn: m" = 31.4 kg/m 2 2.66 kg/dm3/7.85 kg/dm 3 = 10.64 kg/m 2
Materialscience: 4.
t e n
C |A
1536(
1500
liquid (liquid iron with carbon in solution)
1300
liquid +
austenite crystals
liquid +
cementite
austenite
cu
3 1100
ro
CD
a
E 1000
0
~ 911
9001
aust.%^
+ferrite
723
700
/
g
ferrite + fe'
pear lite gl
ferrite
pearlite + grain
boundary
cementite
0.5
hypoeutectoid 0.8
723 C line
pearlite, grain boundary
cementite + ledeburite
(+ graphite)1'
hypereutectoid 2.06
cementite + ledeburite
(+ graphite)1'
4.3
5
%
6
carbon content -
I
eutectic mixture
eutectoid
steel
1)
ledeburite + cementite
(+ graphite)1'
cast iron
For iron types with a C content over 2.06% (cast iron) and additional Si content, a portion of the unalloyed precipitates in the form of graphite.
Heat treatment of steel
1100 I
homogenizing anneal
C '
1000 -
austenite
900
I
k_
.0
800
00
0.1 %C
ferrite
0.45% C
ferrite + pearlite
0.8 %C
pearlite
1.3% C
pearlite + grain
boundary cementite
CD
a
E 700
a)
temperature range:
temperature
ranges:
154
M a t e r i a l s c i e n c e : 4.
Short description
Normalizing
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ annealing ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
Spheroidizing
^annealing ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
Heat to annealing temperature, hold at tem- To improve cold workability, machinperature or cycle anneal
ability and hardenability;
- spheroidizing of the cementite
can be used for all steels
Cool down to room temperature
b
<>
/
"TTTT => "
\j_jj annealinc
Hardening
f \jc
/
I fD
n
3"
5
/ I tempering
i
t
<
c_b
ro
e_l
O
CL
e
<u
time
t
Q
c3_J
o
trQ
_
CJL
E
<U /
/
o>/
sy
1 cz
I
IS tempering
F
time
Case hardening
t
OJ
OJ
Q.
QJ
carburizin g hardening
^^|tempering
time1
Nitriding
t
ai
3
n
o
aj_
CL
E>
a
1)
annealing
For annealing
and
time
tempering temperatures, quenching media and attainable hardness values, see pages 155 to 157.
M a t e r i a l s c i e n c e : 4.
Steel typ<
Designation
Material
number
Surlface hlardni3SS
in HF
after
after
Case
Full
Cooling
harden. harden, hard- temjDerincj2> at
medium
depth 1) up to 0 ening 100 200 300
mm
mm
C C C
Hardenii n g
TemperaHot
Tempe- Hardness
working
ture
HB
rature
temperature
max.
C
C
C
C45U
C70U
1.1730
1.1520
1000-800
680-710
207
183
800-820
790-810
water
3.5
3.0
15
10
58
64
58
63
54
60
48
53
C80U
C90U
C105U
1.1525
1.1535
1.1545
1050-800
1050-800
1000-800
680-710
192
207
212
780-800
770-790
770-790
water
3.0
10
64
64
65
64
64
64
60
61
62
54
54
56
1)
2)
Hot
Material
working
number temperature
C
Spheroidizing
tempe- Hardn.
rature
HB
max.
C
Hardening
tempecooling
rature1 > medium
C
water
air
68
63
64
61
56
59
48
58
40
58
36
56
96-980
780-800
830-850
oil
64
65
65
62
62
62
60
56
57
58
50
50
56
42
43
52
40
40
229
229
900-920
1010-1030
nil
Oil
62
53
60
52
58
52
53
53
48
54
46
52
269
302
277
1200-1220
1220-1240
1180-1200
oil,
hot
bath, air
64
66
66
62
61
62
62
61
62
62
62
61
65
66
68
65
67
69
105V
X153CrMoV12
1.2834
1.2379
incn
OCA
710-750
800-850
212
255
780-800
1010-1030
X210CrW12
90MnCrV8
102Cr6
1.2436
1.2842
1.2067
1050-850
800-840
680-720
710-750
255
229
223
60WCrV8
X37CrMoV5-1
1.2550
1.2343
1050-850
1100-900
710-750
750-800
HS6-5-2C
HS10-4-3-10
HS2-9-1-8
1.3343
1.3207
1.3247
1100-900
770-840
1)
2)
The austenitizing time is the holding time at hardening temperature, which is approx. 25 min for cold work steels
and approx. 3 min. for high-speed steels. Heating is performed in stages.
High-speed steels are tempered at least twice at 540-570C. Holding time at this temperature is at least 60 min.
C10E
C15E
1.1121
1.1141
17Cr3
16MnCr5
1.7016
1.7131
20MnCr5
20MoCr4
1.7147
1.7321
17CrNi6-6
15NiCr13
1.5918
1.5752
830-870
840-880
20NiCrMo2-2
18CrNiMo7-6
1.6523
1.6587
860-900
830-870
1)
2)
End <
quench test
Hardn(JSS HRC at dista nee of:
Hard<3ning
water
880-920
860-900
780-820
880-980
150-200
oil
880
870
47
47
44
46
40
44
33
41
870
910
49
49
49
47
48
44
46
41
870
880
47
48
47
48
46
48
45
47
920
860
49
48
00 00
Designation
45
48
42
48
The same values apply to steels with controlled sulfur content, e.g. C10R, 20MnCrS5.
For steels with normal hardenability (+H) at a distance of 1.5 mm from the end face.
156
M a t e r i a l s c i e n c e : 4.
NormalizMaterial
ing
number
C
C22E
1.1151
880-940
C35E1)
C40E
C45E1'
1.1181
1.1186
1.1191
860-920
850-910
840-900
870
870
850
48-58
51-60
55-62
33-55
35-59
37-61
C50E1)
C55E1'
C60E
1.1206
1.1203
1.1221
830-890
825-885
820-880
850
830
830
56-63
58-65
60-67
28Mn6
1.1170
850-890
850
45-54
860-900
water
550-660
22-49
25-53
28-57
840-880
830-870
820-860
water or oil
550-660
44-61
47-63
50-65
31-58
33-60
35-62
810-850
810-850
810-850
oil or water
550-660
42-53
37-51
840-880
water or oil
540-680
Surface
Material hardness 6 '
HRC
number
38Cr2
46Cr2 1)
1.7003
1.7006
54
34Cr4
37Cr4 1)
41Cr4 1)
1.7033
1.7034
1.7035
51
53
25CrMo4
34CrMo4
42CrMo41>
1.7218
1.7220
1.7225
50CrMo41>
51CrV4
39NiCrMo3
1.7228
1.8159
1.6510
1.6582
34CrNiMo6
1.6580
30CrNiMo8
36NiCrMo16 1.6773
C
850
37-54
40-59
-35
22-39
830-870
820-860
oil or water
oil or water
850
49-57
51-59
53-61
45-56
48-58
50-60
27-44
31-48
32-52
830-870
825-865
820-860
water or oil
oil or water
oil or water
540-680
850
44-52
49-57
53-61
40-51
48-57
52-61
27-41
34-52
37-58
840-900
830-890
820-880
water or oil
oil or water
oil or water
540-680
850
58-65
57-65
52-60
57-64
56-64
50-59
48-62
48-62
43-56
820-870
820-870
820-850
oil
oil
oil or water
540-680
850
50-58
48-56
50-57
50-58
48-56
48-56
48-57
46-55
47-55
830-860
830-860
865-885
oil or water
oil or water
air or oil
540-660
540-660
550-650
53
58
540-680
38MnB5
1.5532
850
52-60
50-59
31-47
840-880
water/oil
400-600
33MnCrB5-2
1.7185
880
48-57
47-57
41-54
860-900
oil
400-600
1)
2)
3)
4>
5)
6)
DIN 17212 "Steels for flame and induction hardening" was withdrawn without replacement. More information about
steels for flame and induction hardening on page 133 and 134 in the section "Quenched and tempered steels".
Identical values apply to the high-grade steels C35 to C60 and steels with controlled sulphur content, such as C35R.
Hardenability requirements: +H normal hardenability
The lower temperature range applies to quenching in water, the higher range to quenching in oil.
The tempering time is 60 minutes minimum.
Minimum surface hardness of the steel after flame or induction hardening.
Hardenability and hardening depth of quenched and tempered steels (scatter bands)
^ C 3 5 E
37Cr4 + HH
51CrV4+HH
37Cr4 + HL
51CrV4 + HL
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
hardening depth
M a t e r i a l s c i e n c e : 4.
Designation
24CrMo13-6
31CrMo12
32CrAIMo7-10
31CrMoV9
33CrMoV12-9
34CrAINi7-10
41CrAIMo7-10
40CrMoV13-9
34CrAIMo5-10
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Material
number
1.8516
1.8515
1.8505
1.8519
1.8522
1.8550
1.8509
1.8523
1.8507
>efore nitridiing
He<3t treatment fc
Quenchling and tem pering
Spheroid,
Hardiening
Tempering
temperature
Tempera- Quenching temperamedium
ture 2 '
ture3'4'
C
C
C
870-970
650-700
870-930
650-700
650-750
870-930
680-720
870-930
oil or
580-700
680-720
870-970
water
650-700
870-930
870-930
650-750
870-970
680-720
870-930
650-750
Nitrocarburizing
Hardness5'
HV1
-
800
-
800
500-600
570-650
950
950
-
950
Material
number
Carburizing
temperature
C
1.0721
1.0722
1.0725
880-980
Quenching
medium 1 '
780-820
Quenching
medium 1 '
Quench, and
temp, temperat.
C
Tempering
temperature 2 '
C
water, oil,
emulsion
150-200
Material
number
Hardness
temperature
C
1.0726
35S20
860-890
water
35SPb20
1.0756
or oil
36SMn14
1.0764
850-880
36SMnPb14
1.0765
540-680
38SMn28
1.0760
850-880
38SMnPb28
1.0761
oil or
44SMn28
1.0762
water
44SMnPb28
1.0763
840-870
46S20
1.0757
1)
The choice of quenching medium depends on the shape of the workpiece.
3)
Values apply to diameters 10 < d < 16.
Am
N/mm 2
A
%
430
630-780
15
14
460
460
2)
700-850
15
480
16
490
12
Solution
Artificic Jl aging
Type of age annealing temperature holding
2
hardening ' temperature
time
h
C
C
Natural
aging time
days
Designation
Material
number
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
Al
Cu4MgSi
Cu4SiMg
MgSi
MgSilMgMn
Zn4,5Mg1
Zn5,5MgCu
Si7Mg 1)
2017
2014
6060
6082
7020
7075
420001'
1)
2)
T4
T6
T4
T6
T6
T6
T6
5-8
500
525
100-300
8-24
5-8
-
470
525
Age ha rdened
Am
N/mm 2
A
%
390
420
130
280
210
545
250
12
8
15
6
12
8
1
158
Cast iron materials are referenced either with a designation or a material number.
Example:
Cast iron with flake graphite, tensile strength Rm = 300 N/mm 2
Designation
EN-GJL-300
Material number
EN-JL1050
Material designations
Material designations have up to six characters without spaces,
beginning with EN (European standard) and GJ (cast iron; I iron)
Designation example:
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ
L
L
S
M
M
M
L
350
HB155
350-22U
450-6
360-12
HV600(XCr14)
XNiCuCr 15-6-2
B
W
A
Material numbers
Material numbers have seven characters without spaces,
beginning with EN (European standard) and J (iron; I iron)
Designation examples:
EN
EN
EN
J
J
J
L
S
M
2
1
1
0 4
0 2
13
7
2
0
159
Examples/
Standard
material number
Tensile
strength
N/mm
Properties
Application examples
I Cast iron
with flake
graphite (gray
iron)
DIN EN
1561
EN-GJL-150
(GG-15)1>
EN-JL1020
100
to
450
with spheroidal
graphite
DIN EN
1563
EN-GJS-400
(GGG-40)1'
EN-JS1030
350
Wear stressed
workpieces;
clutch parts, fittings,
engine/motor construction
ISO
16112/JV/300
300
Automotive parts,
engine/motor construction,
gear housings
Heat treatment and controlled cooling produce bainite and austenite for high
strength and good toughness
with vermicular
graphite
ISO
16112
to
900
to
500
bainitic
cast iron
DIN EN
1564
EN-GJS-800-8
EN-JS1100
800
to
1400
wear-resistant
castings,
white cast iron
DIN EN
12513
EN-GJN-HV350
EN-JN2019
> 1000
Wear-resistant due to
martensite and carbides,
also alloyed with Cr and Ni
DIN EN
1562
EN-GJMW-350
(GTW-35)1>
EN-JM1010
270
to
570
not
decarburized
(blackheart)
DIN EN
1562
EN-GJMB-450
(GTS-45)1'
EN-JM1140
300
to
800
for general
use
DIN EN
102933*
GE240
1.0446
380
to
600
with improved
weldability
DIN EN
102934'
G20Mn5
1.6220
430
to
650
quenched and
tempered
cast steel
DIN EN
102935>
G30CrMoV6-4
1.7725
500
to
1250
Chains,
plating
for pressure
vessels
DIN EN
10213
GP280GH
1.0625
420
to
960
stainless
DIN EN
10283
GX6CrNi26-7
1.4347
450
to
1100
heat-resistant
DIN EN
10295
GX25CrNiSi18-9
1.4825
Turbine parts,
furnace grates
I Cast steel
1)
400 to
550
2)
previous designation
ADI -Austempered Ductile Iron
4)
> Replaces DIN 1681
Replaces DIN 17182 5 ) Replaces DIN 17205
160
Material science: 4.
t o
Cast iron with flake graphite, Cast iron with spheroidal graphite
Cast iron with flake graphite (gray iron)
TyiDe
Designation
Wall
thickness
Material
number
mm
Tensile strength
Rm
N/mm 2
Type
Designation
Material
number
Wall
thickness
Brinell
hardness
mm
HB30
EN-GJL-100
EN-GJL-150
EN-JL1010
EN-JL1020
5-40
2.5-300
100-200
150-250
EN-GJL-HB155
EN-GJL-HB175
EN-JL2010
EN-J L2020
40-80
40-80
max. 155
100-175
EN-GJL-200
EN-GJL-250
EN-JL1030
EN-JL1040
2.5-300
5-300
200-300
250-350
EN-GJL-HB195
EN-GJL-HB215
EN-JL2030
EN-JL2040
40-80
40-80
120-195
145-215
EN-GJL-300
EN-GJL-350
EN-JL1050
EN-JL1060
10-300
10-300
300-400
350-450
EN-GJL-HB235
EN-GJL-HB255
EN-JL2050
EN-JL2060
40-80
40-80
165-235
185-255
Properties
Good castability and machinability, vibration damping, corrosion resistance, high compression strength,
good sliding properties.
Application examples
Machine frames, bearing housings, plain bearings, pressure-resistant parts, turbine housings.
Hardness as characteristic property provides information on the machinability.
Material
number
Tensile
strength
Rm
N/mm 2
Yield
strength
ftp 0.2
N/mm 2
Elongation
EL
%
EN-GJS-350-22-LT1'
EN-GJS-350-22-RT2'
EN-GJS-350-22
EN-JS1015
EN-JS1014
EN-JS1010
350
350
350
220
220
220
22
22
22
EN-GJS-400-18-LT1)
EN-GJS-400-18-RT2'
EN-GJS-400-18
EN-GJS-400-15
EN-JS1025
EN-JS1024
EN-JS1020
EN-JS1030
400
400
400
400
250
250
250
250
18
18
18
15
EN-GJS-450-10
EN-GJS-500-7
EN-GJS-600-3
EN-JS1040
EN-JS1050
EN-JS1060
450
500
600
310
320
370
10
7
3
EN-GJS-700-2
EN-GJS-800-2
EN-GJS-900-2
EN-JS1070
EN-JS1080
EN-JS1090
700
800
900
420
480
600
2
2
2
1)
2)
Properties,
application examples
Good machinability,
low wear resistance;
housings
Good machinability,
average wear resistance;
fittings, press frames
Good surface hardness;
gears, steering and clutch parts,
chains
EN-GJS-400-18: Cast iron with spheroidal (nodular) graphite, minimum tensile strength R m = 400 N/mm 2 ;
elongation at fracture EL = 18%
Hardness HB as identifying characteristic
Type
Designation
Material
number
Tensile
strength
N/mm
Yield
strength
Rp 0.2
N/mm 2
Brinell
hardness
HB
Rm2
EN-GJS-HB130
EN-GJS-HB150
EN-GJS-HB155
EN-JS2010
EN-JS2020
EN-JS2030
350
400
400
220
250
250
< 160
130-175
135-180
EN-GJS-HB185
EN-GJS-HB200
EN-GJS-HB230
EN-JS2040
EN-JS2050
EN-JS2060
450
500
600
310
320
370
160-210
170-230
190-270
EN-GJS-HB265
EN-GJS-HB300
EN-GJS-HB330
EN-JS2070
EN-JS2080
EN-JS2090
700
800
900
420
480
600
225-305
245-335
270-360
Properties,
application examples
By specifying hardness values the purchaser can better adapt process parameters to machining of the cast parts.
Applications as above.
EN-GJS-HB130: Cast iron with spheroidal (nodular) graphite, Brinell hardness HB 130, maximum hardness
161
Material
number
Yield
strength
ftp 0.2
N/mm 2
Elongation
Brinell
at fracture hardness
EL
HB
%
Properties,
application examples
EN-JM1010
EN-JM1030
EN-JM1040
EN-JM1050
350
400
450
550
220
260
340
4
5
7
4
230
220
250
250
EN-GJMW-360-12 EN-JM1020
360
190
12
200
EN-JM1110
300
EN-GJMB-350-10
EN-GJMB-450-6
EN-GJMB-500-5
EN-GJMB-550-4
EN-JM1130
EN-JM1140
EN-JM1150
EN-JM1160
350
450
500
550
EN-GJMB-600-3
EN-GJMB-650-2
EN-GJMB-700-2
EN-GJMB-800-1
EN-JM1170
EN-JM1180
EN-JM1190
EN-JM1200
600
650
700
800
-150
200
270
300
340
10
6
5
4
-150
150-200
165-215
180-230
390
430
530
600
3
2
2
1
195-245
210-260
240-290
270-320
=s> EN-GJMB-350-10: Non-decarburizing annealed malleable cast iron, Rm = 350 N/mm 2 , EL = 10%
1)
Designation
ftm
N/mm 2
ftp 0.2
N/MM 2
EL
Notch
impact
energy
Kv
J
Tensile
strength
Type
Material
number
Yield Elongation
strength
Properties,
application examples
GE2002)
GE2402'
GE3002'
1.0420
1.0445
1,0558
380-530
450-600
600-750
200
240
300
25
22
15
27
31
27
G17Mn5 3)
G20Mn5 2>
GX4CrNiMo16-5-13)
1.1131
1.6220
1.4405
450-600
480-620
760-960
240
300
540
24
20
15
70
60
60
Improved weldability;
composite welded structures
G28Mn6 2)
G10MnMoV6-3 3)
G34CrMo43)
1.1165
1.5410
1.7230
520-670
600-750
620-770
260
500
480
18
18
10
27
60
35
G32NiCrMo8-5-43)
GX23CrMoV12-13)
1.6570
1.4931
850-1000
740-880
700
540
16
15
50
27
11
2)
DIN 17182 "Steel cast types with improved weldability and toughness" was withdrawn without replacement.
3)
normalized
quenched and tempered
Material
number
Elongation
Notch
Yield
Tensile
impact
Properties,
strength 1 ' strength1' at fracture
energy Kv application examples
EL
ftm
ftp 0.22
J
N/mm
%
N/mm 2
GP240GH
G17CrMo5-5
1.0619
1.7357
420
490
240
315
22
20
27
27
GX8CrNi12
GX4CrNiMo16-5-1
1.4107
1.4405
540
760
355
540
18
15
45
60
1)
162
Material science:
^ooo oe)
Characteristics
Wood
Plastic
Metal
Epoxy resins or
polyurethane with
fillers
approx. 750
approx. 10000
approx. 150000
Quality classes1'
W1 2 ) , W2, H3
P1 2) , P2
M1 2 ) , M2
Surface quality
Sand paper
60-80 grit
Ra = 12.5 pm
Ra = 3.2-6.3 pm
Type of material
Application
11
Classification system for the manufacture and use of patterns, pattern equipment and core boxes, according to
their application, quality and service life: W wood; P plastic; M metal
2>
best grade
mm
Hand nlolding
Molding sand
Molding sand
clay bonded
chem. bonded
Machine
molding
Hand nlolding
Molding sand
Molding sand
clay bonded
chem. bonded
Machine
molding
-30
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
> 30-80
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
>80-180
3.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
>180-250
3.5
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
>250-1000
>1000-4000
Cast steel
Nodular
cast
iron
Gray
cast
iron
Malleable
iron
Heavy
metal
castings
Light
alloy
castings
blue
purple
red
gray
yellow
green
red stripes
yellow stripes
blue
blue
framed in black
red
red
blue
red
black
yellow stripes
Risers
Material science:
163
Cast iron
with flake graphite
1.0
Shrinkage
allowance in %
Cast steel
2.0
0.5
2.3
1.2
1.2
austenitic
2.5
CuSnZn, Zn alloys
1.3
1.6
CuSn alloys
1.5
0.5
Cu
1.9
R
F
CT
T
RMA
/? = F + 2 RMA + 772
Casting tolerances
Nominal
dimensions
in mm
12
13
14
15
16
-10
0.52 0.74
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.8
4.2
> 10-16
0.54 0.78
1.1
1.6
2.2
3.0
4.4
> 16-25
0.58 0.82
1.2
1.7
2.4
3.2
4.6
10
12
> 25-40
0.64 0.9
1.3
1.8
2.6
3.6
11
14
>40-63
0.70
1.0
1.4
2.0
2.8
4.0
5.6
10
12
16
>63-100
0.78
1.1
1.6
2.2
3.2
4.4
11
14
18
>100-160
0.88
1.2
1.8
2.5
3.6
10
12
16
20
1.0
1.4
2.0
2.8
4.0
5.6
11
14
18
22
1.1
1.6
2.2
3.2
4.4
6.2
12
16
20
25
0.64 0.90
1.2
1.8
2.6
3.6
10
14
18
22
28
1.4
2.0
2.8
11
16
20
25
32
>160-250
> 250-400
> 400-630
>630-1000
1.0
Advantages and
disadvantages
Casting material
0.00-0.10
40-320
Machine
molding
small to medium
dimensionally accurate, GJL, GJS, GS,
GJM, Al alloys
sized parts, volume good surface
0.00-0.06
20-160
Vacuum
molding
medium to large
parts, volumes
0.00-0.08
40-160
Shell
molding
small parts,
large volumes
0.00-0.06
20-160
Investment
casting
small parts,
large volumes
complex parts,
high mold costs
GS, Al alloys
0.00-0.04
10-80
Die casting
small to medium
sized parts,
large volumes
dimensionally accurate
even with thin walls,
fine-grain structure,
high investment costs
hot chamber:
Zn, Pb, Sn, Mg
cold chamber:
Cu, Al
0.00-0.04
10-40
Method
Application
Hand
molding
large castings,
small lots
1)
The ratio of largest relative deviation to the nominal dimension is called the relative dimensional accuracy.
164
Material science: 4.
a l s
Material
number
Main characteristics
Product shapes1'
S | B | T
Pure aluminum
Al
(Al content
>99.00%)
AW-1000
to
AW-1990
(Series1000)
page 166
AIMg
AW-3000
cold workable
to
weldable and solderable
AW-3990
good machinability in
(Series 3000) work-hardened condition
Compared to Series 1000:
higher strength
improved lye resistivity
AW-5000
good cold workability with high
to
work hardening
limited weldability
AW-5990
(Series 5000) good machinability in work-hardened condition and with higher
alloy contents
weather and saltwater resistant
AIMgMn
AlCuMg
AlZnMgCu
1)
2)
page 166
page 167
AW-6000
to
AW-6990
(Series 6000)
2)
2)
2)
AW-2000
to
AW-2990
(Series 2000)
high-strength values
good high-temperature strength
limited corrosion resistance
limited weldability
good cutting machinability in
heat treated condition
2)
2)
2)
AW-7000
highest strength of all Al alloys
to
best corrosion resistance
in artificially aged condition
AW-7990
(Series 7000) limited weldability
good cutting machinability in
heat treated condition
Material science: 4.
165
a l s
The designations apply to wrought products, e.g. sheet, bars, tubes, wires and for wrought parts.
Designation examples:
EN
AW
EN AW - Al 99,98
EN AW -AI MqISiCu - H111
European standard
Aluminum wrought products
Al 99.98
MglSiCu
Meaning of the
material conditions
manufactured
condition
Wrought products
without secondary
operations
spheroidized
0
01
02
To restore worka
bility after cold
working
Work
hardened
H12
to
H18
H111
H112
Heat
treated
T1
T2
T3
Solution annealed, stress relieved and naturally age hardened, not redressed
Quenched like T1, cold worked and naturally aged
Solution heat treated, cold worked and naturally age hardened
T3510
T3511
T4
T4510
T6
T6510
T8
T9
Material numbers apply to wrought products, e.g. sheet, bars, tubes, wires and for wrought parts.
Designation examples:
EN
AW
EN AW - 1050A
EN AW-5154
European standard
Aluminum wrought products
Alloy groups
Number
Group
Number
Group
1
2
pure Al
AlCu
5
6
AIMg
AIMgSi
3
4
AIMn
AISi
7
8
AlZn
other
Alloy modifications
Type number
0
1-9
Original alloy
Alloys that deviate
from the original alloy
166
Material science: 4.
a l s
Deli very
forr ns2>
R
Al 99.5
(1050A)
Material
DC >
condition 4 '
3
Thickness/
diameter
mm
Tensile
strength
firm
N/mm 2
Yield Elong. at
strength fracture Applications,
EL
Examples
N/mm 2
%
P
z
z
F, H112
O, H111
H14
< 200
<80
<40
> 60
60-95
100-135
> 20
>70
25
25
6
O, H111
0,5-1,4
1,5-2,9
3,0-5,9
65-95
65-95
65-95
>20
>20
>20
22
26
29
p
z
z
F, H112
O, H111
H14
<200
<60
< 10
>95
95-130
130-165
>35
>35
> 110
25
25
6
Equipment manufacturing,
pressure vessels,
signs,
packaging,
trim
O, H111
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
90-130
90-130
90-130
>35
>35
>35
19
21
24
p
z
z
F, H112
O, H i l l
H14
<200
<80
<40
>95
95-130
130-165
>35
>35
> 110
25
25
6
O, H111
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
95-135
95-135
95-135
>35
>35
>35
17
20
23
p
z
z
F, H112
O, H111
H14
<200
<80
<40
> 100
100-145
> 140
>40
>40
> 110
18
18
6
O, H111
0.5-1.49
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
100-145
100-145
100-145
>35
>35
>35
19
20
22
p
z
z
F, H112
O, H111
H14
< 200
<80
<30
> 160
150-200
200-240
>60
>60
> 160
16
17
5
O, H111
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
160-200
160-200
160-200
>60
>60
>60
14
16
18
p
z
z
F, H112
0, H i l l
H14
< 150
<80
<25
> 180
180-250
240-290
>80
>80
> 180
14
16
4
0, H111
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
190-240
190-240
190-240
>80
>80
>80
14
16
18
Al Mg5
(5019)
p
z
z
F, H112
0, H111
H14
<200
<80
<40
> 250
250-320
270-350
> 110
> 110
> 180
14
16
8
Optical equipment,
packaging
Al Mg3Mn
(5454)
F, H112
0, H111
<200
>200
200-275
>85
>85
10
18
0, H111
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
215-275
215-275
215-275
>85
>85
>85
13
15
17
Container construction,
including pressure vessels,
conduits,
tank and silo trucks
p
z
z
F, H111
0, H111
H12
<200
<80
<30
>270
270-350
>280
> 110
> 110
>200
12
16
6
Al Mn1
(3103)
Al MnlCu
(3003)
Al Mg1
(5005)
CO
cH>
Al Mg2Mn0.3
(5251)
Al Mg4.5Mn0.7
(5083)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Equipment manufacturing,
extruded parts,
vehicle superstructures,
heat exchangers
Roofing,
facades,
load-bearing structures
in metal working
Roofing,
facades,
windows, doors,
hardware
Equipment manufacturing,
aircraft industry,
body parts,
mold making
For simplification all designations and material numbers are written without the addition "EN AW-".
Delivery forms: R round bar; S sheet, strip
DC Delivery condition: p extruded; z drawn; w cold-rolled
Material condition, see page 165
Material science: 4.
167
a l s
Deli very
forr ns2>
Material
DC '
condition 4 '
3
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm 2
Yield Elong. at
strength fracture Application,
Examples
EL
ftp 0.2
N/mm 2
%
Al Cu4PbMgMn
(2007)
P
z
z
T4, T4510
T3
T3
<80
<30
30-80
> 370
>370
>340
> 250
>240
>220
8
7
6
Al Cu4PbMg
(2030)
P
z
z
T4, T4510
T3
T3
<80
<30
30-80
>370
>370
>340
> 250
> 240
> 220
8
7
6
Al MgSiPb
(6012)
p
z
z
T5, T6510
T3
T6
< 150
<80
<80
>310
>200
>310
>260
> 100
>260
8
10
8
p
z
z
O, H i l l
T3
T4
<200
<80
<80
<250
>380
>380
< 135
>290
>220
12
8
12
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
<220
<220
<220
< 140
< 140
< 140
12
13
16
p
z
z
O, H111
T3
T6
<200
10-80
<80
< 250
>425
>425
< 150
>290
>315
12
9
5
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
<220
<220
<220
< 140
< 140
< 140
12
13
13
Al MgSi
(6060)
p
z
z
T4
T4
T6
< 150
<80
<80
< 120
> 130
>215
<60
>65
> 160
16
15
12
Al SilMgMn
(6082)
p
z
z
O, H111
T4
T6
<200
<80
<80
< 160
> 205
>310
< 110
> 110
>255
14
14
10
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
< 150
< 150
< 150
<85
<85
<85
14
16
18
p
z
T6
T6
<50
<80
>350
>350
> 290
>280
10
10
0.5-1.4
1.5-2.9
3.0-5.9
<220
< 220
< 220
< 140
< 140
< 140
12
13
15
p
z
T6, T6510
T6
<80
<80
>490
>460
>420
>380
7
8
T6
3.0-12
12.5-24
25-50
>450
>450
>450
>370
>370
>370
8
8
7
p
z
z
O, H111
T6
T73
<200
<80
<80
<275
> 540
>455
< 165
>485
>385
10
7
10
0.4-0.75
0.8-1.45
1.5-2.9
> 275
>275
>275
> 145
> 145
> 145
10
10
10
Al Cu4SiMg
(2014)
Al Cu4Mg1
(2024)
Al Zn4.5Mg1
(7020)
Al Zn5Mg3Cu
(7022)
Al Zn5.5MgCu
(7075)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Parts in hydraulic,
pneumatic,
automotive and aircraft
manufacturing,
load-bearing structures in
metal manufacturing
Parts in automotive and
aircraft manufacturing,
load-bearing structures in
metal working
Parts in hydraulic,
pneumatic and aircraft
manufacturing,
screws
Parts in automotive
and aircraft manufacturing,
mold making and
manufacturing of jigs and
fixtures, screws
For simplification all designations and material numbers are written without the addition "EN AW-".
Delivery forms: R round bar; S sheet, strip
DC Delivery condition: p extruded; z drawn; w cold-rolled
Material condition, see page 165
168
Material science: 4.
a l s
Designation
EN AC - Al Mg5KF
Material number
EN AC - 51300KF
T .
EN
AC
European standard
Aluminum casting
K
casting method
F
material condition
(table below)
Chemical composition
K
casting method
F
material condition
(table below)
Alloy groups
Type number
Example
Alloy percentage
No.
Group
No.
Group
AIMg5
AISi6Cu
5% Mg
6% Si, additions of Cu
21
41
AlCu
AISiMgTi
46
47
AISi9Cu
AlSi(Cu)
AICu4MgTi
4% Cu, additions of
Mg and Ti
42
44
AISi7Mg
AISi
51
71
AIMg
AlZnMg
Casting method
Letter
Casting method
Letter
F
O
Sand casting
Permanent mold
casting
Die casting
Investment casting
Meaning
Casting condition, without subsequent processing
Spheroidized
Controlled cooling after pouring, naturally aged
Solution annealed and naturally aged
LO CO
I- I-
D
L
Material condition
I- I-
S
K
C2>
Hardn. Tensile
M 3 ) strength strength
HB
ftm
N/mm 2
Yield
ftp 0,2
N/mm 2
Elongation
at fracture
EL
%
Properties4'
C
S
K
F
F
50
50
140
150
70
70
3
5
AC-AIMg5
(AC-51300)
S
K
F
F
55
60
160
180
90
100
3
4
AC-AIMg5(Si)
(AC-51400)
S
K
F
F
60
65
160
180
100
110
3
3
AC-AISi12
(AC-44100)
S
K
L
F
F
F
50
55
60
150
170
160
70
80
80
4
5
1
AC-AISi7Mg
(AC-42000)
S
K
L
CO CO CO
75
90
75
220
260
240
180
220
190
2
1
1
AC-AISi12(Cu)
(AC-47000)
S
K
F
F
50
55
150
170
80
90
1
2
AC-AICu4Ti
(AC-21100)
S
K
T6
T6
95
95
300
330
200
220
3
7
2)
4>
I-
1)
I- I-
AC-AIMg3
(AC-51000)
Application
Corrosion resistant,
polishable,
anodized for decorative
purposes; fittings,
household appliances,
ship building,
chemical industry
Resistant to weather
influences, for complex,
thin-walled and pressuretight parts;
pump and motor housings,
cylinder heads, parts in aircraft manufacturing
For simplification all designations and material numbers are written without "EN",
e.g. AC-AIMg3 instead of EN AC-AIMg3 or AC-51000 instead of EN AC-51000.
3)
C casting method (table above)
M material condition (table above)
C castability, P pressure tightness, M machinability; very good, o good, - conditionally good
Material science: 4.
169
a l s
Fabrication,
dimensions
Round bars
Standard
Round tubes
extruded
d = 3-100 mm
DIN EN
755-3
seamless extruded
d = 20-250 mm
DIN EN
755-7
drawn
d = 8-320 mm
DIN EN
754-3
cold-drawn seamless
d= 3-270 mm
DIN EN
754-7
extruded
a = 15-100 mm
DIN EN
754-4
Square bars
Square tubes
extruded
s = 10-220 mm
DIN EN
755-4
drawn
s = 3-100 mm
DIN EN
754-4
Flat bars
Flat tubes
extruded
w = 10-600 mm
s= 2-240 mm
DIN EN
755-4
extruded seamless
a = 15-250 mm
b= 10-100 mm
DIN EN
755-7
drawn
w = 5-200 mm
s= 2-60 mm
DIN EN
754-4
cold-drawn seamless
a = 15-250 mm
b= 10-100 mm
DIN EN
754-7
L profiles
rolled
s = 0.4-15 mm
DIN EN
485
Channels
sharp corners or
round corners
h = 10-200 mm
DIN
17711>
sharp corners or
round corners
h = 15-100 mm
DIN
9714 1 '
Tees
sharp corners or
round corners
h = 10-160 mm
1)
Fabrication,
dimensions
Illustration
Standard
DIN
97131'
< 4 4 4 '
d, a
mm
m'
kg/m
/x =Jy
cm4
Wx =
cm 3
0.17
0.29
0.68
0.05
0.10
0.32
1.00
1.44
2.56
0.21
0.31
0.54
0.27
0.39
0.69
0.10
0.17
0.40
3.14
4.91
7.07
4.00
6.25
9.00
0.85
1.33
1.91
1.08
1.69
2.43
0.79
1.53
2.65
1.33
2.60
4.50
0.79
1.77
3.98
1.33
3.26
6.75
35
40
45
9.62
12.57
15.90
12.25
16.00
20.25
2.60
3.40
4.30
3.31
4.32
5.47
4.21
6.28
8.95
7.15
10.68
15.19
7.37
12.57
20.13
12.51
21.33
34.17
50
55
60
19.64
23.76
28.27
25.00
30.25
36.00
5.30
6.42
7.63
6.75
8.17
9.72
12.28
16.33
21.21
20.83
27.73
36.00
30.69
44.98
63.62
52.08
76.26
108.00
10
12
16
0.79
1.13
2.01
20
25
30
Materials
1)
S
cm 2
0.08
0.17
0.55
DIN 1796 und DIN 1798 were replaced by DIN EN 754-3 or DIN EN 754-4. The
DIN EN standards contain no dimensions. However, dealers continue to offer DIN
1798 and DIN 1796 round and square bars.
O round bars;
square bars
170
Material science: 4.
a l s
X
x
<u
Edge radii r
h
mm
'max
< 10
0.6
> 10-30
1.0
>30-60
2.0
mm
w* h
mm
S
cm 2
m'
kg/m
X
cm
e
y
cm
Wx
cm 3
/x
cm 4
Wy
cm 3
'y
cm 4
10x3
10 x 6
10 x 8
0.30
0.60
0.80
0.08
0.16
0.22
0.15
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.015
0.060
0.106
0.0007
0.018
0.042
0.033
0.100
0.133
0.016
0.050
0.066
15x3
15 x 5
15x8
0.45
0.75
1.20
0.12
0.24
0.32
0.15
0.25
0.4
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.022
0.090
0.230
0.003
0.027
0.064
0.112
0.225
0.300
0.084
0.168
0.225
20 x 5
20x8
20 x 10
1.00
1.60
2.00
0.27
0.43
0.54
0.25
0.4
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.083
0.213
0.333
0.020
0.085
0.166
0.333
0.533
0.666
0.333
0.533
0.666
20 x 15
25 x 5
25x8
3.00
1.25
2.00
0.81
0.34
0.54
0.75
0.25
0.4
1.0
1.25
1.25
0.750
0.104
0.266
0.562
0.026
0.106
1.000
0.520
0.833
1.000
0.651
1.041
25 x 10
25 x 15
25 x 20
2.50
3.75
5.00
0.67
1.01
1.35
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.25
1.25
1.25
0.416
0.937
1.666
0.208
0.703
1.666
1.041
1.562
2.083
1.302
1.953
2.604
30 x 10
30 x 15
30 x 20
3.00
4.50
6.00
0.81
1.22
1.62
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.500
1.125
2.000
0.250
0.843
2.000
1.500
2.250
3.000
2.250
3.375
4.500
40 x 10
40 x 15
40 x 20
4.00
6.00
8.00
1.08
1.62
2.16
0.5
0.75
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.666
1.500
2.666
0.333
1.125
2.666
2.666
4.000
5.333
5.333
8.000
10.666
40 x 25
40 x 30
40x35
10.00
12.00
14.00
2.70
3.24
3.78
1.25
1.5
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.166
6.000
8.166
5.208
9.000
14.291
6.666
8.000
9.333
13.333
16.000
18.666
50 x 10
50 x 15
50 x 20
5.00
7.50
10.00
1.35
2.03
2.70
0.5
0.75
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
0.833
1.875
3.333
0.416
1.406
3.333
4.166
6.250
8.333
10.416
15.625
20.833
50 x 25
50 x 30
50x35
12.50
15.00
17.50
3.37
4.05
4.73
1.25
1.5
1.75
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.208
7.500
10.208
6.510
11.250
17.864
10.416
12.500
14.583
26.041
31.250
36.458
50 x 40
60 x 10
60 x 15
20.00
6.00
9.00
5.40
1.62
2.43
2.0
0.5
0.75
2.5
3.0
3.0
13.333
1.000
2.250
26.666
0.500
1.687
16.666
6.000
9.000
41.668
18.000
27.000
60 x 20
60 x 25
60 x 30
12.00
15.00
18.00
3.24
4.05
4.86
1.0
1.25
1.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.000
6.250
9.000
4.000
7.812
13.500
12.000
15.000
18.000
36.000
45.000
54.000
60 x 35
60 x 40
80 x 10
21.00
24.00
8.00
5.67
6.48
2.16
1.75
2.0
0.5
3.0
3.0
4.0
12.250
16.000
1.333
21.437
32.000
0.666
21.000
24.000
10.666
63.000
72.000
42.666
80 x 15
80x20
80 x 25
12.00
16.00
20.00
3.24
4.52
5.40
0.75
1.0
1.25
4.0
4.0
4.0
3.000
5.433
8.333
2.250
5.333
10.416
16.000
21.333
26.666
64.000
85.333
106.66
80x30
80x35
80 x 40
24.00
28.00
32.00
6.48
7.56
8.64
1.5
1.75
2.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
12.000
16.333
21.333
18.000
28.583
42.666
32.000
37.333
42.666
128.00
149.33
170.66
100 x 20
100 x 30
100 x 40
20.00
30.00
40.00
5.40
8.10
10.8
1.0
1.5
2.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
6.666
15.000
26.666
3.666
22.500
53.333
33.333
50.000
66.666
166.66
250.00
333.33
Material
1)
DIN EN 754-5 contains no dimensions. Specialized dealers still offer flat bars in dimensions according to DIN 1769.
Material science: 4.
171
a l s
outside diameter
wall thickness
cross-sectional
area
m' linear mass
density
W axial section
modulus
I
axial moment
of inertia
dx s
mm
S
cm 2
m'
kg/m
Wx
cm 3
/x
cm 4
dx s
mm
S
cm 2
m'
kg/m
Wx
cm 3
/x
cm 4
10 x 1
10 x 1.5
10 x 2
0.281
0.401
0.503
0.076
0.108
0.136
0.058
0.075
0.085
0.029
0.037
0.043
35 x 3
35 x 5
35 x 10
3.016
4.712
7.854
0.814
1.272
2.121
2.225
3.114
4.067
3.894
5.449
7.118
12 x 1
12 x 1.5
12 x 2
0.346
0.495
0.628
0.093
0.134
0.170
0.088
0.116
0.136
0.053
0.070
0.082
40 x 3
40 x 5
40 x 10
3.487
5.498
9.425
0.942
1.484
2.545
3.003
4.295
5.890
6.007
8.590
11.781
16 x 1
16 x 2
16 x 3
0.471
0.880
1.225
0.127
0.238
0.331
0.133
0.220
0.273
0.133
0.220
0.273
50 x 3
50 x 5
50 x 10
4.430
7.069
12.566
1.196
1.909
3.393
4.912
7.245
10.681
12.281
18.113
26.704
20 x 1.5
20 x 3
20 x 5
0.872
1.602
2.356
0.235
0.433
0.636
0.375
0.597
0.736
0.375
0.597
0.736
55x3
55 x 5
55 x 10
4.901
7.854
14.137
1.323
2.110
3.817
6.044
9.014
13.655
16.201
24.789
37.552
25 x 2
25x3
25 x 5
1.445
2.073
3.142
0.390
0.560
0.848
0.770
1.022
1.335
0.963
1.278
1.669
60 x 5
60 x 10
60 x 16
8.639
15.708
22.117
2.333
4.241
4.890
10.979
17.017
20.200
32.938
51.051
60.600
30 x 2
30 x 4
30 x 6
1.759
3.267
4.524
0.475
0.882
1.220
1.155
1.884
2.307
1.733
2.826
3.461
70 x 5
70 x 10
70 x 16
10.210
18.850
27.143
2.757
5.089
7.331
15.498 54.242
24.908 87.179
30.750 107.62
Material
1)
DIN EN 754-7 contains no dimensions. Specialized dealers still offer round tubes in dimensions according to DIN 1795.
cf. DIN 9713 (1981-09)1)
hx w * s x f
mm
cm"
20 x 20 x 3 x 3
30x30 x 3 x 3
35 x 35 x 3 x 3
2.52
2.97
40 x 15 x 3 x 3
40 x 20 x 3 x 3
40 x 30 x 3 x 3
Wx
cm ;
cm
cm
cm
0.945
2.43
3.44
0.945
3.64
6.02
0.805
1.10
1.28
0.628
2.29
3.73
0.431
0.610
3.62
2.04
2.59
7.24
4.07
5.17
2.49
0.810
0.770
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.30
2.49
0.349
0.795
2.52
3.71
4.51
5.57
1.00
2.0
4.49
5.80
8.97
11.6
13.6
3.03
4.80
5.64
3.17
7.12
8.59
50 x 30 x 3 x 3
50 x 30 x 4 x 4
50 x 40 x 5 x 5
12.2
19.6
23.3
2.91
5.65
6.54
2.70
7.80
9.26
60 x 30 x 4 x 4
60 x 40 x 4 x 4
60 x40 x 5 x 5
4.12
6.35
7.47
3.69
cm
0.437
0.687
0.802
1.00
0.780
1.50
1.75
1.92
2.25
2.85
0.518
40 x 30 x 4 x 4
40 x 40 x 4 x 4
40 x 40 x 5 x 5
8,9
0.6
ex
cm
80 x 40 x 6 x 6
80 x 45 x 6 x 8
100 x 40 x 6 x 6
5,6
m
kg/m
1)
1.62
0.608
2.06
2.91
1.22
2.0
1.50
2.0
1.05
1.49
1.52
3.15
4.91
6.07
0.851
1.33
1.64
2.5
2.5
2.5
0.929
1.38
1.42
4.88
7.83
9.32
4.51
5.31
6.57
1.22
1.43
1.77
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.896
1.29
1.33
7.90
10.1
12.0
23.7
30.3
36.0
8.95
2.42
3.02
2.74
4.0
4.0
5.0
1.22
11.2
10.1
82.4
108
142
10.6
13.9
12.5
20.6
21.8
1.11
20.6
27.1
28.3
14.1
17.2
12.35
3.80
4.64
3.35
5.0
6.0
1.72
1.74
1.83
43.4
61.9
56.4
217
295
350
19.9
28.2
24.7
34.3
49.1
45.2
7.0
1.57
6.80
8.20
9.94
13.8
DIN 9713 was withdrawn without replacement. Specialized dealers still offer channels
according to this standard.
172
Material science: 4.
a l s
T D
2)
F20
F24
MgAI6Zn
3.5612
F27
MgAI8Zn
3.5812
F29
F31
1)
200
240
145
155
15
10
<80
270
195
10
290
310
205
215
10
6
o o
00 00
VI VI
3.3520
3.5312
Yield
strength
Bar diameter
mm
00 00
VI VI
MgMn2
MgAI3Zn
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm 2
o o
Designation
Materialnumber
N/mm 2
Elong. at
fracture Properties,
EL
application
%
Corrosion resistant,
weldable, cold workable;
cladding, containers
Higher strength, limited weldability; lightweight material
in automotive, machine and
aircraft manufacturing
2)
Designation *
MCMgAI8Zn1
Materialnumber 1 '
MC21110
Material- Hardness
M >
HB
condition 3 )
2
Yield
strength
N/mm 2
Elong. at
fracture
EL
Properties,
application
F
T6
50-65
50-65
160
240
90
90
2
8
K
K
D
F
T4
F
50-65
50-65
60-85
160
160
200-250
90
90
140-160
2
8
<7
F
T6
55-70
60-90
160
240
90
150
6
2
MCMgAI9Zn1
MC21120
K
K
D
F
T6
F
55-70
60-90
65-85
160
240
200-260
110
150
140-170
2
2
1-6
High-strength,
good sliding properties,
weldable;
automotive and aircraft
manufacturing,
armatures
MCMgAI6Mn
MCMgAI7Mn
MCMgAI4Si
MC21230
MC21240
MC21320
D
D
D
F
F
F
55-70
60-75
55-80
190-250
200-260
200-250
120-150
130-160
120-150
4-14
3-10
3-12
1)
2)
3)
For simplification, designations and material numbers are written without the "EN-" prefix,
e.g. MCMgAIBZnl instead of EN-MCMgAI8Zn1.
M casting method: S sand casting; K permanent mold casting; D die casting
Material condition, see designation of aluminum casting alloys, page 168
Materialnumber
Dilive>ry
f<Drm 1)
S
Sheet
thickness
s
mm
Tensilestrength
Am
N/mm 2
Elong. at
Yield
strength fracture Properties,
EL
application
N/mm 2
%
Til
Ti2
Ti3
3.7025
3.7035
3.7055
0.4-35
120
150
170
290-410
390-540
460-590
180
250
320
30
22
18
TilPd
Ti2Pd
3.7225
3.7235
0.4-35
120
150
290-410
390-540
180
250
30
22
TiAI6V6Sn2
3.7175
<6
6-50
320
320
> 1070
> 1000
1000
950
10
8
T1AI6V4
3.7165
<6
6-100
310
310
>920
>900
870
830
8
8
TiAI4Mo4Sn2
3.7185
6-65
350
> 1050
1050
1)
Delivery forms: S sheet and strip; B bars, e.g. round bars; T tubes
Weldable, solderable,
glueable, machinable,
cold and hot workable,
fatigue resistant,
corrosion resistantweight saving designs
in machine construction,
electrical engineering,
precision engineering,
optics and medical technology, chemical industry, food industry, aircraft manufacturing
173
Main characteristics
Application examples
Copper (Cu)
High electrical conductivity and thermal conductivity, inhibits bacteria, viruses and molds, corrosion resistant, good appearance, easily recyclable
CuZn
(brass)
CuZnPb
Very good machinability, limited cold workability, Automatic screw machine parts, precision
very good hot workability
mechanical parts, fittings, hot-pressed parts
CuZn
multi-alloy
CuSn
(bronze)
CuAl
CuNi(Zn)
Zinc (Zn)
ZnTi
ZnAICu
Tin (Sn)
SnPb
Low viscosity
Soft solder
SnSb
Nickel (Ni)
NiCu
Extremely corrosion resistant and high temp, resist. Equipment, condensers, heat exchangers
NiCr
Extremely corrosion resistant and very high temperature resistant and nonscaling, e.g. age hardenable
Lead (Pb)
Shields against x-ray and gamma rays, corrosion Shielding, cable sheathing,
tubes for chemical equipment
resistant, toxic
PbSn
PbSbSn
174
NiCu30Fe F45
GD - Sn80Sb
Special properties
Manufacture, application
E
G
GC
GD
GK
GZ
L
S
1)
Electrical material
Sand casting
Continuous casting
Die casting
Permanent mold casting
Centrifugal casting
Solder
Welding filler alloys
a
9
h
ka
ku
ta
wa
wu
zh
age hardened
annealed
hard
naturally aged
cold worked
partially age hardened
artificially aged
hot worked
drawn hard
Chemical composition
Example
Comment
The standard has been withdrawn. However the material designations are
still used in individual standards.
F45
CuZn31Si
- R620
CuZn38Pb2
CuSn11Pb2 - C -GS
Casting method
GS Sand casting
GM Permanent mold casting
GZ Centrifugal casting GC Continuous casting
GP Die casting
Chemical composition
Example
Meaning
CuZn31Si
CuZn38Pb2
CuSnl1Pb2
Cu alloy 11 % Sn, 2% Pb
Product form
C
B
Meaning
Example
Meaning
A007
D
Elongation at fracture EL = 7%
Drawn, without specified
mechanical properties
Y450
M
H160
R620
C W 024 A
Material group
Letter
Material group
A or B
Copper
Copper-nickel alloys
C or D
E or F
J
K
Lor M
N or P
Copper-zinc alloys
Copper-tin alloys
Copper-zinc binary alloys
Copper-zinc-lead alloys
R or S
Copper-zinc multi-alloys
Z P 04 1 0
Z Zinc alloy
P Casting
Al content
04 = 4% aluminum
Cu content
1 = 1% copper
175
Copper alloys
Wrought copper alloys
Designation,
Material
number11
Bars
03)
mm
C>
Tensile
Yield
Elong. at
Hardness strength strength fracture Properties,
application examples
HB
EL
Am
2
%
N/mm 2 N/mm
1 Copper-zinc alloys
CuZn28
(CW504L)
CuZn37
(CW508L)
CuZn40
(CW509L)
R310
R460
4-80
4-10
H085
H145
4-80
4-10
R310
R440
2-80
2-10
H070
H140
4-80
4-10
R340
H080
2-80
85-115
> 145
-
70-100
> 140
310
460
-
120
420
27
310
440
-
340
120
400
-
260
30
-
25
> 80
CuZn38Mn1 Al
(CW716R)
CuZn40Mn2Fe1
(CW723R)
R460
R530
5-40
5-14
H115
H140
5-40
5-14
R490
R550
5-40
5-14
H120
H150
5-40
5-14
R460
R540
5-40
5-14
5-40
5-14
115-145
> 140
-
120-150
> 150
-
460
530
250
330
22
12
-
490
550
210
280
18
10
460
540
270
320
20
8
H110
H150
110-140
> 150
I Copper-zinc-lead alloys
CuZn36Pb3
(CW603N)
R340
R550
40-80
2-4
90
150
340
550
160
450
20
CuZn38Pb2
(CW608N)
R360
R550
40-80
2-6
90
150
360
550
150
420
25
CuZn40Pb2
(CW617N)
R360
R550
40-80
2-4
90
150
360
550
150
420
20
I Copper-tin alloys
CuSn6
(CW452K)
CuSn8
(CW453K)
CuSn8P
(CW459K)
1)
2)
3)
R340
R550
2-60
2-6
H085
H180
2-60
2-6
R390
R620
2-60
2-6
H090
H185
2-60
2-6
R390
R620
2-60
2-6
H090
H185
2-60
2-6
85-115
> 180
-
90-120
> 185
-
90-120
> 185
340
550
230
500
45
390
620
260
550
45
390
620
-
260
550
-
45
176
C>
Bars
03)
mm
Tensile
Elong. at
Yield
Hardness strength strength fracture Properties,
HB
EL
application examples
Am
2
%
N/mm 2 N/mm
Copper-aluminum alloys
CuAI10Fe3Mn2
(CW306G)
CuAI10Ni5Fe4
(CW307G)
R590
R690
10-80
10-50
H140
H170
10-80
10-50
R680
R740
10-80
H170
H200
10-80
140-180
> 170
330
510
12
6
680
740
170-210
> 200
480
530
10
8
-
I Copper-nickel-zinc alloys
CuNi12Zn24
(CW430J)
CuNi18Zn20
(CW409J)
1>
3)
R380
R640
2-50
2-4
H090
H190
2-50
2-4
R400
R650
2-50
2-4
H100
H200
2-50
2-4
Corrosion-resistant, wear-resistant,
fatigue-resistant, high-temperature
resistant; screws, shafts, gears, worm
gears, valve seats
Corrosion resistant, wear-resistant,
nonscaling, fatigue resistant, high temperature resistant; capacitor bases,
control parts for hydraulics
cf. DIN EN 12163(1998-04)
380
640
90-130
> 190
270
550
38
400
650
100-140
> 200
280
580
-
35
Material numbers according to DIN EN 1412, see page 174. 2 ) C Material condition according to DIN EN 1173, see page 174.
D Diameter for round bars, width across flats for flat bars and hexagonal bars, thickness for flat bars.
Yield strength
flp0,2
N/mm 2
Elong. at
fracture
A
%
CuZn15As-C
(CC760S)
160
70
20
45
CuZn32Pb2-C
(CC750S)
180
70
12
45
CuZn25AI5Mn4Fe-C
(CC762S)
750
450
180
CuSn12-C
(CC483K)
260
140
80
High wear-resistance;
spindle nuts, worm gears
CuSnl1Pb2-C
(CC482K)
240
130
80
CuAI10Fe2-C
(CC331G)
500
180
18
100
CuAI10Ni3Fe2-C
(CC332G)
500
180
18
130
CuAI10Fe5Ni5-C
(CC333G)
600
250
13
140
Designation,
Material number11
Hardness
Properties, application
HB
1) Material numbers according to DIN EN 1412, see page 174. More cast Cu alloys for plain bearings, see page 261.
Strength values apply to separately sand-cast test specimens.
ZP3 (ZP0400)
ZP5 (ZP0410)
280
330
200
250
10
5
83
92
ZP2 (ZP0430)
ZP8 (ZP0810)
335
370
270
220
5
8
102
100
ZP12 (ZP1110)
ZP27 (ZP2720)
400
425
300
300
5
2.5
100
120
177
Base
material11
1)
2)
Service
temperature
up to C
Application examples
10800
50
53)
5000
190
3.5 3)
6000
145
3.5
11200
260
205
11700
280
1.44
155
2.2
10300
315
30
1.45
190
2.5
17150
260
Like FRP-PPS
PAI
30
1.42
205
11700
180
Like FRP-PAI
PEEK
30
1.44
210
1.3
13000
315
Like FRP-PEEK
EP
60
365
3.5
UP
35
1.5
130
3.5
PA 66
35
1.4
1602>
PC
30
1.42
90 2 )
PPS
30
1.56
140
PAI
30
1.56
PEEK
30
PPS
FRP
(Fiberglass
reinforced
plastic)
CFRP
(Carbon
fiber
reinforced
plastic)
EP epoxide
PPS polyphenylene sulfide
UP unsaturated polyester
PAI polyamideimide
3)
a y yield stress
PC polycarbonate
| Ceramic materials
Mater ial
Name
Designation
Aluminum
silicate
C130
2.5
160
100000
0.000005
Aluminum
oxide
C799
3.7
300
300000
0.000007
Zirconium
oxide
Zr02
5.5
800
210000
0.000010
Silicon
carbide
SiC
3.1
600
440000
0.000005
Silicon
nitride
Si 3 N 4
3.2
900
330000
0.000004
Aluminum
nitride
AIN
3.0
200
300000
0.000005
178
Sintered metals
Designation system for sintered metals
Designation example:
Volume ratio
Rx in %
AF
<73
Area of application
Filter
75 2.5
plain bearings
80 2.5
plain bearings
Formed parts with
sliding properties
85 2.5
90 2.5
Formed parts
94 1.5
Formed parts
>95.5
Sintered forged
formed parts
7
3,9
Treatment condition
Treatment condition of the material
sintered
calibrated
heat treated
sintered smooth
calibrated smooth
sized and coined smooth
steam treated
sintered forged
isostatically pressed
Sint-AF 50
80-200
40-160
machined
surface treated
Sint-A 00
>25
>60
Sint-A 20
>40
>150
Sint-A 50
>25
>70
Sint-A 51
>18
>60
Sint-B 00
>30
>80
Sint-B 10
>40
>150
Sint-B 50
>30
>90
Sint-C 00
>45
>150
Sint-C 10
>60
>200
Sint-C 40
>100
>300
Sint-C 50
>35
>140
Sint-D 00
>50
>250
Sint-D 10
>80
>300
Sint-D 30
>110
>550
Sint-D 40
>100
>450
Sint-E 00
>60
>200
Sint-E 10
>100
>350
Sint-E 73
>55
>200
Sintered aluminum Cu 4 - 6 %
Sint-F 00
>140
>600
>180
>770
Sint-F 31
astis
Overview of plastics
Disadvantages:
lower strength and heat resistance in
comparison to metals
some are combustible
some are nonresistant to solvents
limited material reutilization
General
properties
Advantages:
low density
electrically insulating
heat and sound absorbing
decorative surface
economical forming
weather and chemical resistance
Classification
Thermoplastics
Thermosets
Elastomers
Processing
Hot workable
Weldable
Generally glueable
Machinable
Not workable
Non-weldable
Glueable
Machinable
Not workable
Non-weldable
Glueable
Machinable at low temperatures
Fabrication
Injection molding
Injection blow molding
Extruding
Pressing
Transfer molding
Injection molding, molding
Pressing
Injection molding
Extruding
Recycling
Easily recyclable
Not recyclable,
possible reuse as filler
Not recyclable
Temperature behavior
Structure
Amorphous thermoplastica
brittle hard
thermoelastic
thermo- viscous
plastic
range of use
V> .O
Filamentary macromolecules
without cross-linking
elongation at
fracture
20C
temperature T
20C
temperature T
Semi-crystalline thermoplastic
/
^.lamella (crystalline)
amorphous
intermediate
layers
hard
tensile strength
range of use
OJ ro1
* g
Macromolecules with
many cross-links
e l o n g a t i o n ^ fracture^
20C 50C
temperature T-
Filamentary elastomers
rubber-elastic
brittle
hard
_to
t
Macromolecules in random
condition with few cross-linkages
range of use
to . 0
QJ "NJ
. cn
0C 20C
temperature J
180
astis
Type11
ABS
Acrylonitrile
butadiene styrene
AM MA Acrylonitrile-methylmethacrylate
T
T
ASA
CA
CAB
CF
CMC
T
Acrylonitrile-styrene-acrylate
T
Cellulose acetate
T
Cellulose acetate butyrate
D
Cresol-formaldehyde
MNM
Carboxymethyl cellulose
CN
CP
EC
EP
Cellulose nitrate
Cellulose propionate
Ethyl cellulose
Epoxide
EVAC
MF
PA
Ethylene-vinyl acetate
Melamine formaldehyde
Polyamide
1)
MNM
T
MNM
D
E
D
T
DesigMeaning
nation
Type11
DesigMeaning
nation
Type11
PAK
PAN
PB
PBT
Polyacrylate
Polyacrylonitrile
Polybutene
Polybutylene terephthalate
T
T
T
T
PTFE
PUR
PVAC
PVB
Polytetrafluoroethylene
Polyurethane
Polyvinyl acetate
Polyvinyl butyral
T
D
T
T
PC
PCTFE
PE
PET
PF
Polycarbonate
Polychlorotrifluoroethylene
Polyethylene
Polyethyleneterephthalate
Phenol formaldehyde
T
T
T
T
D
PVC
PVDC
PVF
PVFM
PVK
Polyvinyl chloride
Polyvinylidene chloride
Polyvinyl fluoride
Polyvinyl formaldehyde
Poly-N-vinylcarbazole
T
T
T
T
T
PIB
Polyisobutene
PMMA Polymethylmethacrylate
POM Polyoxymethylene;
Polyformaldehyde
T
T
T
SAN
SB
SI
SMS
Styrene-acrylonitrile
Styrene-butadiene
Silicone
Styrene-a-methylstyrene
T
T
D
T
PP
PS
PSU
T
T
T
UF
UP
VCE
Urea-formaldehyde
Unsaturated polyester
Vinyl chloride-ethylene
D
D
T
Polypropylene
Polystyrene
Polysulfone
CL 1 '
B
C
D
E
block, brominated
chlorinated; crystalline
density
foamed;
elastomer
CL1>
F
H
I
L
M
Special
properties
flexible; liquid
high; homo
impact tough
linear, low
moderate, molecular
CL1>
N
O
P
R
S
Special
properties
normal; novolak
oriented
plasticized
raised; resol; hard
saturated; sulphonated
Special
properties
CL1>
T
U
V
temperature
ultra; no plasticizers
very
weight
cross-linked, cross-linkable
w
X
code letter
Code letters and abbreviations for fillers and reinforcing materials cf. DIN EN ISO 1043-2 (2002-04)
Abbreviation for material11
Designation
Material
Boron
C
D
E
Carbon
Aluminum trihydrate
Clay
Designation
G
K
L
M
Material
Glass
Calcium carbonate
Cellulose
Mineral, metal 2 '
Designation
P
Q
R
S
Material
Designation
Material
Mica
Talc
Silicate
Aramid
Synthetic materials
W
X
Wood
not specified
other
Shape, structure
Designation
Shape, structure
Designation
nonwoven (thin)
VV
veneer
Shape, structure
ground stock
whiskers
paper
woven
chips, shavings
knitwear
roving
not specified
powder
laminates
peelings, flakes
yarn
fibers
matted, thick
other
=>
2)
Designation
pearls, balls,
beads
11
Shape, structure
The materials can be further designated, e.g. by its chemical symbol or another symbol from relevant international standards.
For metals (M) the type of metal must be specified by the chemical symbol.
astis
1.2-1.5
1.5-1.8
1.8-2.2
Solubility in
solvents
Thermosets and
ABS, ASA, CAB, CP, PTFE are not soluble.
PA, PC, PMMA,
PS, SAN, SB
Other thermoplastics are soluble
CA, PBT, PET,
in certain solvents;
POM, PSU, PUR
e.g. PS is soluble in
Organically filled
benzene or acemolding material
tone.
PTFE
Visual test
Behavior when
Appearance of the specimen is
heated
transparent
cloudy
CA, CAB, CP,
EP, PC, PS,
PMMA, PVC,
SAN
ABS, ASA,
PA, PE,
POM, PP,
PTFE
Touch
Burning test
flame color
fire behavior
soot formation
odor of the smoke
Density
g/cm 3
Burning behavior
Other characteristics
ABS
= 1.05
CA
1.31
CAB
1.19
Sounds dull
MF
1.50
PA
~ 1.10
PC
1.20
PE
0.92
PF
1.40
PMMA
1.18
POM
1.42
PP
0.91
PS
1.05
PTFE
2.20
Waxy surface
PUR
1.26
0.05
PVC-U
1.38
PVC-P
1.20-1.35
SAN
1.08
SB
1.05
UF
1.50
UP
2.00
1)
182
astis
Thermoplastics (selection)
Abbreviation
Density
Designation
Trade name
ABS
AcrylonitrileTerluran,
butadiene-styrene Novodur
PA 6
Polyamide 6
PA 66
Polyamide 66
PE-HD
Polyethylene,
high density
Durethan,
Maranyl,
Resistane,
Ultramid,
Rilsan
Working
TensileImpact temperature,
strength11 toughness long-term2' Application examples
g/cm 3
N/mm 2
mJ/mm 2
1.05
35-56
80n.f. 3 '
85-100
1.14
43
n.f. 3)
80-100
1.14
57
0.96
0.92
4)
80-100
20-30
n.f. 3 '
80-100
8-10
n.f.3>
60-80
Hostalen,
Lupolen,
Vestolen A
21
Telephone housings,
instrument panels,
surf boards
Gears,
plain bearings,
screws,
cables,
housings
Battery cases,
fuel containers,
garbage cans,
pipes,
cable insulation,
films,
bottles
PE-LD
Polyethylene,
low density
PMMA
Polymethylmethacrylate
Plexiglas,
Degalan,
Lucryl
1.18
70-76
18
70-100
Optical lenses,
warning lights,
dials,
lighted letters
POM
Polyoxymethylene;
Delrin,
Hostaform,
Ultraform
1.42
50-70
100
95
Gears,
plain bearings,
valve bodies,
housing parts
Polypropylene
Hostalen PP,
Novolen,
Procom,
Vestolen P
PS
Polystyrene
Styropor,
Polystyrol,
Vestyron
PTFE
Polytetrafluorethylen
Hostaflon,
Teflon,
Fluon
PP
PVC-P
PVC-U
Polyvinylchloride,
Hostalit,
plasticized
Vinoflex,
Vestolit,
Polyvinylchloride Vinnolit,
no plasticizers
Solvic
SAN
Styreneacrylnitrile
copolymer
Luran,
Vestyron,
Lustran
SB
Styrenebutadiene
copolymer
Vestyron,
Styrolux
11
0.91
1.05
21-37
40-65
13-20
100-110
55-85
Packaging material,
flatware,
film cartridges,
insulating boards
Maintenance free
bearings,
piston rings,
seals, pumps
2.20
15-35
n.f. '
280
1.20
-1.35
20-29
24)
60-80
1.38
35-60
n.f. 3 '
<60
1.08
78
23-25
85
Graduated dials,
battery housings,
headlight housings
22-50
40 n.f. 3 '
55-75
Television housings,
packaging material,
clothes hangers,
distribution boxes
1.05
n.f. 3 '
Heating ducts,
washing machine
parts,
fittings,
pump housings
Hoses,
seals,
cable sheathing,
pipes,
fittings,
containers
astis
Designation system
Name
Standard
block:
number block
Example:
Thermoplastic
ISO 1873
PP-R
EL
ISO 8773
06-16-003
Data block 1
In data block 1 the molding material is designated by its abbreviation PE or PP after the hyphen.
For polypropylene the additional information follows: PP-H homopolymers of the propylene, PP-B thermoplastic,
impact tough PP (so-called block-copolymer); PP-R thermoplastic, static copolymers of the propylene.
Data block 2
Intended applications and/or
processing methods for PE and PP
SymPosition 1
bol
SymPosition 1
bol
B
C
Blow molding
Calendering
L
M
Monofilam. extrusion
Injection molding
A
B
Process stabilizer
Anti-blocking agent
L
N
Light stabilizer
Natural colors
E
F
Extrusion
Extrusion (films)
Q
R
Stamping
Rotomolding
C
D
Artificial color
Powder
P
R
Impact tough
Mold release agent
C
H
General use
Coating
S
X
Powder sintered
Unspecified
E
F
Blowing agent
Fire extinguisher
S
T
Cable insulation
C
H
Pellets
Thermal aging stabilizer
X
Y
Z
Cross-linkable
Increased electr. conductivity
Static inhibitor
Data block 3
Density of PE in kg/m 3
Modulus of elasticity
for PP in MPa (N/mm 2 )
Symbol
above-to
Symbol
00
03
08
-901
901-906
906-911
02
06
10
13
18
23
911-916
916-921
921-925
28
27
33
40
925-930
930-936
936-942
02
05
-3
3-6
45
50
57
62
942-948
948-954
954-960
960
09
15
25
35
6-12
12-20
above-to
-400
400-800
190
190
190
190
800-1200
16
1200-2000
40
2000-3500
3500
0.325
2.16
5.00
21.6
for PP and PE
Symbol
above-to
000
001
003
-0.1
0.1-0.2
006
012
022
0,45
090
200
400
700
0.4-0.8
0.8-1.5
1.5-3.0
3.0-6.0
0.2-0.4
6-12
12-25
25-50
50
20-30
30
Data block 4 for PE and PP
Boron
Carbon
Glass
K
L
M
Chalk
Cellulose
Mineral, metal
Symbol Material
S
T
W
X
Synthetic,
organic
Talcum
B
D
F
Pearls, balls
Powder
Fiber
Wood
Not specified
Other
G
H
Ground stock
Whiskers
Symbol Form
Lamina
Flakes
Not specified
Other
2)
3)
only for PP
184
astis
Type
ISO 14526
cf.
page 180
Resin
Flexural
strength 1 '
N/mm 2
Filler
Impact
toughness 1 '
kJ/m 2
Water
absorption
mg
31
PF (WD30+
MD20)
Q: >40
M: > 50
Q >4.5
M >5.0
< 100
51
PF (LF20+
MD25)
Q: > 40
M: > 50
Q >4.5
M >5.0
< 150
84
PF (SC20+
LF15)
Q: > 35
M: >45
Q >5.5
M >6.5
< 150
Q: > 30
M: >45
Q >7.0
M >9.0
<200
Q: > 30
M: >40
Q >2.5
M >3.5
<30
Phenolic
(formaldehyde)-resin
(PF)
74
PF (SS40
to SS50)
13
PF(PF40
to PF60)
83
PF(LF20+
MD25)
Q: > 35
M: > 45
Q >5.5
M >6.0
< 150
12
PF (GF20+
GG30)
Q: > 50
M: >60
Q >6.0
M >7.0
<30
=>
PMC ISO 14526- PF(WD30+MD20), M: Pourable molding compound (PMC), phenolic (formaldehyde)
resin (PF), approx. 30% of wood flour (WD30), approx. 20% of mineral flour (MD20); recommended
machining process: injection molding (M) 1)
UF(LD10+
MD30),X,E2)
131
UF(LD10+
MD30)
130
UF(WD30+
MD20)
UF/MF
(LF20+S10)
Urea
(formaldehyde)
resin
(UF)
Urea/melamine
(formaldehyde) resin
Q: > 45
M: > 55
Q: > 5.0
M: > 7.5
< 150
Q: > 45
M: > 55
Q: > 5.0
M: >7.5
< 150
Q: > 35
M: >40
Q: > 4.5
M: > 5.0
<200
Q: > 6.5
M:-
< 100
PMC ISO 14527 - UF(LD20+MD20), M: Pourable molding compound (PMC), urea formaldehyde resin
(UF), approx. 20% of cellulose powder (LD20), approx. 20% of mineral flour (MD20); recommended
machining process: injection molding (M) 1)
Laminated materials3*
Resin types
Type of resin Designation
EP
MF
PF
UP
SI
PI
Nominal
thicknesses
t in mm
Epoxy resin
Melamine (formaldehyde) resin
Phenolic (formaldehyde) resin
Unsaturated polyester resin
Silicone resin
Polyimide resin
Cotton fabric
Cellulose paper
Combined reinforcing material
Glass fiber fabric
Fiber glass mat
Wood veneer
0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.8; 1.0; 1.2; 1.5; 2; 2.5; 3; 4; 5; 6; 8; 10; 12; 14; 16; 20; 25; 30; 35; 40; 45; 50; 60; 70; 80; 90; 100
Board IEC 60893 - 3 - 4 - PF CP 201,10 x 500 x 1000: Board made of phenolic (formaldehyde) resin/cellulose
paper (PF CP 201) according to IEC standard4* 60893-3-4 with f= 10 mm, w= 500 mm, / = 1000 mm.
astis
Butadiene
rubber
CO
Epichlorhydrin
rubber
CR
Density
g/cm 3
Tensile
Elong: at
Working
Properties,
strength2'
fracture temperature
application examples
C
%
N/mm 2
High abrasion resistance;
tires, belts, V-belts
0.94
2(18)
450
1.27
-1.36
5(15)
250
Chloroprene
rubber
1.25
11 (25)
400
CSM
Chlorosulfonated
polyethylene
1.25
18 (20)
300
- 3 0 to +120
EPDM
Ethylenepropylene rubber
0.86
4(25)
500
1.85
2(15)
450
IsobuteneIsoprene
rubber
0.93
5(21)
600
IR
Isoprene
rubber
0.93
1 (24)
500
- 6 0 to +60
NBR
Acrylonitrilebutadiene
rubber
1.00
6(25)
450
NR
Natural rubber
Isoprene rubber
0.93
22 (27)
600
- 6 0 to +70
PUR
Polyurethane
rubber
1.25
20 (30)
450
- 3 0 to +100
SIR
Styrene-lsoprene
rubber
1.25
1 (8)
250
0.94
5(25)
500
- 3 0 to +80
FKM
IIFt
SBR
1
Fluoro rubber
Styrene-Butadiene
rubber
2)
- 6 0 to +90
Foam materials
Foam materials consist of open cells, closed cells or a mixture of closed and open cells.
Their raw density is lower than that of the structural substance. A distinction is made between hard, medium hard,
soft, elastic, soft elastic and integral foam material.
Stiffness, Raw material base of the
hardness foam material
Cell structure
15-30
Polystyrene
Polyvinylchloride
Hard
Polyethersulfone
Predominantly
closed
cell
Polyurethane
Phenolic resin
Urea-formaldehyde resin
Polyethylene
Open cell
Predominantly
Medium- Polyvinylchloride
closed
hard
cell
Melamine resin
to softPolyurethane polyester type
elastic
Open cell
Polyurethane polyether type
1)
Density
kg/m 3
Max. working
temperature
oC1)
Thermal
conductivity
W/(K m)
75(100)
0.035
2-3
50-130
60 (80)
0.038
<1
45-55
180 (210)
0.05
15
20-100
80(150)
0.021
1-4
40-100
130 (250)
0.025
7-10
5-15
90(100)
0.03
20
25-40
up to 100
0.036
1-2
50-70
- 6 0 to +50
0.036
1-4
10.5-11.5
up to 150
0.033
approx. 1
20-45
- 4 0 to +100
0.045
186
astis
Plastics processing
Injection molding and extrusion
Injection molding
temperalture in C
Abbreviation
Substance
Injection presExtrusion
sure
process
in bar
temperature
in C
Mold
Shrinkage
in %
PE
160-300
20-70
500
190-230
1.5-3.5
150
140
130
PP
170-300
20-100
1200
235-270
0.8-23'
150
140
130
PVC, hard
170-210 4 '
30-60
1000-1800
170-190
0.2-0.5
130
120
110
PVC, soft
170-200 4 '
20-60
300
150-200
1-2.5
PS
180-250
30-60
180-220
0.3-0.7
130
120
110
SB
180-250
20-70
180-220
0.4-0.7
130
120
110
SAN
200-260
40-80
180-200
0.5-0.6
130
120
110
ABS
200-240
40-85
800-1800
180-220
0.4-0.7
130
120
110
PMMA
200-250
50-90
400-1200
180-250
0.3-0.8
130
120
110
PA
210-290
80-120
700-1200
230-275
1-2
130
120
110
POM
180-230 4 '
50-120
800-1700
180-220
1-3.5
140
130
120
PC
280-320 4 '
80-120
>800
240-290
0.7-0.8
130
120
110
pF5)
901104)
170-190
800-2500
0.5-1.5 3 )
140
130
120
MF6>
95-110 4 )
160-180
1500-2500
0.6-1.7 3 >
130
120
110
UF5>
95-110
150-160
1500-2500
0.4-0.6
140
130
120
1)
3)
5)
2)
See table below
Series 1: Can be maintained without special effort, Series 2: Requires high finishing effort
4)
Transverse and longitudinal shrinkage may differ
With screw injection molding machine
6)
With organic filler material
With inorganic filler material
Codeletter1'
0-1
1-3
3-6
6-10
90120
120-
160
General tolerances
150
A
B
0.23
0.13
0.25
0.15
0.27
0.17
0.30
0.20
0.34
0.24
0.38
0.28
0.43
0.33
0.49
0.39
0.57
0.47
0.68
0.58
0.81
0.71
0.97
0.87
1.20
1.10
140
A
B
0.20
0.10
0.21
0.11
0.22
0.12
0.24
0.14
0.27
0.17
0.30
0.20
0.34
0.24
0.38
0.28
0.43
0.33
0.50
0.40
0.60
0.50
0.70
0.60
0.85
0.75
130
A
B
0.18
0.08
0.19
0.09
0.20
0.10
0.21
0.11
0.23
0.13
0.25
0.15
0.27
0.17
0.30
0.20
0.34
0.24
0.38
0.28
0.44
0.34
0.51
0.41
0.60
0.50
1)
140
A
B
0.40
0.20
0.42
0.22
0.44
0.24
0.48
0.28
0.54
0.34
0.60
0.40
0.68
0.48
0.76
0.56
0.86
0.66
1.00
0.80
1.20
1.00
1.40
1.20
1.70
1.50
130
A
B
0.36
0.16
0.38
0.18
0.40
0.20
0.42
0.22
0.46
0.26
0.50
0.30
0.54
0.34
0.60
0.40
0.68
0.48
0.76
0.56
0.88
0.68
1.02
0.82
1.20
1.00
120
A
B
0.32
0.12
0.34
0.14
0.36
0.16
0.38
0.18
0.40
0.20
0.42
0.22
0.46
0.26
0.50
0.30
0.54
0.34
0.60
0.40
0.68
0.48
0.78
0.58
0.90
0.70
110
A
B
0.18
0.08
0.20
0.10
0.22
0.12
0.24
0.14
0.26
0.16
0.28
0.18
0.30
0.20
0.32
0.22
0.36
0.26
0.40
0.30
0.44
0.34
0.50
0.40
0.58
0.48
A For dimensions which do not depend on mold dimensions; B For dimensions which depend on mold dimensions
astis
Designation
PTFE
Polytetrafluoretylene
trade name
"Teflon"
PEEK
Tensile Working
strength temperature
N/mm 2 from to
Special properties
Application examples
10
-20 to 260 C,
short-term to
300 C
High-temperature strength
and chemical resistance, low
strength, hardness and
coefficient of friction
Polyetheretherketone
97
-65 to 250C,
short-term to
300 C
High-temperature strength
and chemical resistance, good
sliding behavior
PPS
Polyphenylensulfide
70
-200 to 220C,
short-term to
260 C
Pump housings,
bearing bushings, space travel,
nuclear power stations
PSU
Polysulfone
-40 to 150C,
140-240 short-term to
200 C
High strength, hardness, stiffness, high chemical and radiation resistance, clear
PI
Polyimide
trade name
"Vespel"
Polyblends
Polyblends (also known as "blends") are mixtures of different thermoplastics. The special properties of these copolymers result from numerous possible combinations of the properties of the original materials.
Abbreviation
Designation
Components
Special
properties
Application examples
S/B
Styrene/butadiene
90% polystyrene,
10% butadiene rubber
ABS
Acrylonitrile/butadiene/
styrene
90% styrene-acrylonitrile,
10% nitrile rubber
Telephones, dash-boards,
hub caps
PPE +
PS
Polyphenylenether +
Polystyrene
various compositions;
possibly can be reinforced
with 30% glass fiber
PC +
ABS
Polycarbonate +
Acrylnitrile/Butadiene/
Styrene
various
compositions
PC +
PET
Polycarbonate + Polyethyleneterephthalate
different
compositions
Motorcycle helmets,
automotive parts
Reinforcing fibers
Designation
Density
kg/dm 3
Tensile
strength
N/mm 2
Elongation
at fracture
%
Special properties
Glass fiber
GF
2.52
3400
4.5
Isotropic 1 ', good strength, high- Body parts, aircraft manufacturing, sailboats
temp. strength, inexpensive
Aramide
fibers
AF 3 '
1.45
3400
-3800
2.0-4.0
Carbon
fiber
CF
1.6-2.0
1750
- 5000 2 '
0.35-2.1 '
Application examples
Thermosets (e.g. UP and EP resins) and thermoplastics with high working temperatures (e.g. PSU, PPE, PPS, PEEK,
PI) are used as embedding materials (so-called matrix).
1)
2)
3)
Isotropic = the same material properties in all directions; anisotropic = material properties in the direction of the
fibers are different from those transverse to fibers
Depends significantly on the fiber defect sites occurring during the manufacturing process
Trade name "Kevlar"
188
aterials
189
aterials
Process
Applications, notes
page 195
page 191
Cylindrical specimens are loaded in standardUsed to determine the shear strength r s e, e.g.
ized equipment until fractured due to shearing
- for strength calculations of shear loaded
Breaking strength is determined from the
parts, e.g. pins
maximum shearing force and cross-sectional - to predict cutting forces in forming
area of the test specimen
page 191
- To test metallic materials for behavior after
impact bending loads
- To monitor heat treatment results, e.g.
with quenching and tempering
- To test the temperature behavior of steels
page 191
Sheet metal clamped on all sides is
deformed until crack formation by a ball
The deformation depth until crack propagation is a measure of deep drawing capability
Fatigue test
A?
Ultrasonic testing
190
aterials
EL
strain e in %
Stress-strain diagram
without distinct yield point,
e.g. for quenched and
tempered steel
Sq
Tensile stress
Tensile strength
P
m
^"m
7T"
Yield strength
R
F6
e
S~
Yield strength at
0.2 % strain offset
0.2
EL
strain in %
= R e (fl p0 . 2 )/^m
about the heat treatment con14
Vs
0.5-0.7
0.7-0.95
10
12
14
Lo
Lc
20
24
25
30
30
36
40
48
50
60
60
72
70
84
Shape A f 1
M
5
65
Shape B ^
M6
40
Shapes, application
Shape E
10
b
Shape E L0
B
8
30
12
10
35
15
10
40
15
20
60
27
22
70
29
25
80
33
25
90
33
Lc
Lt
38
115
45
135
50
80
140 210
90
230
105
260
Shapes, application
Shape C
Shape D
Shape F
Shape G
Shape H
191
aterials
1
T
Shear strength
-0.020
Limit
deviations -0.370
I
10
12
16
-0.020
-0.370
-0.030
-0.390
-0.030
-0.345
-0.040
-0.370
-0.013
-0.186
-0.016
-0.193
-0.016
-0.193
50
50
50
50
110
110
110
50
pendulum
Test specimen
The test specimen must be completely machined. Fabrication of the test material
should alter the material's microstructure as little as possible. No notch should be
visible with the naked eye at the notch root which runs parallel to the notch axis.
Notch impact test specimens
Notch
shape
Designation
Test specimen cross section
1
<=///
55
40
10
10
1.0
55
40
10
10
0.25
11
55
40
10
10
1.0
1)
Explanation
I Ft
MM
punch
Test specimens
The test specimens must be flat and not have any burrs. Before clamping, the
sheets are to be lightly greased over with a graphite lubricant.
Tools and test specimen dimensions
Abbreviation
sheet metal
holder
cf. DIN EN ISO 20482 (2003-12), replacement for DIN 50101 and 50102
die
D
45
test specimen
KU = 115 J:
% Notch shapes ^
i f
Tool dimen;sions
F
D
d
kN
mm mm
IE
27
20
10
>90
>90
0.2-2
IE 4 0
40
20
10
>90
>90
2-3
IE 21
21
15
10
> w
55-90
0.2-2
IE11
11
10
> b
30-55
0.1-1
Application
Standard test
Tests on
thicker or
narrower
strips
192
aterials
test load in N
D
ball diameter in mm
d
diameter of the impression in mm
dy, d2 individual measurement values of the
impression diameter in mm
h
depth of impression in mm
s
minimum thickness of the test specimen
in mm
if
1
-4
Test conditions
Impression diameter
0.24- D < d < 0 . 6 D
Minimum test specimen thickness s > 8 h
Impression diameter
d
+ d
Brinell hardness
0.204 F
HBW =
ji D {D-\/d2
-d2
Hardness value
Indenter
Ball
diameter
Test force F
Impact time
W carbide ball
2.5 mm
1 mm
Unspecified:
Value entry:
10 to 15 s
25 s
1)
1839
7355
Test range
Materials
Brinell
hardness
HBW
29420
< 650
> 140
>200
14710
>35
10
98.07
612.9
2452
9807
Cast iron
Light metal, light metal alloys
Copper, copper alloys
<140
> 35
35-200
49.03
306.5
1226
4903
< 35
35-80
2.5
24.52
153.2
612.9
2452
< 35
9.807
61.29
245.2
980.7
Lead, tin
Small ball diameters for fine-grained materials, thin specimens or hardness tests in the outer layer. For hardness tests
on cast iron, the ball diameter D must be s 2.5 mm. Hardness values are only comparable if the tests were carried out
with the same degree of loading.
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.3
1.5
2.0
2.4
3.0
453r
V12 1.46
2.0
4.0
Table fields without thickness indicated lie outside of the test range 0.24 D< d< 0.6 D
8.0
aterials
193
194
aterials
F
h
s
test load in N
depth of penetration in mm
specimen thickness in mm
Martens hardness
Material
0.1 N
2N
100 N
Aluminum
0.13
0.55
4.00
Steel
0.08
0.30
2.20
Carbide
0.03
0.10
0.80
HM 0 5 / 20 / 20 = 5700 N/mm 2
Designation:
Test method
Test load F
Test duration
Application of load
Martens hardness
0.5 N
20 s
within 20 s
5700 N/mm 2
Applications
Conditions
Test range
2 N < F< 30 kN
Macro range
Micro range
Nano range
h < 0.2 pm
1>
2)
Vickers
Brinell
hardness
hardness
HV
HB30
(F 2; 98 N)
R<ockwell hardnej;s
HRC
HRA
255
285
320
350
385
80
90
100
110
120
76
86
95
105
114
415
450
480
510
545
130
140
150
160
170
124
133
143
152
162
575
610
640
675
705
180
190
200
210
220
171
181
190
199
209
740
770
800
835
865
230
240
250
260
270
219
228
238
247
257
20
22
24
26
61
62
62
63
900
930
965
1030
1095
280
290
300
320
340
266
276
285
304
323
27
29
30
32
34
64
65
65
66
68
HRB2> HRF2>
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm 2
48
56
62
67
83
87
91
94
1155
1220
1290
1350
1420
360
380
400
420
440
342
361
380
399
418
37
39
41
43
45
69
70
71
72
73
71
75
79
82
85
96
99
(101)
(104)
(106)
1485
1555
1595
1665
1740
460
480
490
510
530
437
456
466
485
504
46
48
48
50
51
74
75
75
76
76
87
90
92
94
95
(107)
(109)
(110)
(111)
(112)
1810
1880
1955
2030
2105
550
570
590
610
630
523
542
561
580
599
52
54
55
56
57
77
78
78
79
80
97
98
100
(101)
(102)
(113)
(114)
(115)
2180
650
670
690
720
760
618
58
59
60
61
63
80
81
81
82
83
64
65
66
68
68
83
84
85
85
86
(104)
(105)
-
800
840
880
920
940
Applies to unalloyed and low alloy steels and cast steel. Special tables of this standard are to be used for
quenched and tempered, cold worked and high-speed steels, as well as for various carbide types. Considerable
deviations are to be expected for high-alloyed and/or work-hardened steels.
The values in parentheses lie outside of the measurement range.
195
aterials
Typical stress-strain
curves
Fy
yield stress
AZ-FM
ALFY
Tensile strength
gage length
initial cross section
rr
tensile strength
yield strength
maximum elongation Yield strength
yield strain
Fy
CTY
ductile wifhouf
yield point
E
M1
e M 2 M3
Y2
strain e
Test specimens
Test Specimens
For each property, e.g. tensile strength, yield strength,
yield strain, at least five test specimens must be tested.
Application
- thermoplastic injection molded and extrusion
molding materials
- thermoplastic slabs and films
- thermoset molding materials
- thermoset slabs
- fiber reinforced composite materials, thermoplastic
and thermoset plastic
20
50
100
=>
Yield strain
/-n
Toler- Type
ance Lq
mm
1A
1B
5A
5B
50 0.5
50 0.5
20 0.5
10 0.2
50 0.5
50 0.5
25 0.25
20% h
mm
4 0.2
4 0.2
>2
>1
<1
<1
<1
200 10% b
mm
10 0.2
10 0.2
4 0.1
2 0.1
10-25
25.4 0.1
6 0.4
Test speed
in mm/min
2
Maximum elongation
Test speed
10
Tensile test ISO 527-2/1 A/50: Tensile test according to ISO 527-2; specimen type 1A; test speed 50 mm/min
h
a
depth of penetration
distance from edge
specimen thickness
Test Specimens
distance from edge a > 10 mm, minimum specimen thickness s > 4 mm
Ball indentation hardness H in N/mm 2 for indentation depth h in mm
0.18
0.28
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
0.30
0.32
0.34
0.16
Test load
Fm >n N
49
22
19
16
15
13
12
11
10
132
59
51
44
39
35
32
30
27
25
24
358
160
137
120
106
96
87
80
74
68
64
961
430
370
320
290
260
234
214
198
184
171
Test specimen
F a contact pressure in N
F Test
specimen F test load
h
a
depth of penetration
distance from edge
specimen thickness
Test Specimens
Distance from edge a > 9 mm, minimum specimen thickness s > 4 mm
Test conditions for the Shore A and Shore D methods
Indenters for
Shore A
o
"SL
Shore D
Test
method
Fmax
in N
Fa
in N
7.30
10
40.05
50
=>
Application
196
Corrosion
Electrochemical series of metals
In galvanic corrosion the same processes occur as in electrical elements where the base metals are corroded. The
voltage produced between two dissimilar metals under influence of a conducting liquid (electrolyte) can be taken
from the standard potentials of the electrochemical series. Standard potential refers to the voltage produced between
the electrode material and a platinum electrode immersed in hydrogen.
Passivation (formation of protective layers) alters the voltage between the elements.
Electrode
materials
co
CN
Mg
-3
-2.5
IT)
O
T
Mn
<q
T
Al
co
r-; o
o
Zn Cr
in
o C
oN o- o
Fe Ni Sn H
o
d
0+0
Ag
CO
o
+
Cu
M i
-2
-1.5
-1
-0.5
0
+0.5
Standard potentials of the electrode materials in volts
i
CM
Ol
+
Pt
Au
+1.5
+1
>
increasingly noble
increasingly base
Example: The standard potentials of Cu = +0.34 V and Al = -1.7 V yield a voltage of U = +0.34 V - (-1.67 V) = 2.01 V
between Cu and Al.
Materials
Corrosion behavior
Unalloyed and
alloy steels
Stainless
steels
Aluminum and
Al alloys
toe
Copper and
Cu alloys
Resistant, especially
Cu alloys containing Ni
Dry
ambient air
resistant
fairly resistant
non-resistant
Salt
water
toe
O unusable
Corrosion protection
Preparation of metal surfaces before coating
Processing step
Purpose
Process
Mechanical cleaning
and creating a good
surface for adherence
Examples
Metallic coatings
Hot-dip galvanizing,
galvanic metal plating, e.g. chrome plating
197
Disposal of substances*
Waste management laws
Description of the
type of waste
Appearance, description,
source
Special instructions,
actions
150199D1
Packaging containing
hazardous impurities
Nickel cadmium
batteries
160603
160604
Alkaline batteries
060404
Mercury containing
waste
Fluorescent lamps
(so-called "neon tubes")
120106
120107
110
130202
150299D1
Vacuumed and filter materials, wipe cloths and protective clothing with hazardous contaminants
For example, used rags, clean- Option of using a rental service for cleaning
ing cloths; brushes contamicloths.
nated with oil or wax, oil
binders, oil and lubricant cans
130505
Other emulsions
140102
Other halogenated
solvents and solvent
mixtures
Per (-chloroethane)
Tri (-chloroethene)
Mixed solvents
11
Regulation governing wastes requiring special monitoring - BestbuAbfV (1999-01), Appendix 1: Wastes listed in
the European Waste Catalog (EAK waste) are considered to be especially hazardous. Appendix 2: EAK waste
requiring special monitoring as well as waste types not on the EAK list ( Letter "D" in Disposal code).
*) According to European Standards
198
Identificatio n 2 )
Symbol R-phrases
S-phrases
Acetone
F, Xi
Acetylene
F+
5; 6; 12
Acrylonitrile
F, T, N
Ammonia
C; N
34; 50
Arsenic
T; N
Asbestos
9; 16; 26
Substance
Identificatio n 2 >
Symbol R-phrases
S-phrases
Tetrachlorethane ("Per")
Xn; N
40; 51/53
23; 36/37;
61
(2); 9; 16; 33
Kerosine
45
53; 45
9; 16; 45;
53; 61
Phenol
T;C
23/24/25; 34;
48/20/21/22;
68
24/25; 26;
28; 36/37;
39; 45
26; 36/37/39;
61
Phosphoric acid
34
23; 45
23/25; 50/53
Propane
F+
12
9; 16
45; 48/23
53; 45
Mercury
T; N
7; 45; 60; 61
Gasoline
45; 65
53; 45
Hydrochloric acid C
34; 37
26; 45
Benzene
F; T
53; 45
Oxygen
17
Lead
compounds
T; N
Lubricating grease T
45
53; 45
Chromium
compounds
T; N
Lubricating oil
45
53; 45
Hydrofluoric acid
(HF)
T+;C
26/27/28;
35
7/9; 26;
36/37; 45
Sulphoric acid
35
26; 30; 45
Ceramic
mineral fibers
49; 38
53; 45
Styrene
Xn
23
Carbon
monoxide
F+; T
53; 45
Turpentine, oil
Xn; N
10; 20/21 ;
36/38; 43;
51/53; 65
36/37; 46;
61; 62
Fiber glass
Xn
38; 40
35/37
Trichlorethylene
(Tri)
45; 36/38;
52/53; 67
53; 45; 61
Nicotine
T+;N
36/37; 45; 61
Hydrogen
F+
12
9; 16; 33
11
2)
As per Art. 1a of the Regulation on Hazardous Materials applicable in Germany since 31 October 2005
Cf. R-phrases on page 199, S-phrases on page 200, Safety signs on page 342; the slash (/) between the number indicates a combination of R-phrases or S-phrases.
Density
ratio to air
0.91
Ignition
temperature
305 C
Lower I Upper
ignition limit
vol.-% gas in air
1.5
82
Additional information
With a pressure pe > 2 bar self-disintegration
and explosion
Argon
1.38
Butane
2.11
Carbon dioxide
1.53
Carbon monoxide
0.97
605 C
12.5
74
Hydrogen
0.07
570 C
75.6
Nitrogen
0.97
incombustible
Oxygen
1.1
incombustible
Propane
1.55
incombustible
365 C
incombustible
470 C
1.5
-
2.1
8.5
-
9.5
199
Meaning
R-Phrases3)
Meaning
R1
R 34
Causes burns
R2
R 35
R 36
R3
R 37
R4
R 38
R 39
R 40
R 41
R 42
R 43
R 44
R 45
R5
R6
R7
R8
R 10
R 11
Highly flammable
R 46
R 12
Extremely flammable
R 48
R 13
R 49
R 14
R 50
R 15
R 51
R 52
R 53
R 16
R 17
R 18
R 55
R 19
R 56
Harmful by inhalation
R 57
Toxic to bees
R 21
R 58
R 22
Harmful if swallowed
R 59
R 23
Toxic by inhalation
R 60
R 24
R 25
Toxic if swallowed
R 61
R 62
R 26
R 27
R 63
R 28
R 29
R 64
R 30
R 65
R 31
R 66
R 32
R 33
R 67
R 20
R 68
1)
2)
R = Risk
EU-Directive, Appendix III
Combinations of the risk phrases are possible; e.g. R 23/24: Toxic by inhalation and in contact with skin
*) According to European Standards
3)
200
1)
Meaning
S phrase 3 '
S1
Keep locked up
S 39
S2
S 40
S3
S4
S 41
S5
S 42
S6
S7
S 43
S8
S 45
S9
S 12
S 13
S 46
S 14
S 47
S 15
S 16
S 48
S 17
S 18
S 49
S 20
S 50
S 21
S 22
S 51
S 23
S 52
S 53
S 24
S 25
S 56
S 26
S 57
S 59
S 60
S 61
S 62
S 63
S 64
S 27
S 28
S 29
S 30
S 33
S 35
S 36
S 37
S 38
2>
S = safety
EU- Directive, Appendix IV
' Combinations of the S phrases are possible; e.g. S 20/21: when using do not eat, drink or smoke,
4
5
' i.e. do not expose yourself to this hazard
' Contamination,infestation
*) According to European Standards
3
Table of Contents
201
5 Machine elements
5.1
Threads (overview)
Metric ISO threads
Whitworth threads, Pipe threads
Trapezoidal and buttress threads
Thread tolerances
202
204
206
207
208
5.2
209
210
212
215
221
222
223
5.3
Countersinks
224
Countersinks for countersunk head screws . . . . 224
Counterbores for cap screws
225
5.4
Nuts (overview)
Designations, Strength
Hexagon nuts
Other nuts
226
227
228
231
5.5
Washers (overview)
Flat washers
HV, Clevis pin, Conical spring washers
233
234
235
240
241
242
244
247
251
Drive elements
Belts
Gears
Transmission ratios
Speed graph
253
256
259
260
u
i s :
J
5.8
5.9
5.10 Bearings
Plain bearings (overview)
Plain bearing bushings
Antifriction bearings (overview)
Types of roller bearings
Retaining rings
Sealing elements
Lubricating oils
Lubricating greases
261
262
263
265
269
270
271
272
202
Machine elements: 5.
ads
Thread profile
Code
letter
Metric threads
ISO threads
n n
/yffyyy,
Designation
example
Nominal sizes
Application
DIN 1 4 - M 08
0.3 to 0.9 mm
Clocks, precision
mechanisms
DIN 1 3 - M 30
1 to 68 mm
General purpose
(coarse thread)
DIN 1 3 - M 20 x 1
1 to 1000 mm
General purpose
(fine thread)
DIN 2510-M 36
12 to 180 mm
Bolts/screws with
anti-fatigue shank
DIN 158-M 30 x 2
6 to 60 mm
6 to 60 mm
60
Metric
taper
external threads
Pipe threads,
straight
Parallel
pipe threads
(internal threads)
DIN 2999-Rp 1 / 2
DIN 3858-Rp 1 / 8
V 8 to 1 1 / 2 inch
DIN 2999-R 1 / 2
V16 to 6 inches
DIN 3858-R 1 / 8 -1
/i6to 6 inch
Rp
Pipe threads,
seals on thread;
for threaded pipe,
fittings, screwed
pipe joints
Taper
pipe threads
(external threads)
Metric ISO
trapezoidal
threads
i n
Tr
DIN 103-Tr 40 x 7
8 to 300 mm
General purpose as
motion screw
threads
DIN 513-S 48 x 8
10 to 640 mm
General purpose as
motion screw
threads
DIN 405-Rd 40 x V 6
8 to 200 mm
General purpose
DIN 20400-Rd 40 x 5
10 to 300 mm
1.5 to 9.5 mm
For tapping
screws
Buttress threads
Knuckle threads
/s to 1 1 / 2 inches
Rd
Tapping screw
threads
ST
Type of thread
Explanation
Left-hand threads
Multiple start
right-hand thread
1)
For parts which have right-hand and left-hand threads, "RH" (Right-Hand) is placed after the thread designation of
the right-hand thread and "LH" (Left-Hand) after the left-hand thread. The number of starts for multiple-starts is
found by: no. of starts = lead P h / pitch P.
Machine elements: 5.
ads
Thread profile
Thread designation
Code
Example
Meaning
Country 2 )
Unified National
Coarse Thread
UNC
1/4-20
UNC-2A
ISO-UNC-thread
with V4 inch
nominal diameter,
20 threads/inch,
Class 2A
ARG, AUS,
CAN, GBR,
IND, JPN,
NOR, PAK,
SWE
and others
UNF
V4-28 UNC-3A
ISO-UNF threads
with V4 inch
nominal diameter,
28 threads/inch,
Class 3A
ARG, AUS,
CAN, GBR,
IND, JPN,
NOR, PAK,
SWE
and others
Unified National
Extra Fine
Thread
UNEF
ARG, AUS,
CAN, IND,
NOR, PAK,
SWE
and others
Unified National
Special Thread,
special diameter/lead
combinations
UNS
/4-27 UNS
ARG, AUS,
CAN, NZL,
USA
NPSM
/2-14NPSM
NPSM threads
with V2 inch
nominal diameter,
14 threads/inch
USA, CAN
NPT
/g 18 NPT
NPT thread
with 3 / 8 inch
nominal diameter,
18 threads/inch
BRA, CAN,
FRA, USA
and others
NPTF
V 2 ~14NPTF
(dryseal)
NPTF threads
with V2 inch
nominal diameter,
14 threads/inch,
(dry sealing)
BRA, CAN,
USA
Acme
1 3 / 4 - 4 A c m e - 2 G Acme threads
with 1 3 / 4 inch
nominal diameter
4 threads/inch,
Class 2G
AUS, CAN,
GBR, NZL,
USA
Stub
Acme
1
/2-20 Stub
Acme
CAN, USA
internal thread
Threads for
Mechanical Joints
/ / / / /
/ / / / \
/
, straight
/ / / /
' internal thread/
/ / / / y / y
/ /
p
straight
external thread
American Standard
Taper Pipe Thread
taper
internal thread
internal thread
American truncated
trapezoidal threads
ft = 0.3 P
external thread
1)
2)
203
Machine elements: 5.
ads
Imperial Threads
| Imperial Threads for general purposes
internal thread
oo
P
i
1
Osl
CL
ii
'trr,
S
i \
CVI
ji
1
A
OM
CD
externalthr ead
c
Major diameter
Pitch
d =D
P
h-, = 0 fi134 . P
0.5413 P
= 0.1443 P
= D2 = d- 0.6495 P
= d- 1.1904 P
= d- 1.0825 P
=d-P
60
, 0
7i /d2 + d3Y
S = ~
4 V 2
/
Ft
d2
d3
D-,
Stress area
No.
size
or inches
Threads
per inch
inches
Pitch
P
inches
32
0.1380
0.0313
32
0.1640
0.0313
10
24
0.1900
12
24
1/4
Pitch
diameter
d2 = D2
Miinor
External Internal
threads
threads
Threac J depth
External
Internal
threads
threads
Radius
Stress
area S
inch 2
ch
D^
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
0.1177
0.1008
0.1042
0.01920
0.01691
0.0045
0.0093
#36
0.1065
0.1437
0.1268
0.1302
0.01920
0.01691
0.0045
0.0142
#29
0.1360
0.0417
0.1629
0.1404
0.1449
0.02558
0.02255
0.0060
0.0179
#25
0.1495
0.2160
0.0417
0.1889
0.1664
0.1709
0.02558
0.02255
0.0060
0.0246
#16
0.1770
20
0.2500
0.0500
0.2175
0.1905
0.1959
0.03067
0.02706
0.0072
0.0324
#7
0.2010
5/16
18
0.3125
0.0556
0.2764
0.2464
0.2524
0.03411
0.03007
0.0080
0.0532
0.2579
3/8
16
0.3750
0.0625
0.3344
0.3006
0.3073
0.03834
0.03383
0.0090
0.0786
5/16
0.3125
7/16
14
0.4375
0.0714
0.3911
0.3525
0.3602
0.04380
0.03866
0.0103
0.1078
0.3680
1/2
13
0.5000
0.0769
0.4500
0.4084
0.4167
0.04717
0.04164
0.0111
0.1438
27/64
0.4219
9/16
12
0.5625
0.0833
0.5084
0.4633
0.4723
0.05110
0.04511
0.0120
0.1842
31/64
0.4843
5/8
11
0.6250
0.0909
0.5660
0.5168
0.5266
0.05576
0.04921
0.0131
0.2288
17/32
0.5313
3/4
10
0.7500
0.1000
0.6851
0.6310
0.6418
0.06134
0.05413
0.0144
0.3382
21/32
0.6562
7/8
0.8750
0.1111
0.8028
0.7427
0.7547
0.06815
0.06014
0.0160
0.4666
49/64
0.7656
1.0000
0.1250
0.9188
0.8512
0.8647
0.07668
0.06766
0.0180
0.6120
7/8
0.8750
1 1/8
1.1250
0.1429
1.0322
0.9549
0.9704
0.08765
0.07732
0.0206
0.7713
63/64
0.9844
1 1/4
1.2500
0.1429
1.1572
1.0799
1.0954
0.08765
0.07732
0.0206
0.9781
1 7/64
1.1093
1 3/8
1.3750
0.1667
1.2668
1.1766
1.1946
0.10225
0.09021
0.0241
1.1664
1 7/32
1.2187
1 1/2
1.5000
0.1667
1.3918
1.3016
1.3196
0.10225
0.09021
0.0241
1.4179
1 11/32
1.3437
1.7500
0.2000
1.6201
1.5119
1.5335
0.12268
0.10825
0.0289
1.9171
1 9/16
1.5625
4.5
2.0000
0.2222
1.8557
1.7355
1.7594
0.13630
0.12028
0.0321
2.5207
1 25/32
1.7812
1 3/4
2
No.
size
or inches
Threads
per inch
inches
Pitch
P
inches
40
0.1380
0.0250
36
0.1640
0.0278
10
32
0.1900
12
28
0.2160
1/4
28
5/16
3/8
Pitch
diameter
d2 = D2
Mi nor
External Internal
threads
threads
Radius
Stress
area S
inch 2
<h
01
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
0.1218
0.1082
0.1109
0.0153
0.01353
0.0036
0.0103
#33
0.1130
0.1460
0.1309
0.1339
0.0170
0.01504
0.0040
0.0149
#29
0.1360
0.0313
0.1697
0.1528
0.1562
0.0192
0.01691
0.0045
0.0203
#21
0.1590
0.0357
0.1928
0.1735
0.1773
0.0219
0.01933
0.0052
0.0262
#14
0.1820
0.2500
0.0357
0.2268
0.2075
0.2113
0.0219
0.01933
0.0052
0.0368
0.2720
24
0.3125
0.0417
0.2854
0.2629
0.2674
0.0256
0.02255
0.0060
0.0587
0.2720
24
0.3750
0.0417
0.3479
0.3254
0.3299
0.0256
0.02255
0.0060
0.0886
0.3320
7/16
20
0.4375
0.0500
0.4050
0.3780
0.3834
0.0307
0.02706
0.0072
0.1198
25/64
0.3906
1/2
20
0.5000
0.0500
0.4675
0.4405
0.4459
0.0307
0.02706
0.0072
0.1612
29/64
0.4531
9/16
18
0.5625
0.0556
0.5264
0.4964
0.5024
0.0341
0.03007
0.0080
0.2046
33/64
0.5156
5/8
18
0.6250
0.0556
0.5889
0.5589
0.5649
0.0341
0.03007
0.0080
0.2578
37/64
0.5781
3/4
16
0.7500
0.0625
0.7094
0.6756
0.6823
0.0383
0.03383
0.0090
0.3754
11/16
0.6875
7/8
14
0.8750
0.0714
0.8286
0.7900
0.7977
0.0438
0.03866
0.0103
0.5127
13/16
0.8125
12
1.0000
0.0833
0.9459
0.9008
0.9098
0.0511
0.04511
0.0120
0.6674
59/64
0.9219
1 1/8
12
1.1250
0.0833
1.0709
1.0258
1.0348
0.0511
0.04511
0.0120
0.8607
1 3/64
1.0469
1 1/4
12
1.2500
0.0833
1.1959
1.1508
1.1598
0.0511
0.04511
0.0120
1.0785
1 11/64
1.1719
1 3/8
12
1.3750
0.0833
1.3209
1.2758
1.2848
0.0511
0.04511
0.0120
1.3208
1 19/64
1.2968
1 1/2
12
1.5000
0.0833
1.4459
1.4008
1.4098
0.0511
0.04511
0.0120
1.5877
1 27/64
1.4219
hs
HI
Machine elements: 5.
ads
Imperial Threads
Basic sizes National Pipe Taper (NPT)
internal
thread
external
N
thread
V
axis of thread f
Threads
No. size
.
< ,,
\ t a P e r 1_16
Outside
diam. of pipe
Pitch
Pitch
diameter
Gauge
length
Usuable
length of
ext. thread
h3 = 8P
0.2611
0.2639
0.02963
0.02963
0.2420
0.3320
0.4018
0.0478
0.5337
0.04444
7/16
0.4380
0.04444
0.05714
9/16
45/64
0.3391
0.3997
0.5457
0.05714
29/32
0.5620
0.7030
0.9060
0.6828
1 9/64
0.4197
0.7068
0.06957
0.06957
27
0.3125
0.03704
27
0.4050
0.03704
0.28120
0.37360
0.1598
1/8
1/4
18
0.5400
0.05556
0.49163
3/8
1/2
18
14
14
0.6750
0.0625
0.05556
0.07143
1.0500
0.07143
0.62701
0.77843
0.98887
0.2275
0.2398
1
1 1/4
11 1/2
1.3150
1.6600
0.08696
0.08696
1.23863
1.58338
1 1/2
11 1/2
2
2 1/2
11 1/2
8
1.9000
2.3750
2.8750
0.08696
0.08696
0.12500
1.82234
2.29627
0.4197
0.4354
0.7235
0.7565
2.76215
0.6825
1.1375
11 1/2
L2
/-i
dz = D2
all dimensions in inches
1/16
3/4
Depth of
external
thread
0.1613
0.3199
0.06957
0.06957
0.10000
1 31/64
1.1410
1.484
1 23/32
2 3/16
2 39/64
2.1880
2.6090
1.7190
Basic sizes American National Standard General Purp. Acme Screw Thread ANSI/ASME B1.5 -1988 (R 1994)
thread
No. size
3/8
7/16
1/2
5/8
3/4
Threads
per inch
12
ac
ac
Hi
R2
Minor 0 external threads
Major 0 internal threads
Minor 0 internal threads
Pitch 0
Thread depth
Width of flat
Nominal diameter
Pitch
Pitch diameter
d2=D2
Minor diameter
Internal thread
External thread ii
0.2917
0.3342
0.3600
0.4600
0.3542
0.4000
0.5000
0.5833
0.7083
0.8000
7/8
1
6
6
5
0.7500
0.8750
1.0000
0.1667
0.6667
0.7917
0.5433
0.6683
0.2000
0.9000
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 3/8
5
5
4
1.1250
1.2500
1.3750
0.2000
0.2000
0.2500
1.0250
1.1500
1.2500
0.7600
0.8850
1 1/2
4
4
1.5000
1.7500
0.2500
0.2500
2
2 1/4
2.0000
2.2500
2 1/2
2 3/4
3
3
3
3 1/2
4
2
2
4 1/2
1 3/4
D,
0.2717
0.3750
0.4375
0.5000
0.6250
Thread depth
h3= HA
<h
12
10
8
0.1667
up to 10 tpi = 0.020
over 10 tpi = 0.010
0.06 P
0.12 P
d3 = d- (P+ 2 a c )
D 4 = d+2 ac
D,=
d-P
d2 = D2 = d-0.5 P
h3 = H 4 = 0.5 P+ a c
w = 0.370- P-0.259
0.0517
0.0517
0.0700
0.0825
0.1033
0.1033
0.9250
0.1200
0.1200
1.0100
1.0850
1.0500
1.1250
0.1200
0.1450
1.3750
1.6250
1.2100
1.4600
1.2500
1.5000
0.1450
1.8750
2.0833
1.7100
1.8767
2.3333
2.1267
1.7500
1.9167
2.1667
0.1450
0.1867
2.5000
0.2500
0.3333
0.3333
2.7500
0.3333
2.3767
2.4167
0.1867
0.5000
0.5000
0.5000
2.4600
2.9600
2.5000
3.0000
0.2700
0.2700
3.0000
3.5000
4.0000
2.5833
2.7500
3.2500
3.7500
4.5000
5.0000
0.5000
0.5000
4.2500
4.7500
3.4600
3.9600
4.4600
3.5000
2
2
4.0000
4.5000
0.2700
0.2700
0.1450
0.1867
0.2700
204
Machine elements: 5.
ads
external thread
Major diameter
Pitch
Depth of external thread
Depth of internal thread
Radius at root
Basic pitch 0
Minor 0 of external thread
Minor 0 of internal thread
Tap hole drill 0
Thread angle
d =
P
h3 =
"1 =
R =
d2 =
d3 =
01 =
=
60c>
Stress area
Pitch 0
d= D
d2 = D2
d3
D^
h3
M 1
M 1.2
M 1.6
0.25
0.25
0.35
0.84
1.04
1.38
0.69
0.89
1.17
0.73
0.93
1.22
M2
M 2.5
M3
0.4
0.45
0.5
1.74
2.21
2.68
1.51
1.95
2.39
M 4
M5
M6
0.7
0.8
1
3.55
4.48
5.35
M8
M 10
M 12
1.25
1.5
1.75
M 16
M 20
M 24
Minor 0
external internal
threads threads
0.6134- P
0.5413 P
0.1443 P
D2 = d-0.6495
d- 1.2269 P
d- 1.0825 P
d- P
n fd2 +
! (
2
d3\2
)
Rounded
root
Stress
area S
"i
mm2
0.15
0.15
0.22
0.14
0.14
0.19
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.46
0.73
1.27
0.75
0.95
1.25
3.2
1.57
2.01
2.46
0.25
0.28
0.31
0.22
0.24
0.27
0.06
0.07
0.07
2.07
3.39
5.03
1.6
2.05
2.5
4
5
5.5
3.14
4.02
4.77
3.24
4.13
4.92
0.43
0.49
0.61
0.38
0.43
0.54
0.10
0.12
0.14
8.78
14.2
20.1
3.3
4.2
5.0
7
8
10
7.19
9.03
10.86
6.47
8.16
9.85
6.65
8.38
10.11
0.77
0.92
1.07
0.68
0.81
0.95
0.18
0.22
0.25
36.6
58.0
84.3
6.8
8.5
10.2
13
16
18
2
2.5
3
14.70
18.38
22.05
13.55
16.93
20.32
13.84
17.29
20.75
1.23
1.53
1.84
1.08
1.35
1.62
0.29
0.36
0.43
157
245
353
14
17.5
21
24
30
36
M 30
M 36
M 42
3.5
4
4.5
27.73
33.40
39.08
25.71
31.09
36.48
26.21
31.67
37.13
2.15
2.45
2.76
1.89
2.17
2.44
0.51
0.58
0.65
561
817
1121
26.5
32
37.5
46
55
65
M 48
M 56
M 64
5
5.5
6
44.75
52.43
60.10
41.87
49.25
56.64
42.59
50.05
57.51
3.07
3.37
3.68
2.71
2.98
3.25
0.72
0.79
0.87
1473
2030
2676
43
50.5
58
75
85
95
1.84
2.84
3.87
1.69
2.69
3.76
1.73
2.73
3.78
3.77
4.84
4.68
3.57
4.69
4.39
3.62
4.73
4.46
M
M
M
M
M
M
5.84
5.68
5.51
5.69
5.39
5.08
5.73
5.46
5.19
M 8 x 0.25
M 8 x 0.5
M 8x 1
7.84
7.68
7.35
7.69
7.39
6.77
7.73
7.46
6.92
1>
10x0.25
10x0.5
10 x 1
12 x 0.35
12 x 0.5
12 x 1
Thread
Minor 0
Pitch 0
designation
ext. th. int. th.
dx P
dz = D2 dz
D^
0.25
0.25
0.2
0.35
0.25
0.5
0.25
0.5
0.75
2)
2x
3x
4x
4x
5x
5x
6x
6x
6x
Thread depth
external internal
threads threads
Threaddesignation
9.84
9.68
9.35
9.69
9.39
8.77
9.73
9.46
8.92
11.77
11.68
11.35
11.57
11.39
10.77
11.62
11.46
10.92
M 16x0.5
M 16 x 1
M 16 x 1.5
15.68
15.35
15.03
15.39
14.77
14.16
15.46
14.92
14.38
M 20 x 1
M 20 x 1.5
M 24 x 1.5
19.35
19.03
23.03
18.77
18.16
22.16
18.92
18.38
22.38
Series 2 and Series 3 also have intermediate sizes (e. g. M7, M9, M 14).
cf. DIN 336 (2003-07)
3) cf. DIN ISO 272 (1979-10)
Thread
Minor 0
Pitch 0
designation
ext. th. int. th.
dx P
d2 = D2 d3
M
M
M
M
M
M
24
30
30
36
36
42
x2
x 1.5
x2
x 1.5
x2
x 1.5
22.70
29.03
28.70
21.55
28.16
27.55
21.84
28.38
27.84
35.03
34.70
41.03
34.16
33.55
40.16
34.38
33.84
40.38
M
M
M
M
M
M
42
48
48
56
56
64
x2
x 1.5
x2
x 1.5
x2
x2
40.70
47.03
46.70
39.55
46.16
45.55
39.84
46.38
45.84
55.03
54.70
62.70
54.16
53.55
61.55
54.38
53.84
61.84
Machine elements: 5.
ads
saga
Thread dimensions of
external threads
- X I
. OSL
reference
plane
reference
plane
thread axis
Thread
designation
dx P
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
5 keg
6 keg
8 x 1 keg
10 x 1 keg
12 x 1 keg
10 x 1.25 keg
12 x 1.25 keg
12 x 1.5 keg
14 x 1.5 keg
16 x 1.5 keg
M 18 x
M 20 x
M22x
M 24 x
M 26 x
M 30 x
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
M
M
M
M
M
M
36 x
38 x
42 x
45 x
48 x
52 x
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
1.5 keg
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
27 x
30 x
33 x
36 x
39 x
42 x
45 x
48 x
52 x
56 x
60 x
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
2 keg
Thread
length
h
Thread
depth
h3 max.
Distance
a
0.52
5.5
0.66
2.5
0.82
8.5
0.98
3.5
10.5
1.01
4.5
12
1.32
13
1.34
d2 = d-0.650
Minor0
d3 = d- 1.23 P
Height
H, = 0.866 P
Thread depth
h3 =0.613 P
Root radius
R = 0.144 P
inspection
plane
inspection
plane
Thread cimensions
Pitch 0
4.48
5.35
7.35
9.35
11.35
9.19
11.19
11.03
13.03
15.03
17.03
19.03
21.03
23.03
25.03
29.03
35.03
37.03
41.03
44.03
47.03
51.03
25.70
28.70
31.70
34.70
37.70
40.70
43.70
46.70
50.70
54.70
58.70
ds
4.02
4.77
6.77 ]
8.77
10.77
8.47
10.47
10.16
12.16
14.16
16.16
18.16
20.16
22.16
24.16
28.16
34.16
36.16
40.16
43.16
46.16
50.16
24.55
27.55
30.55
33.55
36.55
39.55
42.55
45.55
49.55
53.55
57.55
3.5
6.5
10
d'2
d'z
4.5
5.4
7.4
9.4
11.4
9.3
11.3
11.2
13.2
15.2
17.2
19.2
21.2
23.2
25.2
29.2
35.2
37.2
41.2
44.2
47.2
51.2
25.9
28.9
31.9
34.9
37.9
40.9
43.9
46.9
50.9
54.9
58.9
4.07
4.84
6.84
8.84
10.84
8.59
10.59
10.35
12.35
14.35
16.35
18.35
20.35
22.35
24.35
28.35
34.38
36.38
40.38
43.38
46.38
50.38
24.80
27.80
30.80
33.80
36.80
39.80
42.80
45.80;
49.80
53.80
57.80
Threads DIN 158 - M 30 x 2 keg: Metric taper external threads, d= 30 mm, P = 2 mm,
standard design
1)
2)
For self-sealing joints (e.g. Drain plugs, grease nipples). For larger nominal diameters it is recommended to use
a joint compound to seal in the threads.
3)
D Basic major diameter of internal thread
D2 Basic pitch diameter of internal thread
206
Machine elements: 5.
ads
(not standardized)
Major diameter
Minor diameter
internal
thread
Pitch diameter
Threads/inch
Pitch
d =D
di = Di = d- 1.28 P
= d-2U
d2 = D2 = d-0.640 P
N
P =
Thread depth
Radius
Thread angle
25.4 mm
N
/?! = Ht = 0.640 P
H = 0.137 P
55
/4"
/l6"
3
/s"
1
/2"
%"
U"
7
/s"
3
1"
6.35
7.94
9.53
12.70
4.72
6.13
7.49
9.99
5.54
7.03
8.51
11.35
20
18
16
12
0.81
0.90
1.02
1.36
17.5
29.5
44.1
78.4
1V
1V2"
13/4"
2"
31.75
38.10
44.45
50.80
27.10
32.68
37.95
43.57
29.43
35.39
41.20
47.19
6
5
4.5
2.32
2.71
3.25
3.61
577
839
1 131
1491
15.88
19.05
22.23
25.40
12.92
15.80
18.61
21.34
14.40
17.42
20.42
23.37
11
10
9
8
1.48
1.63
1.81
2.03
131
196
272
358
2V 4 "
2V 2 "
3"
3 V2"
57.15
63.50
76.20
88.90
49.02
55.37
66.91
78.89
53.09
59.44
72.56
83.89
4
4
3.5
3.25
4.07
4.07
4.65
5.00
1886
2408
3516
4888
Pipe threads
internalthread
external thread
straight
internal thread
cf. American Taper Standard-Pipe Threads NPT: page 203
Thread designation
DIN ISO 228-1
DIN EN10226-1
External and
External
Internal
internal threads threads
threads
G1
G1 1 / 4
G1 1 / 2
G2
G2 1 / 2
G3
G4
G5
G6
R1
R1 1 / 4
R1 1 / 2
R2
R2V2
R3
R4
R5
R6
Rp1
Rp1 1 / 4
Rp1 1 / 2
Rp2
Rp2 1 / 2
Rp3
Rp4
Rp5
Rp6
Major
diameter
Pitch
diameter
Pitch
Threads
per
inch
N
Profile
height
D2
d, = Di
7.723
9.728
13.157
7.142
9.147
12.301
6.561
8.566
11.445
0.907
0.907
1.337
0.581
0.581
0.856
16.662
20.995
26.441
15.806
19.793
25.279
14.950
18.631
24.117
1.337
1.814
1.814
0.856
1.162
1.162
33.249
41.910
47.803
31.770
40.431
46.324
30.291
38.952
44.845
2.309
2.309
2.309
1.479
1.479
1.479
59.614
75.184
87.884
58.135
73.705
86.405
56.656
72.226
84.926
2.309
2.309
2.309
1.479
1.479
1.479
113.030
138.430
163.830
111.551
136.951
162.351
110.072
135.472
160.872
2.309
2.309
2.309
1.479
1.479
1.479
d-D
d2
Minor
diameter
h = h, = Hn
Usable
length of
external
threads
Machine elements: 5.
ads
Dimension
a
R2
For pitch P in mm
2-5
6-12
1.5
0.15
0.075
0.15
0.25
0.125
0.25
14-44
0.5
0.25
0.5
1
0.5
Nominal diameter
Single start pitch
and multiple start lead
Multiple start pitch
No. of threads
Minor 0 external threads
Major 0 internal threads
Minor 0 internal threads
Pitch 0
Thread depth
Thread overlap
Crest clearance
Radius
Width of flat
Thread angle
d
P
Ph
n = Ph:P
d3 = d-(P+2 ac)
04 = d+2 ac
01 = d-P
d2 = D2 = d-0.5 P
h3 = H4 = 0.5 P + a c
Hi = 0,5 P
ac
and R2
w- = 0.366 - P - 0 . 5 4 - a
30c1
Thread dimensions in mm
Thread dimensions in mm
Minor 0
Minor 0
Thread
Thread
Major Thread Width
Major Thread Width designation
designation
Pitch 0 ext. th. int. th.
Pitch 0 ext. th. int. th.
of
flat
depth
0
0 depth of flat
dx P
d x P
D^
D^
w
D 4 *3 = H 4 w
<h
4> = 92 <h
*>4 / 3 = H
4
10.5
12.5
1.25
1.75
0.60
0.96
Tr 40 x
Tr 44 x
36.5
40.5
32
36
33
37
41
45
12
16
16.5
20.5
2.25
2.25
1.33
1.33
Tr 48 x
Tr 52 x
44
48
39
43
40
44
49
53
4.5
4.5
2.66
2.66
18.5
22.5
19
23
24.5
28.5
2.75
2.75
1.70
1.70
Tr 60 x 9
Tr 70 x 10
55.5
65
50
59
51
60
61
71
5
5.5
3.02
3.39
29
34.5
25
32.5
26
33
33
36.5
3.5
2.0
1.93
0.83
Tr 80 x 10
Tr 90 x 12
75
84
69
77
70
78
81
91
5.5
6.5
3.39
4.12
33
31
29
25
30
26
37
37
3.5
5.5
1.93
3.39
Tr 100 x 12
Tr 140 x 14
94
133
87
124
88
126
101
142
6.5
8
4.12
4.58
Tr 10 x
Tr 12 x
9
10.5
Tr 16 x
Tr 20 x
14
18
11.5
15.5
Tr 24 x
Tr 28 x
21.5
25.5
Tr 32 x
Tr 36 x
Tr 36 x 6
Tr 36 x 10
7.5
8.5
internal thread
external thread
d x P
Minor
0
ds
d =D
P
d3 = d- 1.736 P
Dt = d - 1.5 P
d2 = d-0.75 P
D2 = d - 0.75 P+ 3.176 a
a =0.1 - f P
h3 = 0.8678 P
H, = 0.75 P
R =0.124- P
w = 0.264 P
33
2.29
2.29
Thread
depth
h3
Minor
0
01
Thread
depth
"i
Pitch
0
d2
Thread
designation
d x P
Minor
0
ds
Thread
depth
hs
Minor
0
01
Thread
depth
Pitch
0
dz
S 12x3
}S 1 6 x 4
6.79
9.06
2.60
3.47
7.5
10.0
2.25
3.00
9.75
13.00
S 44 x 7
S 48 x 8
31.85
34.12
6.07
6.94
33.5
36
5.25
6.00
38.75
42.00
S 20 x 4
S 24 x 5
13.06
15.32
3.47
4.34
14.0
16.5
3.00
3.75
17.00
20.25
S 52 x 8
S 60 x 9
38.11
44.38
6.94
7.81
40
46.5
6.00
6.75
46.00
53.25
S 28 x 5
S 32 x 6
19.32
21.58
4.34
5.21
20.5
23.0
3.75
4.50
24.25
27.50
S 70x10
S 80x10
52.64
62.64
8.68
8.68
55
65
7.50
7.50
62.50
72.50
S 36 x 6
S 40 x 7
25.59
27.85
5.21
6.07
27.0
29.5
4.50
5.25
31.50
34.75
S 90x12
S 100x12
69.17
79.17
10.41
10.41
72
82
9.00
9.00
81.00
91.00
208
Machine elements: 5.
ads
Thread tolerances
Tolerance classes for metric ISO threads
Screw thread tolerances are to ensure the function
and interchangeability of internal and external
threads. They are dependent on the diameter tolerances set in this standard and on the precision of
the pitch and the thread angle.
The tolerance class (fine, medium and coarse) is
also dependent on the surface finish of the
threads. Thick electroplated protective coatings
require more clearance (e.g. Tolerance Class 6G)
than bright or phosphatized surfaces (Tolerance
Class 5H).
Internal threads
External threads
Applies to
Labeled by
Tolerance class
(example)
5H
6g
Tolerance grade
(size of tolerance)
Tolerance zone
H
| (position of zero line)
Designation examples
Explanations
M12 x 1 - 5g 6g
External fine threads, nominal 0 12 mm, pitch 1 mm; 5g -> Tolerance class for pitch 0;
6g - Tolerance class for major 0
External coarse threads, nominal 0 12 mm; 6g - Tolerance class for pitch and major 0
M24 - 6G/6e
Thread fit for coarse threads, nominal 0 24 mm, 6G - Tolerance class of the internal
threads, 6e Tolerance class of the external threads
M16
QJ
N
l/l
To
c
'E
o
C
Imin<
M12 - 6g
X
ID
e
cT
C3 ^
t t_
o
co a
'E
'E
Major
0 D
min.
min.
max.
min.
max.
max.
min.
max.
min.
max.
min.
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
2.675
3.545
4.480
5.350
2.775
3.663
4.605
5.500
2.459
3.242
4.134
4.917
2.599
3.422
4.334
5.135
2.980
3.978
4.976
5.974
2.874
3.838
4.826
5.794
2.655
3.523
4.456
5.324
2.580
3.433
4.361
5.212
2.367
3.119
3.995
4.747
2.273
3.002
3.869
4.596
M8
M8 x 1
M10
M10 x 1
8.0
8.0
10.0
10.0
7.188
7.350
9.026
9.350
7.348
7.500
9.206
9.500
6.647
6.917
8.376
8.917
6.912
7.153
8.676
9.153
7.972
7.974
9.968
9.974
7.760
7.794
9.732
9.794
7.160
7.324
8.994
9.324
7.042
7.212
8.862
9.212
6.438
6.747
8.128
8.747
6.272
6.596
7.938
8.596
M12
M12 x 1.5
M16
M16 x 1.5
12.0
12.0
16.0
16.0
10.863
11.026
14.701
15.026
11.063
11.216
14.913
15.216
10.106
10.376
13.385
14.376
10.441
10.676
14.210
14.676
11.966
11.968
15.962
15.968
11.701
11.732
15.682
15.732
10.829
10.994
14.663
14.994
10.679
10.854
14.503
14.854
9.819
10.128
13.508
14.128
9.602
9.930
13.271
13.930
M20
M20 x 1.5
M24
M24 x 2
20.0
20.0
24.0
24.0
18.376
19.026
22.051
22.701
18.600
19.216
22.316
22.925
17.294
18.376
20.752
21.835
17.744
18.676
21.252
22.210
19.958
19.968
23.952
23.962
19.623
19.732
23.577
23.682
18.334
18.994
22.003
22.663
18.164
18.854
21.803
22.493
16.891
18.128
20.271
21.508
16.625
18.930
19.955
21.261
M30
M30 x 2
M36
M36 x 3
30.0
30.0
36.0
36.0
27.727
28.701
33.402
34.051
28.007
28.925
33.702
34.316
26.211
27.835
31.670
32.752
26.771
28.210
32.270
33.252
29.947
29.962
35.940
35.952
29.522
29.682
35.465
35.577
27.674
28.663
33.342
34.003
27.462
28.493
33.118
33.803
25.653
27.508
31.033
32.271
25.306
27.261
30.655
31.955
Threads
M3
M4
M5
M6
1)
Pitch 0 D2
Minoi 0 DT
Majo r 0 d
Pitch 0 d2
209
Design
Standard range
from-to
Standard
Fi
bj i
ti
i
Fi i i
b
11
1
1j h - e
pages 212-214
B-
M1.6-M64
DIN EN
ISO 4014
M1.6-M64
DIN EN
ISO 4017
M8x1-M64x4
DIN EN
ISO 8765
M8x1-M64x4
DIN EN
ISO 8676
M3-M20
DIN EN
ISO 24015
Fit bolt
M8-M48
DIN 609
With larger
width across flats
M12-M36
DIN EN
14399-4
M12-M30
DIN 7999
pages 215,216
+--+
M1.6-M64
DIN EN
ISO 4762
M8x1-M64x4
DIN EN
ISO 21269
M3-M24
DIN 7984
Slotted
M1.6-M10
DIN EN
ISO 1207
<
Slotted
M1.6-M10
DIN EN
ISO 2009
M3-M20
DIN EN
ISO 10642
M1.6-M10
DIN EN
ISO 2010
DIN EN
ISO 7047
I,
f ^
|r_,
page 214 |
| Cap screws
1*
Application, properties
pages 217,218
ST2.2-ST9.5
DIN
ISO 7049
Countersunk
head screw
ST2.2-ST6.3
DIN
ISO 7050
Round head
countersunk screws
ST2.2-ST9.9
DIN
ISO 7051
210
Design
Standard range
from-to
Standard
Application, properties
ST2.2-ST6.3
DIN EN
ISO 15481
DIN EN
ISO 15483
Studs
page 219
/. 2 d
/ e ~ 1.25 d
/e * 1 d
M4-M24
M4-M48
M4-M48
DIN 835
DIN 939
DIN 938
Set screws
page 220
With dog point
and slotted
M1.6-M12
DIN EN
27435
M1.6-M24
DIN EN ISO
4028
M1.6-M12
DIN EN
27434
M1.6-M24
DIN EN ISO
4027
M1.6-M12
DIN EN
24766
M1.6-M24
DIN EN ISO
4026
Drain plugs
page 219
Heavy type with
hexagon socket or
hexagon head
M10x1M52x1.5
DIN 908
DIN 910
page 218
M2-M10
DIN 7500-1
Eye bolts
page 219
M8-M 100x6
DIN 580
Type
1)
Hex screw
Drain plug
Cap screws
I
Reference standard,
e.g. ISO, DIN, EN;
Sheet number of
the standard1'
Bolts and screws standardized according to ISO, DIN EN or DIN EN ISO have the abbreviation ISO in their designation. Bolts and screws standardized according to DIN have the abbreviation DIN in their designation.
211
Stainless steels
DIN EN ISO 3506-1
9.8
A 2-70
Tensile strength Rm
Yield strength Re
Steel microstr.
Steel group
Tensile strength Rm
Re = 9 - 8 - 1 0 N/mm 2
= 720 N/mm 2
A austenitic
F ferritic
Rm = 70 10 N/mm 2
= 700 N/mm 2
600
800
900
1000
1200
500
500
700
480
640
720
900
1080
210
210
450
12
10
20
20
13
Elong. at fracture EL in %
1)
10
Tolerances
fine
medium
coarse
Thread
d
Clearance hole d h
Series
fine
med. coarse
Thread
d
1)
Clearance hole d h
Series
fine
med. coarse
M1
M1.2
1.1
1.3
1.2
1.4
1.3
1.5
M5
M6
5.3
6.4
M1.6
M2
1.7
2.2
1.8
2.4
2
2.6
M8
M10
8.4
10.5
9
11
M2.5
M3
M4
2.7
3.2
4.3
2.9
3.4
4.5
3.1
3.6
4.8
M12
M16
M20
13
17
21
13.5
17.5
22
1)
5.5
6.6
Thread
d
Clearance hole d h 1 )
Series
fine
med. coarse
M24
M30
25
31
26
33
28
35
10
12
M36
M42
37
43
39
45
42
48
14.5
18.5
24
M48
M56
M64
50
58
66
52
62
70
56
66
74
5.8
7
Tolerance grades for d h ; fine series: H12, medium series: H13, coarse series: H14
am.
3.6, 4.6
4.8-6.8
0.8 d
1.2 d
0.8 d
1.2 d
1.2 d
0.8 d
1.2 d
1.2 d
1.2 d
0.8 d
1.2 d
1.0 d
1.0 - d
1.3 d
1.5- d
1.5 d
Copper alloys
1.3 d
1.3 - d
1.6 d
2.2 d
Al alloys, age-hardened
0.8 d
1.2 d
1.2 d
1.6 d
Plastics
2.5 d
x 3 P (thread pitch)
e-| according to DIN 76,
see page 89
8.8
-
1.6 - d
-
10.9
-
Engagement depth for fine threads l e = 1.25 Engagement depth for coarse threads
212
Repla ces
DIN EN
DIN
4014
24014
931
t?
WAF'
M1.6
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
WAF
k
dw
3.2
1.1
2.3
4
1.4
3.1
5
1.7
4.1
5.5
2
4.6
7
2.8
5.9
8
3.5
6.9
10
4
8.9
13
5.3
11.6
16
6.4
14.6
e
b
3.4
9
4.3
10
5.5
11
6
12
7.7
14
8.8
16
11.1
18
14.4
22
17.8
26
j from
/ to
12
16
16
20
16
25
20
30
25
40
25
50
30
60
40
80
45
100
Property
classes
1
j
OJ
Thread d
Thread d
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
M42
M48
M56
WAF
k
18
7.5
24
10
30
12.5
36
15
46
18.7
55
22.5
65
26
75
30
85
35
dw
e
16.6
20
22
26.2
27.7
33
33.3
39.6
42.8
50.9
51.1
60.8
60
71.3
69.5
82.6
78.7
93.6
b1>
30
38
44
46
52
54
60
73
66
72
85
84
97
96
109
108
121
137
90
240
110
300
140
360
160
440
180
500
220
500
1)
b3>
2)
j from
/ to
/ in mm
Grade
< M12
all
M16-M24 i
r
/ < 150
/ > 160
> M30
all
50
120
80
200
Property
classes
Nominal
lengths /
65
160
A2-70, A4-70
A2-50, A4-50
i
Qj J
Thread d
24017
I.
1
JH
JL.
wy
Repla ces
DIN EN
DIN
933
Ik_
>
T;J
/ in mm
Grade
< M12
all
Is 150
/ > 160
all
M16-M24
> M30
as per
agreement
M1.6
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
WAF
k
3.2
1.1
4
1.4
5
1.7
5.5
2
7
2.8
8
3.5
10
4
13
5.3
16
6.4
dw
e
2.3
3.4
3.1
4.3
4.1
5.5
4.6
6
5.9
7.7
6.9
8.8
8.9
11.1
11.6
14.4
14.6
17.8
j from
/ to
2
16
4
20
5
25
6
30
8
40
10
50
12
60
16
80
20
100
Property
classes
Thread d
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
M42
M48
M56
WAF
k
18
7.5
24
10
30
12.5
36
15
46
18.7
55
22.5
65
26
75
30
85
35
dw
e
16.6
20
22
26.2
27.7
33
33.3
39.6
42.8
50.9
51.1
60.8
60
71.3
69.5
82.6
78.7
93.6
j from
/ to
25
120
30
200
40
200
50
200
60
200
70
200
80
200
100
200
110
200
Property
classes
Nominal
lengths /
A2-50, A4-50
as per
agreement
213
Repla ces
DIN EN
DIN
8765
960
28765
Thread d
WAF
k
13
5.3
dw
e
Qj
w,A
C|
'
j from
/ to
-1
16
6.4
22
b2>
b3>
26
40
80
24
10
18
7.5
30
45
100
50
120
30
12.5
38
44
65
160
46
52
80
200
M30
x2
M36
x3
M42
x3
M48
x3
M56
x4
46
18.7
55
22.5
65
26
75
30
85
35
42.8
50.9
51.1
60.8
60
71.3
69.5
82.6
78.7
93.6
54
60
73
66
72
85
84
97
96
109
108
121
137
100
240
120
300
140
360
160
440
200
480
220
500
36
15
Nominal
lengths /
40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 90-140, 150, 160, 180, 200,
220-460, 480, 500 mm
Threads d
/ in mm
Grade
< M12x1.5
all
Property
classes
M16x1.5-
< 150
Explanations
1)
M24x2
> 150
> M30x2
all
=>
2)
for / = 125-200 mm
Repla ces
DIN EN
DIN
8676
t
T
L
Qj
W;
28676
961
^J
[D
<
WAF
k
13
5.3
dw
e
18
7.5
16
6.4
16
80
20
100
25
120
24
10
35
160
30
12.5
40
200
36
15
40
200
M56
x4
46
18.7
55
22.5
65
26
75
30
85
35
42.8
50.9
51.1
60.8
60
71.3
69.5
82.6
78.7
93.6
40
200
40
90
200J 420
100
480
120
500
Thread d
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
WAF
k
dw
5.5
2
4.4
7
2.8
5.7
8
3.5
6.7
10
4
8.7
13
5.3
11.4
16
6.4
14.4
18
7.5
16.4
24
10
22
30
12.5
27.7
ds
e
2.6
6
3.5
7.5
4.4
8.7
5.3
10.9
7.1
14.2
8.9
17.6
10.7
19.9
14.5
26.2
18.2
33
12
14
16
18
22
28
26
32
30
36
38
44
46
52
20
30
20
40
25
50
25
60
30
80
40
100
45
120
55
150
65
150
b2)
abm
M48
x3
Property
classes
M42
x3
WA F
M36
x3
16, 20, 25, 30, 35-60, 65, 70, 80, 90-140, 150, 160, 180, 200,
220-460, 480, 500 mm
M30
x2
Nominal
lengths /
QJ
Thread d
j from
/ to
3)
j from
/ to
Nominal
lengths /
Property
classes
Explanations
Threads d
/ in mm
Grade
- M20
all
=>
20, 25, 30-65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100-130, 140, 150 mm
5.8, 6.8, 8.8, A2-70
11
2)
214
x1
M10
M10
x1
M12
M12
x1.5
M16
M16
x1.5
M20
M20
x1.5
M24
M24
x2
M30
M30
x2
M36
M36
x3
M42
M42
x3
M48
M48
x3
WAF
k
13
5.3
16
6.4
18
7.5
24
10
30
12.5
36
15
46
19
55
22
65
26
75
30
ds k6
9
14.4
11
13
19.9
17
26.2
21
33
25
39.6
32
50.9
38
17.8
60.8
44
71.3
82.6
14.5
16.5
17.5
19.5
20.5
22.5
25
27
32
28.5
30.5
35.5
36.5
41.5
43
48
49
54
56
63
61
68
38
150
45
150
55
150
65
200
200
80
200
85
200
Thread d
WAF
"ta
i -
b1>
from
to
Nominal
lengths /
I in mm
< 10
all
> 12
all
25
80
32
120
30
100
Grade
Explanations
A2-70
1)
2)
Product grade C
M12
M16
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M36
WAF
k
22
8
20.1
27
10
24.9
32
13
29.5
36
14
33.3
41
15
38
46
17
42.8
50
19
46.6
60
23
55.9
23.9
23
29.6
28
35
33
39.6
34
45.2
39
50.9
41
55.4
44
66.4
52
35
95
40
130
45
155
50
165
60
195
70
200
200
from
to
75
85
200
Nominal
35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70-175, 180, 185, 190, 195, 200 mm
lengths /
Property class,
10.9
surface
normal - > with thin oil film, hot-galvanized - > code: tZn
Hexagon head bolt EN 14399-4 - M12 x 65 - 10.9 - HV - tZn:
M12, / = 65 mm, property class 10.9, for high-strength bolting
assemblies, with hot-galvanized surface
WAF
M12
M16
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
21
27
10
25
34
13
32
36
14
34
41
15
39
46
17
43.5
50
19
47.5
21
37.3
26
23
39.6
28
25
45.2
29.5
28
50.9
32.5
31
55.4
35
50
180
55
200
55
200
200
8
19
d8b11
e
b
22.8
18.5
17
29.6
22
j from
i to
40
120
45
160
Nominal
lengths /
Property
classes
Product grade C
Thread d
cL
I
k
for / = 50-150 mm
WAF
as per
agreement
A2-50
70
50
25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 38, 40, 42, 45, 48, 50, 55, 60-150, 160-200 mm
Property
classes
M8
M8
63>
13
40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65-180, 185, 190, 195, 200 mm
All bolts: property class 10.9
Hexagon head bolt DIN 7999 - M24 x 165:
d= M24,1 = 165 mm, property class 10.9
60
65
200
215
Replaces
DIN
4762
912
Thread d
WAF
k
dk
M1.6
M2
M2.5
M3
1.5
1.5
2
3.8
2
2.5
4.5
2.5
3
5.5
16
20
17
25
18
>25
1.6
b
for/
/1
for /
from
to
Property
classes
WAF
1
L
h
Thread d
/1
C3
M5
M6
M8
M10
4
5
B.5
5
6
10
6
8
13
8
10
16
20
>30
22
>30
24
>35
28
>40
32
>45
3
= 30
3.8
<35
4.5
<40
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.5
2.1
< 16
< 16
<20
<20
<25
2.4
<25
2.5
16
3
20
4
25
5
30
6
40
8
50
by agreement
M24
M30
M36
M42
M48
M56
WAF
k
dk
10
12
18
14
16
24
17
20
30
19
24
36
22
30
45
27
36
54
32
42
63
36
48
72
41
56
84
b
for /
36
> 55
44
> 65
52
>80
60
>90
72
84
>110
> 120
96
: 140
/1
for /
5.3
< 50
7.5
<70
10.5
12
; 60
: 80
< 100
< 110
20
120
25
160
200
40
200
45
200
45
200
Nominal
lengths /
30
A2-70, A4-70
70
300
80
300
as per
agreement
A2-50, A4-50
2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30-65, 70, 80-150, 160,
180, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300 mm
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
WAF
k
d,
2
2
5.5
2.5
4
4
10
5
5
13
7
6
16
7
18
12
9
24
14
3
3.5
8.5
30
17
13
36
b
for /
12
>20
14
>25
16
>30
18
>30
22
>35
26
>40
30
>50
38
>60
44
>70
46
>90
h
for /
1.5
2.1
3
<25
3.8
<30
4.5
<35
5.3
<45
6
<50
<20
2.4
<25
7.5
< 16
<60 <80
5
20
30
10
40
12
80
16
100
20
25
80
30
80
Nominal
lengths /
M3-M24
60
300
Thread d
from
to
Grade
124
> 180
zzy
Thread d
108
> 160
15
13.5
16.5
< 130 < 150 < 160
16
100
M20
M1.6-M56
di
12
80
M16
Grade
WAF
10
60
Property
classes
Thread d
M4
M12
from
to
Property
classes
2.8
11
40
100
50
100
5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 mm
8.8, A2-70, A4-70
Cap screw DIN 7984 - M12 x 50 - A2-70:
d= M12, / = 50 mm, property class A2-70
216
WAF
L
h
1(
ZZ3
1=4
/1
Thread d
M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36 M42 M48 M56
x2
3x
x4
xl x1 x1.5 x1.5 x1.5 x2
x3
x3
WAF
k
dk
6
8
13
10
8
10
16
12
18
14
16
24
b
for /
36
44
28 32
>40 >45 >55 >65
h
for /
3
3
4.5
< 35 <40 <50
from
to
Nominal
lengths /
20
12
80
19
24
36
30
45
52
>80
60
>90
r 110
4.5
4.5
22
25
30
72
dk
k
Nominal
lengths /
1)
80
300
70
300
as per
agreement
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
7
2.6
8.5
3.3
10
3.9
13
5
16
6
0.8
1.2
1.1
1.2
0.9
1.3
1.6
1.6
4
30
5
40
6
50
60
M1.6
M2
M2.5
M3
3.8
1.4
4.5
1.8
5.5
2
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
3
20
3
25
16
0.6
2.5
2.4
10
12
80
80
Thread d
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
WAF
dk
k
2
5.5
1.9
2.5
7.5
2.5
3
9.4
3.1
4
11.3
3.7
5
15.2
5
6
19.2
6.2
8
23.1
7.4
10
29
8.8
12
36
10.2
b
for /
18
>30
20
>30
22
>35
24
>40
28
>50
CNE
Al
00
/i
124
>180
60
300
A2-70, A4-70
Property
classes
55
200
for / < 45 mm
for / > 45 mm
108
>160
12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,
120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300 mm
1.1
from
to
41
56
84
96
45
200
84
36
48
72
WAF
32
42
63
40
200
200
27
36
54
: 120 >140
Property
classes
Explanation
20
17
20
30
36
>65
44
>80
52
100
/i
for /
1.5
<25
2.1
<25
2.4
<30
3
<35
3.8
<45
4.5
<50
5.3
<60
6
<70
7.5
<90
8
30
8
40
8
50
8
60
10
80
12
100
20
100
30
100
35
100
j from
/ to
Property
classes
Nominal
lengths /
8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 90, 100 mm
Countersunk head screw ISO 10642 - M5 x 30 - 8.8:
d= M5, / = 30 mm, property class 8.8
217
M1.6
dk
k
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
3.8
4.7
1.5
5.5
1.7
8.4
2.7
9.3
2.7
11.3
3.3
15.8
4.7
18.3
5
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.7
1.2
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.2
1.2
2.0
1.6
1.4
2.4
2
2
3.2
2.5
2.3
3.8
3
20
4
25
5
30
6
40
50
60
10
80
12
80
1.2
0.4
0.4
0.6
1.0
C1)
from
to
2.5
16
Property
classes
Nominal
lengths /
Explanation
n II Crj \
"T3 oJ
Iu
-
. b
M1.6
dk
k
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
3.8
4.7
1.5
5.5
1.7
8.4
2.7
9.3
2.7
11.3
3.3
15.8
4.7
18.3
5
2.5
1.2
-Q
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.2
1.2
1.6
0.6
1.3
1.4
1.6
2.3
2.6
2.5
16
3
20
4
25
5
30
6
40
50
60
10
80
12
80
C *
from
to
for / < 45 mm
- ~r~~i
b
Property
classes
Nominal
lengths /
Explanation
1)
Thread d
ST2.9
ST3.5
ST4.2
ST4.8
ST5.5
ST6.3
3.8
7.3
2.4
8.4
9.3
2.6
2.8
0.5
5.5
1.7
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.2
10.3
3
1.3
11.3
3.2
1.4
4.5
16
6.5
19
9.5
25
9.5
32
9.5
32
13
38
13
38
dk
1.1
k
f
from
to
DIN EN ISO 7051,
Form C
C 1>
Nominal
lengths /
Forms
Explanation
218
ST2.2
ST2.9
ST3.5
4
1.6
5.6
2.4
4.5
16
6.5
19
d,
k
from
to
WA
k
ST4.2
ST4.8
ST5.5
ST6.3
2.6
3.1
9.5
3.7
11
4
13
4.6
9.5
25
9.5
32
9.5
32
13
38
13
38
C1>
I
Nominal
lengths /
Forms
Explanation
11
1)
ST2.9
ST3.5
ST4.2
0-0.5
0.6-0.8
0.9-1.1
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.6
2.7
2.8
1.2-1.4
1.5-1.7
1.8-2.0
1.8
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.8
2.9
3.0
2.0-2.5
2.6-3.0
3.1-3.5
3.0
3.0
ST4.8
ST5.5
ST6.3
3.2
3.2
3.7
3.7
4.2
4.9
3.3
3.5
3.5
3.9
3.9
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.6
4.9
5.0
5.2
3.5
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.3
4.6
4.7
5.0
5.3
5.3
5.8
Form
n
\
-*t3
11
DE
Thread
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
WAF
4
1.4
5
1.7
5,5
2
dk
e
2.3
3.4
3.1
4.3
3
16
1.5
M5
M6
M8
M10
2.8
3.5
10
4
13
5.3
16
6.4
4.1
5.5
4.6
6
6
7.7
6.9
11.6
11.1
14.4
14.6
17.8
4
20
4
25
6
30
40
8
50
10
60
12
80
3.8
2
2.5
4.5
2.5
3
5.5
4
5
8.5
5
6
10
6
8
13
10
16
3
16
4
20
4
25
6
30
40
50
10
60
12
80
dk
k
f
3.8
5.5
1.7
1
8.4
2.7
1.2
9.3
2.7
1.4
11.3
3.3
1.4
15.8
4.7
0.4
4.7
1.5
0.5
18.3
5
2.3
j from
/ to
4
16
5
20
25
30
10
40
10
50
12
60
20
80
from
to
WAF
WAF
EE
k
dk
from
to
WAF
[ E
-RAI
Q
I
rI
t
NE
1.2
C1'
Nominal
lengths I
Explanation
Product grade A (page 211)
219
M4
M6
M5
Thread d
x1
t3
n r
U
1
1
b
e
from
to
835
938
939
Aluminum alloys
Steel
Cast iron
12
18
14
20
DIN 835
DIN 938
DIN 939
Application
DIN
For screwing into
M8
M8
Property
classes
Nominal
lengths /
20
30
20
40
M10 M12
M10 M12
xl.25 xl.25
M16
M16
x1.5
M20
M20
x1.5
M24
M24
x2
16
22
18
24
22
28
26
32
30
36
38
44
46
52
54
60
10
5
6.5
12
20
10
12
24
12
15
32
16
20
40
7.5
16
8
10
25
48
24
30
25
50
25
60
30
35
100
40
120
50
170
60
200
200
80
20
70
Eye bolts
M30
M36
M42
M48
M56
18
36
75
144
80
85
166
90
95
184
100
85
63
100
68
110
78
8.60
6.10
8.20
cfi
d2
20
d3
20
13
22.5
45
25
26
54
30
30.5
63
35
35
72
40
45
90
50
55
108
60
65
126
70
25
17
30
20.5
35
27
40
30
50
36
65
45
75
54
Materials
vertical
(single line)
under 45
(double line)
Vertical
under 45c
1.80
1.29
3.20
2.30
4.60
3.30
11.5
6.30
4.50
M12
x1.5
M16
x1.5
M20
x1.5
M24
x1.5
M30
x1.5
M36
x1.5
M42
x1.5
M48
x1.5
M52
x1.5
14
17
17
21
12
21
21
12
25
26
14
29
27
14
36
30
16
42
32
16
49
33
16
55
33
16
60
33
16
c
WAF
e
3
10
10.9
3
13
14.2
3
17
18.7
4
19
20.9
4
22
23.9
4
24
4
27
29.6
5
30
33
5
30
33
5
30
33
Materials
Thread d
26.1
M12
x1.5
M16
x1.5
M20
x1.5
M24
x1.5
M30
x1.5
M36
x1.5
M42
x1.5
M48
x1.5
M52
x1.5
d\
I
c
14
11
3
17
15
3
21
15
3
25
18
4
29
18
4
36
4
42
21
5
49
21
5
55
21
5
60
21
5
WAF
t
e
5
5
5.7
6
7
6.9
7.5
9.2
10
7.5
11.4
12
7.5
13.7
17
9
19.4
19
10.5
21.7
22
10.5
25.2
24
10.5
27.4
24
10.5
27.4
Thread d
Materials
20
220
Machine elements:
Set
5.2 Bolts a n d s c r e w s
screws
S l o t t e d set s c r e w s
LU CO
4
n
t
0.5
r-
Q
^ in
LU CO
Z rO
from
to
with flat point
^
co
d^
n
t
0.6
0.2
0.5
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.7
0.3
0.8
0.3
0.4
1
0.3
0.4
1.1
0.4
0.6
1.4
0.5
0.8
1.6
1.5
1
2
2
1.2
2.5
2.5
1.6
3
3.6
2
3
3
10
3
12
4
16
6
25
8
30
5
35
10
40
12
55
16
60
0.8
1.1
1
1.3
1.5
1.5
2
1.8
2.5
2.3
3.5
2.8
4.3
3.3
5.5
4.3
7
5.3
8.5
6.3
0.3
0.7
0.3
0.8
0.4
1
0.4
1.1
0.6
1.4
0.8
1.6
1.2
2.5
1.6
3
2.5
3
10
4
12
5
16
6
20
8
25
10
40
12
50
16
60
1
0.3
0.8
1.5
0.4
1
2
0.4
1.1
2.5
0.6
1.4
3.5
0.8
1.6
5.5
1.2
2.5
7
1.6
3
8.5
2
3.6
2
10
2.5
12
3
16
4
20
5
25
40
10
50
12
60
from
to
M4
0.8
0.3
0.7
from
to
30
6
30
Property
classes
Valid standard
Replaces
DIN EN 27434
DIN EN 27435
DIN EN 24766
DIN 553
DIN 417
DIN 551
Nominal
lengths /
S e t s c r e w s w i t h h e x a g o n socket
Thread d
M2 M2.5 M3
M20
2.3
1.5
2.9
2
3.4
2
4.6
3
5.7
4
6.9
4.8
9.1
6.4
11.4
8
2
10
2.5
12
3
16
4
20
5
25
6
30
40
10
50
12
60
16
60
20
60
1
1.3
0.9
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.8
1.5
2.5
2.3
3.5
2.8
2.5
4
3.3
3
5.5
4.3
4
7
5.3
5
8.5
6.3
6
12
8.4
15
10.4
10
1
0.8
1.5
1.7
1.2
2.3
1.5
2.9
3.4
2
4.6
3
5.7
4
6.9
4.8
9.1
6.4
11.4
1.2
2.5
10
3
12
4
16
5
20
6
25
30
8
40
20
50
12
60
16
60
1.5
1.3
2.5
1.5
3.5
2.5
8.5
6
12
0.9
15
10
LU O
1.5
&
1.2
1.7
1.2
2.3
1.5
2.9
0.8
3.4
2
4.6
3
5.7
4
6.9
4.8
9.2
6.4
11.4
8
2.5
5
25
6
30
8
40
10
50
16
16
4
20
12
12
60
60
20
60
_ oo
Z
from
to
d1
z
WAF
LU O
from
to
di
WAF
5
10
2.5
5
CN
| o
D c/)
CD
CM
Q c/D
DIN 913
DIN 914
DIN 915
M16
1.7
1.2
M12
1.5
1.2
o 00
Replaces
1.5
3
M10
1
0.8
SW " k ^ -
Valid standard
1.3
2.5
M8
0.8
1.5
sS
M6
0.7
1.3
Z CN
LU O
SW
M5
0.5
0.9
d^
WAF
if
M4
Property
classes
Nominal
lengths /
from
to
10
5.5
4
20
60
221
M a c h i n e e l e m e n t s : 5.2 Bolts a n d s c r e w s
F p preload
Fa applied force
Load
static
2.5
6.3
10
16
25
40
63
F c joint clamp
force
dynamic
1.6
2.5
6.3
10
16
25
40
fa> W5
fs bolt extension
f} joint compression
5.8, 6.
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
8.8
M5
M6
M8
M8
M10
M16
M20
M24
Q. CD 10.9
P o 12.9
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M4
M5
M5
M8
M8
M10
M12
M16
1)
2)
Shank bo Its
Thread
F3)
v
in
mm2
Tightening torque
Mx in N m
Preload
F p in kN
Tightening torque
Mt in N m
Preload
F p in kN
A/v2)
in
mm2
4
coefficier it of fric tion /J )
0.12 0.14 0.08 0.12 0.14
1rota I
0.08
M8
8.8
10.9
12.9
36.6
18.6
27.1
31.9
17.2
25.2
29.5
16.5
24.2
28.3
17.9
26.2
30.7
23.1
34
39.6
25.3
37.2
43.6
26.6
12.9
19
22.2
11.8
17.3
20.2
11.2
16.4
19.2
13.6
20
23.4
17.6
25.8
30.2
19.2
28.2
33
M8 x 1
8.8
10.9
12.9
39.2
20.3
29.7
34.8
18.8
27.7
32.4
18.1
26.6
31.1
18.8
27.7
32.4
24.8
36.4
42.6
27.3
40.1
47.1
29.2
14.6
21.5
25.1
13.4
19.6
23
12.7
18.7
21.9
13.6
20
23.4
17.6
25.8
30.2
19.2
28.2
33
M10
8.8
10.9
12.9
58.0
29.5
43.3
50.7
27.3
40.2
47
26.2
38.5
45
36
53
61
46
68
80
51
75
88
42.4
20.7
30.4
35.6
18.9
27.7
32.4
17.9
26.4
30.8
25
37
43
32
47
55
35
51
60
M10x1.25
8.8
10.9
12.9
61.2
31.5
46.5
54.4
29.4
43.2
50.6
28.3
41.5
48.6
37
55
64
49
72
84
54
80
93
45.6
22.7
33.5
39.2
20.9
30.6
35.9
19.9
29.2
34.4
27
40
46
35
51
60
38
56
65
M12
8.8
10.9
12.9
84.3
43
63
73.9
39.9
58.5
68.5
38.3 61
56.2 90
65.8 105
80
117
137
87
128
150
61.7
30.3
44.6
52.1
27.6
40.6
47.7
26.3
38.6
45.2
43
63
74
55
81
95
60
88
103
M12x1.5
8.8
10.9
12.9
88.1
48.2
70.8
82.7
45
66
72.3
43.2 65
63.5 96
74.3 112
87
128
150
96
141
165
65.8
35
52
61
32.6
47.8
56
31
45.7
53.4
48
71
83
63
93
108
69
102
119
M16
8.8
10.9
12.9
157
81
119
140
194
285
333
214
314
367
117
58.4
85.8
100
53.4
78.5
91.8
51
106
74.8 156
87.5 182
137
202
236
150
221
258
M16x1.5
8.8
10.9
12.9
167
88
129
151
207
304
355
229
336
394
128
65.5 60.2
96.2 88.4
104
113
57.4 115
84.5 169
197
99
151
222
260
166
244
285
M20
8.8
10.9
12.9
245
131
186
218
121
173
202
117
166
194
297
423
495
391
557
653
430
615
720
182
92
134
157
86
123
144
82
117
137
215
306
358
278
395
462
304
432
505
M20x1.5
8.8
10.9
12.9
272
149
212
247
138
200
231
134
190
225
320
455
533
433
618
721
482
685
802
210
113
160
188
104
148
173
100
142
166
242
345
402
322
460
540
355
508
594
M24
8.8
10.9
12.9
353
188
268
313
175
250
291
168
238
280
512
730
855
675
960
1125
743
1060
1240
262
136
193
225
124
177
207
118
168
196
370
527
617
480
682
800
523
745
871
M24x2
8.8
10.9
12.9
384
210
300
350
196
280
327
189
268
315
545
776
908
735
1046
1224
816
1160
1360
295
158
224
263
145
207
242
139
198
230
410
582
682
543
775
905
600
852
998
During assembly, the bolts are under tensile and torsional stress. The tightening torque Mt utilizes approx. 90% of the
yield strength of the bolt material.
1)
4)
As stress area
^ = - 0 8 : b o l t MoS 2 lubricated
2)
A w waist cross section
fj = 0.12: bolt lightly oiled
3)
F property class of bolt
ij = 0.14: bolt secured with microencapsulated plastic
222
Locking fasteners
A locking fastener is generally not necessary for screw
joints which are sufficiently dimensioned and securely
mounted. The clamping forces prevent the slipping of
the screwed parts or loosening of the bolts and nuts. In
practice a loss of clamping force can still occur due to
the following causes:
\ Z
\
\
"O
L o c k i n g e d g e ri n g s , b o l t s / s c r e w s w i ith
t e e t h u n d e r t h e head, m i c r o e n c a p s ii l a t e d
a d h e s i v e s , l i q u id a d h e s i v e : o p t i m a l
u n s c r e w i n g loq k
I \
1 \
1 \
CD
0)
Unscrewing of the screw joint: For joints dynamically loaded transverse to the bolt axis a fully self-actuated unscrewing can occur.
I
Q.
1000
2000
3000
load cycles
4000
5000
Locking element
Standard
Type, property
Loaded
together,
spring loaded
withdrawn
withdrawn
withdrawn
withdrawn
ineffective
ineffective
ineffective
ineffective
Interlocking
lock washer
castle nut with cotter pin
lock wire
withdrawn
DIN 935-1+2
captive fastener
captive fastener
captive fastener
Force-fit
(gripping)
jam nut
bolts and nuts
with gripping
polyamide coating
Blocking
(force-fit and
interlocking)
Bonded
DIN 267-28
ISO 2320
DIN 267-27
223
e-, = 1.4142 s
8 = 0.7071-6!
Length of diagonal
Width across
Two Square Hexa- flats (WAF)
flats
gonal Nominal size
d
s
e2
3.7
4.5
3.5
21
4
4.9
3.8
22
5.7
4.4
4.5
23
Two
flats
d
24
25
26
Length of diagonal
Square Hexa- Octagonal gonal
e
29.7
31.1
32.5
23.4
24.5
25.6
22.7
23.8
24.9
4.5
5
5.5
5
6
7
6.4
7.1
7.8
4.9
5.5
6.0
24
25
26
28
29
31
33.9
35.5
36.8
26.8
27.9
29.0
26.0
27.0
28.1
6
7
8
7
8
9
8.5
9.9
11.3
6.6
7.7
8.8
27
28
30
32
33
35
38.2
39.6
42.4
30.1
31.3
33.5
29.1
30.2
32.5
9
10
11
10
12
13
12.7
14.1
15.6
9.9
11.1
12.1
32
34
36
38
40
42
45.3
48.0
50.9
35.7
37.7
40.0
34.6
36.7
39.0
12
13
14
14
15
16
17.0
18.4
19.8
13.3
14.4
15.5
41
46
50
48
52
58
58.0
65.1
70.7
45.6
51.3
55.8
44.4
49.8
54.1
15
16
17
17
18
19
21.2
22.6
24.0
16.6
17.8
18.9
55
60
65
65
70
75
77.8
84.8
91.9
61.3
67.0
72.6
59.5
64.9
70.3
18
19
20
21
22
23
25.4
26.9
28.3
20.0
21.1
22.2
70
75
80
82
88
92
99.0
106
113
78.3
83.9
89.6
75.7
81.2
86.6
=>
DIN 475 - WAF 16: Width across flats with nominal size s = 16 mm
Table values as per DIN 475 apply to finished stamped wrought products, bolts,
screws, nuts and fittings. Diagonal lengths calculated by the formula e 2 = 1.1547 s
are larger than the table values, since they are based on the sharp-edged hexagon.
Calculation of regular polygons, page 27.
Properties
Type
internal
torx drive
hexagonal head
Like hexagon head except the torque
transmission is slightly less, requires
less space for tool than with hexagon
head
external
torx drive
hexagon socket
tamper resistant
hexagon drive
Inexpensive and popular, but it is difficult to center the tool, low torque
transmission, high contact pressure
on the loaded driving flats
slotted
Properties
cross recess
Pozidriv
224
Machine elements: 5.
o t s n s
1.6
Metric screws
M1.6
2.5
M2
Tapping screws
V/)
M3.5
M4
ST2.9
ST3.5
ST4.2
1.8
2.4
2.9
3.4
3.9
4.5
d2 min.
3.6
4.4
5.5
6.3
8.2
9.4
d2 max.
3.7
4.5
5.6
6.5
8.4
9.6
1.0
1.1
1.4
1.6
2.3
2.6
Tapping screws
M3
d y H13
10
5.5
M5
Metric screws
M2.5
ST2.2
Nominal sizes
3.5
ST4.8
ST5.5
M6
M8
M10
ST6.3
ST8
ST9.5
6.6
d, H13
5.5
11
d2 min.
10.4
11.5
12.6
17.3
20
d2 max.
10.7
11.8
12.9
17.6
20.3
2.6
2.9
3.1
4.3
4.7
Graphical representation,
see page 83;
1.6
4.5
<
d, H13 1)
1.8
2.4
2.9
3.4
4.5
E
o
tf2H13
3.7
4.6
5.7
6.5
8.6
h -
0.9
1.1
1.4
1.6
2.1
5.5
6.6
7.6
9.5
10.4
12.4
14.4
16.4
2.3
2.5
2.9
3.3
3.7
///.
V/,
d, H13
Application of
Form A for:
Thread 0
E
L_
o
LL
24
10
12
16
20
22
10.5
13
17
21
23
25
d 2 H13
19
24
31
34
37
40
fi a
5.5
11.5
12
13
H131)
LU
75 1
60 1
DIN 7969
10
12
14
16
20
di H131)
3.4
4.5
5.5
15.5
17.5
22
6.9
9.2
11.5
18.3
11
22.7
13.5
d2 H13
6.6
13.7
27.2
31.2
34.0
40.7
h -
1.8
2.3
3.0
3.6
4.6
5.9
6.9
7.8
8.2
9.4
Thread 0
Form E
Machine elements: 5.
225
o n e s
dhH131)
3.4
Series 1
6.5
4.5
Series 3
20
24
27
30
36
17.5
22
26
30
33
39
15
18
20
26
33
40
46
50
58
18
24
20
26
33
40
46
50
58
24
30
36
43
46
54
63
69
10
11
11
13
10
11
15
18
11
13
16
20
6.5
10
13
15
18
24
26
33
40
48
54
61
Series 6
10
13
15
20
24
33
43
48
58
63
73
3.0
3.7
4.3
ISO 4762
DIN 7984
2 a
Series
1
x_
16
13.5
Series 5
ISO 1207
tfhH13
12
11
6.6
Series 2
Series 4
10
5.5
2.4
5.6
6.6
3.4
4.4
5.4
6.4
8.6
10.6
31.0 37.0
/Ra 3.2
1)
2)
^H13
10
co
d, H13
X _
or
Ra 3.2
Rz 25
T.
13
10
16
12
14
16
20
24
27
30
33
36
42
18
21
24
30
36
41
46
50
55
65
22
26
30
33
36
39
45
dh H13
4.5
5.5
6.6
Series 1
Series 2
13
15
18
24
28
33
36
40
46
58
61
73
76
15
18
20
26
33
36
43
46
54
73
76
89
82
93
107
Series 3
10
11
13
18
22
26
30
33
40
48
54
82
61
69
73
82
Hex bolt
3.3
4.1
4.6
6.1
7.2
8.3
11
98
Calculation of counterbore depth for flush mounting (for DIN 974-1 and DIN 974-2)
Determining the allowance Z
washer
H,
bolt/screw
Thread
/ head nominal 0 d
Allowance Z
over 1
to 1.4
over 1.4
to 6
over 6
to 20
over 20
to 27
over 27
to 100
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
counterbore depth
maximum height of the screw/bolt head
maximum height of the washer component
allowance based on thread nominal diameter
(see table)
1)
Counterbore depth 11
t=k,
max + ^ m a x +
226
Machine elements: 5.
ts
Nuts-Overview
Illustration
Design
Standard range
from-to
Standard
page 228
M1.6-M64
DIN EN ISO
4032
M8x1-M64x4
DIN EN ISO
8673
M5-M36
DIN EN ISO
4033
M8x1-M36x3
DIN EN ISO
8674
M1.6-M64
DIN EN ISO
4035
M8x1-M64x4
DIN EN ISO
8675
M3-M36
DIN EN ISO
7040
M8x1-M36x3
DIN EN ISO
10512
M5-M36
DIN EN ISO
7719
M8x1-M36x3
DIN EN ISO
10513
HI
page 229
Applications, properties
with large
width across flats,
coarse threads
M12-M36
with flange,
coarse threads
M5-M20
weld nuts,
coarse threads
M3-M16
M8x1 -M16x1.5
DIN EN
14399-4
DIN 929
high form,
coarse or
fine threads
M4-M100
M8x1-M 100x4
DIN 935
low form,
coarse or
fine threads
M6-M48
M8x1-M48x3
DIN 979
cotter pins
0.6x12-20x280
DIN EN ISO
1234
Machine elements: 5.
227
ts
Standard range
from-to
Design
Standard
Application, properties
Acorn nuts
im
%3lit?
page 231
high form,
coarse or
fine threads
M4-M36
M8x1-M24x2
DIN 1587
low form,
coarse or
fine threads
M4-M48
M8x1-M48x3
DIN 917
page 231
eye nuts,
coarse or
fine threads
M8-M 100x6
M20x2M100x4
DIN 582
page 231
lock nuts
with fine threads
M10x1M200x1.5
DIN 70852
lock washers
10-200
DIN 70952
lock nuts
with fine threads
M 10x0.75M115x2
(KM0-KM23)
DIN 981
lock washers
10-115
(MB0-MB23)
DIN 5406
Knurled nuts
page 232
high form,
coarse threads
M1-M10
DIN 466
low form,
coarse threads
M1-M10
DIN 467
coarse threads
M6-M30
DIN 1479
Designation of nuts
Examples:
1)
ISO 4032 - M 1 2
-8
DIN 929 - M8 x 1 - St
EN 1661 - M 1 2
-10
Nuts standardized according to ISO or DIN EN ISO, have the code ISO in their designation.
Nuts standardized according to DIN, have the code DIN in their designation.
Nuts standardized according to DIN EN, have the code EN in their designation.
228
Machine elements: 5.
ts
Stainless steels
DIN EN ISO 3506-2
8
04
A2-70
A 4-035
Code
Steel microstructure
Steel group
Code
8 property class
04 low nuts, test
load = 4 -100 N/mm 2
A austenitic
F ferritic
1 free m a c h i n i n g a l l o y s
2 a l l o y e d w i t h Cr, Ni
4 a l l o y e d w i t h Cr, Ni, M o
Property class
of the nut
4.8
A4-70
allowable combinations
of property classes for nuts
and bolts
10
12
A2-50
A2-70
A4-50
A4-70
04, 05,
A2-025,
A4-025
Bolts
Property classes for low nuts. The nuts are designed for smaller load
capacity. Bolts and nuts of the same material group, e.g. stainless steel,
can be combined with each other.
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
3.2
2.4
4
3.1
5
4.1
5.5
4.6
7
5.9
8
6.9
10
8.9
13
11.6
16
14.6
3.4
1.3
4.3
5.5
6
2.4
7.7
3.2
8.8
11.1
14.4
4.7
5.2
6.8
17.8
8.4
5
-Ji
M20-M64
6, 8, 10
A2-70, A4-70
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
M42
M48
M56
WAF
18
16.6
24
22.5
30
27.7
36
33.3
46
42.8
55
51.1
65
60
75
69.5
85
78.7
20
10.8
26.
33
18
39.6
21.5
50.9
25.6
60.8
31
71.3
34
82.6
38
93.6
45
M1.6-M16
Thread d
Thread d
1.6
as per agreement
Property
classes
dw
M1.6
WAF t
1)
Explanation
as per agreement
6, 8, 10
Property
classes
Grade
14.
A2-70, A4-70
1)
A2-50, A4-50
229
Hexagon nuts
Hexagon nuts with coarse threads, type 2 1 }
Thread d
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
6.9
10
8.9
13
11.6
16
14.6
18
14.6
24
22.5
30
27.7
36
33.2
46
42.7
55
51.1
11.1
14.4
7.5
17.8
9.3
20
12
26.8
16.4
33
20.3
39.6
23.9
50.9
60.8
34.7
WAF
L
Vy/rf
T
e
5.7
5.1
Property
Product grades (page 211) classes
Thread d
Grade
Explanation
28.6
9, 12
1)
Hexagon nuts of type 2 are approx. 10% higher than nuts of type 1.
M1.6-M16
Hexagon nut ISO 4033 - M24 - 9: d = M24, property class 9
M20-M64
28673 934
8674
28674 971
WAF
WAF
mi 1
m21
"TD I
M8
x1
M10
x1
M12
x1.5
M16
x1.5
M20
x1.5
M24
x2
M30
x2
M36
x3
M42
x3
M48
x3
M56
x4
13
11.6
16
14.6
18
16.6
24
22.5
30
27.7
36
33.3
46
42.8
55
51.1
65
60
75
69.5
85
78.6
14.4
17.8
8.4
9.3
20
10.8
12
26.8
33
18
20.3
39.6
21.5
23.9
50.9
25.6
60.8
31
34.7
71.3
34
82.6
93.6
45
6.8
7.5
14.8
16.4
28.6
6,8
Type 1
Property
classes
Type 2
Explanation
A2-70, A4-70
Grade
M8x1 -M16x1.5
10
Hexagon nut type 1: DIN EN ISO 8673, nut height nr, >0.8 d
Hexagon nut type 2: DIN EN ISO 8674, nut height m 2 is approx. 10%
larger than nuts of type 1.
M20x1.5-M64x3
Replaces
DIN EN
4035
24035
Thread d
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
3.2
2.4
4
3.1
5
4.1
5.5
4.6
7
5.9
6.9
10
8.9
13
11.6
16
14.6
3.4
4.3
7.7
11.1
1.2
5.5
1.6
1.8
14.4
4
17.5
5
WAF
S:
m
M20-M36
04, 05
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
M42
M48
M56
WAF
cL
18
16.6
24
22.5
30
27.7
36
33.2
46
42.8
55
51.1
65
60
75
69.5
85
78.7
20
6
26.*
8
33
10
39.6
12
50.9
15
60.8
18
71.3
21
82.6
93.6
28
04, 05
Property
classes
M1.6-M16
3.2
Thread d
Grade
2.7
A2-035, A4-035
2.2
as per agreement
Property
classes
WAF
M1.6
e
m
Thread d
as per
agreement
A2-50, A4-50
8, 10, 12
1)
38
Explanation
A2-035, A4-035
1)
24
as per agreement
A2-025, A4-025
Low hexagon nuts (nut height m < 0.8 d) have a smaller load capacity as type 1 nuts.
230
Machine elements: 5.
ts
Hexagon nuts
Low hexagon nuts with fine threads1'
Valid standard
DIN EN ISO
Replaces
DIN EN
8675
28675
Thread d
WAF
dw
e
m
M8
x1
M10
x1
M12
x1.5
M16
x1.5
M20
x1.5
M24
x2
M30
x2
M36
x3
M42
x3
M48
x4
M56
x4
13
11.6
16
14.6
18
16.6
24
22.5
30
27.7
36
33.3
46
42.8
55
51.1
65
60
75
69.5
85
76.7
14.4
4
17.8
5
20
6
26.8
33
10
39.6
12
50.9
15
60.8
71.3
21
82.6
93.6
28
04, 05
Property
classes
Product grades (page 211)
Thread d
Explanations
1)
M8x1-M16x1.5
Low hexagon nuts (nut height m < 0.8 d) have a smaller load capacity
of type 1 nuts (page 229).
Property classes for stainless steels: A2-025, A4-025
M20x1.5-M64x3
27040 982
M5
M6
M8
M8
x1
M10
M10
x1
M12
M12
x1.5
M16
M16
x1.5
M20
M20
x1.5
M24
M24
x2
M30
M30
x2
M36
M36
x3
WAF
c/w
e
7
5.9
7.7
10
8.9
16
14.6
17.8
16.6
20
24
22.5
26.8
30
27.7
33
36
33.3
39.6
46
42.8
50.9
55
51.1
11.1
13
11.6
14.4
18
8.9
6
2.9
9.5
6.4
11.9
8
14.9
10.4
19.1
14.1
22.8
16.9
27.1
4.9
32.6
24.3
38.9
29.4
Explanation
Product grades see
DIN EN ISO 4032
6.8
4.4
Property cl.
1)
20.2
60.8
Thread d
M12
M16
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M36
WAF
dw
22
20.1
27
24.9
32
29.5
36
33.3
41
38
46
42.8
50
46.6
60
55.9
23.9
10
29.6
13
35
16
39.6
18
45.2
20
50.9
22
55.4
24
66.4
29
Property cl.,
surface
Explanation
10
normal - > lightly oiled, hot-galvanized - > code: tZn
1)
Hexagon nut DIN EN 14399-4 - M16 - 10 - HV: d = M24, property class 10,
high-strength preloaded
Product grade B
Thread d
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
WAF
dw
dc
10
9.8
12.2
11.8
14.2
13
15.8
17.9
16
19.6
21.8
18
23.8
26
24
31.9
34.5
30
39.9
42.8
14.4
17.8
10
20
12
26.8
16
33
20
e
m
24
as per
agreement
A2-035, A4-035
2)
Grade
18
Property
classes
11.1
6
8, 10, A2-70
Hexagon nut EN 1661 - M16-8: d = M16, property class 8
Machine elements: 5.
ts
231
232
Machine elements: 5.
ts
M5
M6
M8
M8
x1
M10
M10
x1
M12
M12
x1.5
M16
M16
x1.5
M20
M20
x2
M24
M24
x2
M30
M30
x2
8.8
7
7.7
5
10
11.1
7.5
13
14.4
9.5
16
17.8
12
18
20
15
24
26.8
19
30
33
22
36
39.6
27
46
50.9
33
n
w
no cylindrical shoulder
2.8
1.4
2.5
3.2
8
4
6.5
15.6
3.5
10
21.5
4.5
13
27.7
4.5
16
33.2
5.5
19
42.7
7
24
Thread d
s
e
Grade
M1.6-M16
1.2
6, 8, 10
Property
classes
A2-70
A2-50
M20-M100
Cotter pins
1.2
1.6
3.2
2.8
1.6
2.5
2.5
4
3.6
2.5
from
to
6
20
8
25
32
10
40
2) over
to
3.5
4.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
7
1.6
Nominal
lengths
Explanations
2.5
3.2
5
4.6
2.5
6.4
5.8
3.2
8
7.4
4
10
9.2
4
12.6
11.8
4
16
15
4
12
50
14
63
18
80
22
100
28
125
36
160
11
14
14
20
20
27
27
39
39
56
11
6.3
6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25, 28, 32, 36, 40, 45, 50, 56, 63, 71, 80,
90, 100, 112, 125, 140, 160 mm
1)
2)
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
s
dy
e
7.5
4.5
8.2
9
6
9.8
10
7
11
11
8
12
14
10.5
15.4
17
12.5
18.7
19
14.8
20.9
24
18.8
26.5
m
h
3
0.3
3.5
0.3
4
0.3
5
0.4
6.5
0.4
8
0.5
10
0.6
13
0.8
Material
Product grade A
Knurled nuts
M1.2
M1.6
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
6
3
1.5
7.5
3.8
9
4.5
11
5
2.5
12
6
2.5
16
8
3.5
20
10
4
24
12
5
30
16
6
36
20
8
5
2.5
5.3
2.5
6.5
3
7.5
3
9.5
4
11.5
5
15
6
18
23
10
h1>
h2
Property
classes
Explanations
St (steel), A1-50
1)
2)
Machine elements: 5.
233
ases
ir~
Name
1)
Hardness
grade
Nominal size
(Thread nominal 0)
Standard
Material
Overview
Design
Standard range
from-to
Illustration
Flat washers
with chamfer
Product grade A 2 )
M5-M64
M1)
Standard
Steel,
stainless
steel
DIN EN
ISO
7090
Design
Standard range
from-to
Illustration
Flat washers
with chamfer,
for HV bolts
M12-M30
Flat washers
small series
Product grade A 2 )
M1.6-M36
DIN EN
ISO
7092
Steel,
stainless
steel
Washers, square,
for channels and
I beams
M8-M27
Steel
DIN EN
14399-6
Steel
DIN 434
DIN 435
Steel
DIN EN
28738
page 235
page 234
Flat washers
normal series
Product grade C 2>
M1.6-M64
DIN EN
ISO
7091
Steel
page 235
page 234
Washers for steel
structures
Product grade
A2>, C 2 )
M10-M30
Steel
Conical spring
washers for
screw joints
d = 2-30 mm
DIN
7989-1
Spring
steel
DIN
6796
page 235
page 234
1)
Standard
page 235
table below
2)
M1)
Material is steel with corresponding hardness grade (e.g. 200 HV; 300 HV); other materials as agreed upon.
Product grades are differentiated by tolerance and by manufacturing process.
"2
M12
M16
M20
10
12
16
20
6.4
8.4
10.5
13.0
17.0
21.0
d2 max. 11
10.0
12.0
16.0
20.0
24.0
30.0
37.0
/7 >
Nominal size
d-j min.
1)
d2 max.
1)
h"
1.6
1.6
2.5
M24
M30
M36
M42
M48
M56
M64
24
30
36
42
48
56
64
25.0
31.0
37.0
45.0
52.0
62.0
70.0
44.0
56.0
66.0
78.0
92.0
105.0
115.0
10
10
M10
For threads
M8
M6
5.3
30 to 45
M5
d-| min. 11
Nominal size
h
Type
1)
3)
300 HV
200 HV
(quenched and
tempered)
Washer ISO 7090-20-200 HV: Nominal size (= thread nomi
nal 0) = 20 mm, hardness grade 200 HV, steel
These are all nominal dimensions
Non-ferrous metals and other materials as per agreement
Compare to page 211
Hardness grade
2)
Stainless steel
Steel
Material '
200 HV
234
Machine elements: 5.
ases
1.6
M5
M6
M8
3.2
4.3
5.3
6.4
8.4
11
15
2.2
d2 max. 1
3.5
4.5
0.35
0.35
0.55
0.55
0.55
1.1
1.8
1.8
M10
M12
M14 2 '
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
2.7
10
12
14
16
20
24
30
36
10.5
13.0
15.0
17.0
21.0
25.0
31.0
37.0
18.0
20.0
24.0
28.0
34.0
39.0
50.0
60.0
1.8
2.2
2.7
2.7
3.3
4.3
4.3
5.6
d2 max. '
Material '
M4
2.5
M3
1.7
Nominal size
M2.5
For threads
TD
M2
M1.6
Steel
Stainless steel
A2, A4, F1, C1, C4 (ISO 3506)4'
Type
Hardness grade
300 HV
(quenched
and tempered)
200 HV
200 HV
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
Nominal size
M12
10
12
2.4
3.4
4.5
5.5
6.6
9.0
11.0
13.5
d2 max. '
5.0
7.0
9.0
10.0
12.0
16.0
20.0
24.0
/71>
0.3
0.5
0.8
1.0
1.6
1.6
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
M42
M48
M64
16
20
24
30
36
42
48
64
di min. 1 '
17.5
22.0
26.0
33.0
39.0
45.0
52.0
70.0
30.0
37.0
44.0
56.0
66.0
78.0
92.0
115.0
For threads
Nominal size
d2 max. '
Hardness grade 100 HV suitable for:
Hexagon bolts/screws, product
grade C, with property classes < 6.8
Hexagon nuts, product grade C,
with property classes < 6
M10
2.5
A)1'
10
Washer ISO 7091-12-100 HV: Nominal size
(= thread nominal 0), d= 12 mm, hardness grade 100 HV
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
M27
M30
d-i min.
11.0
13.5
17.5
22.0
26.0
30.0
33.0
d2 max.
20.0
24.0
30.0
37.0
44.0
50.0
56.0
Machine elements: 5.
ases
235
Washers for HV bolts, Channels and I beams. Clevis pins, Conical spring washers
236
Name
Standard
I
Nominal 0 x nominal length
e.g. St = steel
Stainless steels:
A1 = austenitic
C1 = martensitic
Pins with DIN-EN main numbers are designated with ISO numbers.
ISO number = DIN-EN number - 20000; example: DIN EN 22338 = ISO 2338
11
if available
Illustration
Designation,
Standard range
from-to
Standard
Dowel pin,
not hardened
d = 1 - 5 0 mm
DIN
EN ISO
2338
Material
Illustration
Designation,
Standard range
from-to
Standard
Taper pin
di = 0.6-50 mm
DIN EN
22339
Spring pin
(clamping
sleeves),
slotted
= 1-50 mm
DIN
EN ISO
8752
DIN
EN ISO
13337
Tapered grooved
pin
d-1 = 1.5-25 mm
DIN
EN ISO
8744
Pins
/
1)
tolerance m6 or h8
Dowel pin,
hardened
d = 0.8-20 mm
DIN
EN ISO
8734
F=
3
1:50
?
- d " "CD
I
DIN
EN ISO
8740
I
Half length
reversed taper
grooved pin
d n = 1.5-25 mm
DIN
EN ISO
8741
DIN
EN ISO
8745
Center grooved
pin,
grooved 1/3 the
length
d-i = 1.2-25 mm
DIN
EN ISO
8742
Round head
grooved pin
d-i = 1.4-20 mm
DIN
EN ISO
8746
Center grooved
pin, with long
grooves
d-i = 1.2-25 mm
DIN
EN ISO
8743
DIN EN
22340
Clevis pins
Form A
Form A
DIN EN
22341
dm6/h82)
0.6
0.8
from
to
d m6/h82>
from
to
Nominal
lengths /
1)
12
60
14
80
1.2
1.5
4
10
4
12
4
16
6
20
6
24
30
8
40
10
50
10
12
16
20
25
30
40
50
18
95
22
140
26
180
35
200
50
200
60
200
80
200
95
200
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35,
40-95, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180, 200 mm.
Dowel pin ISO 2338 - 6 m6 x 30 - St: d = 6 mm,
tolerance class m6, / = 30 mm, of steel
2)
1)
2.5
1.5
3
10
4
16
5
20
6
24
8
30
12
50
10
40
12
16
20
14
60
18
80
22
26 40
100
50
3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 40,
45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 mm
Materials
8
12
45
22
90
18
60
12
16
22 26 32 40
120 160 180
20
25
30
45 50
200
55
6
10
Nominal
lengths /
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 40,
45-95, 100, 120-180, 200 mm
10
35
14
55
10
7 from
/ to
Nominal 0 d^
d<\ max.
2
2.4
2.5
2.9
3
3.5
4
4.6
5
5.6
6
6.7
8
8.8
10
10.8
12
12.8
s ISO 8752
s ISO 13337
0.4
0.2
0.5
0.25
0.6
0.3
0.8
0.5
1
0.5
1.2
0.75
1.5
0.75
2
1
2.5
1
j from
/ to
4
20
4
30
4
40
4
50
5
80
10
100
10
120
10
160
10
180
Nominal 0 dy
d-1 max.
14
14.8
16
16.8
20
20.9
25
25.9
30
30.9
35
35.9
40
40.9
45
45.9
50
50.9
s ISO 8752
s ISO 13337
3
1.5
3
1.5
4
2
5
2
6
2.5
7
3.5
7.5
4
8.5
4
9.5
5
j from
/ to
10
Nominal
lengths I
1)
2.5
10
200
14
200
20
200
Nominal
lengths /
4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 40,
45-95, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180, 200 mm
Materials
Application
238
pins
from
to
2.5
10
12
16
20
25
10
30
10
40
10
60
14
60
14
80
14 14 18 22 26 26
100 100 100 100 100 100
10
60
10
60
12
80
14 18 26 26 26 26
100 160 200 200 200 200
20
8
30
from
to
20
8
30
30
8
40
from
to
8
20
12
30
12
30
12
40
18
60
18
60
22
80
26 32 40 45 45 45
100 160 200 200 200 200
from
to
8
20
30
8
30
40
60
60
10
80
12 14 14 24 26 26
100 120 120 120 120 120
from
to
20
30
30
40
10
60
10
60
10
80
14 14 18 26 26 26
100 200 200 200 200 200
1.4
1.6
3 -
Grooved pins
with round head
ISO 8746
"ta
^
2.5
10
12
16
20
from
to
3
10
3
12
4
16
5
20
6
25
8
30
10
40
12
40
16
40
20
40
25
40
from
to
4
10
4
12
5
16
6
20
25
8
30
10
40
12
40
16
40
20
40
25
40
Nominal
lengths /
d h11
d, H13
UV
HT
/e
0.8
1.2
1.6
10
12
3.2
3.2
18
20
/
dk h14
10
14
14
16
18
20
22
6.3
22
25
28
30
33
1.6
k js14
/
Form A without cotter pin hole
Form B with cotter pin hole
4.5
2.2
2.9
3.2
3.5
4.5
6
30
8
40
10
50
12
60
16
80
20 24 28 30 35 40 45 50
100 120 140 160 180 200 200 200
5.5
hi 1
-,
f
5.5
1.6
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
40
50
17
20
20
20
25
29
36
42
49
b min
11
14
d2
M6
M8
d3 h14
14
18
22
k js14
25
28
30
36
44
55
66
24
27
32
36
50
60
4.5
11
13
17
19
22
Nominal
16, 20, 25, 30, 35-125, 130, 140, 150-190, 200 mm
lengths l 2
gripping length
36
1)
24
Clevis pin DIN 1445 - 12h11 x 30 x 50 - St: d, = 12 mm, tolerance class h 11, /) = 30 mm, / 2 = 50 mm, of 9SMnPb28 (St)
239
Designation,
Standard range Standard
from-to
Illustration
Designation,
Standard range Standard
from-to
Illustration
table below
1^1:100
DIN 6887
Gib-head
tapered key
wx h =
4 x 4100 x 50
Form B:
driving key
Form A:
sunk key
(
^
1^1:100
DIN 6886
Tapered key
wx h =
2x2-100x50
page 240
Form A
>
j
Feather key
wx h =
2x2-100x50
DIN 6885
Form A - J
DIN 6888
Woodruff keys
wx h =
2.5x3.7-10x16
b D10
tsj:100
jL
b*J:100
1^1:100
j L
-xT
/
For shaft
diameter d
over
to
10
12
12
17
17
22
22
30
30
38
38
44
44
50
50
58
58
65
65
75
75
85
85
95
95
110
Tapered keys
w D10
h
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
7
10
8
12
8
14
9
16
10
18
11
20
12
22
14
25
14
28
16
4.1
7
5.1
8
6.1
10
7.2
11
8.2
12
8.2
12
9.2
14
10.2
16
11.2
18
12.2
20
14.2
22
14.2
22
16.2
25
2.5
1.2
3
1.7
3.5
2.2
4
2.4
5
2.4
5
2.4
5.5
2.9
6
3.4
7
3.4
7.5
3.9
9
4.4
9
4.4
10
5.4
50
200
56
220
63
250
70
280
80
320
Gib-head tapered
h2
keys
Shaft keyway depth
Hub keyway depth
Allow, deviation
Key length /
fi
h
from
to
+0.2
+0.1
h.t2
1
10 >
45
12D
56
16
70
20
90
25
110
32
140
40
160
45
180
Nominal lengths /
6, 8-20, 22, 25, 28, 32, 40, 45, 50, 56, 63, 70, 80-100, 110, 125, 140, 160-200, 220,
250, 280, 320, 360, 400 mm
Length tolerances
Tolerances for
1)
6-28
32-80
90-400
Key length
-0.2
-0.3
-0.5
+0.2
+0.3
+0.5
240
Form B
\
>
s
I
Form C
Form D
Form E
Form F
I
Tolerances for feather keyways
r////////a
C<3
N
t ]
I
tight fit
normal fit
P9
N9
tight fit
normal fit
P9
JS 9
<22
<130
>130
+0.3
+0.3
+0.1
+0.1
+0.2
+0.2
6-28
32-80
90-400
-0.2
-0.3
-0.5
+0.2
+0.3
+0.5
ke
Length
tolerances
Y
keyway
di over
to
6
8
8
10
10
12
12
17
17
22
22
30
30
38
38
44
44
50
50
58
58
65
65
75
75
85
85
95
95
110
110
130
w
h
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
7
10
8
12
8
14
9
16
10
18
11
20
12
22
14
25
14
28
16
32
18
h
t2
1.2
1
1.8
1.4
2.5
1.8
3
2.3
3.5
2.8
4
3.3
5
3.3
5
3.3
5.5
3.8
6
4.3
7
4.4
7.5
4.9
9
5.4
9
5.4
10
6.4
11
7.4
from
to
6
20
6
36
8
45
10
56
14
70
18
90
20
110
28
140
36
160
45
180
50
200
56
220
63
250
70
280
80
320
90
360
Nominal
lengths /
6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25, 28, 32, 36, 40, 45, 50, 56, 63, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 140, 160, 180,
200, 220, 250, 280, 320 mm
Feather key DIN 6885 - A - 12 x 8 x 56: Form A, b = 12 mm, h = 8 mm, / = 56 mm
Woodruff keys
P 9 (P8)1
N 9 (N 8) 1 )
P 9 (P8) 1 )
J 9 (J8) 1 )
WTPZvm
.
d l
w <5
5
h <7.5 >7.5
over
to
8
10
+0.2
+0.1
6
<9
6
>9
+0.1
+0.1
+0.2
+0.1
8
-
10
-
+0.2
+0.1
10
12
12
17
17
22
22
30
30
38
10
+0.2
+0.2
w h9
2.5
3.7
3.7
6.5
6.5
7.5
6.5
7.5
7.5
11
11
13
11
13
16
d2
10
10
13
16
13
16
19
16
19
22
19
22
28
22
28
32
28
32
45
2.9
2.5
3.8
5.3
3.5
4.5
5.5
5.1
6.6
8.6
6.2
8.2
10.2 7.8
9.8
12.8
t2
9.7
h12
1.4
2.2
12.7 115.7 12.7' 15.7 18.6 15.7' 18.6 21.6 18.6 21.6' 27.4 21.6
2.6
3
CN
9.7
1.7
3.4
31.4 27.4 31.4 43.1
241
Shaft
Light
series
A/1)
D
14
16
20
22
25
3
3.5
4
5
5
42
46
52
56
62
8
8
8
8
8
46
50
58
62
68
8
9
10
10
12
8
8
8
8
8
48
54
60
65
72
8
9
10
10
12
28
32
34
38
42
6
6
7
6
7
72
82
92
102
112
10
10
10
10
10
78
88
98
108
120
12
12
14
16
18
10
10
10
10
10
82
92
102
112
125
12
12
14
16
18
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
6
7
6
6
6
8
8
26
30
32
36
40
Light
series
A/1)
D
Heat
treated
dimensions
H10
H9
Internal
centering
H7
H11
Medium
series
A/1)
D
B
Medium
series
A/D
D
B
6
6
6
8
8
H7
H10
Dimen.
Sliding
fit
Type of fit
Transition
fit
Press fit
d10
f9
h10
all
a11
a11
f7
97
h7
N number of splines
Open end blind rivets with break mandrel and flat head
Open end blind rivets with break mandrel and countersunk head
Head 0 d k max.
6.3
Head height k
1.3
Rivet mandrel 0 cL
max.
Rivet hole 0 d h 1
min.
max.
Fitting length b
3.1
3.2
W
+ 3-5
Shaft length /
max.
min.
8.4
10.5
12.6
1.7
2.1
2.5
2.45
2.95
3.4
4.1
4.2
5.1
5.2
6.1
6.2
/max + 4
/max + 4.5
/max + 5
original
head
(* d m m
broken
mandrel
original
head
"
1)
2)
3.5-5.0
2-5
3-5 1 )
2.5-4.0
2-3
5-7
5.0-6.5
4-6
3-5
12
13
7-9
6.5-8.5
6-8
5-7
16
17
9-13
8.5-12.5
8-12
7-11
20
21
13-17
12.5-16.5
12-15
11-15
15-20
15-20
20-25
20-25
Property
classes
Materials 2 '
formed
head
1.5-2.5 1)
11
30
m*dk
1-3 1 )
10
25
Mt77\
2.0-3.5
1.5-3.5 1)
26
31
17-22
16.5-21.0
242
Rz 2.5
r
CNI
i
v!
^Am/
T~
'1
'
'
/ '
- V /
/ / / /\/
R z
2 5
/ / /
<3
The Forms AK, BK CK and DK each have a feed for cooling lubricants.
Taper shank
Size
Type of
taper
Metric
taper
(ME)
Morse
taper
(MT)
ds
<*4
dfc
'1
cfeH11
Taper
z1>
Taper
ratio
a
2
1 : 20
1.432
4.1
2.9
23
25
20
0.5
6.2
4.4
32
4.6
34
28
0.5
9.045
9.2
6.4
6.1
50
56.5
6.7
52
45
1 : 19.212
1.491
12.065
12.2
9.4
M6
53.5
3.5
62
9.7
56
47
1 : 20.047
1.429
17.780
18.0
14.6
M10
14
64
75
14.9
67
58
1 : 20.020
1.431
23.825
24.1
19.8
M12
19.1
81
94
20.2
84
72
1 : 19.922
1.438
31.267
31.6
25.9
M16
25.2
102.5
6.5 117.5
26.5
107
92
1 : 19.254
1.488
44.399
44.7
37.6
M20
36.5
129.5
6.5 149.5
38.2
135
118
1 : 19.002
1.507
63.348
63.8
53.9
M24
52.4
182
210
54.8
188
164
1 : 19.180
1.493
80
80.4
70.2
M30
69
196
220
71.5
202
170
1.5
100 100
100.5
88.4
M36
87
232
10
260
90
240
200
1.5
120 120
120.6
106.6
M36 105
268
12
300
108.5
276
230
1.5
1 : 20
1.432
160 160
160.8
143
M48
141
340
16
380
145.5
350
290
200 200
201.0
179.4
M48
177
412
20
460
182.5
424
350
80
Metric
taper
(MT)
dz
Taper shank
Taper shank DIN 228 - ME - B 80 AT6: Metric taper shank, Form B, Size 80,
Taper angle tolerance quality AT6
1)
Control dimension d 1 may lie a maximum distance z in front of the taper sleeve.
7:24
dy
d2 a10
d3
d 4 - 0.4
30
31.75
17.4
M12
50
68.4
1.6
16.1
40
44.45
25.3
M16
63
93.4
1.6
16.1
50
69.85
39.6
M24
97.5
126.8
3.2
25.7
60
107.95
60.2
M30
206.8
3.2
25.7
92
M36
230
296
32.4
140
M48
350
469
40.5
70
165.1
80
254
156
/i
243
Torque transmission:
force-fit over the taper surface
+ reduction sleeves fit different taper
diameters
- not suitable for automatic tool change
machine
tool
spindle
threads for
machining coolant
feed
hole
for tool
Vcontact surface
cf. DIN 2080-1 (1978-12) and -2 (1979-09) and DIN 69871-1 (1995-10)
Torque transmission:
grooves on taper edge produce interlock.
The steep taper is not meant for transmission of forces, it only centers the tool.
Axial locking is achieved by the thread or
the ring groove.
Vcontact
surface
Application, sizes
Torque transmission:
force-fit using the taper and contact surfaces
drive slots on shaft end produce interlock.
+ low weight, therefore
+ high static and dynamic
rigidity
+ high repeated clamping accuracy (3 pm)
+ high rotational speeds
- more expensive than steep taper
Shrinkage chucks
Torque transmission like HSK.
Clamping the tool by quick, inductive heating (approx. 340 C) of the holding shank in
the shrinkage chuck. A shrinkage joint is
formed by the oversize of the tool (approx.
3 - 7 pm) after the joining and cooling.
holding
shank
Universally applicable in
machine tools with steep taper
or hollow shank tool holders;
suitable for tools with cylindrical shank of HSS or carbide.
Shank diameters: 6; 8; 10; 12;
14; 16; 18; 20; 25 mm
244
UC
Do
Ds
Li
Lb
D0
Ds
wire diameter in mm
outside coil diameter
minimum sleeve diameter in mm
free length, with no load on spring in mm
length of spring body with no load in mm
maximum spring length
internal prestress in N
maximum allowable spring force in N
spring rate in N/mm
maximum allowable spring displacement
for F m a x in mm
Lf
1)
Sm
0.20
0.25
0.32
0.36
0.40
3.00
5.00
5.50
6.00
7.00
3.50
5.70
6.30
6.90
8.00
8.6
10.0
10.0
11.0
12.7
4.35
2.63
2.08
2.34
2.60
0.06
0.03
0.08
0.16
0.16
1.26
1.46
2.71
3.50
4.06
0.036
0.039
0.140
0.173
0.165
33.37
36.51
18.85
19.23
23.67
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.63
0.70
7.50
10.00
6.00
8.60
10.00
8.60
11.10
7.10
9.90
11.40
13.7
20.0
13.9
19.9
23.6
3.04
5.25
5.78
7.88
9.63
0.25
0.02
0.88
0.79
0.83
5.31
5.40
11.66
12.13
14.13
0.207
0.078
0.606
0.276
0.239
24.41
68.79
17.78
41.15
55.78
0.80
0.90
1.00
1.10
1.25
10.80
10.00
13.50
12.00
17.20
12.30
11.70
15.40
14.00
19.50
25.1
23.0
31.4
27.8
39.8
10.20
9.45
12.50
11.83
15.63
1.22
1.99
1.77
2.99
2.77
19.10
28.59
28.63
41.95
42.35
0.355
0.934
0.454
1.181
0.533
50.36
28.49
59.22
32.98
74.25
1.30
1.40
1.50
1.60
1.80
11.30
15.00
20.00
21.60
20.00
13.50
17.50
22.70
24.50
23.20
134.0
34.9
48.9
50.2
46.0
118.95
15.05
21.75
20.00
19.35
5.771
5.44
3.99
3.99
6.88
70.59
66.08
60.54
67.40
100.90
0.322
1.596
0.603
0.726
1.819
201.60
38.00
93.72
87.38
51.70
2.00
2.20
2.50
2.80
3.00
27.00
24.00
34.50
30.00
40.00
30.50
27.80
38.90
34.70
45.10
62.8
55.6
79.7
69.8
140.0
25.00
23.10
31.25
29.40
86.25
6.88
9.81
9.88
17.77
11.50
101.20
148.00
148.50
233.40
214.20
0.907
2.425
1.056
3.257
0.587
104.00
57.02
131.33
65.85
345.31
3.20
3.60
4.00
4.50
5.00
43.20
40.00
44.00
50.00
50.00
46.60
46.00
50.60
57.60
58.30
100.0
92.1
117.0
194.0
207.0
40.00
37.80
58.00
128.25
142.50
11.88
19.60
24.50
28.00
47.00
238.40
357.10
436.30
532.30
707.90
1.451
3.735
3.019
1.613
2.541
156.13
90.38
136.43
312.74
260.12
5.50
6.30
7.00
8.00
60.00
70.00
80.00
80.00
69.30
80.00
92.00
94.00
236.0
272.0
306.0
330.0
156.75
179.55
199.50
228.00
38.00
45.00
70.00
120.00
774.50
968.50
1132.00
1627.00
2.094
2.258
2.286
4.065
351.72
429.00
464.83
370.91
1>
^max
0.20
0.40
0.63
0.80
1.00
3.00
7.00
8.60
10.80
13.50
3.50
8.00
9.90
12.30
15.40
1.25
1.40
1.60
2.00
4.00
17.20
15.00
21.60
27.00
44.00
19.50
17.50
24.50
30.50
50.60
8.60
12.70
19.90
25.1
31.4
39.8
34.9
50.2
62.8
117.0
4.35
2.60
7.88
10.20
12.50
0.05
0.121
0.631
0.971
1.411
15.63
15.05
20.00
25.00
58.00
2.211
4.351
3.211
5.501
19.600
0.99
3.251
9.861
15.67
23.77
35.50
55.72
56.93
84.86
366.50
0.031
0.142
0.237
0.305
0.390
30.54
22.11
38.97
48.19
57.40
0.458
1.371
0.623
0.779
2.593
72.73
37.48
86.19
101.86
133.83
In addition to the springs listed, other springs with different outside diameters and lengths are commercially
available for each wire diameter.
wire diameter
Dm
oZ
mandrel diameter
On
sleeve diameter
it = 's + 2
cf D I N 2 0 9
FF2
is
/t
Da
max.
Ds\
min.
^rnax
inN
Li
's = 3.5
s
max
is = 5.5
R
Li
max
Li
is = 8-5
s
R
max
/s = 12.5
s
R
Li
max
5.4
4.0
3.0
3.8
2.4
1.5
0.26
0.51
1.0
8.2
5.9
4.4
6.0
3.8
2.4
0.17
0.33
0.65
12.4
8.7
6.4
9.3
5.9
3.6
0.11
0.21
0.42
17.9 13.7
12.6 8.6
9.2 5.4
6.6
9.3
10.4
13.5
7.0
4.4
9.2
3.3
0.9
0.73
2.84
11.6
20.0
10.0
6.1
14.0
4.9
1.4
0.46
1.81
7.43
30.0
15.0
8.7
21.3
7.9
2.2
0.30
1.17
4.80
14.4
9.6
6.5
22
33.2
43.8
24.0
13.0
8.5
14.6
5.7
1.9
1.49
5.68
23.2
36.5
19.0
12.0
23.1
8.9
3.0
0.95
3.61
14.8
55.5
28.5
17.0
36.1
14.2
4.4
0.61
2.33
9.57
80.5 53.1
40.5 20.6
24.0
6.6
17.5
10.3
5.9
22.6
14.7
10.1
84.9
135
212
48.0
24.0
14.5
35.6
14.0
5.5
2.38
9.76
37.3
73.5
36.0
21.5
55.9
21.9
8.9
1.52 110
6.23 53.5
23.7
31.5
25
16
10
22.0
13.4
7.5
28.0
18.6
12.5
128
198
318
58.0
30.0
18.0
43.0
17.5
6.8
2.98
11.4
46.6
88.5
45.0
26.5
67.1
27.3
10.9
151
0.83
62.1 3.19
24.4 13.0
32
O K 25
20
16
28.3
21.6
16.8
12.9
36.0
28.4
23.2
19.1
182
233
292
365
71.5
49.0
36.0
27.5
52.2
32.2
20.5
12.9
3.48 110
7.29 74.5
14.2
54.0
41.0
27.8
82.1
50.5
32.1
20.5
187
116
75.7
49.9
40
Q O 32
O.d. 25
20
35.6
27.6
21.1
16.1
44.6
36.5
28.9
23.9
288
361
461
577
82.0
58.5
42.5
33.5
60.8
38.7
23.4
15.0
4.76 125
88.5
9.3
19.4
63.5
38.2
49.5
95.3
61.1
37.2
23.6
275
190
135
105
216
1.33
136
2.61
83.4 5.45
53.4 10.7
50
40
32
25
44.0
34.8
27.0
20.3
56.0
45.2
37.0
29.7
427
533
666
852
99.0
71.0
53.5
41.0
71.6
45.8
29.5
18.1
5.95 150
11.7 105
22.8
79.5
47.7
60.5
111
69.9
46.2
28.3
335
235
170
130
257
1.65
165
3.26
104
6.36
65.5 13.3
63
50
40
32
56.0
43.0
34.0
26.0
70.0 623
57.0 785
46.0 981
38.0 1226
120
85.0
64.0
51.0
87.7
54.1
34.4
22.3
7.27 180
14.5 130
28.4
95.5
55.4
75.0
135
86.8
54.5
34.8
4.63
9.25
18.1
35.3
275
195
140
110
210
2.99
133
5.98
81.6 11.7
52.5 22.9
395
280
205
160
304
2.03
194
4.07
124
7.95
79.5 15.5
80
63
50
40
71.0
55.0
42.0
32.6
89.0 932
71.5 1177
58.0 1481
47.5 1854
145
103
105
65.0
80.0 42.0
60.0 24.0
8.96 220
18.3 155
36.7 115
71.7
90.0
160
99.0
62.0
39.7
5.70
11.7
23.3
45.6
335
235
175
135
250
3.69
155
7.55
100
15.1
63.2 29.5
490
340
250
195
370
2.51
277
5.13
145 10.3
95.0 20.1
100
80
63
50
89.0
69.0
53.0
40.5
111
91.0
73.0
60.0
170
118
125
76.0
95.0 48.0
75.0 30.0
11.9
23.2
47.0
95.4
187
111
74.0
46.8
7.58
14.8
30.3
60.8
390
285
205
160
4.9
286
186
9.58
112
19.6
70.0 39.2
570
410
300
230
423
271
169
103
0.2
2.5
2
1.6
2.0
1.5
1.1
3.1
2.6
2.1
0.5
6.3
4
2.5
5.3
3.1
1.7
7.5
5.0
3.4
12.5
8
5
10.8
6.5
3.6
1.6
20
12.5
8
c
O
O.O
Q
o
1.00
1.24
1.50
1413
1766
2237
2825
260
180
140
110
0.07
0.15
0.28
0.41
1.59
6.51
0.67
84.5 0.99 165 129
33.4 4.0
78.0 50.0 2.73
13.6 15.4
45.0 20.2 10.4
0.97
2.04
3.98
7.78
3.34
6.51
13.3
26.7
246
Disc springs
Single spring
D0
Series stack
De
outside diameter
Di
inside diameter
ho
lo
\ho~lp52223
D;
cf. d i n 2093(2006-03)
Spring
Spring force deflection
"total
Stotal -
'
Spring length
=F
Lo = i lo
Parallel stack
Spring deflection s
3)
Group 2: f = 1.25-6 mm
without contact surface
Group
Spring force
De
D\
h12
H12
8
10
14
16
4.2
5.2
7.2
8.2
0.4
0.5
0.8
0.9
0.6
0.75
1.1
1.25
0.21
0.33
0.81
1.00
0.15
0.19
0.23
0.26
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.55
0.7
0.9
1.05
0.12
0.21
0.28
0.41
0.19
0.23
0.30
0.34
0.2
0.25
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.55
0.8
0.9
0.04
0.06
0.12
0.16
0.19
0.23
0.34
0.38
20
25
28
40
10.2
12.2
14.2
20.4
1.1
1.55
1.53
0.34
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.35
1.6
1.8
0.75
0.87
1.11
0.41
0.53
0.60
0.5
0.7
0.8
1
1.15
1.6
1.8
2.3
0.25
0.60
0.80
1.02
0.49
0.68
0.75
0.98
25
28
40
45
12.2
14.2
20.4
22.4
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.5
2.05
2.15
3.15
4.1
2.91
2.85
6.54
7.72
0.41
0.49
0.68
0.75
1.5
1.7
2.6
3.0
2.62
3.66
0.86
0.98
1.25
2.85
1.89
1.20
50
56
63
71
25.4
28.5
31
36
3
3
3.5
4
4.3
4.9
5.6
6.7
12.0
11.4
15.0
20.5
0.83
0.98
1.05
1.20
2
2.5
2.5
3.4
3.6
4.2
4.5
4.76
4.44
7.18
6.73
1.05
1.20
1.31
1.50
1.25
1.5
1.8
2
2.85
3.45
4.15
4.6
1.55
2.62
4.24
5.14
1.20
1.46
1.76
1.95
80
90
100
125
41
46
51
64
5
5
6
7
8.2
8.5
33.7
31.4
48.0
1.28
1.50
1.65
3
3.5
3.5
5
5.3
6
6.3
8.5
10.5
14.2
13.1
30.0
1.73
1.88
2.10
2.63
2.25
2.5
2.7
3.5
5.2
5.7
6.2
8
6.61
7.68
8.61
15.4
2.21
2.40
2.63
3.38
140
160
180
72
82
92
9
10.5
11.1
27.9
41.1
37.5
3.00
3.38
3.83
3.8
4.3
4.8
8.7
9.9
11
17.2
21.8
26.4
3.68
4.20
4.65
5
6
6
Spring
deflection
Drill bushings
248
Form A
Form B
Form E
32
dz
12
<h
18
M6
40
14
21
M8
21
hz
20
fh
10
12
26
25
14
15
50
18
25
10
M10
34
32
20
18
63
20
32
12
M12
42
40
25
22
80
25
40
16
M16
52
50
30
28
1001)
32
48
20
M20
65
60
38
36
Form
Description
AtoE
Metal knobs
rough part of metal
with through bore d4
with blind bore d 4
Form C
Form K
K2)
L 2>
1)
2)
Fluted knobs
Form A
Form E
Form L
' t i iTP?)
1
ft
d,
Form B
Locating
pin
cylindrical
1
I
Form C
Locating
pin
truncated
<*2
h2
hs
32
12
M6
21
20
10
12
20
30
40
14
M8
26
25
13
15
20
30
50
18
M10
34
32
17
18
25
30
63
20
M12
42
40
21
22
30
40
80
25
M16
52
50
25
28
30
40
n6
1.2
12
16
1.6
18
2.5
13
22
3.5
15
25
1.6
10
10
12
16
12
20
25
0.04
10
12
18
1)
0.02
2.5
= 20 mm, /, = 25 mm
250
10
12
14
19
23
Width a
18
30
+ 2/0
mlE
Thread d
1)
+ 1/0
28
23
25
20
42
-0.4/-0.7
56
68
+ 4/0
16
20
25
+ 2/0
36
45
30
38
56
48
71
61
32
+ 3/0
21
17
M6
13
15
18
22
28
35
44
54
10
12
14
16
20
28
36
44
52
10
14
18
22
26
0/-0.5
85
74
65
0/-1
fQ
-=- t A -
46
36
18
15
Deviation from k
37
+ 3/0
12
max.
min.
28
-0.3/-0.6
22
T
k
-a
from
to
b
e
uS
h
up to M12x 12:
s. '
M12x14 and
up: a>d-\
ih
6 \
k
Nominal
lengths /
M8
M10
M12
M16 M20 M24 M30
10
12
14
18
22
8
28
36
22
30
35
45
55
70
80
50
60
120
240
150
190
300
15
18
22
44
54
13
28
35
14
24
12
16
32
41
50
20
6
7
14
22
6
8
10
18
25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400,
500 mm
Bolt DIN 787 - M10 x 10 x 100 - 8.8: d, = M10,
a = 10 mm, / = 100 mm, property class 8.8
by
fci h6
b2 h6 Form
h2
12
12
h3
20
3.6
10
28.6
12
20
5.5
12
20
14
18
14
22
50.5
18
28
12
61.5
24
36
16
76.5
30
42
19
90.5
36
90
I"
IVA
2
d
du
Form C
Form D
d4 = d3
32
40
50
Spherical washer
5.5
m
-c:
'
Form G
d 4 > of3
dy
d2
H13
H13
6.4
7.1
8.4
d4
Form
D
G
12
12
17
h2
h3
Form
D
G
2.3
2.8
17
17
24
11
14.5
21
21
30
18.5
14.2
24
24
36
20
4.6
19
30
30
44
26
23.2
36
36
50
31
9.6
10.5
12
13
17
21
d3
3.2
R
Sphere
3.5
12
4.2
15
5.3
6.2
22
6.3
7.5
27
17
d2
d3
20
15
M16 x 1.5
40
25
20
M16 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
45
32
25
M20 x 1.5
M24 x 1.5
40
32
50
42
, /0c
WAF
WAF
h
12
58
17
16
68
21
56
16
79
27
M24 x 1.5
M27 x 2
M30 x 2
70
26
93
12
36
M30 x 2
80
26
108
12
41
2.5
1)
t
[fl
Graduation
0.5-0.95
0.05
1.0-2.9
0.1
3.0-6.4
0.1
6.5-20
0.5
/ 0/+0.5
71
Hardness
Shank
Head
Material
WS2>
80
62 2 HRC
45 5 HRC
64 2 HRC
50 5 HRC
HWS3>
71
80
100
HSS 4)
d ih6
Form
WS
HWS
HSS
2)
3)
4)
80
160
100
630
20, 25, 32
200
25, 32, 40
250
25, 32, 40
32, 40, 50
315
32, 40, 50
400
32, 40, 50
500
630
Code
Ra 6.B
500
Fabrication method
Ra B.2
Flame cutting
Beam cutting
Milling
Limit deviations
for thickness t
+4
+1
+ 0.4
+ 0.2
+ 0.5
+ 0.3
252
a y x b-,
c1
02
C3
d2
80x63
100 x 63
100 x 80
160x80
125 x 100
250 x 100
50
30
80
19
M20 x 1.5
50
30
80
25
M20 x 1.5
50
40
90
25
32
M24 x 1.5
160 x 125
315 x125
200 x 160
315x160
56
40
90
32
M24 x 1.5
56
63
50
100
32
40
M30 x 2
63
50
100
40
M30 x 2
250 x 200
315x250
<h
125
145
155
215
180
315
160
50
63
160
80
170
180
40
100
200
330 220
395
250
315
25
65
16
d3
80
95
M16 x 1.5
50
30
80
25
M20 x 1.5
155
25
56
180
56
63
40
50
32
90
100
40
125
140
125
160
180
160
M24 x 1.5
M30 x 2
225
180
245
180
265
190
330
395
200
220
<*2
125
225 180
380
265 200
395 220
P3
19
C2
zaiim
L U i
!AI
d * do
= 3 7
z
80
100
125
160
200
=>
50
50
56
80
85
90
100
110
di
'1
fz
a, x ^
19
125
16
10
36
170
80x63
125 x 80
25
32
155
180
225
265
18
11
40
23
11
45
180
220
125x 100
250 x 100
160x 125
240
315 x 125
190
=>
3)
32
bz
135 180
215
190
235
325 255
235
280
390
C1
50
56
C2
C3
30
80
40
90
d2
19
25
25
40
90
32
I
i
75 103
160
128
120
148 170
245 158
155
180
183
310
253
Range of dimensions
Designation
h 1 ) in mm |
Standard for the belts
Power
range
L 2 ) in mm
Vmax in m/s P ' m a x
Properties,
application
in kW3>
Classic V-belts
185-19000
4-25
30
65
8-18
40
70
4-25
50
70
10-26
1250-15000
30
65
3-17
600-15000
60
20
DIN 7867
Insensitive to vibration or
impact, no twisting of single
belts in the pulleys, absolutely
uniform force distribution, high
tensile strength, for long distances between axles;
paper machines
Large transmission ratios
possible, low vibration running
behavior;
automotive alternator drives,
compressor drives in
HVAC, small machines
DIN 7867
85
20
0.5-900
Efficiency t ] m a x ^ 0.98,
synchronous running, low prestress forces, therefore lower
bearing load;
precision machine drives, office
machine drives, automotive
industry, CNC spindle drives
Wide V-belts
468-2500
6-18
30
DIN 7719
DIN 7719
C)ouble V-belt:s
(Hiexagonal bel
2000-6900
10-25
30
Its)
DIN 2217
100-3620
289
40-80
DIN ISO 5294
DIN 7721, DIN ISO 5296
1>
21
Belt length
3)
254
Narrow V-belts
Narrow V-belts
Narrow V-belt
pulley
DIN 2211-1 (1984-03)
V.
" I SrfJ
Effective diameter
31
Narrow V-belts,
V-belt pulleys
Designations
Belt profile (ISO designation codes)
SPZ
SPA
SPB
SPC
9.7
8.5
12.7
11
16.3
14
22
19
10
2.8
13
3.5
18
4.8
63
9.7
90
12.7
140
16.3
224
22
2.8
h
belt height
/7W distance
c/ m i n minimum allowable effective 0
w-| upper groove width
r,
mm.
mm
c
t
2
11
13.8
3.5
17.5
4.8
23.8
- 2c
12
15
19
25.5
10
12.5
17
34 for effective 0 up to
80
118
190
315
80
118
190
315
1.47
de = da
Wrap angle /?
180
1.02
1.05
1.08
170
160
150
1.12
1.16
1.22
1.28
1.37
140
130
120
110
100
90c
Service factor c 2
Dai ly operating time in ho urs
over 16
up to 10
from 10 to 16
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.4
1.4
1.5
2500
| 2000
1600
P
Prate(j
N
c-|
c2
power to be transmitted
power rating per belt
number of belts
angle factor
Number of belts
service factor
| 1250
^ 1000
800
"S
Example:
6 3 0
| 500
400
I 315
ro
250
200
2.5
6.3 10
16 25 U0 63
5. Selected: N = 5 belts
255
Tooth spacing
Code
T2.5
t*
IV i
-cj
T10
-cT
\|/
10
120
150
160
200
245
S \
VV
l1-1
0.2
1.3
1.2
0.4
2.2
5.3
2.5
0.6
48
30
112
122
126
61
66
78
700
720
780
840
880
144
156
168
84
91
96
100
900
920
960
990
54
114
132
-
168
-
192
200
10
4.5
530
560
610
630
660
40
49
16
Effective
length1*
270
285
305
330
390
LAHN profile
0.7
64
80
98
420
455
480
500
HT profile
1.5
2.7
Effective
length 1)
Double-sided
p y v j <:f
2.5
T5
Nominal
thickness
hs
Single-sided
180
184
-
T)
Effective diameter
2)
25
32
50
70
72
78
84
88
1320
1390
1460
1560
1610
132
139
146
156
161
1780
1880
1960
2250
178
188
196
225
Belt DIN 7721 - 6 T2.5 x 480: w=6 mm, spacing p = 2.5 mm,
effective length = 480 mm, single-sided
The code letter D is added for double-sided positive drive belts.
1)
Effective lengths from 100-3620 mm, in custom-made products up to
25000 mm
cf. DIN 7721-2 (1989-06)
1)
25
1010
1080
1150
1210
1250
d = d0 +
16
53
56
61
63
66
92
96
198
10
Pulley
groove
Pulley outer 0
Pulley outer 0
Pulley outer 0
Pulley
Pulley
d0 for
d0for
d0 for
groove
groove
T2.5
T5
T10
T2.5
T5
T10
T2.5
T5
T10
10
11
12
13
7.4
15.0
8.2
16.6
18.2
14
15
16
10.6
9.0
9.8
11.4
12.2
19.8
36.3
39.5
21.4
23.0
24.6
42.7
45.9
49.1
13.0
13.8
14.6
15.4
27.8
29.4
31.0
22
25
17.0
19.3
21.7
34.1
38.9
43.7
28
2 a
Pully dimensions
T2.5
T5
T10
24.9
50.1 100.0
56.4 112.7
62.8 125.4
75.5 150.9
61.8
32
36
40
48
31.3
37.7
68.2
77.7
87.2
60
72
84
28.1
Groove width w r
Form SE 1)
Form N 2 >
1.83
3.32
6.57
1.75
2.96
6.02
Groove height hg
Form SE1>
Form N2>
0.75
1.25
2.6
2a
0.6
1
1.95
3.4
1
2
Pulley width
with flange w f
without flange w' f
Letter symbols
Belt width w
T2.5
4
6
10
5.5
7.5
11.5
10
16
25
7.5
11.5
17.5
26.5
14
20
29
16
25
32
50
18
27
34
52
30
37
55
T10
without pulley flange
52.2
55.4
58.6
26.2
17
18
19
20
10
14
10
21
256
_ d
Number of teeth
N=
- 2
d 0 = d+ 2 m= m (N + 2)
Outside diameter
dr = d-
Root diameter
2 {m + c)
Center distance
Module
Pitch
m
module
N, Nh N2
p
c
h
ha
hd
a
pitch
clearance
whole depth
addendum
dedendum
center distance
d,
d2
dQ, d 0 1 , do2
dr, d r 1 , d r 2
p = n m
no. of teeth
pitch
diameter
outside
diameter
d= m N
Pitch diameter
Clearance
0.1 m to 0.3 m
often c= 0.167 m
Addendum
ha = m
Dedendum
hri = m + c
c=
root
diameter
Example:
External spur gear,
m = 2 mm; N= 32; c= 0.167 m; d= ?; d0 = ?;/? = ?
d m ' N 2 mm 3 2 - 6 4 mm
d0 = d + 2 m = 64 mm + 2 - 2 mm = 68 mm
h = 2-m + c=2-2 mm + 0.167 2 mm = 4.33 mm
h = 2
Whole depth
m + c
Internal teeth
Number of teeth
Outside diameter
Root diameter
Center distance
N=
| d0 =
dQ
+ 2 m
m
d+2 m = m (N + 2)
dr=d
-2
(m+
c)
_ d 2 - d - 1 _ m (A/ 2 - N^)
Example:
Internal spur gear, m = 1.5 mm; N = 80;
c= 0.167 m; d= ?; dQ = ?;/? = ?
d= m N= 1.5 mm 80 = 120 mm
dQ = d-2 m= 120 m m - 2 1.5 mm = 117 mm
h = 2 m + c= 2 1.5 mm + 0.167 1.5 mm = 3.25 mm
257
VI
mt
transverse module
mr
Pt
pr
real pitch
N,
N2 no. of teeth
d, d-|, d2
pitch diameter
dQ
outside diameter
a
center distance
ex.
Transverse module
Transverse pitch
Pitch diameter
Number of teeth
In helical gears the teeth run in a screw-like pattern on
the cylindrical wheel body. The tools for manufacturing spur gears and helical gears conform to the real
pitch module.
Real pitch
Example:
Outside diameter
Center distance
Calculations of whole depth, addendum, dedendum, clearance and root diameter are the same as those for spur
gears with straight teeth (page 256). In the formulae the
module m is replaced by the real pitch module mr.
Module
Pitch
Module
Pitch
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.25
0.628
0.785
0.943
1.257
1.571
1.885
2.199
2.513
2.827
3.142
3.927
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
16.0
4.712
6.283
7.854
9.425
12.566
15.708
18.850
25.132
31.416
37.699
50.265
Classification of a tool set of 8 module side milling cutters (up to m = 9 mm) '
Cutter no.
No. of teeth
1)
12-13
14-16
17-20
21-25
26-34
35-54
55-134
The manufacture of gears with side milling cutters is not an involute process. Only an approximate involute form
of the tooth flank is produced. Therefore this manufacturing process is only suitable for secondary gears. For gears
with m > 9 mm a tool set with 15 module side milling cutters is used.
258
no. of teeth
pitch angle
tip angle
Pitch diameter
Outside diameter
Example:
d = m N
d0 = d+ 2 m cosd
tan Yy -
N^ +2 cosd-,
N2-2 -sinS,
A/o + 2 cos<59
tan y , =
2
A/-| - 2 sin<52
^
d!
/Vt 1
tand-,1 = 1 = ' = d2
N2
i
+ X
d
N
.
tan do = 2 = 2 = /
2
di
N,
Shaft angle
2 = d i + <5-
Worm drive
m
module
d, d-1, d2
pitch diameter
d0, d 0 i , d o 2 outside diameter
rt
throat radius
Worm
Pitch diameter
Axial pitch - worm
Outside diameter
Lead
Ny (no. of teeth)
Example:
Worm drive m = 2.5 mm; A/-, = 2; d q = 40 mm;
N2 = 40; d 0 i = ?; d 2 = ?; d t = ?; r t = ?; a = ?
d o 1 = d 1 + 2 m = 40mm + 2-2.5 mm = 45 mm
d 2 = m N2= 2.5 mm 40
= 100 mm
do2=d2+2m = 100 mm+ 2 2.5 mm= 105 mm
d
t ~ d o 2 + m = 105 mm + 2.5 mm
= 107.5 mm
c/-|
40 mm
rt = m =
-2.5 mm
= 17.5 mm
2"
c/i+do 40 mm + 100 mm
a =
=
= 70 mm
2
2
Worm gear
Pitch diameter
Pitch
Outside diameter
Tip diameter
Throat radius
Clearance, whole depth, addendum, dedendum and center
distance like spur gears (page 256).
259
Transmission ratios
Gear drives
driving
no. of teeth
NVN3,N5...
n 3 , n 5 . . . speeds
no. of teeth
N2,N4,N6...
n2, n4, n6... speeds
driven
i
/'1, h,
/,
^ driven
j 9ears
initial speed
final speed
total gear ratio
individual gear ratios
n\
driving
J gears
Example:
i.
nu=nf
Drive formula
n<| A/<| = n2 N2
Gear ratio
N 2
i =
/V,
1 =
n2
nf
/ =
/v 2 A / 4 - / V 6
A/q A/ 3 A/ 5
i= h- I2- 13,
Belt drives
d-|, d 3 , d 5 . . . diameters1*
driving
pulleys
n 3 , n 5 . . . speeds
^2, d 4 , d 6 ... diameters1*
driving
driven
6 speeds
initial speed
Drive formula
nf
final speed
/'
/'1, / 2 , / 3 ...
v,
circumferential velocity
v2
c/-|
n2
d,=
1)
Gear ratio
. = c[2
Example:
y= v/-| = V2
driven
pulleys
Hj
Velocity
400/min ~ 1
d-| 600/min 240 mm
= 360 mm
400/min
n2
_ Hj
n2
A7f
d2
dA
di
d i c/o c/c
I = h /2 '3
Worm drives
driven
/'
gear ratio
Example:
/'= 25;
driving
= 1500/min; A/-, = 3; n2 = ?
ni 1500/min
.
==
= 60/min
/
25
Drive formula
n-| A/-! = n2 A/ 2
Gear ratio
260
Speed graph
The speed n of a machine tool from the workpiece or tool diameter d and the selected cutting speed vc can be determined
on a computer/calculator using the formula, or
graphically using the speed graph.
Speed graphs have the speeds under load which can be set on the machine.
These are stepped geometrically. For infinitely variable drives the calculated speed
can be set precisely.
Speed
800
m/min
600
500
6 7 8 9 10
15
20
30
40
50 60
80 100
150
c^
200 mm 300
diameter d
Example: d = 100 mm; v c =220 ; n = ?
c
min
m
220
m n
Calculation: n =
' = 700.3
; read from the speed graph above: n 700
_ yc _
n d Ji 0.1 m
min
min
400
Machine elements: 5.
261
rins
Hydrostatic
plain bearings
Dry-running
plain bearings
Suitable for
Suitable for
Suitable for
Areas of application
Areas of application
- precision bearings
- space telescopes and
antennae
- machine tools
- axial bearings for high forces
Other plain bearings: air or gas and water lubricated plain bearings, magnetic bearings
Elongation limit
ftp 0.2
N/mm 2
Specific
bearing
load
P l"
N/mm 2
Shaft
min.
hardness
Sliding
properties
Sliding
speed
EmergencyProperties, application
running
behavior
43
G-SnSb12Cu6Pb
2.3790
61
10
Medium loading;
all purpose plain bearing
160 HB
160 HB
130
CuZn31Si1
2.1831
250
58
55 HRC
80
18
250 HB
60
11
150 HB
CuPb10Sn10-C2)
2.1816
CuPb20Sn5-C
2.1818
21
280 HB
PA 6
(Polyamide)
12
50 HRC
POM
(Polyoxymethylene
18
50 HRC
2)
Thermoplastics
1)
(2001-02)
very good
limited
Harder and capable of higher compressive loads than PA; bearings in precision
mechanics, suitable for dry-running
q good
O poor
normal
262
bushings
Form F
Form C
d,
>o
LU
"6"
NO vO
LU
u) "6"
///////)
all
. chamfers 45
by js13
Force fitting produces
tolerance class H8
Recommended tolerance classes for mounting dimensions
Location hole
H7
Shaft
e7 or g7 (depending on
application)
by] S13
10
12
15
18
20
22
25
30
35
40
by
d2
10
12 14 16
10 15 20
14 16 18
10 15 20
17 19 21
12 20 30
20 22 24
15 20 30
23 24 26
15 20 30
25 26 28
20
30 40
28 30 32
20 30 40
34 36 38
30 40 50
39 41 45
30 40 60
44 48 50
Diameter range dy. 6-200
Bushing ISO 4379 - F22 x 25 x 30 - CuSn8P: Form F,
di = 22 mm, d2 = 25 mm, by = 30 mm, of CuSn8P
Form J
Y//////S
-P
7 7 7 7 7m;
r*ID
t5~
I
b / / / / A
V / / / / / / >
A
2 js13
by] S13
Z71JS13
all chamfers 45
dy
10
12
15
18
20
22
25
30
35
40
Form V
<h
bi
<h.
d2
16
14
16
18
16
18
21
19
21
24
22
24
26
25
26
28
27
28
32
30
32
38
35
38
45
41
45
50
46
50
Diameter range dy.
22
24
27
30
32
34
39
46
55
60
1-60
Thermoset plastics
Form R
S//S//
J
- "6"
V / / / / J
6 2 js13
ijs13
all chamfers 45
by] S13
Form T
by h13
y h13
dy
di
<h
bz
^max
10
12
15
18
20
22
25
30
35
16
18
21
24
26
28
32
38
45
20
22
27
30
32
34
38
44
50
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.8
+0.07
; ss/
>30<
16
20
25
30
25
25
30
30
40
50
Lengths
by
6
10
10
12
15
15
20
20
30
10
15
15
20
20
20
30
30
40
20
20
30
30
30
40
40
50
Tolerance class
Fabrication
resulting after
method
from 10 15 20 28 35 42
force fitting d.
to 14 18 25 32 40 55
D12
A +0.21 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.69 +0.90 i n j e c t i o n
m
- "O
10
12
15
18
20
20
25
25
35
40
8
10
12
15
15
20
20
25
30
dz
30(
30
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
Thermoplastics
Form S
3.5
4
5
5
Lengths
by
f?max
Form P
Lengths
Form F
Series 1
Series 2
dz <h t>2 d2
b>2
12 14
16 20
14 16
18 22
17 19
21 27
20 22 1
24 30
23 26 1.5 26 32
25 28 1.5 28 34
28 31 1.5 32 38
38 44
34 38 2
45 50
39 43 2
50 58
44 48 2
b2 h13
molded
machined
B
Tolerance class zb11
C11
Additional codes for bushings made of thermoset plastics
Machine elements: 5.
263
rins
Radial
load
Ball bearing
Linear bearings
Roller bearing
Ballbearing
For linear
movement
Antifriction bearings
Roller bearing
Ball bearing
Angular ball
Tapered roller
bearings DIN 628 bearings DIN 720
Roller bearing
i n
Axial
load
Inside 0
Radial Axial
High
loading loading speed
High
loads
Quiet
Application
running
Ball bearings
Deep groove ball
bearings
1.5-600
Self-aligning ball
bearings
5-120
10-170
2>
10-110
8-360
Four-point contact
bearings
20-240
Cylindrical roller
bearings (form N)
17-240
Cylindrical roller
bearings (form NUP)
15-240
Needle bearings
90-360
Tapered roller
bearings
15-360
C2)
Axial cylindrical
roller bearings
15-600
Spherical
roller bearings
60-1060
e
e
e
03)
Roller bearings
11
2)
3)
Suitability levels:
very good
good
^ limited
O not suitable
normal
264
Machine elements: 5.
rins
Name
Prefix symbol
Basic numbers
Prefix symbols
K
L
R
S
Suffix symbol
3 0 2 08
Bearing type
Diameter series 2
Dimension series 02
Design
Bore code 08
Borecode
Bore 0
d
Bore
code
Bore 0
d
00
10
12
60
01
12
13
65
02
15
14
70
03
17
15
75
04
20
16
80
05
25
17
85
06
30
18
90
07
35
19
95
Needle bearings
08
40
20
100
QJ
09
45
21
105
10
50
22
110
11
55
23
115
8
NA
m-
02
"ool
Dimension series 02
dimension
series
width series
a0.3
Bore
code
Bore
07
08
09
10
35
40
45
50
10
diameter
series
1)
72
80
85
90
17
18
19
20
Ball bearings
Deep groove ball bearings (selection)
Bearing series 60
"O
Cl
w
d f r o m 1.5 to 600 m m
Mounting dimensions
according to DIN 5418:
T
(2A
*
N\
V/A )/ i ^
N
10
12
15
26
28
32
17
20
25
r h
Basic
max min number
Bearing series 62
r
h
Basic
max min number
Bearing series 63
30 9 0.6 2.1
32 10 0.6 2.1
35 11 0.6 2.1
6200
6201
6202
35 11 0.6 2.1
37 12 1
2.8
2.8
42 13 1
6300
6301
6302
35 10 0.3 1
42 12 0.6 1.6
47 12 0.6 1.6
6003
6004
6005
40 12 0.6 2.1
47 14 1
2
52 15 1
2
6203
6204
6205
47 14
52 15
62 17
1
1
1
2.8
3.5
3.5
6303
6304
6305
30
35
40
55 13
62 14
68 15
1
1
1
2.3
2.3
2.3
6006
6007
6008
62 16
72 17
80 18
2
2
3.5
6206
6207
6208
72 19
80 21
90 23
1
3.5
1.5 4.5
1.5 4.5
6306
6307
6308
45
50
55
75 16
80 16
90 18
1
1
1
2.3
2.3
3
6009
6010
6011
85 19
90 20
100 21
1
3.5
1
3.5
1.5 4.5
6209
6210
6211
100 25
110 27
120 29
1.5 4.5
2
5.5
2
5.5
6309
6310
6311
60 95 18
65 100 18
70 110 20
1
1
1
3
3
3
6012
6013
6014
110 22
120 23
125 24
1.5 4.5
1.5 4.5
1.5 4.5
6212
6213
6214
130 31 2.1 6
140 33 2.1 6
150 35 2.1 6
6312
6313
6314
75 115 20
80 125 22
85 130 22
1
3
1
3
1.5 3.5
6015
6016
6017
130 25
140 26
150 28
2
5.5
2
5.5
2.1 6
6215
6216
6217
160 37
170 39
180 41
2.1 6
2.5 7
2.5 7
6315
6316
6317
90 140 24
95 145 24
100 150 24
1.5 3.5
1.5 3.5
1.5 3.5
6018
6019
6020
160 30 2.1 6
170 32 2.1 6
180 34 2.1 6
6218
6219
6220
190 43
200 45
215 47
2.5 7
2.5 7
2.5 7
6318
6319
6320
8 0.3 1
8 0.3 1
9 0.3 1
1
1
1
Deep groove ball bearing DIN 625 - 6208 - 2Z - P2: Deep groove ball bearing (bearing type 6), width series 0 1 ) , diameter series 2, bore code 08 (d= 8 5 mm = 40 mm),
design with 2 shields, bearing with highest precision (tolerance class 2)
Bearing series 72
Mounting dimensions
according to DIN 5418:
r
h
Basic
max min number
6000
6001
6002
11
d f r o m 10 to 170 m m
h Basic
D
r
max min number2'
15
17
20
25
35
40
47
52
11 0.6 2.1
12 0.6 2.1
14 1
2.8
15 1
2.8
30
35
40
62 16
72 17
80 18
r
h
D
Basic
max min number2'
h
r
Basic
max min number3'
2.8
2.8
3.5
3.5
7302B
7303B
7304B
7305B
42
47
52
62
2.8
2.8
3.5
3.5
3302
3303
3304
3305
72 19
80 21
90 23
1
3.5
1.5 4.5
1.5 4.5
7306B
7307B
7308B
72 30.2 1
3.5
80 34.9 1.5 4.5
90 36.5 1.5 4.5
3306
3307
3308
7209B
7210B
7211B
100 25
110 27
120 29
1.5 4.5
2
5.5
2
5.5
7309B
7310B
7311B
3309
3310
3311
1.5 4.5
1.5 4.5
1.5 4.5
7212B
7213B
7214B
130 31
140 33
150 35
2.1 6
2.1 6
2.1 6
7312B
7313B
7314B
130 54 2.1 6
140 58.7 2.1 6
150 63.5 2.1 6
3312
3313
3314
1.5 4.5
2
5.5
2
5.5
7215B
7216B
7217B
160 37
170 39
180 41
2.1 6
2.1 6
2.5 7
7315B
7316B
7317B
3315
3316
3317
5.5
90 160 30 2
95 170 32 2.1 6
100 180 34 2.1 6
7218B
7219B
7220B
190 43
200 45
215 47
2.5 7
2.5 7
2.5 7
7318B
7319B
7320B
190 73 2.5 7
200 77.8 2.5 7
215 82.6 2.5 7
3318
3319
3320
7202B
7203B
7204B
7205B
42
47
52
62
2.8
3.5
3.5
7206B
7207B
7208B
45 85 19
50 90 20
55 100 21
1
3.5
1
3.5
1.5 4.5
60 110 22
65 120 23
70 125 24
75 130 25
80 140 26
85 150 28
1
1
1
13
14
15
17
1
1
1
1
19
22.2
22.2
25.4
1
1
1
1
Angular contact ball bearing DIN 628 - 7309B: Angular contact ball bearing
(Bearing type 7), width series 0 1 ) , diameter series 3, bore code 09 (bore diameter
d= 9 5 mm = 45 mm), contact angle a = 40 (B)
11
In the designations for deep groove and angular contact ball bearings the 0 for the
width series is sometimes omitted according to DIN 623-1.
2
3>
' Contact angle a = 40
Contact angle not standardized
266
Machine elements: 5.
rins
Basic
h
number
min
max
Basic
h
r
number
min
max
\/jCr/
\\'T
i
i
///J
Dy
D
dfrom 8 to 360 mm
Mounting dimensions according to DIN 5418:
k.
25
30
35
27
32
37
47
52
62
15 0.6
16 0.6
18 1
51205
51206
51207
52
60
68
18
21
24
40
45
50
42
47
52
68
73
78
19
20
22
51208
51209
51210
78
85
95
26
28
31
10
10
12
51308
51309
51310
55
60
65
57
62
67
90
95
100
25
26
27
51211
51212
51213
105
110
115
35
35
36
13
13
13
51311
51312
51313
70
75
80
72
77
82
105
110
115
27
27
28
51214
51215
51216
125
135
140
40
44
44
14
15
15
51314
51315
51316
Form NU
W ry hy '2
Bearing series
N3, NU3, NJ3, NUP3
h2
W
dfrom 15 to 500 mm
unflanged
M m
Form NU
with fixed flange
W ry hy '2
h2
Bore
code
17
20
25
47 14 1
2.8 1
52 15 1.1 3.5 1
62 17 1.1 3.5 1
2.8
2.8
2.8
03
04
05
30
35
40
62 16 1
72 17 1
80 18 1
72 19 1.1 3.5 1
80 21 1.5 4.5 1
90 23 1.5 4.5 2
2.8
2.8
5.5
06
07
08
5.5
5.5
5.5
09
10
11
45 85 19 1
3.5 1
50 90 20 1
3.5 1
55 100 21 1.5 4.5 1
Form N
1
1.5
1.5
51305
51306
51307
2
2
2
5.5
5.5
5.5
12
13
14
2
2
3
5.5
5.5
7
15
16
17
90 160 30 2
5.5 2
5.5 190 43 3
2.1 6 200 45 3
95 170 32 2.1 6
100 180 34 2.1 6
2.1 6 215 47 3
7
7
7
3
3
3
7
7
7
18
19
20
105
110 200 38 2.1 6
120 215 40 2.1 6
7
7
7
3
3
3
7
7
7
21
22
24
2.1 6
2.1 6
225 49 3
240 50 3
260 55 3
Roller bearings
Tapered roller bearings (selection)
Dimensions
C
Db
t s Basic
max min min max min min min max max no.
da
db
Da
cb
as
20
25
30
47 14
52 15
62 16
12 15.25 33.2
13 16.25 37.4
14 17.25 44.6
27
31
37
26
31
36
40
44
53
41
46
56
43
48
57
2
2
2
3
2
3
35
40
45
72 17
80 18
85 19
15 18.15 51.8
16 19.75 57.5
16 20.75 63
44
49
54
42
47
52
62
69
74
65
73
78
67
74
80
3
3
3
3
1.5 1.5 30207
3.5 1.5 1.5 30208
4.5 1.5 1.5 30209
50 90 20
55 100 21
60 110 22
17 21.75 67.9
18 22.75 74.6
19 23.75 81.5
58
64
70
57
64
69
79 83 85
88 91 94
96 101 103
3
4
4
65 120 23
70 125 24
75 130 25
20 24.75 89
21 26.25 93.9
22 27.25 99.2
77
81
86
4
4
4
4.5 2
2
5
2
5
80 140 26
85 150 28
90 160 30
22 28.25 105
24 30.5 112
26 32.5 118
4
5
5
6
2.5 2
6.5 2.5 2
6.5 2.5 2
95 170 32
100 180 34
105 190 36
27 34.5
29 37
30 39
126
133
141
5
5
6
7.5 3
8
3
9
3
2.5 30219
2.5 30220
2.5 30221
110 200 38
120 215 40
32 41
34 43.5
148
161
6
6
9
3
9.5 3
2.5 30222
2.5 30224
di
1
1
1
1
1
1
30204
30205
30206
1.5 30213
1.5 30214
1.5 30215
30216
30217
30218
Dimensions
Mounting dimensions
according to DIN 5418:
cb
47
57
66
2
2
3
3
1.5 1.5 30304
1.5 1.5 30305
3
4.5 1.5 1.5 30306
74
82
92
3
3
3
4.5 2
2
5
2
5
65
71
77
60 95 100 102
65 104 110 111
72 112 118 120
4
4
5
6
2.5 2
30310
6.5 2.5 2
30311
7.5 3
2.5 30312
83
89
95
5
5
5
8
8
9
db
L >a
Db
20
25
30
52 15
62 17
72 19
13 16.25 34.3
15 18.25 41.5
16 20.75 44.8
28
34
40
27
32
37
44
54
62
45
55
65
35 80 21
40 90 23
45 100 25
18 22.75 54.5
20 25.25 62.5
22 27.25 70.1
45
52
59
44
49
54
70
77
86
71
81
91
50 110 27
55 120 29
60 130 31
23 29.25 77.2
25 31.5 84
26 33.5 91.9
65 140 33
70 150 35
75 160 37
28 36
30 38
31 40
98.6
105
112
80 170 39
85 180 41
90 190 43
33 42.5
34 44.5
36 46.5
120
126
132
95 200 45
100 215 47
105 225 49
38 49.5
39 51.5
41 53.5
110 240 50
120 260 55
42 54.5
46 59.5
dy
cage
In the case of tapered roller bearings the cage projects beyond the
lateral face of the outer ring.
rbs Basic
max min min max min min min max max no.
ca
da
as
1.5 30307
1.5 30308
1.5 30309
3
3
3
2.5 30313
2.5 30314
2.5 30315
5 9.5 3
6 10.5 4
6 10.5 4
2.5 30316
30317
3
3
30318
139
148
155
6 11.5 4
6 12.5 4
7 12.5 4
3
3
3
30319
30320
30321
165
178
8 12.5 4
8 13.5 4
3
3
30322
30324
Tapered roller bearing DIN 720 - 30212: Tapered roller bearing of bearing
series 302 with bearing type 3, width series 0, diameter series 2, bore code 12
268
Machine elements: 5.
rins
mounting
space
external
groove
groove'
m
Nomilal size
dy
Ring
s
Slot
<h
d4
25
28
30
32
35
38
40
42
45
48
50
60
65
70
75
80
90
100
=>
IV
<*2
sss
mm
10
12
15
18
20
22
1
1
1
9.3
11
13.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
H13
min
mm
1)
dy
9.6
11.5
14.3
17
19
21
0.6
0.8
1.1
10
12
15
1.3
1.3
1.3
23.9
26.6
28.6
1.3
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.7
2.1
2.1
18
20
22
1.2
1.5
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3
3.2
3.5
1.1
1.1
1.1
16.5
18.5
20.5
23.2
25.9
27.9
17
19
22.6
26.2
28.4
30.8
34.2
37.9
40.5
1.5
1.5
1.75
29.6
32.2
35.2
43
46.8
50.2
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
36.5
38.5
41.5
52.6
55.7
59.1
62.5
64.5
75.6
81.4
87
92.7
98.1
108.5
120.2
3.6
3.9
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.7
30.3
33
36
37.5
39.5
42.5
45.5
47.0
57.0
62.0
67.0
72.0
76.5
86.5
96.5
1.6
1.6
1.85
1.85
1.85
1.85
1.85
2.15
2.15
2.65
2.65
2.65
2.65
3.15
3.15
2.6
3
3
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.3
5.3
5.3
44.5
45.8
55.8
60.8
65.5
70.5
74.5
84.5
94.5
5
5.1
5.8
6.3
6.6
7.0
7.4
8.2
9
3-10
25
28
30
32
35
38
40
42
45
48
50
60
65
72
75
80
90
100
=>
Nominal size
Ring
d3
Slot
<*4
dz
w
*
1
1
1
1
1
1
10.8
13
16.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.5
1.5
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.3
4.9
7.2
9.4
11.2
13.2
19.5
21.5
23.5
26.9
30.1
32.1
34.4
37.8
40.8
43.5
45.5
48.5
51.5
54.2
64.2
69.2
76.5
79.5
85.5
95.5
105.5
15.5
17.9
19.9
20.6
23.6
26.4
27.8
29.6
32
34.5
36.3
44.7
49.0
55.6
58.6
62.1
71.9
80.6
1.4
1.7
2
10.4
12.5
15.7
2.2
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.9
3
3.2
3.4
3.7
3.9
4.1
4.3
4.5
4.6
5.4
5.8
6.4
6.6
7.0
7.6
8.4
19
21
23
26.2
29.4
31.4
33.7
37
40
42.5
44.5
47.5
50.5
53.0
63.0
68.0
75.0
78.0
83.5
93.5
103.5
n
min
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.3
1.3
1.3
0.6
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.6
1.6
1.85
1.85
1.85
2.6
3
3
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.3
5.3
5.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.1
1.85
2.15
2.15
2.65
2.65
2.65
2.65
3.15
3.15
24-100
dy
in mm
8-22
d2
h10
hi 1
h12
H11
Standard design: dy from 3-300 mm; heavy duty design: dy from 15-100 mm
24-100
100-300
H12
H13
Circlips (selection)
relaxed
Circlips
loaded
d2
hi 1
Mounting
dimensions:
d2 from 0.8 to 30 mm
m
H13
Shaft
d3
loaded
dy
12.3
14.3
16.3
5.26
5.84
6.52
0.7
0.9
7- 9
9-12
18.8
7.63
8.32
10.45
1.1
1.2
12.61
15.92
1.5
1.75
21.88
9
10
12
20.4
23.4
15
19
24
29.4
37.6
44.6
from-to
1.3
8-11
10-14
11-15
13-18
16-24
20-31
25-38
n
min
0.74 + 0.05
0.94
0
1.05
1.2
1.15
1.25
1.35 + 0.08
0
1.55
1.80
2.05
1.5
1.8
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
270
Machine elements: 5.
rins
Sealing elements
Radial seals (selection)
Form A
dz
Form AS
10
22 26
25
14 24 30
non-rotating
b * 0.3,
with
Ra0.2 to
Ra0.8
or
Rz1 bis Rz5
12
26 35
35
47 52
38 55 62
18
40
50 55
55
52 62
22.5
70
80
51
85
90 10 61
70
90
95 10 66
75
95 100 10 70.5
44.5 100
48 62
56
80
41.5
62
85
65
38.5
60 65
75
32
120 130
125
12 94.5
Mounting dimensions:
4
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
d, from 17 to 180 mm
d2
30
37
42
47
52
57
66
71
Mounting dim.
Dimensions
d3
d4
di
6.5
6.5
21
26
31
36
41
46
51
56
31
38
43
48
53
58
67
72
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
100
Mounting dim
d2
w
<h
76 6.5 61.5
81 6.5 66.5
88 7.5 71.5
93 7.5 76.5
99 7.5 81.5
103 7.5 86.5
110 9.5 92
124 10 102
<U
77
82
89
94
99
104
111
125
Felt ring DIN 5419 M5-40: Felt ring of d, = 40 mm, felt hardn. M5
O-rings
Mr:
w+0.25
46.5
68
a) = edges rounded
72
60
37
42 55 62
45
65
29
35
55
19.5
40 52
27.5
47
16
35 47
50
72
45 52
30 35
40
25
42 52
14
35 47
25.5
47
40 47
dz
40 52
30 35
35
22
32
13
30
30 40
20
30
10
25
Mounting dimensions:
8.5 28
12 22 30
15
ds
5
6
8
9
10
14
15
16
17
1.8
1.8 2.65
d.
18
20
25
28
30
40
45
50
53
di
dz
2.65 3.55
3.55
5.3
56
58
60
63
67
69
71
75
80
dz
dy
dz
85
90
95
100
3.55 5.3 103 3.55
106
109
112
115
5.3
0 to 5
fisa
d2
1.8
CD
+
i
w+0.25
2.65
3.55
5.3
r-i
r2
0.3
0.2
0.6
0.2
internal external
h
axially sealing
w
2.4
1.4
1.3
2.6
1.3
3.6
2.1
1.95
3.8
4.8
2.85
2.65
2.75
7.1
4.3
4.15
7.3
4.25
Lubricating oils
Designation of lubricating oils
PGLP
CL
100
Additional code
letters
Code letters
for lubricating oils
ISO viscosity
grade
220
Silicon based
lubricating oil
Lubricating oil DIN 51517 - CL 100: Circulating mineral oil based lubricating oil (C), increased corrosion and
aging resistance (L), ISO viscosity grade VG 100 (100)
Lubricating oil DIN 51517 - PGLP 220: Polyglycol oil (PG), increased corrosion and aging resistance (L),
increased wear protection (P), ISO viscosity grade VG 220 (220)
Application
DIN 51501
DIN 51513
Manual, continuous flow and oil bath lubrications, mainly for open lubrication points
DIN 51517
DIN 8659
T2
CG
Synthetic liquids
Ester oils with especially low
change in viscosity
PG
SI
For lubricants that are mixed with water, e.g. cooling lubricant SE
For lubricants with solid lubricant additive, e.g. graphite, molybdenum sulfide
For lubricants with active ingredients to improve corrosion protection and/or aging
resistance
For lubricants with active ingredients for reducing friction and wear in
mixed friction areas and/or to increase the load capacity
Kinetic viscosity
in mm 2 /s at
20 C
40 C
50 C
3.3
5
13
21
34
2.2
3.2
4.6
6.8
10
15
Viscosity
grade
Kinetic viscosity
in mm 2 /s at
50 C
40 C
20 C
Viscosity
grade
Kinetic viscosity
in mm 2 /s at
20 C
40 C
50 C
1.3
2.7
3.7
ISO VG 22
ISO VG 32
ISO VG 46
22
32
46
15
20
30
ISO VG 220
ISO VG 320
ISO VG 460
220
320
460
130
180
250
5.2
7
ISO VG 68
ISO VG 100
ISO VG 150
68
100
150
40
60
90
ISO VG 680
ISO VG 1000
ISO VG 1500
680
1000
1500
360
510
740
11
272
Machine elements: 5.
rins
cf. d i n 5 1 5 0 2 <1990-08)
Designation by symbols
-20N
'3N
Lubricating grease DIN 51517 - K3N -20: Lubricating grease for antifriction and plain bearings (K) based on
mineral oil (NLGI grade 3) (3), upper working temperature +140C (N), lower working temperature -20C (-20)
Lubricating grease DIN 51517 - KSI3R -10: Silicon based lubricating grease for antifriction and plain bearings
(K) (SI), NLGI-grade 3 (3), upper working temperature +180C (R), lower working temperature -10C (-10)
Lubricating greases
Code letters Application/additives
KF
Closed gears
OG
M
Open gears
(adhesive lubricant without bitumen)
For plain bearings and seals
(low requirements)
Worked penetration2'
000
00
0
1)
2)
3)
NLGIgrade3'
Worked penetration2'
1
2
3
NLGI
grade 3)
4
5
6
310-340
265-295
220-250
Worked penetration2'
175-205
130-160
85-115 (very firm)
Upper working
temperature
C
C
D
+60
+60
E
F
+80
+80
1>
2)
Addit.
letter1)
Upper working
temperature
C
0 or 1
2 or 3
G
H
+ 100
+ 100
0 or 1
2 or 3
0 or 1
2 or 3
K
M
+120
+120
0 or 1
2 or 3
Grade
2)
Grade '
Addit.
letter1)
Upper working
temperature
C
N
P
R
S
T
U
+ 140
+ 160
+ 180
+ 200
+ 220
+ 220
Grade 2 '
as per
agreement
The number value for the lower working temperature can be appended to the additional code letters;
e.g.-20 for-20C
Grades for behavior when subjected to water, cf. DIN 51807-1:
0: no change; 1: small change; 2: moderate change; 3: large change
Solid lubricants
Lubricant
Code
Working
temperature
Application
Graphite
-18 to+450 C
Molybdenum
Polytetrafluorethylene
MOS2
-180 to+400 C As mineral oil-free paste, sliding lacquer or additive to lubricating oils sulfide
and lubricating greases, suitable for very high surface pressures
PTFE
-250 to+260 C As powder in sliding lacquer and synthetic lubricating greases and as
bearing material, very low coefficient of sliding friction fj = 0.04 to 0.09
Table of Contents
273
6 Production Engineering
inflection
point
frequency
curve
Material overhead
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
Wear safety
glasses
Wear hard
hat
Quality management
Standards, Terminology
Quality planning, Quality testing
Statistical analysis
Statistical process control
Process capability
274
276
277
279
281
Production planning
Time accounting according to REFA
Cost accounting
Machine hourly rates
282
284
285
Machining processes
Productive time
Machining coolants
Cutting tool materials, Inserts, Tool holders . . . .
Forces and power
Cutting data: Drilling, Reaming, Turning
Cutting data: Taper turning
Cutting data: Milling
Indexing
Cutting data: Grinding and honing
287
292
294
298
301
304
305
307
308
Material removal
Cutting data
Processes
313
314
Separation by cutting
Cutting forces
Shearing
Location of punch holder shank
315
316
317
Forming
Bending
Deep drawing
318
320
Joining
Welding processes
Weld preparation
Gas welding
Gas shielded metal arc welding
Arc welding
Thermal cutting
Identification of gas cylinders
Soldering and brazing
Adhesive bonding
322
323
324
325
327
329
331
333
336
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
274
Production
ngineering: 6.
u i
ang
Standard
Explanation, contents
DIN EN ISO
9000
process approach
DIN EN ISO
9004
Production
ngineering: 6.
u i
ang
Terminology
I Terms (selection)
I Quality-related terms
Quality
Extent to which the characteristics of a product fulfill the requirements for that product.
Requirement
Specified or mandatory demands for characteristics of a unit, e.g. nominal values, tolerances, functional capability or safety.
Customer satisfaction
Capability
Suitability of an organization, system or process to provide a product that fulfills that product's quality requirements.
Conformity
Defect
Rework
Mutually interactive resources and activities which convert inputs into results. Some examples of resources are personnel, finances, facilities and manufacturing methods.
Method
Defined manner in which an activity or process is performed. In written form also referred
to as process instructions.
Product
Result of a process, e.g. part, assembly, service, processed item, knowledge, concept, document, contract, pollutant.
Group of persons and facilities with a matrix of responsibilities, authorities and relationships.
Customer
Supplier
Quality
management
All coordinated activities for managing and controlling the quality-related aspects of an
organization by:
establishing a quality policy
quality control
setting quality goals
quality assurance
quality planning
quality improvement
Quality planning
Activities directed toward establishing quality goals and required implementation processes, as well as associated resources for attaining quality goals.
Quality control
Work activities and techniques to continually fulfill requirements despite unavoidable variations in quality. Consists primarily of process monitoring and elimination of weak points.
Quality assurance
Performing and generating required documentation for all activities relating to the QM system, with the goal of creating an atmosphere of trust, both in-house and with the customer,
that quality requirements will be fulfilled.
Quality
improvement
Quality manual
Document describing the quality policy, quality goals and quality management system of an
organization.
276
Production
ngineering: 6.
u i
ang
testing
and customer
Quality control
Quality control circle
human
environment
machine W testing
Actions taken
on process
BBHHRRIH^
Actions taken
on product
Factor
Examples
Human
qualification, motivation,
degree of utilization
Machine
Material
Method
Surroundings
(environment)
temperature, vibrations,
light, noise, dust
Management
Measurability
measurement inaccuracy
Quality testing
Concepts
Explanations
Quality testing
Test plan
Test instructions
Define and describe the type and scope of testing, e.g. measuring and monitoring devices,
frequency of testing, test personnel, testing location.
Complete testing
100% testing
Testing of all units within a test lot, e. g. visual inspection of all delivered parts.
Statistical testing
(sampling test)
Quality testing with the aid of statistical methods, e. g. evaluation of a large quantity
of parts by analyzing a number of sampled parts.
Test lot
(sampling test)
All of the units being tested, e.g. a production of 5000 identical workpieces.
Sample
One or more units which are taken from the population or a subset of the population,
e. g. 50 parts from a daily production of 400 parts.
Example:
In a crate there are m = 400 parts, where n = 10 parts have a dimensional defect.
What is the probability Pof obtaining a defective part when taking one part out
of the crate?
n
10
Probability P=
100%
100% = 2.5%
m
400
Probability
P = 100%
m
Production
ngineering: 6.
u i
ang
Statistical analysis
Statistical analysis of continuous characteristics
Example
Tally sheet
The tally sheet provides a clear presentation of the observed values and
assignment into classes (ranges) of a
specific class interval size.
n
k
/
R
rij
h,
8.01
8.02
7.96 8.03
7.99
7.99
8.02
8.02
8.00
8.01 8.01
Parts 11-20
7.96 7.99
8.00
8.02
Parts 21-30
7.99
8.05 8.03
8.00
Parts 31-40
8.02
8.01 8.05
7.94 7.98
7.99
8.03 7.99
8.00
7.96
2.5
7.96
7.98
III
7.5
7.98
8.00
Wt 1
11
27.5
8.00
8.02
m 111
13
32.5
8.02
8.04
Jttt Wi-
10
25
8.04
8.06
ll
0.11 mm
Histogram
14-
12-
8.01 8.02
8.01
8.02
8.01
in\ %
7.94
c = f n = l/40 = 6.3 6
7.98 7.99
8.00
Number of classes
n
2 =
8.01
40
100
k^Jn
Class interval size
.
i
Relative frequency
100%
= 0.018 mm ~ 0.02 mm
A7 = 40
10-
c
J3 0)
co cr
. O CD
4 2
0
7.94
7.96
7.98
8.00
8.02 8.04 mm
part diameter d
8.08
c
uT
c
CD
cr
<
>1)
TO
a>
CD
>
TO
=3
E
=3
o
99.9
99.95
7.94
7.96
7.98
8.00
8.02
8.04
part diameter d
LLV lower limit value; ULV upper limit value
mm
8.08
278
Production
ngineering: 6.
u i
ang
Normal distribution
Gaussian distribution
QQ 73 %
Continuous data values often exhibit a characteristic in their distribution which is approximated mathematically by the Gaussian
normal distribution model. For an infinite number of individual values the probability density of a normal distribution yields the typical
bell curve. This symmetrical and continuous distribution curve is
clearly described by the following parameters:
The mean n lies on the curve maximum and identifies the position of
the distribution.
The standard deviation a is a measure of the variations, i.e. how values deviate from the mean.
1)
characteristic value x
number of samples
2)
Standard deviation2'
'Z(Xi-x)2
S =
n-1
Range
R
*Ynax
*min
x = 8.005 mm
s = 0.02348 mm
/ ?
/ ?
+ . . .
/ ?
1)
x = 8.00225 mm ft = 0.11 mm
Arithmetic
mean2)
* 1 + * 2 + -
*m
Many pocket calculators have special functions for calculating the mean and
standard deviation.
Repeated occurrences of identical measurement values can be represented by a
suitable factor.
Mean of standard
deviations
100% inspection
(descriptive statistics)
Arithmetic mean x
Process mean //
Standard deviation s
Production
ngineering: 6.
u i
ang
Control limits
The raw data chart is a documentation of all measurement values by entering directly
on the chart. It assumes an approximate normal distribution process and is relatively
complex because of the
number of entries.
characteristic mean
(mean of the characteristic, target value, ideal
value)
5.06
II
UWL
LWL
UCL
LCL
USL
LSL
5.04
USL
UCL
5.02
b UWL
5.00
4.98
LWL
4.96
LCL
4.94
LSL
Sample
number
5...
Example:
Example:
k
Control interval
/
Sample size
60 m i n
f
n= 5
5.03 4.97
J*1 4.98 4.96
0) w
4.97
4.99
5.01 4.96
II CD E
D D E 4.99
5.02
5.03
5.01
cfl
C
D >5
x 4 5.01 4.99
4.99
4.99
5.02
*5 5.01 5.00 4.98
Ex 24.96 24.97 25.03 24.95
4.99
4.99
5.01 4.99
0.04 0.07
0.05
0.06
v}
5.04
UCL
<v
5.02
UWL
5.00
x
4.98
LSL
.E
4.96
LCL
"8*
UCL
0.08
UWL
0.06
E
x
>E 0.04
LWL
CD c 0.02
LCL
II
Inspect, characteristic:
diameter
Sample size:
Control intervall:
n =5
60 min
4.97
5.03
*1 4.98 4.96
E
4.97
4.99
5.01
4.96
*2
a? w
5.02
5.03
5.01
u. <D
*3 4.99
x 4 5.01 4.99
4.99
4.99
5.02
*5 5.01 5.00 4.98
X 4.992 4.994 5.006 4.990
s 0.018 0.025 0.021 0.025
UCL
cr,)
5.02
I
1
I
CD
UWL
5.01
.V
5.00
A
LWL
4.99
I
I
I*
s
4.98
LCL
11
CO
L! C
T3
CD O 0.022
"O VC C
D 0.020
CD ' C
iz > 0.018
0.016
Sample no.
Sample no.
Time
UCL
UWL
0.026
0.024
Time
1)
Control dimension:
50.05
leasu
valui
mrr
x
>
LWL
I
1
6 00
2
7 00
3
8i 00
LCL ,
4
9i 00
280
Production
ngineering: 6.
u i
ang
Designation/observations
Possible causes
Natural run
RUN (sequential)
7 or more sequential values lie on
one side of the mean line.
Actions
LCL
UCL
Trend
LCL
UCL
Middle Third
At least 15 consecutive values lie
within standard deviation s.
V V V V W v ^
LCL
UCL
x
Cyclical
The values cross the mean line
periodically.
LCL
An attribute inspection is an acceptance sampling inspection in which the acceptability of the inspection lot is determined based on defective units or defects in individual sampling.
The percentage of nonconforming units or the number of defects per hundred units of the lot identifies the quality level. The acceptable quality level is the quality level defined for continuously presented lots; it is a quality level
that is specified by the customer in most cases. The associated sampling instructions are summarized in control
tables.
Acceptance sampling plan for single sampling inspection as the normal inspection
(excerpt from a control table)
Acceptable quality level AQL (preferred values)
Lot size
0.04
0.065
0.10
0.15
0.25
0.40
0.65
2-
9-
15
16-
25
26-
50
51-
90
50
32
91- 150
80
50
151- 280
125
80
50
281- 500
200
125
80
501-1200
315
200
125
80
Explanation:
50 2
1
1.0
13
20
20
32
32
50
50
1.5
2.5
13
13
20
20
13
32
20
20
50
32
32
32
80
50
50
50
125
80
80
80
80
Use first sampling instruction of this column. If the sample size is greater than or equal to
the batch size: Carry out a 100% inspection.
Second number: Acceptance number = number of the accepted delivered defective units
Production
ngineering: 6.
u i
ang
LLV
*
charcteristic value
LLV
ULV
x
s
ULV
Cp, C p k
Example:
Examination of machine capability for production dimension 80 0.05;
0,1mm
- o,-o Acrit
0.047 mm
= 1852; Cmk
=.
=1.74
m =-_
6 0.009 mm
* 3 s 3-0.009 mm
Pareto11 diagram
Customer or contract
specific requirements;
in large scale production,
e.g. automotive industry,
tendency to higher requirements, e.g. Cm: 2.0.
Example:
Part: Cover
Sample size n = 50
Defect type
Frequency of
Paint damage
F1
1
Dents
F2 1 2
2 1
Corrosion
F3
1
1
BunF4 1
Crackings
F5
1
Angle error
F6 2
3 1
Bent
F7
1
Threads missing F8
1
Defects per sample
4 6 3 3 3
Sample no.
1 2 3 4 5
defect /j
1
2 2 2 2
1
Example:
1)
35
100% = 40%
F4
F7
defect types
F8
282
Job time1'
Structure of types of time for workers
Designation
Job time
ts
Setup time
fp
Production time
fre
Recovery time
fu
Unproductive time
tac
Activity time
fw
Waiting time
Job volume
Symbol
min
= 4.50
= 10.00
= 12.50
= 27.00
= 1.08
= 3.78
= 31.86
Production times:
Activity time
Waiting time
Floor-to-floor time
Recovery time
Unproductive time
T.m* per unit work
Production time
tac
fw
=
+ t...
f r e compens. for in f w
f u = 8%offff
f u w = f f f + tn + tu
tp = q f u w
min
= 14.70
= 3.75
= 18.45
= 1.48
= 19.93
= 59.79
1)
According to REFA (Verband fur Arbeitsgestaltung, Betriebsorganisation und Unternehmensentwicklung e.V.)
International Association for Work Design, Industrial Organization and Corporate Development
283
Utilization time1'
Structure of the types of times for production resources (PR)
Designation
'UtP
Utilization time
UP
Production resource
setup time
Production resource
production time
Time allowed for the production time of a lot size (without setup)
uP
Production resource
interruption time
mp
Main
productive time
Auxiliary
productive time
Production resources are prep., loaded or emptied for the main productive time
variable times f a v
- manual clamping
fixed times f a f
automatic workpiece change
Idle time
Job volume
Symbol
PP
fid
Example: Milling a contact surface on 20 base plates using a vertical milling machine
min
min Production times:
3.52
4.54 Milling = main productive time f m p
4.00
3.65 Clamp workpiece = aux. productive time f a p
1.20
3.10 Transport workpiece = idle time f i d
2.84 Prod. res. floor-to-floor time f f f P = f m p + f a p + f i d
= 8.72
Production resources basic setup time f b s P
= 14.13 Prod. res. unproductive time f u P = 10% of f f f P
=
0.87
Prod. res. unproductive s. time f u s P = 10% of f b s P = 1.41Prod, resource time per unit f
= 9.59
u w P = fffP + f u P
= 191.80
Production resources setup time f s P = fbsP + *usP = 15.54 Production resource prod, time f p P = q f u w P
Setup times:
Read the job order and drawing
Set up and store the surface cutter
Clamp and unclamp the cutter
Set up the machine
284
Cost accounting
Simple calculation (numerical example)
Direct costs1'
directly attributable
to a specific product
Types
of
costs 1 '
Material costs
Labor costs
Overhea d 1 '
Not directly
Surcharge in percent of wage
attributable to a specific product
costs
$ 80 000.00
$ 120 000.00
Depreciation
Salaries (incl.
management salaries)
Interest
Other costs
I Overhead
Cost calculation
$ 50 000.00
$ 80 000.00
$ 40 000.00
$ 50 000.00
1 8 3 3 3
Material costs
of order
Working time 5 hr
x$/hr 34.20
$ 171.00
$ 295.75
$ 124.75
Design costs
Salaries etc.
Material overhead
Percent of material direct costs,
e.g. purchasing costs, storage
costs, etc.
Equipment costs
Drilling equipment molds etc.
Material costs
Special tools
Special drills etc.
Production overhead1'
Machine costs
Depreciation, interest, occupancy, energy and maintenance
costs
Remaining overhead
Percent of production wages,
e.g. fringe benefits, occupancy,
operating materials, etc.
Out-of-house processing
Heat treatment etc.
1
Special direct costs of
production
1
Production costs
Special direct costs of
production
Manufacturing costs
Management and
sales overhead
Percent of manufacturing costs
Prime cost
Profit
Percent of prime cost
Raw price
Commissions, discounts, rebates
Percent of sales price
Sales price without VAT
$ 120 000.00
$ 220 000.00
$ 2 2 0 000.00- 100%
Example:
Material direct costs
Material overhead 5%
Production wages 10 hr x $/hr 15.Machine costs 8 hr x $ / h r 3 0 Residual overhead 200% of production wages
Special tools
$ 1 225.00
$61.25
$ 150.00
$ 240.00
$ 300.00
$ 125.00
Manufacturing costs
Management and sales overhead
12% of manufacturing costs
$2101.25
Prime cost
Profit addition 10% of the prime cost
$2353.40
$ 235.34
Raw price
Commissions 5% of sales price
$2588.74
$ 136.25
$2724.99
$ 252.15
/ o
285
Energy costs
Costs incurred by electricity, natural gas, steam or
gasoline consumption
Calculated interest
Average interest for capital invested for
the machine
Occupancy costs
Costs incurred by floor and traffic
space of the machine
Maintenance costs
Costs for repairs and regular service
. 0 t h e r types of costs
Costs for tool wear, insurance premiums, disposal of
coolants and lubricants etc.
TSm
CM
CMhr
Cf
Qj/hr
What would be the machine hourly rate for normal utilization and 80% utilization?
Type of cost
Calculation
Fixed costs
$/year
Calculated
depreciation
procurement value
service life in years
Calculated
interest
Maintenance
costs
Energy
costs
Proportional
occupancy costs
$ 16 000.00
$ 160 000.00
10 years
$ 80 000 - x 8%
100%
+ <Vhr = $ ^ i f ? ' 0
1200 nr
$ 6 400.00
$ 8 000.00
$5.00
$ 240.00
$ 1.20
$ 1 800.00
$ 32 440.00
Variable
costs
S/hr
7RJ
+ Q,/\hr =
+ $/hr 6.20 = $/hr 40.00
0.8 /RT
0.8 1 zOO nr
The machine hourly rate does not include costs for operator.
$ 6.20
286
Direct costing1'
Marginal costing (with numerical example)
Contribution margin
Marginal costing takes the market price of a product into consideration. The market
price must at least cover variable costs (lower price limit). The remainder is the contribution margin. Contribution margins of all products carry the costs of operational
readiness.
R/piece
R
CM
CM/piece
Cf
CXj
P
Bp
CM
piece
fixed costs
variable costs
profit or gain
breakeven point
CM-
R
piece
C M
Cv
piece
volume
piece
Profit
P= CM- Cf
Variable costs (C^)21
depends on production
volume
Cfl
Material costs
Labor costs
Energy costs
CD
C
>L
2 Variable costs
No. of pieces
produced
CO
O
|
CM = ft/piece - C v /piece
$ 50 000.00
$ 80 000.00
$ 40 000.00
$ 30 000.00
$ 200 000.00
Contribution margin
5 000 pieces $ 110.00-$60.00
= $/piece 50.00
Breakeven point
800000 -
S> 600000
c
CD
>
CD 400000
breakeven
point (Bp)
O CD
II
S 200000
200000
fixed
costs
w 33
O3
O -Q
^
2000
4000 piec. 6000
volume
i
1
2000
4000 piec. 6000
volume
Cf2 - Cfl
C v1 /piece - C v2 /piece
Cost comparison
piece count limit M\]rr
600000 machine 1
machine 1 costs
$475000.machine 2
400000
200000
= 4000 pieces
Mil iim
m =
$/piece 75.00 - $/piece 50.00
Machine 2 is more economical at volumes above 4000 pieces.
1)
2)
2000
4000
volume
6000 pieces
Direct costing separates costs into fixed costs (costs of operating readiness) and variable costs (direct costs).
Variable costs are calculated for each job and compared to revenue.
Production engineering
ci
/0i
L
f
n
/
vc
productive time
outside diameter
inside diameter
mean diameter 11
workpiece length
starting idle
Productive time
Solid cylinder
without shoulder
with shoulder
L
/c
/si
r~i
with shoulder
without shoulder
L
Hollow cylinder
y i
f-
k-i
A
dm
n=
1)
L = / + / si
= / + /Sj +10\
2
dm = ~;
k d
L=
81
n=
rc dr
L^+lsi+lo!
,
d + d-i
dm = L\
vr
n=
Jt dr
Use of mean diameter dm leads to higher cutting speeds. This ensures acceptable cutting conditions for small
diameters (inside area).
Example:
Straight cylindrical turning without shoulder, / = 1240 mm;
/ s i = / 0 j = 2 mm; f= 0.6 mm; v c = 120 m/min;
/'= 2; d= 160 mm;
i = ?; n = ? (for infinitely variable speed adjustment)
fP = ?
fp
L
/
/Si
/oi
/
productive time
total travel of thread cutting tool
thread length
starting idle
overrun idle travel
number of cuts
P
n
s
h
ap
vc
L = I + / s i + / o i = 1240 mm + 2 mm + 2 mm = 1244 mm
120 m
1
v
min a 239
n = c _
n d Ji 0.16 m
min
L i
1244 mm -2
.
fp =
=
~ 17.4 min
n T
'
239
0.6 mm
min
thread pitch
rotational speed
no. of starts
thread depth
cutting depth
cutting speed
Example:
L-i-s
P n
Number of cuts
.
L = I + /Sj + / o i = 76 mm + 2 mm + 2 mm = 80 mm
Productive time
/' = ?; fp = ?
h 1.84 mm
/=- =
= 12.2 ^ 13
3 P 0.15 mm
n=
nd
L-is
P n
min
^ QQ 1
it 0.024 m
min
80 mm -13-1
= 4.3 min
1
3 mm 80
min
288
Production engineering
ci
Turning
Straight cylindrical turning and facing at constant cutting speed
If the rotational speed must be limited for safety reasons by inputting a rotational speed limit n|, m , a turning diameter of d < transition diameter dx is turned at
constant rotational speed (page 287).
<k
transition diameter
number of cuts
Vc
cutting speed
outside diameter
dy
inside diameter
cutting depth
de
L
effective diameter
travel
feed
Transition diameter
dt =
Jt H;
Productive time
f
Jt d e
Vc -f
/si
starting idle
lo\
d-d
2 ar
J t
cu
H
ft1
"C3
% d1
ra d\
TD
Xj
r
/
d\
"D
Ik
n lim
rotational speed n
with shoulder
without shoulder
dn
rotational speed n
Hollow cylinder
"lim
-T-
/si
/si
L
L
1 + ls\
L=
L=l +L
l 0j
de = d - a D (/' + 1)
Example:
de
si
d + d
d =
M
de
LTL
tSl
L=
t =
UL
Sl
2
120 m m +
65 mm
2
Jt de L i
v
c -f
+1.5 mm = 94 mm
2
Jt 94 mm 29 mm 2
= 0.39 min
___
mm _ _
220000
0.2 mm
min
d-d^
-
.
.
+ L+ L
+
' c i
*ru
Production engineering
ci
lc
0.6 d
118
0.3 d
130
0.23 d
140
0.18 d
/si
productive time
tool diameter
bore depth
starting idle
overrun idle travel
lead
Productive time
travel
f
n
vc
/
o
number of cuts
drill point angle
L i
n f
Speed
n = c
71 d
Calculating travel L
for drilling and reaming
for counterboring
Through hole
Blind hole
L = / + /c + /si + /c
L=I+L+L
Example:
L = / + l c + / s i = 90 mm + 0.23 30 mm + 1 mm = 98 mm
L i
98 mm-15
450
min
= 21.78 min
0.15 mm
L
w
wa
productive time
workpiece length
starting idle
overrun idle travel
stroke length
width of workpiece
approach width
wQ
n
vc
vr
W
f
/'
overrun width
no. of double strokes per minute
cutting speed, approach speed
return speed
planing, shaping width
feed per double stroke
number of cuts
Productive time
W- i
vv
W- i
f
290
Production engineering
ci
Milling
Productive time
productive time
workpiece length
cutting depth
a e engagement (milling width)
la approach
/st
starting travel
total travel
cutter diameter
rotational speed
Feed rate
vf = n f
ft
number of teeth
VF=N-FT-N
Rotational speed
v c cutting speed
vf
feed rate
number of cuts
eccentric
centric
a P <0.5 d
3p >0.5 d
L = / + 0.5 d + la + lol-
/st
L = I+ la + l0 j + /st
L = ! + 0.5 d +
+ lr
lst =
l/ae-d-ae2
Example:
Face milling (see left illustration): N = 10, ft = 0.08 mm,
v c = 30 m/min, la = / o i = 1.5 mm, i = 1 cut
Sought after: n; vf; L; tp
080
Solution: n
v
JT d
=
=
m
30 min
JT 0.08 m
Vt =n I -N =119
[ - xZ/y/A r ^t
-0.08 mm 10 = 9 5 . 2 - ^
min
30 mm
= 0.375, it follows that a <0.5 d
80 mm
in
I o^
260
min
min
= '+la+loi
+ 'st
2
lst
=y]ae d-a
'P
301.7 m m - 1
95.2 mm
min
= 3.2 min
Production engineering
ci
Grinding
Straight cylindrical grinding
fp
L
/
n
f
vf
d-|
d
ap
/
wg
/oi
t
productive time
travel
number of cuts
workpiece rotational speed
workpiece feed per revolution
feed rate
initial diameter of workpiece
final diameter of workpiece
cutting depth
workpiece length
grinding wheel width
overrun idle travel
grinding allowance
Workpiece rotational
speed
Productive time
Number of cuts
for external straight
for internal straight
grinding
grinding
; =
2 3n
2 an
1)
2 cuts to spark out, for lower tolerance grades additional cuts are necessary
Calculating travel L
Workpieces without shoulder
Workpieces
with shoulder
2-wq
^
- j - k
s>
S E E
3
/. = / - - Wg
Surface grinding
f p productive time
workpiece length
/j
L travel
/'
number of cuts
w width of workpiece
grinding allowance
w 0 overrun width
W grinding width
a p cutting depth
Number of cuts
No. of strokes
r = - + 21>
n=
Vf
Productive time
2 cuts to
spark out
yy+1
f
.
f
1Li
"tn
//
~ 3\
m*
/
w0~-
=J3
L = / + 2 /i
/; - 0.04 /
W = W Wg
L = I+ 2-1;
l\ 0.04 /
1/1/= W
Wg
3
292
Composition
SN
machining
coolants
insoluble in
water
1)
Group
Applications
Inorganic materials
in water
Grinding
Organic or synthetic
materials in water
Machining at high
cutting speed
Emulsions
2%-20% emulsive
(soluble) machining
coolant in water
Cutting oil
Solutions/
dispersions
SEMW
machining
coolants
(oil in water)
2)
Explarlation
Effect
SESW
machining
coolants
Machining coolants may be hazardous to health (page 198) and are therefore only used in small quantities.
EP = Extreme Pressure; additives to increase acceptance of high surface pressure between chip and tool
Steel
Cast iron,
malleable cast iron
Cu,
Cu alloys
Al,
Al alloys
Mg alloys
Roughing
emulsion,
solution
dry
dry
emulsion,
cutting oil
dry,
cutting oil
Finishing
emulsion,
cutting oil
emulsion,
cutting oil
dry,
emulsion
dry,
cutting oil
dry,
cutting oil
Milling
emulsion,
solution,
cutting oil
dry,
emulsion
dry,
emulsion,
cutting oil
cutting oil,
emulsion
dry,
cutting oil
Drilling
emulsion,
cutting oil
dry,
emulsion
dry,
cutting oil,
emulsion
cutting oil,
emulsion
dry,
cutting oil
Reaming
cutting oil,
emulsion
dry,
cutting oil
dry,
cutting oil
cutting oil
cutting oil
emulsion
dry,
emulsion,
dry,
cutting oil
cutting oil,
emulsion
dry,
cutting oil
cutting oil
cutting oil
cutting oil
Turning
Sawing
Broaching
cutting oil,
emulsion
emulsion
Hobbing,
gear shaping
cutting oil
cutting oil,
emulsion
Thread cutting
cutting oil
cutting oil,
emulsion
cutting oil
cutting oil
Grinding
emulsion,
solution,
cutting oil
solution,
emulsion
emulsion,
solution
emulsion
Honing, lapping
cutting oil
cutting oil
cutting oil,
dry
Material
hardened steel
HRC
Cutting
speed
vc m/min
Feed f
mm/revolution
60-220
0.05-0.3
0.05-0.5
60-180
0.05-0.2
0.05-0.2
50-190
0.05-0.25
0.05-0.4
50-150
0.05-0.2
0.05-0.2
Cutting
a depth
p
mm
W ^ t ,
External turning
45-58
Internal turning
External turning
> 58-65
Internal turning
<
Material
hardened steel
Cutting
speed
HRC
m/min
mm
to 35
80-90
0.05 d
36-45
60-70
0.05 d
46-54
50-60
0.05 d
working
engagement
^e max
/-
2-8
>8-12
> 12-20
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.03
0.04
0.05
Cutting
speed
Material group
1<3
m/min
i
yy
y
d>0
ae
mm
ft
mm
ae
mm
fx
mm
Steel Rm
850-1100
> 1100-1400
280-360
210-270
0.25
0.09-0.13
0.40
0.13-0.18
Hardened steel
48-55 HRC
> 5 5 - 6 7 HRC
90-240
75-120
0.25
0.20
0.09-0.13
0.40
0.35
0.13-0.18
300-360
0.25
0.09-0.13
0.40
0.13-0.18
Titanium alloy
90-270
0.20-0.25
0.09-0.13
0.35-0.40
0.13-0.18
Cu alloy
90-140
0.20
0.09-0.13
0.35
0.13-0.18
1 Dry machining
Process
Quenched and
tempered steels
Wrought alloy
Drilling
TIN, dry
TIN, dry
TIAIN, MQCL
TIAIN, MQCL
Reaming
PCD, MQCL
_2)
PCD, MQCL
TiAIN, PCD,
MQCL
"TIAIN, MQCL
Milling
TIN, dry
TiAIN, MQCL
TIN, dry
TiAIN, dry
TIAIN, MQCL
Sawing
MQCL
MQCL
_2)
TIAIN, MQCL
TiAIN, MQCL
drilling
grinding
lapping
turning
reaming
honing
2)
3)
294
Production engineering
HC -
Application group
20
K1>
M (yellow)
K (red)
Components
N (green)
S (br
Properties
HT
HC
Increasingly replacing
the uncoated hard
metals
CA
CM
CN
CR
CC
Increasingly replacing
the uncoated cutting
ceramics
Cutting ceramics
BC
Diamond
Applications
Hard metals
Boron nitride
H (gray)
DP
DM
Monocrystalline diamond
HS
High-performance high-speed
steel with alloying elements
tungsten (W), molybdenum (Mo),
vanadium (V) and cobalt (Co),
usually coated with titanium
nitride (TIN)
Cutting of non-ferrous
metals and Al alloys with
high silicon content
Production engineering
ools
Application
color code
group
Possible cutting
parameters 1 '
Workpiece - material
Wear
resistance
Toughness
Cutting
speed
Feed
Steel
P
blue
P01
P10
P20
P30
P40
P50
P05
P15
P25
P35
P45
M01
M10
M20
M30
M40
M05
M15
M25
M35
K01
K10
K20
K30
K40
K05
K15
K25
K35
Stainless steel
M
yellow
Cast iron
K
red
I
y
u
N
green
N01
N10
N20
N30
N05
N15
N25
f t
U
Special alloys and titanium
S01
S10
S20
S30
S05
S15
S25
High-temperature special
alloy on the basis of iron,
nickel and cobalt,
titanium and titanium
alloys
A
u
Hard materials
H
gray
H01
H10
H20
H30
H05
H15
H25
Hardened steel,
hardened cast iron
materials, cast iron
for ingot casting
I
1)
296
Production engineering
ISO 1832
Designations for indexable inserts for cutting toolscf. DIN (2005-11)
Designation examples:
Indexable carbide insert with rounded corners (DIN 4968) without mounting hole
Insert DIN
4968
T
N G N
16 03 08 T
P20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Indexable carbide insert with wiper edges (DIN 6590) without mounting hole
Insert DIN
Standard number
15
04
ED
6590
D
R - P10
(9
Basic shape
Equilateral, equiangular
and round
80 (
Equilateral and
non-equiangular
W
85 (
Non-equilateral and
L
equiangular
A, B, K non-equiangular
55c
82'
N
c
20c
15
Allow, dev. for
Control dim. d
0.025
0.013
0.005
0.013
0.025
0.025
M
U
0.16
0.013
0.08...0.20
0.25
0.09
0.13
0.025
0.025
K
W
T
c r o
a n n o
0.025
D E I
\ZE
7 [
D D J
a s 7C
Special data
The cutting length is the longer cutting edge for non-equilateral inserts, for round
inserts it is the diameter.
45
0.09
0.05...0.15
0.025
0.025
K
0.005
0.025
0.05...0.15
Control dim. d
Insert size
0.025
Insert thickness s
Insert thickness s
special data
11'
Control dim. m
Control dim. m
30c
H
0.013
@ Faces and
clamping
features
25c
F sharp
E rounded
T chamfered
60c
c
c
c
15c 20 25 30
chamfered
rounded
double
chamfered
11'
doub. chamfered
and rounded
standard no.
of holder
holding method
insert
shape 1 '
design of holder
normal clear, angle of insert 1 ' a n
type of holder
height of cutting edge h^ = h2 in mm
shank width w i n mm
length of holder /| in mm
indexable insert size 1 '
1) For indexable inserts, see page 296
R 32 25
cf
MOTW
M 16
298
Production engineering
an
cutting force in N
chip section in m m 2
cutting depth in mm
feed per revolution in mm
chip thickness in mm
cutting edge angle in degrees ()
correction factor for the cutting
speed
v c cutting speed in m/min
kc specific cutting force in N/mm 2
(page 299)
P c cutting power in kW
P-\ drive power of the machine tool in kW
rj efficiency of the machine tool
10-30
31-80
1.3
1.1
81-400
1.0
Chip section
A = ap f
Cutting force
Fc - A
Example:
A shaft of 16MnCr5, a p = 5 mm, f= 0.32 mm, v c = 110 m/min, x = 75c
Sought after: h; kc; C; A; Fc; P-, with rj = 0.75
Solution: h = f sinx = 0.32 mm sin 75 = 0.31 mm
kc = 3735N/mm 2 (see table on page 299),
C = 1.0 (see correction factor table)
A =ap -f = 5 mm 0.32 mm = 1.6 m m 2
N
2
= A kc C 1.6 mm 3735
1.0 = 5976 N
mm z
5976N 110 m i l 4 A <
= 14608 W= 14.6 kW
0.75 60 s
Chip thickness
h = f sinx
Cutting power
Pc = Fc. vc
Drive power
Pr
Pi'
Drilling
Fc
z
A
d
f
fz
o
h
C
vc
kc
Pc
Pi
rj
Example:
10-30
1.3
31-80
1.1
d f
A- kr - C
6265
1.3 = 7037 N
mnr1
2 7037 N-28 m
N m
P, =
~
= 3284
= 3284W = 3.3 kW
2
60 s 2
s
11
The specific cutting force values ke are assessed in turning tests.
The conversion to drilling is realized via the factor 1.2 in the formula.
Chip thickness
sin
o
2
Cutting power
p
r
c ~
Drive power
Production engineering
an
0.05
0.08
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.80
1.00
1.50
2.00
S235
E295
E355
3850
5635
4565
3555
4990
4215
3425
4705
4055
3195
4235
3785
3040
3930
3605
2930
3710
3470
2840
3535
3365
2705
3285
3205
2605
3100
3085
2405
2740
2850
2315
2585
2745
2160
2330
2560
2055
2160
2340
C15, C15E
C35, C35E
C45, C45E
4575
4425
4760
4125
3895
4210
3925
3670
3975
3590
3290
3575
3370
3045
3320
3210
2865
3130
3085
2725
2985
2895
2525
2770
2755
2375
2615
2485
2095
2315
2365
1970
2185
2165
1765
1965
2030
1635
1825
C60, C60E
11SMnPb30
16MnCr5
4750
2675
5950
4365
2460
5265
4190
2360
4965
3895
2195
4470
3700
2085
4150
3555
2000
3915
3440
1935
3735
3265
1840
3465
3135
1765
3270
2880
1625
2895
2770
1560
2730
2575
1450
2455
2445
1375
2280
20MnCr5
18CrMo4
34CrAIMo5
5775
4955
4930
5135
4575
4360
4855
4405
4115
4385
4110
3705
4085
3915
3435
3860
3770
3245
3690
3655
3095
3435
3480
2870
3245
3350
2710
2885
3095
2395
2730
2975
2260
2475
2780
2035
2295
2645
1890
42CrMo4
50CrV4
102Cr6
7080
6290
5895
6265
5565
4910
5915
5250
4500
5320
4725
3840
4940
4385
3435
4660
4140
3145
4445
3945
2930
4125
3660
2620
3890
3455
2400
3445
3060
2000
3250
2885
1835
2925
2595
1565
2715
2410
1400
90MnCrV8
X210CrW12
X5CrNi18-10
5610
5155
5730
5080
4565
5190
4850
4305
4955
4455
3875
4550
4195
3595
4285
4000
3395
4085
3850
3235
3935
3625
3005
3705
3460
2835
3535
3135
2510
3200
2990
2365
3055
2745
2130
2805
2585
1975
2640
X30Cr13
T1AI6V4
5155
3340
4565
3025
4305
2890
3875
2655
3595
2495
3395
2385
3235
2295
3005
2160
2835
2060
2510
1985
2365
1780
2130
1635
1975
1540
GJL-150
GJL-200
GJL-400
2315
2805
4165
2100
2495
3685
2005
2360
3480
1840
2130
3130
1730
1985
2905
1650
1875
2740
1590
1790
2615
1500
1670
2425
1430
1575
2290
1295
1405
2025
1235
1325
1910
1135
1200
1720
1065
1115
1595
GJS-400
GJS-600
GJS-800
2765
3200
5500
2455
2955
4470
2325
2845
4055
2100
2655
3390
1955
2530
2985
1845
2435
2710
1765
2360
2500
1645
2250
2200
1555
2165
1995
1380
2000
1625
1305
1925
1470
1180
1795
1230
1100
1710
1085
AlCuMgl
AIMg3
AC-AISi12
2150
2020
2150
1930
1810
1930
1835
1725
1835
1670
1570
1670
1565
1470
1565
1485
1395
1485
1425
1340
1425
1335
1250
1335
1265
1190
1265
1135
1065
1135
1080
1015
1080
985
925
985
920
865
920
MgAI8Zn
CuZn40Pb2
CuSn7ZnPb
895
1740
1760
820
1600
1565
785
1535
1480
725
1425
1335
690
1355
1245
660
1300
1175
635
1260
1125
605
1195
1045
580
1150
990
530
1055
880
505
1015
830
470
945
750
445
895
700
1)
The standard values apply to tools with hard metal edges. Tool wear increases the specific cutting force by
approximately 30%. The values specified in the table include this addition. For turning, drilling (page 298) and
milling processes (page 300), the effect of the cutting speed on the standard values for the specific cutting force
is considered via correction factors C in the upper table.
300
Production engineering
an
fz
d
cutting power in kW
Py drive power in kW
effective power of the machine
tool
Example:
Feed rate
Vj = N-
fz-
A = ap-fz
Fc=1.2
A - kc - C
Chip thickness
for d = (1.2-1.6)- a e 2 )
h~f
Solution:
Pc = Ne-FcP,
Number of teeth
engaged
A/p =
d/ae
cp in
2)
<p in
d/ae
ip in
1.20
113
1.35
96
1.50
83
1.25
106
1.40
91
1.55
80
1.30
100
1.45
87
1.60
77
360c
Cutting power
Ne- Fc
VC
Correction factor C
for the cutting speed
Cutting speed
vc in m/min
C
Drive power
cutter diameter
30-80
1.1
engagement
81-400
1.0
1)
d/ae
<P
14.2kW
Pc=
Angle of engagement <p
rj
The values of the specific cutting force kc (page 299) are assessed in turning tests. The conversion to milling is
achieved via the factor 1.2 in the formula.
In order to ensure favorable cutting conditions, the cutter diameter should be selected in the range
d = (1.2-1.6) a e .
Production engineering
Drilling
Twist drills of high-speed steel (HSS)
Helix angle
Type 1 '
11
Point angle
3)
Helix
angle 2 '
Point angle 3)
30-40c
118c
13-19c
118c
40-47c
130c
Application
2)
Workpiece matesrial
Material group
Tensile strength
Rm in N/mm 2
or
Hardness HB
Drill d iameter d in
i mm
2-3
>6-12
>3-6
>12-25
>25-50
m/min
Feed f in mm/revolution
Rm < 800
40
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.25
0.35
Rm > 800
20
0.04
0.08
0.10
0.15
0.20
Stainless steels
Rm < 800
12
0.03
0.06
0.08
0.12
0.18
<250 HB
20
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.60
Al alloys
Rm < 350
45
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.60
Cu alloys
Rm < 500
60
0.10
0.15
0.30
0.40
0.60
Thermoplastics
50
0.10
0.15
0.30
0.40
0.60
Thermoset plastics
25
0.05
0.10
0.18
0.27
0.35
Workpiece mate5rial
Material group
Tensile strength
Rm in N/mm 2
or
Hardness HB
vc
Drill diameter d in
i mm
2-3
>3-6
I >6-12
>12-25
>25-50
m/min
Feed f in mm/revolution
Rm < 800
90
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.25
0.40
Rm > 800
80
0.08
0.13
0.20
0.30
0.40
Stainless steels
Rm < 800
40
0.08
0.13
0.20
0.30
0.40
< 250 HB
100
0.10
0.15
0.30
0.45
0.70
Al alloys
180
0.15
0.25
0.40
0.60
0.80
Cu alloys
200
0.12
0.16
0.30
0.45
0.60
Thermoplastics
80
0.05
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
Thermoset plastics
80
0.05
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
2>
short drill
302
Production engineering
Cutting speed
Reami ng allow.
f o r d ' in mm
Tens, strength
Rm in N/mm 2
or
Hardness HB
m/min
Rm - 800
15
0.06
0.12
0.18
0.32
0.50
Rm > 800
10
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.25
0.40
Stainless steels
Rm < 800
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.25
0.40
<250 HB
15
0.06
0.12
0.18
0.32
0.50
Al alloys
Rm < 350
26
0.10
0.18
0.30
0.50
0.80
Cu alloys
Rm < 500
26
0.10
0.18
0.30
0.50
0.80
Material group
2-3
>3-6
>6-12
>12-25
>25-50
to 20
>20-50
0.20
0.30
0.30
0.60
Feed f in mm/revolution
Thermoplastics
14
0.12
0.20
0.35
0.60
1.00
Thermoset plastics
14
0.12
0.20
0.35
0.60
1.00
Cutting speed
Tool dliametei' d in mm
Reamiing allow.
f o r d ' in mm
Tens, strength
Rm in N/mm 2
or
Hardness HB
m/min
Rm < 800
15
0.06
0.12
0.18
0.32
0.50
Rm > 800
10
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.25
0.40
Stainless steels
Rm > 800
10
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.25
0.40
< 250 HB
25
0.10
0.18
0.28
0.50
0.80
Al alloys
Rm < 350
30
0.12
0.20
0.35
0.50
1.00
Cu alloys
Rm < 500
30
0.12
0.20
0.35
0.50
1.00
2-3
>3-6
>6-12
>12-25
>25-50
to 20
>20-50
0.20
0.30
0.30
0.60
Feed f in mm/revolution
Thermoplastics
20
0.12
0.20
0.35
0.50
1.00
Thermoset plastics
30
0.12
0.20
0.35
0.50
1.00
Tens, strength
Rm in N/mm 2
or
Hardness HB
Tapping 2 '
Cutting sf
Carbic ie tool
Thread
forming 2 '
Deed v c m/min
Tapping 2 '
Thread
forming 2 '
Rm s 800
40-50
40-50
40-60
Rm > 800
20-30
15-20
20-30
Stainless steels
Rm > 800
8-12
10-20
20-30
< 250 HB
15-20
Al alloys
Rm < 350
20-40
30-50
60-80
60-80
Cu alloys
Rm s 500
30-40
25-35
30-40
50-70
25-35
Thermoplastics
20-30
50-70
Thermoset plastics
10-15
25-35
Production engineering
Turning
Roughness depth depending on tool nose radius and feed
flth theoretical
roughness depth
Example:
flth = 25 pm; r= 1.2 mm; f= ?
= V8 1.2 mm -0.025 mm ~ 0.5 mm
Roughn. depth
ftth
in pm
0.4
1.6
4
10
16
25
0.07
0.11
0.18
0.23
0.28
^th ~
hh
8 r
R,
Nose radius r in mm
0.8
I
1.2
Feed f in mm
0.10
0.12
0.16
0.20
0.25
0.31
0.32
0.39
0.40
0.49
1.6
0.14
0.23
0.36
0.45
0.57
Cutting
speed vc
in
m/min
40-80
Rm > 800
30-60
Stainless steels
Rm > 800
30-60
<250 HB
20-35
Al alloys
Rm < 350
120-180
Cu alloys
100-125
Thermoplastics
100-500
Thermoset plastics
80-400
Feed
f
in
mm
Cutting
a depth
p
0.1-0.5
0.5-4.0
Feed
f
in
mm
Cutting depth
0.1-0.5
0.3-5.0
in
mm
Workpiece matesrial
Tensile strength
Rm in N/mm 2 or
Hardness HB
Cutting
speed vc
in
m/min
Rm < 800
200-350
> 800
100-200
Stainless steels
Rm > 800
80-200
<250 HB
100-300
Al alloys
400-800
Cu alloys
Rm < 500
150-300
Thermoplastics
500-2000
Thermoset plastics
400-1000
P
in
mm
Application
Lower values
Application
vc = 350 m/min
vc = 200 m/min
premachining (roughing)
unstable tool or workpiece
f= 0.5 mm,
a p = 5.0 mm
premachining (roughing)
stable tool and workpiece
f= 0.1 mm,
a p = 0.3 mm
1)
HSS lathe tools have for the most part been replaced by lathe tools
with carbide indexable inserts.
2)
304
Production engineering
a n i n g
Taper turning
Terminology for tapers
^ 1: x (taper ratio)
taper incline
1: x taper:
on a taper length of x mm
the taper diameter
changes by 1 mm.
a taper angle
a taper-generating angle
2 (setting angle)
C taper ratio
GOO
G01
G01
G01
N50
N60
G01
G01
X72
N70
GOO
X100
1)
X0
X0
X50
X60
Z2
Z0
F0.15
Z-25
Z-40
Z150
Setting angle
a
D-d
tan =
2 2L
(225- 150) mm
= 0.375
2- 100 mm
-
=20.556 = 20 33 22
a _C
tan
2~2
a D-d
tan =
2
2-L
Taper ratio
D-d
(225- 150) mm
= 0.75-1 : 1.33
L ~
100 mm
Wmax
Lw
tailstock offset
maximum allowable
tailstock offset
Tailstock offset
workpiece length
Example:
tailstock
centerline
D = 20 mm;
L =80 mm;
VT = ?; TV-max
d =18 mm;
L w = 100 mm
=
Maximum allowable
tailstock offset1'
parallel to
lathe axis
1)
2
L
(20 -18) mm 100 mm
= 1.25 mm
2
80 mm
L^ 100 mm _
VT
<
=
= 2 mm
T m a x
50
~ 50
If the tailstock offset is too large the workpiece cannot be secured between the lathe centers.
1/
V
<
T max -
5 Q
Production engineering
Milling
Standard values for milling with HSS milling cutters
Material group
Cutting
speed
Milling cutter
(except for
end mill)
in m/min
Rm < 800
50-100
Rm > 800
30-60
Stainless steels
Rm > 800
15-30
< 250 HB
25-40
Al alloys
Rm < 350
50-150
Cu alloys
Rm < 500
50-100
Thermoplastics
100-400
Thermoset plastics
100-400
Feed ft in mm
End
mm
mill d in
6
20
12
0.05-0.15
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.10-0.20
0.10
0.15
0.20
Cutting
speed
vc
in m/min
Rm < 800
200-400
Rm > 800
150-300
Stainless steels
Rm > 800
150-300
< 250 HB
150-300
Al alloys
Rm < 350
400-800
Cu alloys
Rm < 500
200-400
Thermoplastics
500-1500
Thermoset plastics
400-1000
Milling cutter
(except for
end mill)
Feied ft in mm
mm
End
mill d in
6
20
12
0.05-0.15
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.10-0.20
0.10
0.15
0.20
Increasing the recommended feed per cutting edge ft for slotting with side milling cutters
Cutting depth a e , based on the milling cutter 0 d
1/3 - d
1/6 - d
i / i o - cy
1/20 d
increase
1 A
1.15- ft
1.45 ft
2- ft
to be adjusted
0.25 mm
0.29 mm
0.36 mm
0.50 mm
Application
Lower values
Application
v c = 100 m/min
vc = 50 m/min
premachining (roughing)
low rigidity of tool or workpiece
ft = 0.15 mm
premachining (roughing)
rigid tool and workpiece
ft = 0.05 mm
n
N
Vf= n - ft-
306
Production engineering
Drilling
CD
TJ
C/3
c -o
CD
o
o>
Q. co
= E
i- CO
Q
T3
4'
CJ
O
c 0)
CO E
0 CO
> "D
0
o
o
4-"
CD
M
X JS
w
en
2? CD
.E en
= "D
1 s
c5
/ t;
CO <13
Q.jE>
v,>
D
O
CD
<4
t O =
I I
00
1
.a
>
Check cutting geometry
Increase supply of lubricant
Decrease feed f
Increase cutting speed v c
Decrease projection length
Check cutting parameters
Check type of carbide
Turning
TJ
C
LJ
CO
CD
C CD
O CD
4= TJ
CO CD
E o>
O c=
CD
D o
CD
O)
O
(D
CD O)
Ec
Oo
'TD CD
c C
<D
CL ts
0 =3
Q.
^C/3 o
o CD
CO
1_
la.
CD
JZ C/3
t ; <D
4 O)
o "O
O) <
C CD
= E
co 'E
CL 5
CO o
(J
_0)
co
x
CD
~o
c
4o
JD
CD
D CD
O TJ
CD
co
CA
CD
B
t
O <D
co w
.V-
!E
o
CD "co
c .!=
O CL
- I c/3
C/3
O
co
.a
>
Milling
_Q)
"O
c
co
o
C <D
O CD
co
oi
sz
g>
-Q
Q)
CD
"O
4= -a
CO CD
05
CO
X
CD
"O
iz a) C
H- CD >4
O "D O
O) ^
CD
c CD
CD
CD
0)
o>
"O
CD
3
O
O <D
CD
= E
CO ' X
C3 o
Q- ^
CO o
B t
O CD
CO c/3
."r c
CD
O
CO
t
O CO
O 13
Q- cr
C/3
c
o
CO
1
-9
1)
problem to be solved
ft
Production engineering
n i n g
Example:
indexing
/ plate
1
workpiece
n h =24; D= 8;
Worm disengaged
=?
Indexing step
= = = 3
D
8
Indirect indexing
In indirect indexing the dividing head spindle is driven
by the worm and worm wheel.
worm gear
dividing head
spindle
workpiece
Indexing step
n0r =
D
D no. of divisions
a angular division
/' gear ratio of dividing head
nc indexing step; no. of indexing crank revolutions
for one division
i a
360
Example 1:
D = 68; /' = 40; nc = ?
worm
locking pin
(engaged)
indexing
crank
indexing
plate
_i_ 40 10
" ~ D ~ 68 ~ 17
c
Circles of holes on
indexing plates
15 16 17 18 19 20
21 23 27 29 31 33
Example 2:
37 39 41 43 47 49
a = 37.2; / = 40; nc = ?
i-a
40 37.2 37.2 186 _ 2
nr =
9
9 5 ~ 15
360
360
or
17 19 23 24 26 27
28 29 30 31 33 37
39 41 42 43 47 49
51 53 57 59 61 63
Differential indexing
worm gear
dividing head
spindle
workpiece
locking
pin (disengaged)
Indexing step
ncr =
D ,
No. of teeth on
change gears
A/dn
D'
Example:
Nda
i = 40; D = 97; nCc =7;-^ = ?; D'selected = 100
/Vdn
indexing
crank
ndexing
plate
No. of teeth on
change gears
24
24
28
32
48
36
40
44
56
84
64
72
80
86
96
100
308
Production engineering
Grinding
v c cutting speed
dg diameter of grinding wheel
n n rotational speed of grinding wheel
'g
feed rate
Vf
L travel
Surface grinding
grinding wheel
workpiece
n s no. of strokes
di diameter of workpiece
Cylindrical grinding
workpiece
Cutting speed
Vr = K dn nr
Feed rate
Surface grinding
n
q
VF = /_ N<
Cylindrical
grinding
Vf = jt d-| n
Example:
Speed ratio
vc = 30 m/s; vf = 20 m/min; q = ?
vr
grinding
wheel
30 m/s 60 s/min
20 m/min
Vf
1800 m/min
90
20 m/min
q = v
Standard values for cutting speed vc, feed rate vf, speed ratio q
<Surface grindir
Cylindrical <jrindin g
>g
Per ipheral gr inding
Material
Steel
Cast iron
Carbide
Al alloys
Cu alloys
vc
Vf
m/s
30
30
10
18
25
m/min
10-35
10-35
4
15-40
15-40
q
80
65
115
30
50
Si
vc
ing
de wheeli
Vf
m/s
25
25
8
18
18
m/min
6-25
6-30
4
24-45
20-45
q
50
40
115
20
30
vc
Vf
m/s
35
25
8
18
30
m/min
10
11
4
24-30
16
Interi
iding
rial cyl. grii
vc
q
125
100
100
50
80
m/s
25
25
8
16
25
Vf
m/min
19-23
23
8
30-40
25
q
80
65
60
30
50
Grinding data for steel and cast iron with corundum or silicon carbide grinding wheels
Processes
Rough grind
Finishing
Precision grinding
Grain size
Grinding allowance
Depth of cut in mm
Rz in pm
30-46
46-80
80-120
0.5-0.2
0.02-0.1
0.005-0.02
0.02-0.1
0.005-0.05
0.002-0.008
3-10
1-5
1.6-3
Miaximu m speed vc in
i m/s for be>nd ty|pe2>
B
E
R
BF
M
RF
PL
V
Straight grinding wheel
stationary
pd or ho
50
63 40
25
50
50
40
hand-held grinder
free-hand
50
80
50
80
50
stationary
Straight cutting wheel
pd or ho
80 100 63
63
80
hand-held grinder
80
free-hand
1>
pd positively driven: feed by mechanical means; ho hand operated: feed by operator2)
free-hand grinding: grinding machine is guided entirely by hand;
Type of bond, see page 309
Shape of grinding wheel
Guide
Meaning
Not allowed for free-hand or hand operated
grinding
VE2
VE3
VE4
VE5
Not
Not
Not
Not
3)
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
in m/s
blue
yellow
red
green
50
63
80
100
125
140
160
320
360
200
280
a s
Abrasives, Bonds
Abrasives
Symbol Abrasive
Chemical composition
KnoopAreas of application
hardness
18000
21000
zircon corundum A l 2 0 3 + Z r 0 2
silicon carbide
SiC + additions
24800
BK
boron carbide
B 4 C in crystalline form
47000
CBN
boron nitride
BN in crystalline form
60000
diamond
C in crystalline form
70000
Carbide, cast iron, glass, ceramic, stone, non-ferrous metals, not for steel; dressing of grinding wheels
Stainless steels
Hardness grade
Designation
hard
very hard
P Q RS
T U V W
Conventional metal
grinding
extremely hard X Y Z
extremely soft A B C D
very soft
E FG
H I J K
soft
medium
L M N O
Grain size
medium
fine
very fine
F230 to F1200
10-5
* 5-2.5
2.5-1.0
* 1.0-0.4
Grain ranges
Grain designation
Attainable Rz in (jm
Structure
Code
Structure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14, etc. up to 30
dense (nonporous)
Bond
Code
open (porous)
cf. DIN ISO 525 (2000-008) and VDI 3411 (2000-08)
Type of bond
Properties
Areas of application
B
BF
shellac bond
galvanic bond
metal bond
MG
magnesite bond
PL
plastic bond
R
RF
rubber bond,
fiber reinforced
Cut-off grinding
Grinding wheel ISO 603-1 1 N-300 x 50 x 76.2 - A/F 36 L 5 V - 50: Form 1 (straight grinding wheel), wheel
face N, outside diameter 300 mm, width 50 mm, hole diameter 76.2 mm, abrasive A (normal corundum or
white fused alumina), grain size F36 (medium), hardness grade L (medium), structure 5 vitrified (ceramic)
bond (V), maximum peripheral speed 50 m/s.
310
Production engineering
ining
ls
Abrasive
Steel, unhardened
54
M-N
80
M-N
60
L-M
180
L-M
46
L-M
80
K-L
60
J-K
240-500
H-N
60
M-N
240-500
H-N
A, C
80
M-N
80
Carbide, ceramic
C
A, C
60
80
N-0
K
60
240-500
H-N
60
80
60
100
46
60
60
Cast iron
Non-ferr. met., e.g. Al, Cu, CuZn
Abrasive
Steel, unhardened
80
K-L
120
M-N
80
M-N
80
A, C
80
J-K
100
80
60
Carbide, ceramic
80
120
120
80
Cast iron
80
L-M
80
K-L
60
46
80
l-J
120
60
J-K
54
Abrasive
Cup vvheel
D< 3010 mm
Abrcisive
segnlents
Grain size Hardness Grain size Hardness Grain size Hardness Grain size Hardness
J
24
46
J
46
J
36
J
Steel, unhardened
46
60
36
46
H-J
60
J
l-J
46
46
l-J
36
l-J
Carbide, ceramic
46
46
60
46
J
J
60
Cast iron
C
A
46
J
J
46
24
J
J
46
60
60
36
I Tool grinding
Cutting tool material
Abrasive
Dish whee Is
CiJP
whieels
D < 100 D> 100
Grain size Grain size Hardness Grain size Grain size Hardness Grain size Hardness
M
K
M
80
60
46
80
60
Straighlt grinding wheels
D < 225 D > 225
Tool steel
High-speed steel
60
46
60
46
46
Carbide
80
54
80
54
46
Abrasive
Straight <;ut-off wheels vc upto 80 m/s Straight c:ut-off wh<aels vc up:ot 100 m/s
D < 2010 mm
D> 2010 mm
0<5C )0 mm
D> 5C)0 mm
Grain size Hardness Grain size Hardness Grain size Hardness Grain size Hardness
Q-R
46
Q-R
24
60
Q-R
46
Q-R
24
U
U-V
60
Q-R
46
Q-R
30
Steel, unhardened
80
Cast iron
20
Q-R
20
24
U-V
S
Abrasive
Steel, unhardened
30
24
24
36
Q-R
30
16
24
36
Cast iron
A, C
30
R
T
20
24
30
A, C
30
20
Production engineering
ining
ls
Finishing
D126-D76
B126-B76
0.55-0.50
Attainable Ra in pm
1)
Mesh size of test sieve in pm
Precision grinding
D64, D54, D46
B64, B54, B46
0.45-0.33
Lapping
D20, D15, D7
B30, B6
0.18-0.15
0.05-0.025
Abrasive
CBN
D
External cylindrical
CBN
grinding 2 '
D
Internal cylindrical
CBN
grinding
D
Tool
CBN
grinding
D
Cut-off
CBN
grinding
D
1)
Bond types, see page 309
Surface grinding
\/
dry
wet
30-60
25-50
30-60
25-50
30-50
25-50
30-50
Standard values for depth of cut and feed of diamond grinding wheels
Process
D126
D64
0.02-0.04
0.01-0.02
External cyl. grinding 11
0.01-0.03
0.0-0.02
Internal cyl. grinding
0.002-0.007
0.002-0.005
Tool grinding
0.01-0.03
0.005-0.015
Groove grinding
1.0-5.0
1)
Approx. three times the value for high speed grinding (HSG)
Feed
m/min
0.005-0.01
0.005-0.01
0.001-0.003
0.002-0.005
10-15
0.3- 2.0
0.5-2.0
0.3- 4.0
0.01-2.0
0.5-3.0
Standard values for depth of cut and feed of CBN grinding wheels
Process
Surface grinding
External cyl. grinding
Internal cyl. grinding
Tool grinding
Groove grinding
B151/B126
B91/B76
0.03-0.05
0.02-0.04
0.005-0.015
0.002-0.1
1.0-10
0.02-0.04
0.02-0.03
0.005-0.01
0.01-0.005
1.0-5.0
0.01-0.015
0.015-0.02
0.002-0.005
0.005-0.015
0.5-3.0
Feed
m/min
20-30
0.5-2.0
0.5-2.0
0.5-4.0
0.01--2.0
V4-V w
-
Grinding processes achieving extremely high material removal rates by utilization of special machines and tools with
increased cutting speeds (> 80 m/s) and appropriate machine coolant. Predominantly used for side and external cylindrical grinding of metallic materials.
Grinding wheel preparation (conditioning)
Processing step
Action
Goal
Dresising
Truing
Sharpening
Cleaning
Reduction of the
bond
No effect on abrasive
layer
Establishing concentricity
and wheel profile
140
200
180
280
312
Production engineering
Honing
v c cutting speed
Cutting
speed
contact area of
honing stone
v a axial speed
v p peripheral speed
Fr
angle of intersection
betw. abrading tracks
contact pressure
V^a 2 w
^c =
Angle of
intersection
Example:
miny
Contact pressure
28 m
min
miny
tan =
2
a v a 12 m/min _
tan = =
= 0.48; a = 51.3
2 v n 25 m/min
Material
Machining allowances in mm
for hole diameter in mm
Axial speed
v a in m/min
18-40
Steel, unhardened
20-40
9-20
2-15
15-100
100-500
10-20
0.02-0.05
0.03-0.15
0.06-0.3
0.01-0.03
0.02-0.05
0.03-0.1
0.02-0.05
0.03-0.15
0.06-0.3
Steel, hardened
14-40
15-40
5-20
6-20
Alloy steels
23-40
25-40
10-20
11-20
Cast iron
23-40
25-40
10-20
11-20
Aluminum alloys
22-40
24-40
9-20
10-20
Honing process
Ceramic
honing stone
Boron nitride
honing stick
Rough honing
50-250
200-400
300-700
200-400
Finish honing
20-100
40-250
100-300
100-200
Tensile
strength
N/mm 2
Process
< 500
rough honing
(unhardened) intermed. honing
finish honing
rough honing
intermed. honing
finish honing
5-10
2-3
0.5-2
Cast
iron
rough honing
finish honing
plateau honing 1 '
5-8
2-3
3-6
Nonferrous
metals
rough honing
intermed. honing
finish honing
6-10
2-3
0.5-1
A
A
C
500-700
(hardened)
1)
80
400
700
R
O
N
80
120
900
M
K
H
80
400
1000
0
O
N
CBN or diamond
Grain size
D126
D54
D15
3
5
3
3
7
8
D91
D46
D25
3
1
5
D64
D35
D15
B76
B54
B30
2)
Selection of honing stone made of diamond and cubic boron nitride (CBN)
Abrasive
Natural diamond
Synthetic diamond
CBN
Material
Steel, carbide
Hardened steel
Production engineering: 6.
ei
wire electrode
Productive time
L
p
Vf
Example:
Material: Steel, H= 30 mm; L = 320 mm;
T= 30 (xm; v f = ?; f p = ?
Vf = 1.8 mm/min (from table)
p
_ L _ 320 mm
= 178 min
vf
1.8 mm/min
Steel eroding
60
40
30
9.0
8.5
5.5
4.0
2.5
4.0
1.8
1.2
5.1
3.7
2.5
2.5
Carbide eroding
80
4.5
20
0.7
3.1
0.3
0.2
0.6
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
2.3
1.4
10
These standard values are average values from the main cut and all subsequent cuts required to reach geometric tolerance.
With unfavorable flushing conditions the achievable feed rate drops considerably.
Tensile strength
in N/mm 2
400-900
1900
2500
Typical wire
diameter in mm
0.2-0.33
0.025-0.125
0.025-0.125
Application
Universal
Cuts with very tight geometric tolerance
Narrow slots, small corner radii
Productive time
v_
w
Example:
Roughing of steel; graphite electrode,
S = 150 mm 2 ; V= 3060 m m 3 ; V w = ?; f p = ?
V w = 31 mm 3 /min (from table)
3060 mm 3
= 99 min
31 mm 3 /min
Removal rate V w (standard values)11
Removal rate l / w in mm 3 /min
Workpiece
material
Steel
Carbide
1)
Electrode
Graphite
Copper
Copper
10
to
50
7.0
13.3
6.0
Rough ing
rem()val area S in mnn 2
50
100
200
300
to
to
to
to
100
200
400
300
18
62
81
31
22
28
51
85
15
18
28
30
400
to
600
105
105
33
Finishin g
des ired rouejhness d epth Rz in
i pm
4
2
3
8
6
to
to
to
to
to
3
4
6
10
8
2
5
0.1
0.5
3.8
5
1.9
0.1
2.2
0.5
5.2
Actual values will vary widely due to the effects of different processing methods. Refer to page 314.
314
Production engineering: 6.
ei
Ve
Removal rate
Wei
Parameter
Electrode
Material
Graphite
in various grain
Universal application; very low wear; greater current density than Cu;
low electrode weight; easy to manufacture electrode by machining;
non-warping; low thermal expansion; more detailed electrodes are made by
selecting a finer graphite grain; unsuitable for carbide machining
sizes
Tungsten-copper
Detailed electrodes; very low wear; very high material removal rate with relatively
low discharge currents even with large current densities;
only manufactured in limited sizes, high electrode weight
Copper-graphite
Synthetic oils,
filtered and
Dielectric cooled; according
t o
m a c h i n e
fluid
manufacturer
Flushing
Electrode is positively polarized; for low electrode burn rate during roughing with
long pulse duration and low frequency
negative
Electrode is negatively polarized; for erosion with short pulse duration and high
frequency
face
side
low
Low removal performance, low tool wear on copper electrodes, high wear on
graphite electrodes
high
High removal performance, high tool wear on copper electrodes, low wear on
graphite electrodes
s h o r t
l o n g
Polarity
Gap
Discharge
current
Pulse
duration
Production engineering: 6.
paation
315
ctin
mmax
force-stroke curve
/y
at
C
o
M
cn
c
\k
F - S Tsb max
sB max
Example:
f-
b
^CO
^)
II
fgg m a x
IV
s
Cutting force
cutting force
calculated cutting force
shear area
maximum tensile strength
mavimnm
maximumchoar
shearctronnth
strength
cutting work
sheet metal thickness
cvj|r
II n
= 510 N/mm 2
Cutting work
Wanted: r s B m a x ; F ; W
I'
max
I"
Solution: r s B
working stroke h
max
= 0.8 R m
max
sheet metal
thickness s
W = - y F s = - J - 96.288 kN 2.5 mm
* 160 kN mm = 160 N - m
crank
connecting
Work capacity in
continuous mode
15
Work capacity in
single-stroke mode
F
Fn
ws = 2 Wc
ram
metal
strip
Sa
adjusted stroke
crank angle
Wc
W<
Operating conditions
Fixed stroke
Example:
Eccentric press with fixed stroke F n = 250 kN; S = 30 mm;
F= 207 kN; s = 4 mm
Find: W; Wc. Can the press be put into continuous mode?
2
F * Fn
W < Wc or
W <
Adjustable stroke
F
Fgiiow
FnS
^allow
,at
F15
250 kN
n S
15 30 mm
\Nn =
=
= 500 kN mm = 500 N m
If F< F n , but W> Wc, the press cannot be used in continuous mode for
this workpiece.
W < W c or
W < Ws
316
Production engineering: 6.
e i o n i n g
punch
dimension
cutting die
dimension
Piercing
Blanking
Governing
specified size is:
dimension of
punch d
dimension of
cutting die D
Dimension of
opposite tool
cutting die
D=d+2 u
punch
d=D-2u
Process
Shape of
workpiece
die clearance
sheet metal
thickness
clearance angle
cutting die
Web width, edge width, trim stop waste for metallic materials
a edge width
e web width
l a edge length
l e web length
B strip width
/' trim stop waste
(french stop waste)
Polygonal workpieces:
The web or edge length, whichever is larger,
is used to determine web and edge widths.
Round workpieces:
For all diameters values given for / e = l a =
10 mm of polygonal workpieces apply to
web and edge widths.
Polygonal workpieces
Strip
width B
mm
up to
100 mm
Web length le
Edge length / a
mm
Web
width e
Edge
width a
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.25
1.5
1.75
2.0
2.5
3.0
up to 10
e
a
0.8
1.0
0.8
0.9
0.8
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.9
2.1
11-50
e
a
1.6
1.9
1.2
1.5
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.4
1.4
1.6
1.7
2.0
2.3
51-100
e
a
1.8
2.2
1.4
1.7
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.9
2.2
2.5
over 100
e
a
2.0
2.4
1.6
1.9
1.2
1.5
1.4
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.4
2.7
1.8
2.2
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.5
1.5
over
100 mm
to
200 mm
up to 10
e
a
0.9
1.2
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.1
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.7
2.0
2.3
11-50
e
a
1.8
2.2
1.4
1.7
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.9
2.2
2.5
51-100
e
a
2.0
2.4
1.6
1.9
1.2
1.5
1.4
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.4
2.7
101-200
e
a
2.2
2.7
1.8
2.2
1.4
1.7
1.6
1.7
2.0
2.0
2.2
2.3
2.6
2.9
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
5.0
1.5
Production engineering: 6.
paation
317
ctin
Workpiece
blanking out
x=
C]
d i + C2 ' 3 2 C '
+ ...
C i + Co + Co + . . .
Example:
-<P
10
20
selected reference edge
Ci, C2, C3 ...
a-|, a2, a 3 ...
x
x=
x=
80 mm 10 mm + 31.4 mm 31 mm
16 mm
80 mm + 31.4 mm
Location of punch holder shank for punch geometry with unknown center of gravity
Center of forces corresponds to centroid of the line 1) of
all cutting edges.
Punch layout
Workpiece
I, a^+l2 a2+l3
a3 +..
x = Q
Z'n
Example:
selected
refer,
edge
/v h> h t 0
cutting edge lengths
a-i, a 2 , a 3 to a n distance from line centroids
to selected reference edges
x
distance from center of forces
to selected reference edge
n
1)
15
9.8
21
23.6
20
2 20
20
118.6
3
4
I / n a,
n
x = I'n
/ n a n in m m 2
a n in mm
75
231.28
420
1240
820
31
41
2786.28
2786.28 mm
118.6 mm
_ ^
23.5 mm
strip
area
V W
workpiece
area
A -l-w
I
I
w
workpiece length
workpiece width
W
a
strip width
edge width
web width
V
A
R
strip feed
area of workpiece
(including holes)
number of rows
degree of utilization
Strip width
W=w+2a
Strip feed
V=l+e
Utilization factor
318
Production engineering: 6.
o i n g
Material condition
AIMg3-01
AIMg3-H14
AIMg3-H111
spheroidized
cold work hardened
cold work hardened
and annealed
AIMg4.5Mn-H112 spheroidized
straightened
AIMg4.5Mn-H111 cold work hardened
and annealed
AIMgSi1-T6
solution annealed
and artificially aged
CuZn37-R600
hard
1)
For bending angle a = 90, regardless of
>
Thickness s in mm
0.8 | 1
1.5 | 2 | 3 | 4
Smallest allowable bending radius r 1 )
0.6
1
2
4
3
6
4
14
1.6
2.5
6
10
1
1.5
4.5
10
1.5
2.5
10
14
1.6
2.5
10
16
20
25
12
16
23
28
36
4
2.5
5
rolling direction
10
12
18
24
Minimum tensile
strength Rm
in N/MM 2 over-to
1)
5
6
in mm
8
10
18
10
10
12
10
12
1.5
2.5
up to 390
1.6
2.5
390-490
1.2
490-640
1.6
2.5
10
12
14
16
12
16
20
25
16
20
25
28
16
20
25
32
36
18
20
28
36
40
32
40
45
45
50
Values apply to bending angle a < 120 and bending transverse to rolling direction. Value of the next larger sheet
metal thickness should be selected for bending longitudinal to rolling direction and bending angle a > 120.
in mm
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.5
2.5
3.5
4.5
1
1.6
2.5
4
1.0
1.3
1.6
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.5
1.7
1.8
2.2
2.8
1.9
2.1
2.4
3.0
2.9
3.2
3.7
4.0
4.5
4.8
5.2
6.0
6.9
3.4
3.8
5.5
8.1
9.8
4.5
6.1
8.7
10.4
5.2
6.7
9.3
11.0
5.9
7.4
9.9
11.6
6.7
8.1
10.5
12.2
7.5
8.9
11.2
12.8
8.3
9.6
11.9
13.4
9.0
10.4
12.6
14.1
9.9
11.2
13.3
14.9
12.7
14.8
16.3
17.8
19.3
21.0
22.3
11.9
15.0
18.4
22.7
12.6
15.6
19.0
23.3
13.2
16.2
19.6
23.9
13.8
16.8
20.2
24.5
14.4
17.4
20.8
25.1
15.0
18.0
21.4
25.7
15.6
18.6
22.0
26.3
16.2
19.2
22.6
26.9
16.8
19.8
23.2
27.5
18.2
21.0
24.5
28.8
21.1
23.8
26.9
31.2
24.1
26.7
29.7
33.6
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
-Q
"
10
L = a+ b+
2)
c+...-n-v
a
L
11
If the ratio r/s > 5, the formula for developed length (page 24) can be
used.
Production engineering: 6.
319
ormin
developed length
length of leg
bend allowance
correction factor
L = a +
b-v
v = 2 (r + s) tan
(180-/^
180-j3
- n
180 y
f r + s- u)
k
K
2
J
Example:
Bent part with p = 60, a = 16 mm, b = 21 mm, r=6 mm,
s = 5 mm; k = ?; v = ?; L = ?;
Correction factor
6 mm
[
1)
J V 2
180
1 n fio \
Springback in bending
Radius on tool
Material of
bent part
Springback factor
r, = fcR-(r2 + 0 . 5 - s ) - 0 . 5 - s
1.6
2.5
6.3
10
16
25
40
63
100
DC04
DC01
X12CrNi18-8
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.98
0.99
0.99
0.97
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.97
0.96
0.93
0.97
0.96
0.89
0.96
0.93
0.84
0.94
0.90
0.76
0.91
0.85
0.63
0.87
0.77
0.83
0.66
E-Cu-R20
CuZn33-R29
CuNi18Zn20
0.98
0.97
0.97
0.97
0.97
0.96
0.96
0.95
0.97
0.95
0.94
0.96
0.93
0.93
0.95
0.90
0.89
0.92
0.85
0.86
0.87
0.79
0.83
0.82
0.72
0.77
0.72
0.6
0.73
EN AW-A199.0
EN AW-AICuMg1
EN AW-AISiMgMn
0.99
0.92
0.98
0.99
0.84
0.96
0.98
0.77
0.95
0.98
0.67
0.93
0.97
0.54
0.90
0.97
0.96
0.95
0.93
0.99
0.90
0.98
0.99
0.87
0.97
0.86
0.82
0.76
0.72
320
Production engineering: 6.
o i n g
Deep drawing
Calculation of blank diameter
Drawn part
Blank diameter D
Drawn part
without flange d2
without flange d2
d,
D = Jd? +4 d-i h
D = yjd2 +4
D = yl2 d,2+4
d-i h
without flange d3
J
i.
CM
. ! -c:
i
D = yjd2
0 = ^2-d?+4-d^
with flange d2
with flange d2
2
Blank diameter D
+4 (d: fy +d2 h2
d^ h +
(d22-d?)
without flange d2
D = yjdi2+4
d-i h2
\r
with flange d3
with flange d2
D = yjd,2 +4 h, 2 +4 dy h2
without flange d 4
without flange d2
0 =^ + 4
D = y]2 d? =1.414 d
d2 /
+(d22-df)
JUf
II
1 s
with flange d2
with flange dA
2
D = y]d-\ + 4 d 2 l +
D = yjd-f +d22
(dA -d3 )
Example:
Cylindrical drawn part with flange d2 (see figure, upper left) with d-\ = 50 mm, h = 30 mm; D = ?
D = > j d f + 4 d: h = V502 mm 2 +4 50 mm 30 mm = 92.2 mm
blank holder
blank
drawing gap
material factor
rr
rst
blank diameter
punch diameter
dr
Drawing gap in mm
w = s + k V10 s
Drawing gap
dr-d
Example:
Steel sheet; D = 51 mm; d = 25 mm; s = 2 mm; w = ?; r r = ?; r s t = ?
Material factor k
Steel
0.07
Aluminum
0.02
rr
0.04
r s t = 4.5 s = 4.5 2 mm = 9 mm
Production engineering: 6.
321
ormin
Deep drawing
Drawing steps and drawing ratios
draw punch
blank holder
D
d
d-\
d2
dn
02
/? tot
s
1st draw
\
draw ring
blank diameter
inside diameter of finished drawn part
punch diameter for 1st draw
punch diameter for 2nd draw
punch diameter for nth draw
drawing ratio for 1st draw
drawing ratio for 2nd draw
total drawing ratio
sheet metal thickness
Drawing ratio
1st draw
2nd draw
Example:
Cup without flange made of DC04 (St 14) with d =
50 mm; /7 = 60 mm; D = ?;fa = ?; /?2 = ?; di = ?; d 2 = ?
d2
D = y/d2 +4 d h
blank holder
Redraw
Material
Max. d rawing
rati'os1>
R 2>
n
m
02
N/mm 2
Material
Max. d rawing
rati os1>
Total
drawing ratio
d2<d
R 2>
n
m
02
N/mm 2
Material
R 2>
n
m
Max. d rawing
rati OS1'
P,
N/mm 2
DC01 (St12)
1.8
1.2
410
CuZn30-R270
2.1
1.3
270
AI99.5 H111
2.1
02
1.6
DC03 (St13)
1.9
1.3
370
CuZn37-R300
2.1
1.4
300
AIMgl H111
1.9
1.3
145
DC04 (St14)
2.0
1.3
350
CuZn37-R410
1.9
1.2
410
AICu4Mg1 T4
2.0
1.5
425
X10CrNi18-8
1.8
1.2
750
CuSn6-R350
1.5
1.2
350
AISilMgMn T6
2.1
1.4
310
1)
95
Values apply up to d-i : s = 300; they were determined for d-\ = 100 mm and s = 1 mm. Values change negligibly
2)
for other sheet metal thicknesses and punch diameters.
maximum tensile strength
tearing force
dd
di
s
Am
tensile strength
drawing ratio
0
0max
Fu
D
Blank holding pressure p in N/mm 2
Steel
2.5
Cu alloys
2.0-2.4
Al alloys
1.2-1.5
dh
P
rr
w
Tearing force
punch diameter
sheet metal thickness
max. possible
drawing ratio
blank holding force
Fdd = Ji-(d1 + s ) . s - / 7 m - 1 . 2 .
P-1
An ax
blank diameter
support diameter
of blank holding force
blank holding pressure
radius on draw ring
drawing gap
d h = di + 2 (r r + w)
Example:
D = 210 mm; d-, = 140 mm; s = 1 mm; Rm = 380 N/mm 2 ; ^ = 1.5; ftmax = 1 -9'' ^dd = ?
jS-1 = ii (140 mm + 1 mm) 1 mm 380N 1.2 1.5-1 = 112218 N
Fdd = K (d-] +s) s /? m 1.2
1.9-1
mm^
^max-1
322
eding
Method, process
1 Arc welding
101
111
N1>
Method, process
24
25
11
311
12
13
312
131
135
136
Method, process
Other welding methods
73
74
electrogas welding
induction welding
oxyacetylene welding
75
753
78
788
stud welding
friction stud welding
Gas welding
Pressure welding
41
42
ultrasonic welding
friction welding
81
82
oxygen cutting
arc cutting
137
45
47
diffusion welding
pressure gas welding
83
84
plasma cutting
laser beam cutting
14
141
Brazing, soldering
15
151
51
52
Resistance welding
21
22
225
23
Beam welding
Cutting
91
912
brazing
torch brazing
512
electron beam
welding, nonvacuum
914
924
521
94
944
soldering
metal bath soldering
522
946
952
induction soldering
iron soldering
Process ISO 4063-111: Specified welding process -* manual arc welding (111)
1)
N Reference number for designating methods and processes in drawings, operating procedures and data processing
Welding positions
PD ^
PEK
PA-""
Name
PA
PB
horizontal position
PC
transverse position
PD
horizontal
overhead position
PE
overhead position
PF
vertical up position
PG
Code
PEx
fit
E r
^ PF
-PG
Degree
of accuracy
1)
/ shorter leg
to
30
over
30
to
120
over
120
to
400
over
400
to
1000
over
1000
to
2000
over
2000
to
4000
to
400
over
400
to
1000
over
1000
20'
15'
10'
45'
30'
20'
11
45'
30'
Production engineering: 6.
oin
Weld preparation
Name,
Workweld symbol piece
thickness D 1 '
weld
t
Edge form
pages 93-95
mm
Flare-V
groove
weld
butt weld
Weld preparation
Dimension
gap b
mm
web c
mm
angle a
in
Preferred
welding
method 2 '
0-2
3, 111, 141,
512
0-4
3, 111, 141
t/2
111, 141
0-8
< t/2
V groove
weld
V
Y-butt weld
3-10
<4
3-40
<3
13
<2
5-40
1-4
> 10
1-3
<2
2-4
13
111,
60c
111, 141
13, 141
2-4
111, 141
<2
40-60c
13
3-10
2-4
1-2
35-60c
111,
I /
3-30
1-4
<2
35-60c
111,
1-4
<2
35-60c
double
bevel weld
13
bevel
groove
weld
> 10
Little filler
material,
no weld
preparation
111, 141
60c
60c
1-3
Thin sheet
welding,
usually without
filler material
40-60c
> 10
Remarks
40-60c
60c
double
V-weld
323
ein
Symmetrical
edge form,
h=t/2
13, 141
13, 141
111,
13, 141
Symmetrical
edge form,
h = t/2 or t/3
fi
| v
>2
<2
70-100c
3, 111,
13, 141
-2
70-110
3, 111,
13, 141
T-joint
Fillet weld
>3
1
it
- i t :Qia
J
1)
2
j!
324
eding
Filling
Filling
pressure p F quantity
bar
6 m3
150
Oxygen
blue
white
R3/4
blue
10 m 3
200
chestnut- chestnut8 kg
19
Acetylene
yellow Quick connect
brown
brown
10 kg
19
10
2 m3
200
Hydrogen
red
red
red
W21.80x1/14
50
10 m 3
200
dark2 m3
10
200
Argon
W21.80x1/14
gray
gray
10 m 3
green
50
200
2 m3
200
10
Helium
brown
W21.80x1/14
gray
gray
10
m3
200
50
4 m3
Argon-carbon
fluorescent
200
20
W21.80x1/14
gray
gray
10 m 3
dioxide mixture
green
200
50
7.5 kg
10
58
Carbon dioxide gray
W21.80x1/14
gray
gray
58
20 kg
50
6 m3
dark40
150
Nitrogen
black
W24.32x1/14
gray
10 m 3
green
50
200
1)
Changeover to the new color coding should be completed by July 1, 2006. During the transition
period the hazardous substance label (page 331) is the only legally valid designation.
*) According to European Standards
Type of gas
shoulder
N
body
Connection
threads
Volume
1/
/
40
50
40
50
prev.
Ol
O
Si
Mn
GI
<0.1
<0.20
<0.65
G II
<0.2
<0.25
<1.20
<0.15
<0.25
<1.25
Mo
Ni
Weld behavior
Cr
Flow behavior
Spatter
Tendency
for pores
highly fluid
high
yes
low
yes
semifluid
none
no
<0.80
OIV
G IV
<0.15
<0.25
<1.20
<0.65
<1.20
semifluid
none
no
OV
GV
<0.10
<0.25
<1.20
<0.65
<1.20
semifluid
none
no
1>
Yield
strength
Re
N/mm 2
Tensile
strength
Am
N/mm 2
Elongation
at fracture
A
%
NI 2 '
Areas of
application
Steel type
Sheet, tube
S235, S275
0 I
> 260
360-410
> 20
>30
S235, S275,
P235GH, P265GH
0 II
>300
390-440
>20
>47
S235, S275
P235GH, P265GH
>310
400-460
>22
>47
Boilers, pipes,
temperature resistant up to 530 C
0 IV
>260
440-490
>22
>47
Boilers, pipes,
temperature resistant up to 570 C
13CrMo4-5, 16CrMo3
OV
>315
490-590
> 18
>47
Vessels,
pipes
2)
Production engineering: 6.
oin
325
ein
Composition 1 '
Gas type,
effect
Welding
methods
Materials;
Applications
reduction
gases
TIG, plasmawelding
high-alloy steels,
Ni, Ni alloys
inert gases
(neutral
behavior)
MIG, TIG,
plasmawelding
Al, Al alloys,
Cu, Cu alloys
gas mixtures,
weak
oxidizing
MAG welding
mixed gases,
more strongly
oxidizing
MAG welding
low-alloyed and
medium-alloyed steels
mixed gases,
medium
oxidizing
MAG welding
MAG welding
unalloyed steels
R1
R2
(15-35)% H 2 , balance Ar or He
11
100% Ar
12
100% He
13
M11
M12
(3-10)% C0 2 , balance Ar or He
M13
M21
(5-25)% C0 2 , balance Ar or He
M22
(3-10)% C0 2 , balance Ar or He
M23
M31
(25-50)% C0 2 , balance Ar or He
M32
(10-15)% 0 2 , balance Ar or He
M33
C1
100% C0 2
C2
Shielding gas EN 439-13: Inert gas with up to 95% Helium, balance Argon
1>
Ar argon
He helium
0 2 oxygen
C 0 2 carbon dioxide
H 2 hydrogen
46
Standard number
G3Si1
Designation
for shielding gases
2
Designation for
gas shielded metal
arc welding
Code
letter
Shielding gases
DIN 439
M21, M22,
M23, M24
C1
GO
G3Si1
Designation
G2T1
G2Ni2
EN 440 - G 46 4 M G3Si1: Properties of weld metal: Minimum yield strength R e = 460 N/mm 2 ,
notch impact energy at-40C = 47 J; mixed gas M21-M24, electrode with 0.7-1.0% Si, 1.3-1.6% Mn
Wire electrodes (selection)
Designation as per
DIN EN 440
Welding
methods
Shielding
gases
Usable on steels,
examples
Applications, properties,
examples
G 46 4 M G3Si1
MAG
M21-M24, C1
G 50 4 M G4Si1
MAG
M21-M24, C1
G 46 M G2Ni2
MAG
M21
326
eding
Standard values for gas shielded metal arc welding. Filler metals for aluminum
v\feld design
Weld
Number
Wire
thickness diameter of passes
a
mm
mm
Voltage
V
Sett ings
Current Wire feed
A
rate1*
m/min
Shielding gas
l/min
Efficient :y values
ProFiller
ductive
metal
time
min/m
g/m
0.8
1.0
1.0
20
22
23
105
215
220
7
11
11
10
45
90
140
1.5
1.4
2.1
5
6
7
1.0
1.0
1.2
1
1
3
30
300
10
15
215
300
390
2.6
3.5
4.6
8
10
1.2
3
4
30
300
10
15
545
805
6.4
9.5
K
/
ro I
IS W / / / J
F
1)
4
5
6
1.2
1.6
1.6
23
25
26
180
200
230
3
4
7
12
18
18
30
77
147
2.9
3.3
3.9
5
6
8
1.6
1
2
2
22
22
26
160
170
220
6
6
7
18
126
147
183
4.2
4.6
5.0
75
90
0.3
0.2
19
22
3.8
4.3
2
3
3.0
110
125
0.2
28
1.8
5.9
4
5
6
3.0
160
185
210
0.2
0.1
0.1
8
10
10
38
47
47
6.7
7.1
12
4.0
1st layer
2nd layer
165
0.1
0.2
12
105
13
4.0
1st layer
2nd layer
165
0.1
0.2
12
190
16
0
1
E S S H / / / / J
J
70
1
1.5
Material
number
SG-AI99.8
(EL-AI99.8)
3.0286
AI99.7, AI99.5
SG-AI99.5T1
(EL-AI99.5T1)
3.0805
AI99.0, AI99.5
SG-AIMn1
(EL-AIMn1)
3.0516
AIMnl, AIMnlCu
SG-AIMg3
3.3536
AIMg1(C), AIMg3
SG-AIMg5
3.3556
SG-AIMg4.5Mn
3.3548
SG-AISi5
(EL-AISi5)
3.2245
AIMgSilCu, AIZn4.5Mg1
SG-AISi12
(EL-AISi12)
3.2585
1)
Production engineering: 6.
oin
327
ein
Coated rod electrodes for unalloyed steels and fine grain steels
Classification of rod electrodes
Yield strength
Notch impact energy 47 J
Tensile strength
Notch impact energy 27 J
according to
Designation example
Standard number
A classification according to
yield strength and notch
impact energy 47 J
H hydrogen content
5 - > 5 ml/100 g weld metal
Tensile
strength
N/mm
Minimum
elongation
at fracture
EL5 in %
35
355
440-570
22
38
380
470-600
20
42
420
500-640
20
46
460
530-680
20
50
500
560-720
18
Welding position
all positions
Code
number
Efficiency
%
Type of current
Code letter/
code number
> 105
AC and DC
> 105
DC
no requirements
>105<125
AC and DC
+ 20
>105 <125
DC
>125<160
AC and DC
-20
>125<160
DC
-30
> 160
AC and DC
-40
> 160
DC
Code
letters
Type of coating
Code
letters
Maxiimum conteii t in %
Mn
Mo
Ni
None
2.0
Mo
1.4
MnMo
1.4-2.0
1 Ni
1.4
0.6-1.2
RA
2Ni
1.4
1.8-2.6
RB
MnINi
1.4-2.0
0.6-1.2
RC
1NiMo
1.4
0.6-1.2
RR
acid coating
basic coating
0.3-0.6
cellulose coating
0.3-0.6
rutile coating
0.3-0.6
ISO 2560-A - E 42 2 RB 12: A rod electrode with guaranteed yield strength and notch impact energy, 42 yield
strength R e = 420 N/mm 2 , 2 notch impact energy 47 J at-20C, RB rutile basic coating, 1 efficiency > 105%, 2 all
welding positions except for vertical down welds.
328
Production
eding
Properties, application
acid coating
Limited application in
constrained positions
basic coating
cellulose coating
PG
rutile coating
1)
The specifications apply to rod electrodes designated according to the yield strength and the notch impact
energy (page 327).
filler pass
Number
and
type of
pass 1)
Electrode
dimensions
dxl
mm
1 R
1 FP
3.2 x 450
4 x 450
1.5
1 R
1 FP
3.2 x 450
4 x 450
4
2.9
100
110
1 R
2 FP
1 R
1 F
1 FP
1 R
1 F
1 FP
3.2
4
3.2
4
5
3.2
4
5
x 450
x 450
x 450
x 450
x 450
x 450
x 450
x 450
4
4.7
4
3.7
3.5
4
4
6.2
100
185
100
145
215
100
195
380
1
1
3.2 x 450
4 x 450
3.2
3.6
80
140
80
140
3
3
3.2 x 450
4 x 450
8.6
8
215
310
215
310
Gap
s
mm
roof pass
10
Weld weight
total
per pass
m
ms
g/m
g/m
75
155
80
210
285
460
675
final pass
roof pass
1)
1 R
2 FP
4
5
x 450
x 450
3
7
120
430
550
10
1 R
4 FP
4
5
x 450
x 450
3
12.3
120
745
865
12
1 R
4 FP
4
5
x 450
x 450
3
18.5
120
1125
1245
R root pass;
F filler pass;
FP final pass
Production engineering: 6.
Cutting
nozzle
Width of
cut
mm
3-10
1.5
2.5
heating
bar
bar
2.0
0.2
2.0
3.0
10
2.5
10-25
3.0
1.8
20
3.5
25
4.0
30
Acetylene
pressure
Oxygen pressure
mm
10
15
25-40
2.0
0.2
2.5
4.3
0.2
2.5
4.5
35
4
5
10
70
15
20
25
70
1)
120
120
Cutting
rate
quality stand.
cut
cut
m/min m/min
Acetylene
Total
oxygen
consumption
consumption
m3/hr
m3/hr
Cutting rate
quality
cut
m/min
standard
cut
m/min
1.67
0.27
0.69
0.84
1.92
0.32
0.64
0.78
2.14
0.34
0.60
0.74
2.46
2.67
0.36
0.62
0.75
0.37
0.52
0.69
2.98
0.38
0.45
0.64
3.20
0.40
0.41
0.60
3.42
0.42
0.38
0.57
3.54
0.44
0.36
0.55
11
Material: aluminum
Cutting method: argon-hydrogen
329
ein
cutting
bar
5
8
oin
Consumption values
argon
m3/hr
hydrogen
m3/hr
1.4
1.1
0.65
2.4
2.0
0.95
0.6
0.6
1.2
0.24
0.35
0.25
0.35
0.6
0.45
0.35
1.2
1.2
1.5
0.24
0.24
0.48
Electrical current
Consumption
Cutting
rate
values
hydroquality stand. argon
gen
cut
cut
3
m3/hr
m/min m/min m /hr
nitrogen
m3/hr
quality
cut
A
stand,
cut
A
1.2
1.2
70
120
3.6
1.9
1.1
6.0
5.0
1.6
1.2
0.5
70
120
0.6
0.35
0.2
1.3
0.75
0.5
1.2
0.5
Values apply to an arc power of approx. 12 kW and 1.2 mm cutting noozle diameter.
330
eding
Cutting
speed
V
Cutting
gas
m/min
Cutting
gas press.
P
bar
Laser power 1 kW
13
4
COF
"D
CD
>
o
~CD
c
Z>
"A3
<D
4-1
V)
V)
CO
c
CD
cn
1)
2)
Cutting
speed
V
Cutting
gas
m/min
Cutting
gas press.
P
bar
7.0-10
5.6-7.4
5.0-8.0
4.0-7.0
7.0-10
5.5-7.5
2
2.5
4.0-6.0
3.5-5.0
3
4
3.5-4.0
2.5-3.0
3.5-4.2
2.8-3.3
3.6-2.8
2.8-3.4
5
6
1.8-2.3
1.3-1.6
2.3-2.7
1.9-2.2
2.5-3.0
2.1-2.5
1
1.5
4.0-5.5
2.8-3.6
2
2.5
2.2-2.8
1.6-2.0
3
4
1.3-1.4
N2
1.5-3.5
4.8-6.2
4.2-5.0
8
10
5.0-7.0
3.5-5.2
14
2.0-4.0
1.9-3.2
15
Cutting
gas press.
P
bar
Laser power 2 kW
1
1.5
02
Cutting
gas
m/min
02
1.5-3.5
N2
1.8-.2.4
1.0-1.1
4.8-6.1
4.2-5.0
6
10
4.5-9.0
3.8-6.6
10
14
3.4-5.3
2.7-3.8
14
15
2.2-2.7
1.4-1.8
O2
1.5-3.5
12
13
N2
14
14
16
The table values apply a the focal length of f= 127 mm (5") and a cutting gap width of w = 0.15 mm.
M material group
Range
Cutting
speed
Perpendicularity
tolerance u
in mm
Average surface
roughness /? z5
in pm
Comments
Put in workpiece
thickness
in mm
^
ISO 9013-342
standard number
<315
< 1000
< 125
<315
< 1000
> 1 <3.15
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.8
>3.15 <6.3
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.8
0.9
1.1
> 6 . 3 < 10
0.6
0.7
0.7
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.9
2.3
> 10 <50
0.7
0.7
0.8
1.8
> 50<100
1.3
1.4
1.7
2.5
2.6
3.0
>100<150
1.9
2.0
2.1
3.3
3.4
3.7
'
Example: oxy-fuel gas cutting according to tolerance class 2, / = 450 mm,
s= 12 mm, cutting quality according to range 4
Quality of cut
perpendicularity tolerance u ^
according to row 3
average surface roughness/?z5
according to row U
tolerance class 2
< 125
Solution:
A/= 2.3 mm
u = 1.2 + 0.035 s = 1.2 mm + 0.035 12 mm = 1.62 mm
Rz5 = 110 + 1.8 s = 110 pm + 1.8 12 pm = 131.6 pm
Production engineering: 6.
oin
331
ein
A hazardous substance label must be applied to individual gas cylinders to identify their contents and any possible hazards from these contents. Up to three hazard labels warn of the main hazards.
Example:
supplemental information on
hazards and safety
precautions
manufacturer's name,
address, phone number
product name
i.e. oxygen
gas
composition
information from
manufacturer
complete
name of the gas,
e.g. oxygen, compressed
Hazard label
non-combustible,
non-toxic
combustible
flammable
toxic
Color coding
corrosive
Color coding of the cylinder shoulder is used as additional information about the properties of the gases.
It is readily recognized when the hazardous substance label is illegible from a distance.
This color coding does not apply to liquid gases.
>
flammable
inert2)
oxidizing
a
Si
Oxygen
1)
W)
Acetylene
2)
Argon
Nitrogen
Carbon dioxide
N = new
Non-toxic, non-corrosive, non-flammable, non-oxidizing
According to European Standards
Helium
332
Coding
old
Coding
new
1)2)
old
Oxygen
blue
blue
yellow
(black)
r N
Mk
white
blue
gray
flourescent
green
gray
gray
(black)
Hydrogen
chestnut brown
red
chestnut brown
Argon
red
red
red
gray
dark green
gray
gray
Nitrogen
to
1)2)
Acetylene
yellow
new
red
red
red
(dark green)
gray
black
gray
gray
flourescent
green
gray
gray
Carbon dioxide
Compressed air
gray
gray
gray
flourescent
green
gray
gray
gray
gray
1)
Helium
gray
aaailiSilS gray
brown
gray
Production engineering: 6.
and
Brazing
Brazing heavy non-ferrous metals
Special
brazing
Silver content
below 20%
AgCuZn(Sn)
AgCuCdZn
Brazing nlaterial
Material
Group Desig- number
nation1*
Alloy
designation
as per
ISO 3677 2)
Working
tempera- Brazing Solder
ture
joint 3 ' feed 4)
C
AG 301
2.5143
B-Ag50CdZnCu-620/640
640
AG 302
2.5146
B-Ag45CdZnCu-605/620
620
AG 304
2.5141
B-Ag45ZnCdCu-595/630
610
AG 309
2.1215
B-Cu40ZnAgCd-605/765
750
G, V
AG 104
2.5158
B-Ag45CuZnSn-640/680
670
AG 106
2.5157
B-Cu36AgZnSn-630/730
710
AG 203
2.5147
B-Ag44CuZn-675/735
730
AG 205
2.1216
B-Cu40ZnAg-700/790
780
AG 207
2.1207
B-Cu48ZnAg(Si)-800/830
830
AG 208
2.1205
B-Cu55ZnAg(Si)-820/870
860
G, V
CP 102 2.1210
B-C u 80 Ag P-645/800
710
G, V
CP 104 2.1466
B-Cu89PAg-645/815
710
G, V
CP 105 2.1467
B-Cu92PAg-645/825
710
G, V
Materials
precious metals, steels,
copper alloys
steels, malleable cast iron, copper,
copper alloys, nickel, nickel alloys
AG 351
2.5160
B-Ag50CdZnCuNi-635/655
660
Cu alloys
AG 403
2.5162
B-Ag56Cu I n N i-600/710
730
AG 502
2.5156
B-Ag49ZnCuMnNi-680/705
690
steels
2.0091
B-Cu100(P)-1085
1100
CU 201
2.1021
B-Cu94Sn(P)-910/1040
1040
CU 202
2.1055
B-Cu88Sn(P)-825/990
990
CU 301
2.0367
L-CuZn40
900
G, V
f, I
G, V
f, I
CU 305
2.0711
B-Cu48ZnNi(Si)-890/920
910
CP 202
2.1463
B-Cu93P-710/820
720
f, I
5)
5)
5)
nickel, cobalt,
nickel and cobalt alloys,
unalloyed and alloyed steels
cast iron
2.4140
B-Ni73CrFeSiB(C)-960/1060
NI 103
2.4143
B-Ni92SiB-980/1040
NI 105
2.4148
B-Ni71CrSi-1080/1135
NI 107
2.4150
B-Ni76CrP-890
3.2280
B-AI92Si-575/615
610
f,l
AL 103
3.2282
B-AI90Si-575/590
600
f, I
AL 104
3.2285
B-AI88Si-575/585
595
f, I
1)
2}
3)
4)
5)
The two letters indicate the alloy group, while the three digit numbers
are purely numbers increasing sequentially.
Numbers at the end indicate the melting range. Alloy components,
see pages 116 and 117.
G suitable for gap brazing; V suitable for V-joint brazing
f filled brazing; I lapped brazing
Refer to manufacturer's data.
Gap brazing:
iv < 0.25mm
V-joint brazing:
w > 0.3 mm
AmSH
US
334
Alloy designation
as per ISO 3677 3)
Previous
designation
DIN 1707
Working
temperature
C
Application examples
tin-lead
101
102
103
S-Sn63Pb37
S-Sn63Pb37E
S-Sn60Pb40
L-Sn63Pb
L-Sn63Pb
L-Sn60Pb
183
183
183-190
precision mechanics
electronics, printed circuit boards
printed circuit boards, high-grade steel
lead-tin
111
114
116
124
S-Pb50Sn50
S-Pb60Sn40
S-Pb70Sn30
S-Pb98Sn2
L-Sn50Pb
L-PbSn40
L-PbSn2
183-215
183-235
183-255
320-325
131
132
S-Sn63Pb37Sb
S-Sn60Pb40Sb
L-Sn60Pb(Sb)
183
183-190
precision mechanics
precision mechanics, electrical industry
134
136
S-Pb58Sn40Sb2
S-Pb74Sn25Sb1
L-PbSn40Sb
L-PbSn25Sb
185-231
185-263
tin-leadbismuth
141
142
S-Sn60Pb38Bi2
S-Pb49Sn48Bi3
180-185
138
precision solders
low-temperature solder, safety fuses
tin-leadcadmium
151
S-Sn50Pb32Cd18
L-SnPbCd18
145
tin-leadcopper
161
162
S-Sn60Pb39Cu1
S-Sn50Pb49Cu1
L-SnPbCu3
L-Sn50PbCu
230-250
183-215
tin-leadsilver
171
S-Sn60PbAg
L-Sn60PbAg
178-180
lead-tinsilver
182
191
S-Pb95Ag5
S-Pb93Sn5Ag2
L-PbAg5
304-365
296-301
tin-leadantimony
1)
2)
3)
Flux
type
1 rosin
2 organic
Flux basis
Classification by effect
Flux
form
Flux activator
1 colophonium
2 without colophonium 1 without activator
2 activated by halogens
1 water soluble
3 activated without halogens
2 not water soluble
A liquid
1 salts
B solid
2 acids
1 phosphoric acid
2 other acids
C paste
3 alkaline
3 inorganic
Desi gnations
DIN EN DIN 8511
Effect of
residues
3.2.2...
3.1.1...
F-SW11
F-SW12
very
corrosive
3.2.1...
3.1.1...
2.1.3...
2.1.2...
1.2.2...
F-SW13
F-SW21
F-SW23
F-SW25
F-SW28
somewhat
corrosive
1.1.1...
1.2.3...
F-SW31
F-SW33
noncorrosive
Flux ISO 9454- 1.2.2.C: Flux of type rosin (1), base without colophonium (2),
activated by halogens (2), available in paste form (C)
Activation temper.
FH10
FH11
FH12
550-800 C
550-800 C
550-850 C
FH20
FH21
FH30
FH40
700-1000C
750-1100 C
over 1000 C
650-1000C
FL10
FL20
400-700 C
400-700 C
Production engineering: 6.
and
r a i n 3 3 5
Soldering
< 450 C
> 450 C
> 900 C
Energy source
flame, furnace
Base material
Cu, Ag,
Al alloys,
stainless steel,
steel, Cu,
Ni alloys
steel,
carbide inserts
steel, carbide
Sn, Pb alloys
Cu, Ag alloys
Ni-Cr alloys,
Ag-Au-Pd alloys
Flux
flux, vacuum
Working temperature
Soldering or filler
material
Auxiliary materials
for solders
silver
unalloyed steel
0.05-0.2
0.05-0.15
0.1-0.3
0.05-0.2
Alloy steel
0.1-0.25
0.1-0.2
0.1-0.35
0.1-0.25
Cu, Cu alloys
0.05-0.2
Carbide
0.3-0.5
0.05-0.25
0.3-0.5
dmax ~ S 5
Load transfer
The load on the soldered joint should be in shear (transverse forces) if at all possible. In particular, solder seams
should not be loaded with tensile or peeling stress.
knurled
press fit
Soldering gap depths / d > 5 s do not fill with solder reliably. Therefore load capacity cannot be increased by a
larger gap depth.
Load capacity can be increased by design features such as
folds
Production process simplification
In soldering there should be a means for assuring proper
positioning of the parts to be joined, e.g. by part shape
or by knurled press fit.
Application examples
pipes and fittings
sheet metal parts
tools with brazed carbide cutters
336
Acrylic
resins
Trade name
Temperature Time
C
Agomet M,
Acronal,
Stabi I itExpress
max.
operating
temperature
C
Comb, tensile
and shear
strength
Elasticity
Applications,
special characteristics
N/mm 2
metals, thermosets,
ceramics, glass
20
24 hr
120
6-30
low
20-200
1 hr to
12 hr
50-200
10-35
low
120-200
60s
140
20
low
metals, thermosets,
glass, elastomers, wood,
ceramics
metals, thermosets,
glass, elastomers, wood,
ceramics
Phenolic
resins (PF)
Porodur,
Pertinax,
Bakelite
Polyvinyl
chloride
(PVC)
Hostalit,
Isodur,
Macroplast
20
> 24 hr
60
60
low
Polyurethane Desmocoll,
(PUR)
Delopur,
Baydur
50
24 hr
40
50
present
metals, elastomers,
glass, wood,
some thermoplastics
Polyester
resins (UP)
Fibron,
Leguval,
Verstopal
25
1 hr
170
60
low
Polychloroprene
(CR)
Baypren,
Contitec,
Fastbond
50
1 hr
110
present
Cyanoacrylate
Permabond,
Sicomet 77
20
40 s
85
20-25
low
Hot glue
Jet-Melt,
Ecomelt,
Vesta-Melt
20
> 30 s
50
2-5
present
1)
metals, thermosets,
ceramics, glass
contact glue for metals
and plastics
Due to varying chemical compositions of adhesives, the values given are only approximate values. For detailed
information please refer to information from the manufacturer.
Material
low
Al alloys
Mg alloys
Ti alloys
Cu alloys
11
21
medium
high
low
1-2-3-4
1-6-5-3-4
1-6-2-3-4
1-6-2-3-4
1-2-7-8-3-4
1-7-2-9-3-4
1-2-10-3-4
Steel, bright
Steel, galvanized
Steel, phosphatized
1-2-3-4
1-6-2-3-4
1-7-2-3-4
Other metals
Material
medium
high
1-2-3-4
1-6-2-3-4
1-2-3-4
1-2-3-4
1-7-2-3-4
1-2-3-4
1-6-2-3-4
1-2-3-4
1-6-2-3-4
1-7-2-3-4
Production engineering: 6.
o n
T-joint
Tube joint
not as good,
since peeling forces act due to
off-center application of force
not as good,
since peeling forces act due to
bending load
Test methods
Test method
standard
Contents
Fatigue test
DIN EN ISO 9664
Tensile test
DIN EN 26922
1)
increasing
width w
mm
40
Imethacrylate
epoxy resin
increasing
overlap /
phenolic resin
epoxy polyaminoamide
-50
0
50
test temperature 0
100
150
337
338
Safety colors
Color
Meaning
yellow
stop,
prohibited
blue
caution!
potential danger
safety,
first aid
mandatory signs,
notices
black
white
white
black
black
white
white
Application
examples
(see pages 340
and 341)
Stop signs,
emergency stop
prohibitive signs,
fire fighting
equipment
Requirement to
wear personal protective equipment (PPE);
location of a
telephone
Prohibitive signs
Prohibited
No smoking
No fires, open
flame or
smoking
Do not touch
Walking in this
area prohibited
No magnetic or
electronic data
media allowed
1)
Climbing
prohibited for
unauthorized
persons
Do not touch
live voltage
Non-potable
water
Do not
connect
No access for
persons with
pacemaker
No spraying with
water
No cell phones
No food or drink
allowed
Do not reach in
Operating with
long hair
prohibited
Hand-held or
manually operated grinding not
allowed
German Employer's Liability Insurance Association - Accident Prevention Regulations (Berufsgenossenschaftliche Unfallverhiitungsvorschrift) BGV A8 (replaces VGB 125)
*) According to European Standards
339
Warning signs*
cf. DIN 4844-2 (2001-02) and BGV A8 1 ) (2002-04)
Warning signs
A AA A A A
Warning:
Hazardous area
Warning:
Combustible
materials
Warning:
Explosive
substances
Warning:
Toxic substances
Warning:
Corrosive substances
Warning:
Radioactive
materials or
ionizing radiation
A AAA AA
Warning:
Suspended
load
Warning:
Forklift traffic
Danger:
High voltage
Warning:
Optical radiation
aK A A A
Warning:
Non-ionic,
electromagnetic
radiation
Warning:
Strong magnetic
field
Warning:
Danger of
tripping
Warning:
Danger of falling
Warning:
Laser beam
radiation
Warning:
Biological hazard
AAAAA
Warning:
Oxidizing
substances
Warning:
Extreme cold
^mmmmmrn
Warning:
Substances
hazardous to
health or irritants
Warning:
Gas cylinders
Warning:
Hazards due to
batteries
Warning:
Explosive
atmosphere
Warning:
Milling shaft
Warning:
Crushing hazard
AA AAA A
Warning:
Danger of tipping
when rolling
1)
Warning:
Automatic
start-up
Warning:
Hot surface
Warning:
Risk of hand
injury
Warning:
Danger of slipping
Warning:
Moving
conveyor
on track
German Employer's Liability Insurance Association - Accident Prevention Regulations (Berufsgenossenschaftliche Unfallverhiitungsvorschrift) BGV A8 (replaces VGB 125)
*) According to European Standards
340
Safety signs^
Mandatory signs
General
mandatory sign
Wear safety
glasses
Wear ear
protection
Wear respirator
Wear protective
gloves
Wear protective
clothing
Wear face
protection
For pedestrians
Use safety
harness
Use crosswalk
Disconnect
before working
Wear life
preserver
Sound horn
Follow
instructions
Emergency
shower
Eye rinsing
equipment
Escape and rescue signs for escape routes and emergency exits
Emergency
telephone
Doctor
First aid
Medical stretcher
Defibrillator
Meeting point
Directional arrows
Ladder
Work area!
Fire fighting
equipment
1)
Fire alarm
telephone
High Voltage
Danger to life
Location:
Date:
Sign may only be
removed by:
Fire extinguisher
2)
341
Safety signs
Information signs
In case of
failure part can
have live voltage
Discharge time
longer than
1 minute
5 Safety rules
Before touching:
- discharge
- ground
- short circuit
Combination signs
Work area!
Location:
Date:
Do not connect
High Voltage
Hazardous
3 t
3^
3 *
A
Turn off engine.
Risk of poisoning.
Walking on roof
is prohibited
First aid
station
1)
Prohibited! Walking on
roof is prohibited.
Danger of toxic
gases
German Employer's Liability Insurance Association - Accident Prevention Regulations (Berufsgenossenschaftliche Unfallverhutungsvorschrift) BGV A8 (replaces VGB 125)
*) According to European Standards
342
Danger criteria of
materials
When consumed
in very small
amounts leads to
death or may
cause acute
or chronic damage to health.
Very toxic
Danger criteria of
Code letter,
danger symbol,
materials
hazard description
Danger criteria of
Code letter,
danger symbol,
materials
hazard description
Solid material
can be easily
ignited by a
source of ignition
Liquid material
with flash point
<21 C.
Xi
Irritant
X = St. Andrew's
cross
i = irritating
Flammable
F = flammable
T = toxic
When consumed
in small amounts
leads to death or
may cause acute
or chronic damage to health.
Risk of explosion
by shock, friction,
fire or other
sources of
ignition.
N
N
l & i
Toxic
T = toxic
Xn
Harmful to
health
Danger of
explosion
When ingested
may result in
death or cause
acute or chronic
harm to health.
X = St. Andrew's
cross
n = noxious
C = corrosive
Xn with R 40
Limited
evidence of
mutagenic
effect
E = explosive
Substances that
substantially
increase the risk
and severity of a
fire, because they
produce oxygen.
Oxidizing
T with R 45
N = noxious
(harmful)
Substance may
cause cancer from
inhaling, swallowing or from contact with the skin.
Carcinogenic
T = toxic
O = oxidizing
Liquid substances
with flash point
< 0C and boiling
point <35 C;
gaseous substances, which
are flammable in
contact with air.
Highly
flammable
T with R 46
Substances
which can have a
mutagenic effect
on humans.
R 46: May cause
heritable genetic
damage.
Mutagenic
substances
T = toxic
F = flammable
Substance which
can cause concern T with R 60, R 61
due to possible
mutagenic effect
on humans. However, there is not
yet sufficient
information available to give conDanger to
clusive proof.
fertility
Substances which
are known to
impair fertility or
reproduction.
X = St. Andrew's
cross
n = noxious
R 40 = irreversible
damage possible
(page 199)
T = toxic
R 60 = may impair
fertility
R 61 = may cause
harm to the
unborn child
EU-Directive, Appendix
Environmentally
dangerous
Substances
change water,
ground, air, climate, animals,
plants, etc. in
such a way that
the environment
is endangered.
Corrosive
RL 67/548/EWG
(2004-04)1)
Xn with
R 62, R 63
Limited
evidence of
influence on
fertility
Substances
which cause concern due to possible impairment of
fertility of
humans.
X = St. Andrew's
cross
n = noxious
R 62 = possible
risk of impaired
fertility
R 63 = possible
risk of harm to
unborn child
343
c f D N 24 0
( 2'0 07 0 5'
Area of application: A precise identification marking of pipe lines, indicating the substance being conveyed, is necessary for reasons of safety, fire fighting and proper maintenance and repairs. The identification marking is intended to
indicate possible hazards and help to prevent accidents and damage to health.
Requirements concerning identification marking
Identification marking must be clearly visible and longlasting.
Identification can be established by painting, lettering
(e.g. via self-adhesive foil strips) or signs.
Particularly operation-critical and hazardous places
should be marked (e.g. beginning and end of branch
pipes, wall penetrations, fittings).
Group
Group
color
RAL
green
6032
Water
Supplem.
color
RAL
Color of
lettering
RAL
white
9003
Steam
red
3001
white
9003
Air
gray
7004
black
9004
Flammable gases
yellow
1003
3001
black
9004
Non-flammable gases
yellow
1003
9004
black
9004
Acids
orange
white
9003
Lyes
purple
white
9003
Flammable liquids
and solid materials
brown
red
3001
white
9003
Non-flammable liquids
and solid materials
brown
black
9004
white
9003
Oxygen
blue
white
9003
Code
Color
Description
Code
Color
PW
PWC
green
PWH-C
purple
PWH
red
NPW
white
Potable water
Compressed air
Heating
Oil
a
Water
Oxygen (fire-promoting, O)
Oxygen
*) According to European Standards
Acetylene
a>
344
Term
Sound
Sound comes from mechanical vibrations. It propagates in gaseous, liquid and solid bodies.
Frequency
Number of oscillations per second. Unit: 1 Hertz = 1 Hz = 1/s. Pitch increases with frequency.
Frequency range of human hearing: 16 Hz-20.000 Hz.
Sound level
Noise
Decibel (dB)
dB (A)
Since the human ear perceives tones of different heights (frequencies) to have different
strengths when they are actually at the same sound levels, noise must be appropriately
dampened with filters for certain frequencies. Frequency weighting curve with Filter A
compensates for this and indicates the subjective auditory impression. A difference of 3 dB (A)
corresponds approximately to a doubling (or halving) of the sound intensity.
Sound level
dB (A)
Type of sound
Threshold of
auditory sensitivity
dB (A)
Type of sound
normal speech
at distance of 1 m
dB (A)
Type of sound
70
heavy stamping
95-110
75-90
angle grinder
95-115
80
car horn at
distance of 5 m
100
85
disco music
100-115
Breathing at distance
of 30 cm
10
20
Whispering
30
Tearing paper
40
90
110
Quiet conversation
50-60
90-110
jet engine
120-130
machine tools
loud talking
at distance of 1 m
welding torch, lathe
15 Workplace regulation
max. dB (A)
55
70
85
55
II
LJU 1 11.
Psycflologic al readtions
LJ
annoyance, irritability
Vegetative r eactioris
10
20
30
40
50
60 65 70
80 85 90
100
danger limif
for hearing
110
120 130
pain
threshold
140
S Q U n d
150
leyel
160 dB (A)
^
Table of Contents
345
//
Final
control
elem. /
Contr.
system
7.2
OFF
ON h - J
K1
L-
K1
a.
7.3
\
7.4
7.5
110
111
01
7.6
7.7
7.8
346
348
349
350
Electrical circuits
Circuit symbols
Designations in circuit diagrams
Circuit diagrams
Sensors
Protective precautions
351
353
354
355
356
358
361
363
365
366
368
369
370
372
373
374
374
374
375
376
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
386
388
392
Information technology
Numbering systems
ASCII code
Symbols for program flow charts
Program flow chart, Structograms
WORD commands
EXCEL commands
401
402
403
404
405
406
346
For open loop control the output variable, such as the temperature in a hardening furnace, is influenced by the input
variable, such as the current in the heating coil. The output
variable does not have an effect on the input variable.
Open loop control has an open action flow.
Schematic
presentation
disturbance
heat losses
final control
element
relay
disturbance
heat losses
manipulated
variable
current
controlled variable
feedback value
axial extensometer
spring
contact
controller
button
controlled \
system
\
_ annealing furn.\]
7777777777777; 77,
r v
'controlled system
^annealing furnace
/ V / / / / / / / / Z ? /
Functional diagram of
open loop control system
controled
system
controller
button
relay
target value
of controlled
variable
comparing
element
adjustment
screw contact
annealing furnace
w reference
input variable
y mamp.
variable
z disturbance
x control,
variable
w reference
input variable
temperature
setpoint
current
heat loss
actual
temperature
temperature
setpoint
open loop
control ^v,.-. s\
contr.
elem.
L.
x
axial
extonsometer
contact
e Error
e = w-x
If
'
drive final concont. trolled
elem. system
relay
annealing furnace
ymanip.
variable
z disturbance
x contr.
variable
current
heat loss
actual
temperat.
Designation example:
PDIC
JTT.
First letters
D
E
F
G
H
K
L
M
P
Q
R
S
T
W
density
electrical parameters
flow, throughput
distance, position, length
manual input/intervention
time
status (e.g. level)
humidity
pressure
quality parameters
radiation parameters
speed, rotational speed
temperature
weight, mass
Supplementary letters
D
difference
ratio
sum, integral
Succeeding letters
A error indication
C automatic closed loop control
H upper limit value
I
display
L lower limit value
R registration
Pit
PDIC
312
P2
-{ih
pressure
difference
display
automatic closed loop control
Symbols
Location of output & user control
CD
or
Local,
general
o
Process control
room
Local, implemented
by process control
system
Local, implemented
by process
computer
Servo motor,
general
Reference line
Measuring point,
sensor
Example
temperature
lRZ\ registration
automatic
closed
loop control
ok>
Temperature control
and registration at local
control stand measuring
point 310
Explanation
Symbol
Explanation
Controllers
Sensors
or
piox
p
Two-point controller
with switching output and PID behavior
-z^W
>ki
/
-E
Signal designators
Adapters
Pressure transducer
with pneumatic
signal output
~E
A
n
Signal, electrical
Signal, pneumatic
Analog signal
Digital signal
Output devices
Basic symbol,
general display
temperature
transducer
with electrical
signal output
temperaturesensor
<6
Controller, general
Sensor for
temperature,
general
Explanation
Monitor
PID controller
signal amplifier for
manipulated
actuating signal
controlled variable x
variable/
reference input
PID)
valve
actuator,
signal adjuster for electrical
motor
signal to adjust reference
driven
input variable w
[M
steam
>
water bath
348
Analog controllers
Analog (continuous) controllers
In analog controllers the manipulated variable y may assume any desired value within the control range.
Controller design
P-controllers
Proportional
controllers
P controller
Output variable is
proportional to
input variable.
P-controllers
have steady-state
errors.
outflow
valve
Transition function
x controlled variable
y manipulated variable
e error
Symbol1'
Block representation2'
step function 3 '
step response 4 '
time t
2
/
time t
I-controllers
Integral controllers
I controller
I-controllers are
slower than
P-controllers, but
they eliminate all
errors.
2
/
PI-controllers
Proportional
integral controllers
P control
part
I control
part
LR
PI
X
z
In PI-controllers a
P-controller and a
I-controller are
connected in parallel.
D-controllers
Derivative controllers
D-controller systems only occur with P- or PIcontroller systems, since pure D-controller
behavior with constant error does not provide
any manipulated variable and therefore no
closed loop control.
LN
/
PD-controllers
Proportional
derivative controllers
PID-controllers
Proportional
integral
derivative controllers
Lf
II
4)
PID
Switching controllers change the manipulated variable y discontinuously by switching in several steps.
Controller design
Transition function,
switching behavior
Example, description
Two-point controller
9^9
relay
Symbol
Block representation
heating coil
IHII
heat radiation
f-V
contacts
switch pos. 2
set-point potentiometer
Three-point controller
switch pos. 1
II
error
switch pos. 3
switch pos. 2
y
0 error
switch pos. 1
31
-1
Transient function
Example (simplified)
Computers
J
Start
I
Enter
reference input
variable w
Programmable
Logic Controllers
(PLC)
Digital
PID-controller
error step
1
Aquire
controlled variable x
1
Generate error
e = w-x
Microcontrollers
Microprocessors
time t
.""-I
PID
control algorithm
1
Output manipulated
variable y
-
tl
3
2
1
summing
step response
Controller design
Example
P-controlled
system with delay
1st order
(P-T-i controlled
system)
i t
i t
Explanation
time t
time t
Filling two gas vessels
1
ffl
it-
=1X3=
time t
P-controlled
system with delay
2nd order
(P-T2 controlled
system)
Explanation
Jfez
Py
Pn
time t
time t
350
Binary logic
Function
Circuit symbols
Logical equation
11
AND
&
12
Technical implementation
Function table
0 = 11 A 12
11
12
pneumatic
11
A\
OR
12
0 = 11 V 12
12
NOT
11
T r
12
12
H
11
electric
11 12
11
111
~Jt
5
i\
12
11
12
--0-
11
11
12
0 = (11 A 12) V
(11 A 12)
&
0 = 11 A 12
NOT-OR
(NOR)
0 = 11 V 12
II
Exclusive
OR
(XOR)
=1
12
11
11
0
0
1
1
Memory
(RS flipflop)
12
R
S set
R reset
02
I = inputs
5
11
12
H5
I2
12
01
C1
11
12
12
0 =I
NOT
AND
(NAND)
12 0 1 02
0
1 0 1
0 1 0
1
state unchanged
condition
indeterminate
state
,1J J J J
01
11
,02
( 1
12
v ]*
C = relays, contacts
! J
I \ C 1 \ C 1 \ I \ C2\C2\
C1
C2
01
02<^)
351
Circuit symbols
-C
D general
Lamps,
general,
optional representation
Inductor, coil
Fuse
Nonstandard
representation
Capacitor
Permanent
magnet
Electrolytic
component
Buzzer
Horn
Converter,
transducer
Junction,
optional representation
Connection
to ground,
optional representation
i^-
Grounded
conductor,
PE
Conductor,
moveable
Neutral conductor, PN
Conductor,
insulated
-t-
I^A-J
Measuring
device,
recording
Transformer,
optional representation
Ground
Ground connector connection
Semiconductor diode,
general
LED light
emitting
diode
Types of current
Adjustability
Valve
Designations
general
"="
Semiconductor components
Double
junction,
optional representation
f k
Function
stepped
continuous
adjustable
Effect
thermal
regulated
radiation
DC
AC with low
frequency
AC with high
frequency
PNP
transistor
NPN
transistor
Types of connections
Y connection
Delta
connection
YA
Y-delta connection
cT
d * a) single-pole
a)
b)
b) double-pole
KK^
Sensor switch
/
X
Three-way
switch, illuminated
Motor circuit
breaker
Groundingtype
receptacle
Series switch
Three-pole
switch, protective system IP 44
Key button
Automatic
breaker
Ground-fault
circuit interrupter
Application examples
Inductor,
continuously
adjustable
/
H
X
/
Resistor,
5 step
variable
DC-AC
converter,
regulated
DC or AC
(universal)
3G 1,5
Three-core
cable with
junction
Cable with
3 conductors,
with ground
conductor (G)
and 1.5 mm 2
cross section
DC motor
Three-phase
motor
352
Circuit symbols
Actuation types
Relay contacts
NO contact,
normally open
NC contact,
normally
closed
Single pole
double throw
Electromech. relays
Manual,
general
E>
By
pressing
By
Timer on
delay
Timer off
delay
Timer on off
delay
T-
By tilting
0
>/-
By key
By coil
By pressure
energy
C B -
By proximity
By touching
By pedal
pulling
By
turning
_F
Switch behavior
b)
>
By bimetal
(thermal)
Capacitive
sensor,
reacts to
proximity of
all substances
<0
Hl-
Delayed
action (parachute effect)
for movement
a) to the right
b)to the left
a)
Lock,
prevents
automatic
return
Relay coil,
general
fx-7I|
'
Inductive
sensor,
reacts to
proximity of
metals
Symbol for
"actuated
state"
Magnetic
sensor,
reacts to close
proximity of a
magnet (reed
switch)
Optical
sensor,
reacts to
reflection of
infrared beam
h-
NO contact
manually
hvV-
Double pole
single throw
a) NC contact
b) NO contact
Representation in actuated condition
NO contact
a) closes
b) delayed
opening when
actuated
NC contact
with roller
actuation
Limit switch,
NO contact
Valve with
electromagnetic
actuation
Emergency
palm button
RS flip-flop
set dominant
11 12 01 02
12
02
0 1 0 1
1 1
=0-
RS flip-flop
reset dominant
11 12 01 02
S1 1
R
91 0
02
1 0 1 0
Function
table 2 '
Capacitive
proximity
switch with
NC contact,
reacts to proximity of all
materials.
Delay elements
RS 1) flip-flop
I<0>--
Limit switch,
NC contact
Flip-flop elements
91 0
Magnetic
proximity
switch with
NO contact,
reacts to
proximity of
magnetic
material.
11 12 01 02
0 1 0 1
12
R1 1
91 0
02
1 0 1 0
Function
table
1 1 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
Function
table
1 1 0 1
> R = reset
S = set
2)
unchanged state
indeterminate state
10 t 21 0
With loss of a
signal at
input I, output
O takes the
value 0 after
completion of
time t2.
353
B
F
K
Q
M
P
R
S
Type of device
Sequential number
Code letters
for type (selection)
Function OFF
Direction of movement
Function ON
Device function
F1
K1
S1A E--
G Test
K
Jog operation
Save, set
Clear, reset
S2E E K1
eg
M1_c>X
Insulated wires
Designation
Type of wire
DC network
AC network
Code
letters
positive
L+
negative
L-
neutral wire
Phase conductor 1
L1
Phase conductor 2
L2
Phase conductor 3
L3
Example
Symbols
Rectifier circuit
L1
light blue
neutral wire
Ground wire
Wire
color
L3
brown
black
CD
C
light blue
PE
light blue
PE
black
L2
(J
<
green-yellow
-f-
green-ylffiov
L-
PEN
o
$
<D
black
c
O
Q
black
Ground
Device connections
Connections for
Example
Designation
Phase conductor 1
Phase conductor 2
Phase conductor 3
1)
2)
M3~
Terminal board
W2
L1
V1
U2
rv>r>r\
V2
T
W1
L2
L3
354
Circuit diagrams
2nd digit
Function number for contacts
NC
NC
NO
NO
delayed
SPDT
delayed
SPDT
delayed
1st digit
Consecutive numbering of contact sets
Control circuit
L+
Main circuit
?
C1
S1 h ~
S2
53 h
H-A
C1
C1
\
MlCp-% N3CpX
C1
L-
Designation of devices
Contacts and the associated relay coils
are marked with the same code numeral.
Example: Current sections 1, 2 and 3
2 NO contacts belong to relay coil C1,
both marked as C1. They are used to
latch the relay coil.
All contacts of a relay are entered as a
complete contact set or as a table under
the current path of the relay. Both representations indicate the current section
on which a contact is located.
o
C1 I
0
C2 1
o
c a r
CNI
Osl
CM
,13
14
23 - i
33 -1n *
14
slL
23 ' 1 24
33 " 1 34
r ^ r
S1h A
C1
S2 I f
L-
ciN
S3
C1
14
1L
23 "f ~ 2 4
33 "rru
L+
C3
Osl
O
Contacts
C1
Section
13-14
23-24
2
3
C2 \
C3
M1
M3
S4
C2
Cvl
Contacts
C2
Section
Contacts
C3
Section
13-14
13-14
Representation as table
355
Sensors
Sensors (selection)
Sensors that are sensitive
to proximity
Inductive
sensors
Sensors
Capacitive
sensors
Photoelectric
sensors
Tactile sensors
Magnetic sensors
Ultrasound
sensors
Limit
switches
Characteristics of sensors
Sensor
type
Disadvantages
Object
distance
Only objects with high electrical conductivity, unsuitable where there is greater
accumulation of metal chips
1 mm to
150 mm
20 mm to
40 mm
<0
Triggers if an object
returns the infrared field
of the sensor
A permanent magnet
actuates a proximity
switch (reed contact)
using two contact springs
Symbol
Principle
Inductive
Capacitive
Hh
Photoelectric
Ultrasound
HDh
O
Magnetic
Mechanical
M>~
Advantages
Triggered by manual
actuation or lever system
J
Type of
detection
inductive
C capacitive
U ultrasound
D photoelectric diffuse
reflected
luminous
beam
M magnetic
R photoelectric reflected
luminous
beam
photoelectric direct
luminous
beam
approx.
2m
Design
and size
FORM
A cylindrical
threaded
sleeve
B smooth cylindrical sleeve
C rectangular
with square
cross-section
D square, with
rectangular
cross-section
SIZE
(2 digits)
for diameter
or side length
JTTTI
Circuit element function
A NO contact
B NC contact
C single pole
double
throw
P programmable by
user
S other
Type of
output
P PNP output, 3
or 4 DC connections
N NPN output, 3
or 4 DC connections
D 2 DC connections 1 '
F 2 AC connections 2 '
U 2 AC or DC
connections
S other
Type of
connection
integrated
connection
line
plug
connection
screw
connection
unused
other
type of
connection
NAMUR
function
N NAMUR 3'
function
Note:
NAMUR
sensors
are 2 wire
sensors that
are connected
to an external
switching
amplifier
356
Safety precautions
Safety precautions against electrical shock
Protection
against direct
and
indirect contact
I
Protection by:
Protection
against electric shock
under normal conditions:
against direct contact
i
Protection by:
- protective insulation of active
parts, e.g. cable
- coating as insulation, e.g. housings on electr. devices
- distance, e.g. protective hoods,
housings of machine screen
- barriers, e.g. protective screen,
enclosure
Protection
against electric shock
under fault conditions:
for indirect contact
l
Protection by:
- automatic disconnect or warning,
e.g. residual current protective
device
- potential equalization
- non-conductive areas;
e.g. by insulating coverings
- protective insulation, e.g. housings
encapsulated with insulating material
ft
ft
Physical effects
10 000
ms
AC-1
normally no effect
2000
AC-2
AC-3
1000
o
5=
c
500
200
o
o
c
o
100
3
-o
20
AC-1
AC-2
Trigger curve
of a ground
fault interrupt
dev. < 30 mA
50
10
0.1
0.2
0.5 1 2 5 10
AC-4.1
AC-4.2
AC-4.3
mA
500 2000
100
AC-4
leakage current
Rated current of
fuse
I n in A
Color
code
of
fuse
Rated current of
fuse
I n in A
Color
code
of
fuse
25
yellow
35
50
A1
2
10(13)
16
20
gray
B1
B2
Installation in thermally
insulated walls, in electrical conduit
B1
Installation in electrical
conduit or in the wall or in
cable channels
B2
white
A1
B1
B2
2.5
10
16
10
10
10
10
10
10
2.5 2.5
357
Safety precautions*
Protective systems for electrical devices
Example:
Protective system
designation IP
(International Protection)
J T T
1st code numeral
for protection of
device1* against
penetration of
solid foreign
objects
II
Supplementary letters
Additional
code letters 2 '
J
1st code no.
Code
Protection against
Protection from
no
accidental contact
foreign objects
No protection
Protected against
contact by back of
the hand
Code
no
No protection
Protected against
penetration by foreign
objects d> 50 mm
Protected against
contact with finger
d = 12 mm
Protected against
penetration by foreign
objects d> 12.5 mm
Protected against
contact with a
tool d= 2.5 mm
Protected against
penetration by foreign
objects d> 2.5 mm
Protected against
water spray impacting device at 60
Protected against
contact with a wire
d = 1 mm
Protected against
penetration by foreign
objects d > 1 mm
Protected against
water spray from all
directions
Svmbol
Protected against
contact with a wire
d = 1 mm
Protected
from dust
Protected against
water jets from all
directions
Protected against
contact with a wire
d = 1 mm
Dust
proof
Protected against
strong water jets
from all directions
Protected against
temporary submersion in water
Protected against
continual submersion in water
4>
2)
Protected against
drips if device is
inclined 15
Additional
letters
Symbol
None
*
4
4
Protected against
contact by back of the
hand
Protected against
contact with finger
d= 12 mm, 80 mm long
Protected against
contact with a tool
d = 2.5 mm,
100 mm long
Protected against
contact with a wire
d = 1 mm, 100 mm long
Supplementary letters
AA
44
44
44
...kPa
Code
Type of protection
0
P
oil immersion
pressurized
enclosure
sand filling
flameproof
enclosure
increased
safety
inherent safety
q
d
e
Group II
A
i
*) According to European Standards
ethylene, acryl
nitrite, hydrogen
cyanide,
dimethylether,
propylene oxide,
coke oven gas,
tetrafluoroethylene
Surface
temperature
T1
450 C
T2
300 C
T3
200 C
T4
135C
T5
100C
T6
85C
Code
hydrogen,
acetylene,
carbon bisulphide,
ethyl nitrite
358
The function chart in accordance with GRAFCET is a graphical design language for sequential control. However, it
does not make any statement about the type of devices used, the direction of lines and the installation of electrical
equipment. Only the general representation via symbols is obligatory; dimensions and other details are left to the
user.
Explanation
Steps
Examples
Explanation
Solenoid valve M2 ON
Signal light M5 ON
M2:=1
M5:=1
Step
/
*
7
^
\
/
Start step
Set step
It displays which steps
are set for a definite
condition of the process
Macro step
Individual representation
of a detailed part of a
sequential control
S
/
Inclusive step
This step contains several
steps that are referred to
as included steps.
E5
5.1
5.2
M5
5.3
359
Explanation
Examples
Sequential chart
step
step
Pump motor ON
Tank FULL
step
Agitator motor ON
15s delay time
step
Tank empty
Transistions
The transition is composed of
a dash and
a text describing the
transition
-- transition
Agitator motor ON
Transitions can be
represented by:
text statements
Boolean algebra
(equation)
graphical symbols
cAd-
--cAd
A sequence branches to
several sequences starting at a single or several
steps.
A difference is made
between:
sequence branch
1
Example:
sequence
branch
Sequence branch:
--
-II
sequence junction
-- a
A sequence branches to
multiple sequences that
are simultaneously activated but run independently of each other.
The next individual step is
carried out only after all
branches are processed.
22
24
._,
=E=
a) step 2 is set
and
-- a
-f b
3
1
360
System "ON".
Cylinders 1A1 and 2A1
in initial position
Start button S1
si-art
System "ON"
Start button S1
Valve Q1 OPEN
Stirring motor M1 ON
start-
t= 2 min
Stirring motor M1 OFF
Pump motor M2 ON
pressure
sensor for
fill level
pump motor
M2
-
= 1
Function diagrams
Path diagram
Function diagram
cp
nJ
^ ^
SI
State diagram
S2
0 1 4 10 11
1
:l
Function lines
Straight line
working movement
Path limits
general
Straight line
idle movement
Signal elements
Manual actuation
Mechanical actuation
ON
JOG
OFF
~p\ 6 bar
71 2 s
P r e s s u r e
switch set to
6 bar
MODE
AUTOMATIC
MODE
ON/
OFF
Hydraulic or pneumatic
actuation
ON
Signal combinations
V
V
AND state:
marked with a slash
OR state:
marked with a dot
0 12 3 4
0 1 2 3 4 5
Step 1: switch
from initial position b to position a
Step 2 and 3:
remain in position
Step 4: switch
from position a to
initial position a
1A1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 step
i
1S1
yi N,2s
J /
362
Function diagram
Parts list
Designations Name
1A1
2A1
0V1
1V1
1V2
2V1
Designations Name
151
152
153
251
252
3/2
3/2
3/2
3/2
3/2
363
Circuit symbols
Function elements
Hydraulic
fluid flow
>
Compressed
airflow
ill
( (
Direction of
flow
Power transmission
Hydraulic
pressure
source
Line junction
Pneumatic
press, source
Quick
coupling
Control line
Leakage current line
Exhaust
without
connection
Enclosure
around
subassemblies
Exhaust with
connection
S p r i n g
V W
Flow restriction
Adjustability
~ m >
Filter or
screen
Muffler
Tank
Line crossing
Working line
Direction of
rotation
Water
separator
Air
receiver
Hydraulic
accumulator
T 7 _
Service unit
(FRL)
dryer
Lubricator
Fixed displacement
hydraulic
motor, unidirectional
Variable displacement
hydraulic
motor, bidirectional
Fixed displacement
pneumaticmotor, unidirectional
Variable displacement
pneumatic
motor, bidirectional
Hydraulic
oscillating
drive
Pneumatic
oscillating
drive
Double-acting cylinders
Single-acting cylinders
JL
simplified:
Single-acting
cylinder,
return stroke
by undefined
power source
simplified:
Single-acting
cylinder,
return stroke
by integrated
spring
j
I
simplified:
Pilot operated
check valve
r^i
C h e c k valve,
spring loaded
Shuttle valve
(OR function)
Quick exhaust
valve
Double-acting
cylinder with
one-sided
piston rod
Pressure valves
Electric motor
TM
Pressure
relief valves
1M
Sequence
valve
LL
One-way flow
control valve
Dual-pressure
valve (AND
function)
simpli- '
fied: /
Double-acting
cylinder with
one-sided
piston rod
and twosided
adjustable
end cushion
Adjustable
throttle valve
Adjustable
2-way flowcontrol valve
Adjustable
3-way flowcontrol valve,
relief opening to tank
364
Circuit symbols
cf. DIN ISO 1219-1 (1996-03)
DIN ISO 5599 (2005-12)
4 2
6V/
12
14
PI
Designator
Connection
5 13
Code designation
5 / 2 - directional control valve 6 V 7
I
Number of
switch positions
Number of
connections
Circuit
number
Part
designation
Switch positions1*
Part designation
Valve with 2
positions
a
1)
Part
number
pumps and
compressors
drives
drive motors
signal pick-up
valves
all other parts
Valve with 3
positions
Number of rectangles
Number of positions
as per DIN
with
numbers
obsolete:
with
letters1'21
Inflow,
1
P
pressure
port
Working
A, B, C
2, 4,6
ports
Vent,
3, 5,7
R, S, T
drain
Leakage
L
oil port
Control
10,11,
X, Y, Z
12,14
ports3'
11
Letters are still frequently used in
hydraulic circuit diagrams.
21
The sequence of the letters does not
necessarily correspond to the number
sequence.
3)
A pulse at control port 12, for example,
connects ports 1 and 2.
. . T,
3/3 DCV, NC
in middle
position
OKI
e
in:
JZL
General, no
type of actuation indicated
HI
SQl
5/3 DCV,
NC in middle
position
Plunger
Pressure actuation
"C
hydraulic
Direct
--EC
Plunger with
adjustable
stroke limit
Push button
4/3 DCV. NC in
middle pos.
Mechanical actuation
Two flow
paths
Two flow
paths and
one closed
port
5/2 directional
control valve
1 X
X
i i
Manually activated
ri-i
4/2 directional
control valve
pneumatic
j
Indirect using
pilot valve
Electrical actuation
k:
HI
a )
^ L
Lever
Pull button
Spring
HI
Roller
plunger
Foot pedal
f t
Roller lever,
one direction
of actuation
By solenoid
By electric
motor
Combined actuation
By solenoid
and pilot
valve
Mechanical components
Notch
365
Circuit diagrams
circuit 2
1S2
1A1
1S2
W
Components are
arranged from bottom
to top in the direction
of power flow and
H t J T y M from left to right.
Ht lywv
ti
3-e5 V 7
Hht
1
Circuit
number
Part
designation
Part
number
Equipment
number
1S3
Tl!
2S2
X h
Subassemblies such
as throttle check
valves or service units
(FRL) are enclosed by
a dash-dot line.
2S1
Hydraulic components
are shown in their initial positions in the
equipment before
pressure is applied.
2S1
Similar components
or subassemblies are
shown at the same
height within a circuit.
Devices actuated by
drives, e.g. limit
switches, are represented at their point of
activation by a dash
and their designator.
2S2
Components of a circuit
Pneumatic components are shown in
their initial positions
in the equipment
before pressure is
applied.
Drive elements
Actuators
Control elements
Signal elements
Supply elements
1A1
circuit 1
1S2
circuit 2
2S1
2A1
drive elements
1V2
4
71
1V1
T \
J
L
2S1
1S3
J2
5v v 3
2S2
Xlw
/w
LP
11 3
'3
ovTl%
0Z1
TW
14
final control
elements
control
element
signal
elements
supply elements
2V1
4
5v
1S2
=
12
f
ISI
2S2
366
Electropneumatic controls
Function diagram
Layout
transfer cylinder 2A1
B2
up
< pV
lifting cylinder 1A1
down
forward
transfer
cylinder 2A1
back
\
?<
B1
7/
11
B3
Pushing
B3 B4
B1 B2
8 2
~~ f i
lifting cylinder 1A1
Circuit diagram
U
switching
element t a b l e 1 )
B2
B/f
C2
C3
NCINO
NCINO
B1
C1
C2
C3
C4
1M1
2M1
1M2
2M2
C4
NC| NO
3 C M
NCINO
C M
E l *
NC = normally closed
NO = normally opened
~'6
Circuit diagram with the additional functions - magazine query and continuous operation
9
I-2A- V
11
rrrr
continuous
operation
ON
E-VcsV
continuous
operation
OFF
10
tr
B2
B4
T T
V
B1
T
V
C1
C2
C3
C4
1M1
2M1
1M2
2M2
B3
C5 d ^ Z I
0V
switching
element table 1 *
SOE--VC5\
START
C1
C=2 I
j C3
c m
C4
NCNO
-
10
11
NCINO
-15
NCNO NC [NO
-
|6~
IT
NC NO
8
C M
NC = normally closed
NO = normally opened
Example for relay K5: Relay K5 has a normally open switch in section 10 and a normally open switch in section 11.
1
> The switching element table is similar to the contact table (pg. 354) and is often used in practice. However it is not
standardized. The table indicates the section in which a NC or NO relay contact can be found.
367
Technological scheme
feed
/
fast X
motion
motor
+
fast
reverse
motion
feed unit
Description
A1
B4
J
B1 B2
/
automatic
operating
panel
B3
lift cylinder A1
single
CT
O
Address
Remarks
E0.0/E0.1
NO contact/
NC contact
S2
E0.2
NO contact
S3
E0.3
NC contact
B1-B4
E0.4-E0.7
NO contact
1M1
A1.0
2M1
A1.1
2M2
A1.2
Proximity switch
FUNCTION BLOCK
Operating modes
ON
Controller
OFF
[ Operating panel \
Automatic mode
Single
Release
step
START
Reset
STOP
Network 5: Step 3
Extend in feed mode
M0.1
RS
E0.5
&
M2.0
M3.0
M0.2
R1 1 h m
M4.0 >1
M0.1
-CZ]
MO.2
-EH
Step chain
Network 3: Step 1
Start step
MO.2
>1
M2.0
Instruction list IL
Network 4: Step 2
Extend in fast motion
M0.1
RS
M0.3
&
M1.0
M2.0
M0.2
R1 1 H Z I
M3.0 >1
Operating modes
Network 1: Function block FB1
&
Component
designation
S0/S1
M0.1
Mode switch
AUTOMATIC/STEP
V1
w
ISD2M2
E 0 3
W
2M1CH
Allocation list
- Start step -
EO.O
O
STOP
V2
ra
1M1
START
B1 B2 B3
Network 6: Step 4
Fast reverse with dwell time
T1
RS
2 0
&
M02
M1.0
M4.0
R1 1 b e n
>1
RS
M1.0
R1 1
M4.0
Color marking: step flag in red
Transition in blue
Command output
Networks 7 to 9
M2.oll Cylinder extends
L=-l in fast motion
MIOSIS Cylinder in
I' feed mode
MU)/4n Cylinder retracts
in fast motion
Network 1
CALL FB1
Network 2
Basic position
U E0.4
U E0.7
S MO.3
Network 3
Step 1:
Start step
U E0.2
UN E0.3
U M0.1
U E0.4
U M4.0
0 MO.2
S M1.0
U M2.0
R M1.0
Network 4
Step 2:
Fast extension
U M0.1
U MO.3
U M1.0
S M2.0
O MO.2
O M3.0
R M2.0
Network 5
Step 3:
Feed mode
U M0.1
U E0.5
U M2.0
S M3.0
U MO.2
O M4.0
R M3.0
Network 6
Step 4:
Fast reverse
U M0.1
U E0.6
U M3.0
= T1
U T1
S M4.0
U MO.2
O M1.0
R M4.0
Network 7 to 9
Steps 5 to 7:
Command output
U M2.0
= A1.1
U M3.0
= A1.0
U M4.0
= A1.2
PE
368
Hydraulic fluids
Mineral oil based hydraulic oils
Type
Standard
HL
DIN 51524-1
HVLP
DIN 51524-3
Increase in
aging
resistance
HL 10
HLP 10
Properties
Kinematic
viscosity in mm 2 /s
HL 22
HLP 22
HL 32
HLP 32
HL 46
HLP 46
HL 68
HLP 68
HL 100
HLP 100
at -20C
600
at 0C
90
300
420
780
1400
2560
at 40 C
9-11
19.8-24.2
28.8-35.2
41.4-50.6
61.2-74.8
90-110
at 100C
2.4
4.1
5.0
6.1
7.8
9.9
-18C
-15C
-12C
-12C
175C
185C
195C
205 C
30 C
125C
1)
Increase in
corrosion
DIN 51524-2 ) resistance
+
HLP
Applications
- 2 1 C
165C
The pour point is the temperature at which hydraulic oil still flows under the force of gravity.
Hydraulic oil DIN 51524 - HLP 46: Hydraulic oil of type HLP, kinematic viscosity = 46 mm 2 /s at 40C
Viscosity-temperature behavior of HL and HLP hydraulic oils
200
i2
HL 100/HLP 100
HL 68/HLP 68
HL 46/HLP 46
HL 32/HLP 32
HL 22/HLP 22
HL 10/HLP 10
20
40
temperature
100
ISO
Viscosity
classes
HFC
HFD
Suitability for
temperatures Characteristics
C
Applications
-20 to +60
-20 to+150
Hydraulic
fluid
Rust
protection
Compatibility
with inner
coatings
Seal compatiCost
bility
effectiveness
Unsaturated
esters
(3
Saturated
esters
Polyglycol
oils
(3
Suitability:
very good
good
average
(3
limited/poor
Fluid life
369
Pneumatic cylinders
Dimensions and piston forces
Piston diameter
12
16
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
10
12
16
20
20
40
25
25
32
40
G3/8
G3/4
G / 8 G /s G / 8 GV 8 G / 4 G3/8
20
Coupling thread
M5
M5
..
,
single-act. cyl. 2 '
Pushina force 1 '
at p e = 6 bar in N double-act. cyl.
50
96
644
968
58
106
665
54
79
137 216
560
Pulling force1'at
p e = 6 bar in N
d o u b l e
.act.
single-act. cyl.
to
to
160 200
double-act. cyl.
G /2
10, 25, 50
strike
in m m
364
G /2
9960 15900
to
320
10, 25, 50, 80, 100, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500
Single-acting cylinder
A
Pamb
air consumption
gage pressure in
cylinder
ambient air pressure
number of strokes
A
q
piston surface
Air consumption 1 '
area
Single-acting cylinder
specific air conPe+Pamb
sumption per cm
Q =
A-s-npiston stroke
Pamb
piston stroke
Example:
Pe
Pamb
Double-acting cylinder
A
Q2
Pamb
Q = A-s-n-
Pamb
Pamb
ji (5 cm)
\
Pe Or Pamb
(on return)
Pe+Pamb
(6 + 1) bar
1 bar
10 cm 120
min
5
= 164934 cmmin
Pamb or pe
(on return)
165
min
q- s- n
Example:
0.0125
10 12 14 16 20
25 32 35 40
50 63 70mm 100
piston diameter d
11.89
15.96
10.76 13.49
1
20.6
' When it fills dead space, actual air consumption may be up to 25% greater. Dead spaces include compressed air
lines between the directional control valve and the cylinder and unused space in the end position of the piston. The
cross-sectional area of the piston rod is not taken into consideration.
370
Force calculation
Piston forces
Extending
1
1
m
d,
Fy
dy piston
diameter
d2 piston rod
diameter
efficiency
pe
gage pressure
Ay, A2 piston areas
Fy
piston force when
extending
F2
piston force when
retracting
Example:
Pe
Retracting
0 0 0
F^Pe-A
^ e o o A - "
cnr
40055 N
-0.85
F=pe-A-rj
Pressure units
1 Pa = 1 - ^ = 10-5 bar
nv
1 bar = 10
= 0.1
cm'
mm'
1 mbar = 100 Pa = 1 hPa
Retracting:
F2 =
PeA2rl
T7J
ir
"1'
pe
. 6 0 0 ^ -2 J t cm
= 20 428 N
[ ( 1 0 c m ) 2
( 7 c m ) 2 ]
.0.85
Hydraulic press
In confined liquids or gases, pressure is distributed Displaced volume
uniformly in all directions.
A Si = A2 s 2
Fy force on pressure piston
Work on both pistons
F force on working piston
2
Ay
A2
Sy
s2
/'
^ = F2 s 2
Ratios:
forces, areas, travel
F2 _A2
A
Example:
Fy = 200 N; Ay = 5 cm 2 ; A2 = 500 cm 2 ;
s2 = 30 mm; F2 = ?; Sy = ?; /' = ?
Fo =
s2
Transmission ratio
Ft A2 _ 200 N -500 cm 2
= 20000 N =20 kN
5 cm 2
A
30 mm 500 cm 2
= 3000 mm
5 cm 2
s,_ Fy_ _
F2
200 N 1
20000 N " 100
Pressure intensifier
Pe 1
Pel
Compressed
air
oil
Example:
\ i r
At = 200 cm ; A2 = 5 cm ; rj = 0.88;
2
ir
1
A
Circuit symbols
accord, to DIN ISO 1219-1
__ N
z
A2
cm
2
200 cm 2
0.
5 cm 2
Gage pressure
Pe2
Pel '
A
'
M2
371
Speeds, Power
Flow rates
Volume flow rate
Q =A v
QI = Q 2
Continuity equation
^
v 1 A,
~ A2
V1=A2
v2
A
Piston speeds
Extending
4k
Q
volume flow rate
A-i, A2 effective piston areas
v 2 piston speeds
Piston speed
Example:
Hydraulic cylinder with piston diameter
d-\ = 50 mm; piston rod diameter
d2 = 32 mm and Q = 12 l/min.
How high are the piston speeds?
Extending:
Q 12000 cm 3 /min _ cm _
m
= 611
= 6.11
ji (5 cm) 2
min
min
Retracting:
Q
12000 cm 3 /min
V l
~ A2 ~ tc (5 cm) 2 n (3.2 cm) 2
= 1 0 3 5 ^ = 10.35^min
min
Input power
Example:
Pump with Q = 40 l/min; p e = 125 bar; r\ = 0.84;
P 1 = ?;P 2 = ?
40^25
=
1
600
600
^ = a333 k W
rj
0.84
k w
8 > 3 3 3 | < w
9 g 2 0 k W
372
Tubes
Seamless precision steel tubes for hydraulic and pneumatic lines (selection)
Materials
Yield strength
N/mm 2
Elongation at
fracture EL
%
E235
340 to 480
235
25
E355
490 to 630
355
22
Material
Mechanical
properties
A n n l i r a t i n n1Q1 O
R \ F J P 1 I L - Q LI U
Wall
thickness
s
mm
Outside
diameter
D
mm
Wall
thickness
s
mm
Outside
diameter
D
mm
Wall
thickness
s
mm
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
10
12
12
12
14
14
14
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
18
18
18
18
0.8
1.0
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
3.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
0.05
0.01
0.10
0.07
0.13
0.07
0.28
0.20
0.13
0.50
0.39
0.28
0.79
0.64
0.50
1.13
0.95
0.79
1.33
1.13
0.79
1.54
1.13
0.79
0.64
2.01
1.77
1.54
1.13
20
20
20
20
22
22
22
22
25
25
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
28
30
30
30
30
30
35
35
35
35
35
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
3.5
1.5
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.5
6.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
5.0
6.0
2.5
3.5
4.0
5.0
6.0
2.01
1.77
1.54
1.13
3.14
2.54
2.01
1.77
3.80
3.14
2.84
2.55
2.01
1.33
4.91
4.52
3.80
3.46
3.14
5.31
4.91
4.52
3.14
2.55
7.07
6.16
5.73
4.91
4.16
38
38
38
38
38
42
42
42
50
50
50
50
50
55
55
55
55
60
60
60
60
70
70
70
70
80
80
80
80
2.5
4.0
5.0
7.0
10.0
2.0
5.0
8.0
4.0
5.0
8.0
10.0
13.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
5.0
8.0
10.0
12.5
5.0
8.0
10.0
12.5
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.5
8.55
7.07
6.16
4.52
2.55
11.34
8.04
5.31
13.85
12.57
9.08
7.07
4.52
17.35
14.52
11.95
9.62
19.64
15.21
12.57
9.62
28.27
22.90
19.64
15.90
36.32
32.17
28.27
23.76
Outside
diameter
D in mm
64
100
6
8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
10
12
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
16
20
1.5
1.5
25
30
38
50
160
250
Wall thickness s in mm
320
400
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
4.0
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
6.0
3.0
4.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
8.0
10.0
373
Programming languages
PLC programming languages (overview)
Use
Symbol
()
Initialization operator
Assignment operator (ST)
%
I or!
Real-exponent delimiter
e or E
:=
Use
Variable Meaning
B
W
D
L
Name
1)
ST %QB5 1) :
Stores current result in byte size in
output storage location 5
Operators
ADD
SUB
MUL
DIV
AND
OR
XOR
NOT
S
R
GT
GE
EQ
NE
LE
LT
Example (AWL)
Symbol Meaning
+
*
/
&
^ 1
=1
3
3)
3)
>
>=
=
<>
<=
<
addition
subtraction
multiplication
division
Boolean AND
Boolean OR
Boolean exclusive OR
negation
sets Boolean operator to "1"
sets Boolean operator to "0"
comparison: greater than
comparison: greater than or equal to
comparison: equal to
comparison: not equal to
comparison: less than or equal to
comparison: less than
Data type
Bits
BOOL
SINT
INT
DINT
LINT
REAL
LREAL
STRING
TIME
DATE
Boolean
short whole number
whole number
double whole number
long whole number
real number
long real number
variable long number sequence
duration
date
1
8
16
32
64
32
64
_4)
BYTE
WORD
DWORD
LWORD
bit
bit
bit
bit
8
16
32
64
Key word
sequence
sequence
sequence
sequence
of
of
of
of
length
length
length
length
8
16
32
64
_4)
-4)
374
Programming languages
Ladder diagram (LD)
Description
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Description
Contacts
... 1)
H I
Horizontal line
Vertical line
Line junction
Coils
-(/^
O
NO contact
logic condition "1"
...
Crossing without
connection
...
l/l
NC contact
logic condition "0"
|P|
(s)
Latching coil,
stores an operation
Unlatching coil
Blocks with
connection lines
Left power rail
... )
...
1)
|N|
- ( N ) -
Function block language consists of individual function blocks with statistical data. They are useful in implementing
frequently recurring functions.
Symbol
Description
Symbol
_ AND J
Description
OR
OR
Structured text is a high level language and builds on the syntax of ISO-PASCAL.
A: = A + B (B-C)
Statement
Type
IF
CASE
FOR
WHILE
REPEAT
EXIT
assignment
conditional statement
selection statement
repeat statement
repeat statement
repeat statement
leaving a repeated statement
B
c
ADD
or
&
F
AND
or
G
H
375
Programming languages
Instruction list (IL)
N
Operator
Label
Operand
Comment
Separates multiple.
Standard
operator
Modifier
Standard operators
Operator
Modifier
Meaning
Operator
Modifier
Meaning
LD
setting an operand
DIV
division
ST
GT
comparison: >
GE
comparison: >=
EQ
comparison: =
AND
N,(
Boolean AND
NE
comparison: <>
&
N,(
Boolean AND
LE
comparison: <=
OR
N,(
Boolean OR
LT
comparison: <
XOR
N,(
Boolean exclusive OR
JMP
C,N
jump to label
ADD
addition
CAL
C,N
SUB
subtraction
RET
C,N
jump back
MUL
multiplication
Structure of an instruction
Set solenoid Y2 back'
Label 1: R A1.2
I
Label
I
Operand
Operator
I
Comment
Operators for
signal processing
Operators for
program organization
Operators
load
AND operation
ZV
count forwards
open parenthesis
OR operation
ZR
count backwards
closed parenthesis
negation
XO
exclusive OR
UN
NAND operation
SP
unconditional jump
ON
NOR operation
input
SPB
conditional jump
assignment
output
BA
call of a block
ADD
addition
tag
BAB
SUB
subtraction
constant
BE
block end
MUL
multiplication
timer
Operand
comment beginning
DIV
division
counter
comment end
set
program block
PE
program end
reset
function block
> In practice, many more PLC controls exist which are programmed according to the VDI guidelines.
376
Programming languages
Comparison of the most commonly used PLC programming languages
Functions as
components of
programs
AND
with 3 inputs
Ell
E12
E13
A10
E11
E11
E12
8c
E13
Ell
E12
E13
A10
OR
with 3 inputs
E11
E12
A10
E11
E11
E12
M1
E13
E14
M1
A10
OR before AND
with intermediate
tag
Exclusive OR
(XOR)
RS flip-flop
Set dominant
RS flip-flop
Reset dominant
U
UN
O
>1
A10
>1
A10
E11
E12
E13
E14
A10
&
M1
E11
E12
E12
M1
>1
&
1-1-1
A10
E14
E111>
A11
E12
A11
E11
E12
S1 1
R
R1 1
t
i
E11
E12
E11
E12
E12
A10
(
A10
0
i
A11
S1 1
A12
E12
A12
R1 1
E12
A10
A12
A11
E11
A11
A12
E11
T1
T1
A10
E11
E11
M1
3E
E11
A11
T1
E11
A10
=1
E12
E12
E13
E14
E11
U
S
U
R
E12
A10
Ell
A10
A10
E13
E14
E11
U
0
UN
E12
E13
E121>
A11
Ell
A11
Ell
T1
T1
A10
l/l
E11
U
R
U
S
Turn on
delay
Latch,
ON (E 12)
dominating
E11
E12
(UN E l l
U E12)
A10
1 I
A10
-o
E12
E12
E13
E14
A10
E12 E13
E11
E13
AND before OR
Ladder diagram
(LD)
A10
A10
&
>1
E12
A10
> The following applies to flip-flops: If S = 1 and R = 1, the last function programmed in the IL dominates.
377
Technological scheme
/
?
automatic
cylinder A1
B1
single
step
cr vo
START
STOP
operating
panel
Component
designation
Address
S0/S1
E0.0/E0.1
S2
E0.2
S3
E0.3
B1-B4
E0.4-E0.7
E1.0-E1.3
B5-B8
1M1 und 1M2 A0.0/A0.1
2M1 und 2M2 A0.2/A0.3
3M1 und 3M2 A0.4/A0.5
Step chain
Network 3: Step 1
Start step
M0.2
E0.3
M0.1
EOA
M7.0
>1
&
M2.0
RS
M1.0
R1 1 b m
Network 4: Step 2
Extend cylinder A1
M0.1
RS
M0.3
&
M1.0
M2.0
M0.2
R1 1
M3.0 >1
Network 5: Step 3
Extend cylinder A2
M0.1
E0.5
&
E1.3
RS
M2.0
M3.0
M0.2
R1 1 b e n
M4.0 >1
Network 2: Basic position
E0.6
E1.0
E1.2
M0.1
Network 6: Step 4
Retract cylinder A2
T1
NO contact/
NC contact
NO contact
NC contact
NO contact
Network 7: Step 5
Retract cylinder A1
M0.1
RS
E0.6
&
M4.0
M5.0
M0.2
HZI
M6.0
Network 8: Step 6
Extend cylinder A3
M0.1
RS
E0.4
&
M5.0
M6.0
M0.2
-GH
M7.0
Network 9: Step 7
Retract cylinder A3
M0.1
E1.B
&
E1.1
RS
M6.0
M7.0
M0.2
KZI
M1.0 >1
Command output
Networks 10 to 15
M ? n AO.O
^ 4 Z I (Extend A1)
M3.0 A0.2
3 (Extend A2)
M4.0 A0.3
&
M0.3
- m
Color marking: step flag in red
Transition in blue
Remarks
(Retract A2)
^ - m
(Retract A1)
378
Robot axes
Robot auxiliary axes
for orientation
Coordinate system
To manipulate workpieces
or tools in space, the following are necessary:
3 degrees of freedom for
positioning and
3 degrees of freedom for
orientation
3 translation axes
(T axes) designated
X, Y and Z
3 rotational axes
(R-axes) designated
A, B and C
Coordinate systems
Symbol
Designation
Translation axis
(T-axis)D
Rotation axis
(R-axis)2>
Rotation
aligned
Translation aligned
(telescoping)
Translation out of
alignment
Symbol
- < l > - 0
Rotation out of
alignment
Auxiliary axis
(e.g. for roll, pitch
and yaw)
Gripper
1
Robot designs
Mechanical structure1)
Cartesian robots
TTT-Kinematics
Examples of
design types
Characteristics, areas of
application
Main axes:
3 translational
Gantry robot
Cylindrical robots
Areas of application:
large working space, therefore often in overhead
gantry
tool and workpiece feed in
production ceils
sheet processing with laser
beam and water jet cutting
palletizing
Main axes:
1 rotational
2 translational
Areas of application:
suitable for heavy masses
handling of heavy forged
and cast parts
transport of pallets
and tool cartridges
pick and place
RTT-Kinematics
CD )
Base robot
Polar robot 1
Main axes:
2 rotational
1 translational
RRT-Kinematics
Vertical
swivel arm robot
Polar robot 2
Type: SCARA3> robot
Areas of application:
telescoping type axis 3,
consequently deeper
working space
point and simple path
welding, e.g. on car bodies
pick and place with die
casting machines
Main axes:
2 rotational as horizontal
revolute joint
1 translational
RRT-Kinematics
Areas of application:
primarily in vertical
assembly area
point and simple path
welding
pick and place work
Horizontal
swivel arm robot
Articulated arm robots
RRR-Kinematics
Vertical
swivel arm robot
1)
Main axes:
3 rotational
Areas of application:
handling and
assembly area
complex path welding
painting work
adhesive bonding
low space requirement
yet large working space
Axes are designated with numbers, where axis 1 is the axis of the first motion.
R = rotational axis; T = translational axis (Designations "R" and "T" are not standardized.)
3
> SCARA = Selective Compliance Assembly Robot Arm
2)
380
mechanical
Finger grippers
Linear
grippers
pneumatic
adhesive
suction gripper
articulated finger gripper
electromagnets
permanent magnets
Jaw grippers
Clamp grippers
Scissors
grippers
Characteristics
Characteristics
Spring
loaded
Both gripper
fingers turn
about an axis
fixed in the
frame.
1 degree of
movement
Flat
gripper
Parallel
gripper
Weight
loaded
Both gripper
fingers are
pushed
parallel to
each other
opposite to
the gripper
housing.
Spatial
gripper
6 degrees of
movement
velcro fastener
gripper
Needle grippers
Characteristics
Clamping
force is created by a
spring.
Opening of
the gripper
by pressure.
Frequently
used
grippers.
3 degrees of
movement
JP
magnetic
Clamping
force created
by the own
weight of the
gripping
object.
Opening of
the gripper
by pressure.
Concepts
Explanations
Maximum
space
Area encompassing:
moving parts of robot
tool flange
workpiece
Restricted
space
Separating
safeguards
Protective
systems with
contactless
activation
area bordered by
protective fence
safety
switching mat
DIN EN 294
DIN EN 457
CSA Z 434-03
ANSI R 15.06
Automation: 7.
technology
Coordinate axes
381
CF. DIN 66217 <1975-12)
Coordinate system
Right hand rule
Lathe
Lathe tool
behind turning center
To simplify programming it is
assumed that the workpiece
remains motionless and only the
tool moves.
Example:
2-carriage lathe with programmable
main spindle
Reference points
Machine zero point M
Origin of the machine coordinate system and is set by the
machine manufacturer.
^ ^ ^
382
Automation: 7.
technology
Program structure
Tasks of the control program
Block structure
rN10
G01
X30
Y40 F150
S900
T01
M03
Explanation of words:
N10 block number 10
Positional
data
Technical
information
Prep,
function
(G function)
Block
number
Coordinates of
target point
Feed
Speed
Tool
Y40
F150
S900
T01
M03
Program structure
CNC
%01
N1 G90
N2 G96
N3 GOO
N4 G01
N5
N6 GOO
N7
program
F0.2
X20
X30
X200
M04
S180
Z2
Z-3
Z-15
Z200
M30
Preparatory functions
Prep,
functions
Effectiveness
Prep,
functions
Meaning
Effectiveness
Meaning
GOO
G53
Cancel shift
G01
Linear interpolation
G02
G54G59
Shift 1-Shift 6
G03
G74
G04
G80
G09
Exact stop
G17
Plane selection XY
G81G89
G18
Plane selection ZX
G90
G19
Plane selection YZ
G91
G33
G94
Feed rate
in mm/min
G40
G95
Feed in mm
G41
G96
G42
G97
modal:
Preparatory functions that remain effective until they are overwritten by a similar type of
condition.
non-modal:
Preparatory functions that are only effective in the block in which they are programmed.
MOO
Programmed stop
M04
Spindle counterclockwise
M07
Cooling lubricant ON
M02
Program end
M05
Spindle stop
M09
M03
Spindle clockwise
M06
Tool change
M30
Automation: 7.
technology
383
384
Automation: 7.
technology
Linear motion
Designation and machining example:
N30
X!50
Gl[>1
Linear interpolation,
machining motion in
programmed feed
Y 19
Z-8
CNC program
N...
N10
N20
19
10
0-
Pz
GOO
G01
| N30
X20
Y10
X50
Y19
Z1
ZO
(P1)
(P2)
Z - 8 | | (P3)
N...
<=>
Csl
G02
o
LTI
G02
X32
I26
Y38
Coordinates of
circle endpoint
I
I
in X
in Y
direction direction
Clockwise circular
interpolation,
machining motion
in programmed
feed
J-10.39
in X direction in Y direction
CNC program
N...
N10 G41
N20 G01 X6
N30
Y4
Y20.39
(P1)
(P2)
I26 J-10.39| (P3)
(P4)
G03
X32
18
J16.12
Coordinate of
circle endpoint
I
I
in X
in Y
direction direction
Counterclockwise
circle interpolation,
machining motion in
programmed feed
CNC program
38-
>4
P2
N...
N10 G41
N20 G01 X6
N30
P1
88
Y38
II
-j-
Y4
Y21.88
J16.12
(P1)
(P2)
(P3)
(P4)
Automation: 7.
385
technology
Linear movement
Designation and
machining example:
N20
G<di
XI50
z- 50
CNC program
N...
si
m
50
60
G02
N10
GOO
N20
N30
N40
N...
G01
X60
Z2
(P1)
(P2)
(P3)
(P4)
Z-50
X 80
X102
Z-61
G02
X100
Z-60
I20
Incremental input of
center point relative to
circle starting point
r..-tlr-^'-v
I
in X direction in Z direction
Coordinates of
circle endpoint
I
I
in X
inZ
direction direction
Clockwise circular
interpolation,
machining motion in
programmed feed
KO
CNC program
Id
P2
P1
60
G03
.40
N...
N10
N20
GOO
G01
X60
Z2
Z-40
| N30
G02
X100
Z-60
N40
N...
G01
X110
(P1)
(P2)
I20
KO | (P3)
(P4)
G03
Counterclockwise
circle interpolation,
machining motion in
programmed feed
X90
Z-55
10
K-15
Incremental input of
center point relative to
circle starting point
1
i
in X direction in Z direction
Coordinates of
circle endpoint
I
I
in X
inZ
direction direction
CNC program
N...
N10
N20
N30
G01
G03
G01
XO
X60
ZO
Z-11.46
Z-40
10
K-45
(PI)
(P2)
(P3)
N40
G03
X90
Z-55
10
K-15
(P4)
N...
386
Automation: 7.
technology
Milling
NC program
NC program
N10...
N15G90
N20...
N25G1 X68Z-16 ;P2
N30G1 XI31 ZI-54 ;P3
N35...
N10...
N15 G42
N20G0 X...
;P2
N25 G1 X72
N30G1 XI-17 YI57 ;P3
N35...
55 72
NC program
NC program
N10...
N15G91
N20...
N25G1 X68Z-16
;P2
N30G1 XA130 ZA-70 ;P3
N35...
N10...
N15G42 GO X-16Y18
N20 G91
;P2
N25G1 X88
N30G1 XA55YA78 ;P3
N35...
NC program
16 0
N10...
N15
N20...
N25G1 X60Z-16
N30 AS150X130
N35...
|AS|
m '
18
;P2
;P3
120
P2
38
NC program
N10...
N15G42
N20G0 X... Y18
N25G1 X72
;P2
N30 G1 |AS120 X38 ;P3
N35...
72
^
^ ^
[as]
140 y^
P1\
m
80
P2]
BR v
1Hjr+X vo
1 A.
^
\mjTz
NC program
NC program
N10...
N15G90
N20...
N25G1 X60Z-16 ;P2
N30G1 AS 140 Z-80 ;P3
N35...
N10...
N15G42
N20G0 X... Y18
;P2
N25 G1 X50
N30G1 AS65Y66 ;P3
N35...
16 0
Transition elements radius RN+ and phase RNThe radius RN+ and the phase RN- are transition elements be tween two contour elements (circles, straight lines)
10x45
90 74
1)
30
NC program
N10...
N15G90
N20 GO X48 ZO
N25G1 Z-30 RN-10
N30G1 X82
N35G1 Z-74 |RN+30
N40G1 X140Z-90
NC program
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
N10...
N15G42
N20 GO X... Y18
N25 G1 X75IRN-23I
;P2
N30 G1 X60 Y80[RN+12|;P3
N35...
Priifungsaufgaben- und Lehrmittelentwicklungsstelle (PAL) (Institute for the development of training and testing material)
Automation: 7.
387
technology
Milling
Block structure:
G90
G1 X.. Z..
G2 X.. Z..
G90
G1 X..
G2 X..
;P2
IA.. KA.. ;P3
Z..
Z..
;P2
IA.. JA.. ;P3
NC program
NC program
70
N10 ...
N15G90
N20 GO X38 Z4
;P1
;P2
N25G1 Z-40
N30 G2 X98 Z-70 IA49| KA-40|;P3
N35 ...
40
29
D3 m
m
+Y-
it
40
N10 ...
N15G90
;P1
N20G0 X... Y9
N25 G1 X40
;P2
N30 G3 X60 Y29 |lA40|| JA29 |;P3
N35 ...
P3
60
or:
G1 X.. Z..
G2 X.. Z.. R+..
Block structure:
Block structure:
Block structure:
Block structure:
G1 X.. Z..
;P2
G2 X.. Z.. R.. 0.. ;P3
;P2
;P3
NC program
or:
G1 X.. Z..
G2 X.. Z.. R-..
;P2
;P3
NC program
longer arc
N10 ...
N15G90
N20...
;P2
N25G1 X12Y15
N30G2X66Y15 R26 [ a^ ;P3
or:
N30G2X66Y15 R026
;P3
N10 ...
N15G90
N20...
;P2
N25G1 X70 Z-25
N30G2X100Z-70 R26 |0 l] ;P3
or:
N30G2X100Z-70 R026 ;P3
Selection of the start angle using the address H
Block structure:
Block structure:
G1 X.. Z..
;P2
G2 Z.. R.. AO.. H.. ;P3
G90
G1 X.. Z..
;P2
G2 X.. R.. AO.. H.. ;P3
[Rj]
larger
NC program
NC program
ascent angle
N10 ...
N15G90
N20...
N25G1X50Z-18
;P2
N30 G2 Z-55 R26 A0115 [Hi] ;P3
N10 ...
N15G90
N20...
;P2
N25G1 X30 Y26
N30 G2 Z62 R26 A0115 H2 ;P3
Block structure:
G1 X.. Z..
G61 AS..
G1 X.. Z..
G62 AS.. R..
N15 ...
N20G1 X40Z-20 ;P1
N20 G61 AS210
;P2
N30 G62 Z-72 R+26 ;P3
>P3 / 2 1 0 ^
/Wo
^ S P1 j
o
_jiiiir
+ X k
-Ji
J"P2
-TTz
72
20
0
388
Automation: 7.
technology
XI, Yl, Zl
IA, KA
Absolute input of the interpolation parameters relative to the workpiece zero point
TC
TR
Incremental tool radius or cutting edge offset in the selected offset memory
TL
TZ
Incremental tool length offset in Z direction in the selected offset memory (turning)
TX
M17
M14
M60
Constant feed
M15
M61
Cutter compensation
GO
Rapid travel/motion
Linear interpolation with feed rate
Circular interpolation, clockwise
Circular interpolation, counter clockwise
Dwell time
Exact stop
G40
G41
G92
G94
G95
G96
G97
G1
G2
G3
G4
G9
G14
G61
G62
G63
G42
Reference points
Program features
G50
G22
G23
G53
G29
Conditional jumps
G54G57
G59
Dimensions
G70
G71
G90
G91
Cycles
G31
G32
G33
G80
G81
G82
G83
G84
G85
G86
G87
G88
G89
Thread cycle
Tapping cycle
Thread chasing cycle
Completion of a machining cycle contour
description
Longitudinal rough-turning cycle
Rough facing cycle
Rough-turning cycle parallel to the contour
Drilling cycle
Undercut cycle
Radial grooving cycle
Radial contour cutting cycle
Axial grooving cycle
Axial contour cutting cycle
Automation: 7.
389
technology
Structure of NC block
G22 L [H] [/]
Obligatory addresses:
L
number of the
sub program
Machining example
Optional addresses:
H
number of
repetitions
/
extract level
G23
Structure of NC block
G23 N N [H]
Obligatory addresses:
N start block number of the program section to
be repeated
N end block number of the program section to
be repeated
Optional addresses:
H
number of repetitions
G14
Machining example
N10..
N15G0 X58 Z-15 M4
N20 G91
N25G1 X-11
N30G1 X11
N35G0Z-16
N40 G23 N20 N35 H2
N45 G90
N50 ...
Structure of NC block
G14 [H]
H1_
Optional addresses:
HO travel to tool change point simultaneously in all axes
H1 first X axis, then Z axis H2 first Z axis, then X axis
H2
Drilling cycle
Structure of NC block
G84 ZI/ZA [D] [V] [VB] [DR] [DM] [R] [DA] [U] [O] [FR] [E]
VB
>-
Obligatory addresses:
/
E?
Zl depth of hole, incremental depth relative to the current tool position
\
\
ZA depth of hole, absolute depth
Optional addresses (selection):
ZA
D pecking amount
Zl
(if D is not specified, pecking depth is
Machining example
equal to the final drilling depth)
35
27
31
V
safety distance
VB safety distance to the hole bottom
DR reduction value of the pecking amount
DM minimum infeed
K
R retract level/distance
DA spot-drilling depth
U dwell time at hole bottom
130
20
0
dwell time selection
01 in seconds
N10 G90
02 in revolutions
N15 G84 Z-130 D30 V5 VB1 DR4 U0.5
FR rapid travel reduction in %
N20..
E spot-drilling feed
k+X
uL
V Tz
V
I F
G32
Tapping cycle
Structure of NC block
G32 Z/ZI/ZA F
Obligatory addresses:
Z, Zl, ZA thread end point in
Z direction
I incremental, A absolute
F
pitch of thread
Machining
example
35
M20x3.5/45
2.5
Zl
N10 G90
N15 G32 Z-35 F2,5 S.. M..
390
Thread cycle
Structure of NC block
G31 Z/ZI/ZA X/XI/XA F D [ZS] [XS]
[DA] [DU] [Q] [O] [H]
Obligatory addresses:
Z, Zl, ZA thread end point in Z direction
Z controlled by G90/G91;
I incremental, A absolute
X, XI, Zl thread end point in X direction;
X controlled by G90/G91,
I incremental, A absolute
F
thread pitch
D
thread depth
Optional addresses [..]:
ZS thread starting point, absolute in Z
XS thread starting point, absolute in X
DA approach
DU overrun
Q number of cuts
O number of idle cycles
H selection of infeed type and residual cuts (RC)
H1 without offset (radial infeed), RC OFF
H2 infeed at left flank, RC OFF
H3 infeed at right flank, RC OFF
H4 alternating infeed, RC OFF
H11 without offset (radial infeed), RC ON
H12 infeed at left flank, RC ON
H13 infeed at right flank, RC ON
H14 alternating infeed, RC ON
Residual cuts Vi, 1 A, 1/s, Vs x (D/Q)
G81
Radial
infeed
HI/H11
Flank
infeed
left H2/H12
0
Flank
infeed
right H3/H13
0
Alternating
infeed
H4/H14
Machining example
N10 G90
N15 G31 Z-40 X30 F3.5 D2.15 ZS-10 XS30 Q12 013 H14
N20 ..
G82
Structure of NC block
G81 (or G82) H4 [AK] [AZ] [AX] [AE]
[AS] [AV] [O] [Q] [V] [E]
or
G81 (or G82) D [H1/H2/H3/H24]
Obligatory addresses:
D
infeed
Optional addresses [..]:
H type of machining
Longitudinal rough turning
Rough facing cycle with G82
cycle with G81
H1 rough machining, removal below 45
H2 stepwise angle-cutting along the contour
Machining example: longitudinal rough-machining cycle
H3 like H1 with final contour cut
=o.P9
H4 contour finishing
H24 rough-machining with H2 and subsequent
finishing
AK contour allowance parallel to the contour
AZ contour allowance in Z direction
AX contour allowance in X direction
AE immersion angle (final angle of the tool)
20 0 3
170
125 110
77 55
AS emergence angle (lateral adjustment angle of tool)
AV safety angle reduction for AE and AS
O machining starting point
N10
01: current tool position
N15 G81 D3 H3 E0.15 AZ0.1 AX0.5
02: calculated from contour
P1
N20 X44Z3
Q idle step optimization
P2
N25 G1 Z-20
Q1: optimization OFF
N30 G1 Z-55 AS135 RN20
P3
Q2: optimization ON
P4
N35 G1 Z-77 AS 180
N40 G1 Z-110X64
P5
V safety distance for idle step optimization
G81: in Z direction
P6
N45 AS 180
G82: in X direction
P7
N50 AS110 X88 Z-125
immersion feed
N55 AS 180
P8
P9
N60 AS130 X136 Z-170
N65 G80
Automation: 7.
technology
391
G88
Structure NC block
G86 Z/ZI/ZA X/XI/XA ET [EB] [D] [..] (selection)
G88 Z/ZI/ZA X/XI/XA ET [EB] [D] [..] (selection)
Obligatory addresses:
Z, Zl, ZA grooving position in Z direction;
Z controlled by G90/G91,
Zl incremental, ZA absolute
X, XI, XA grooving position in X direction;
X controlled by G90/G91,
XI incremental, XA absolute
ET G86 absolute diameter of grooving depth
G88 absolute grooving depth
Optional addresses [..]:
EB grooving width and position
EB+ grooving in direction Z+ relative to the
programmed grooving position P
EB- grooving in direction Z - relative to the
programmed grooving position P
D pecking amount (if no value is specified, the
pecking depth is equal to the groove depth ET)
AS flank angle of grooving at the starting point
relative to the grooving direction (X or Z)
Radial grooving cycle with G86 Axial grooving cycle with G88
AE flank angle of grooving at the end point
relative to the grooving direction (X or Z)
RO rounding or chamfering of upper corners
R0+ rounding
RO- chamfer width
Machining example: radial grooving cycle with G86:
RU rounding or chamfering of lower corners
RU+ rounding
RU- chamfer width
AK contour allowance parallel to the contour
AX contour allowance in X direction (contour offset)
EP setpoint definition for groove cutting (position P)
EP1: setpoint in upper corner of the groove
EP2: setpoint in bottom corner of the groove
H type of processing
H1 roughing cut H14 roughing and finishing
H2 plunge turning H24 plunge turning and finishing
H4 finishing
DB infeed in % of the cutting tool width for grooving
N10G0 X82 Z-32
V
safety distance above groove
N35 G86 Z-30 X80 ET48 EB20 D4 AS10 AE10 RO-2.5 RU2 H14
E
feed rate into solid material
G85
Structure of NC block
Thread undercuts acc. to DIN 76 Undercuts acc. to DIN 509
G85 Z/ZI/ZA X/XI/XA l/[l] K[K] [RN] [SX] [H] [E]
Obligatory addresses:
RN
,^30 "
Z, Zl, ZA undercut position in Z direction;
Z controlled by G90/G91,
Zl incremental, ZA absolute
outside
X, XI, XA undercut position in X direction;
Machining process with DIN 76
X controlled by G90/G91,
0.2
XI incremental, XA absolute
shapeF
I
undercut depth; obligatory parameter for DIN 76 (H1)
K
undercut length; obligatory parameter for DIN 76 (H1)
Optional addresses [..]:
RN corner radius
SX grinding allowance
N10G0..
E
feed rate for plunging
N15G85 ZA-18 XA16 11.5 K5 RN1 SX0.2 H1 E0.15
H
undercut shape
H1 DIN 76 H2 DIN 509 E H2 DIN 509 F
Further information on p. 89 and p. 92
G80
Structure of NC block Optional addresses [..]: ZA absolute Z-coordinate of the machining limit parallel to the X axis
G80 [ZA] [XA]
XA absolute Z-coordinate of the machining limit parallel to the Z axis
392
Automation: 7.
technology
Tool offsets
GO
Rapid motion
G40
G1
G2
G41G42
G3
G4
Dwell time
G94
G9
Exact stop
G95
G10
G96
Gil
G97
G12
Program features
G13
G45
G46
G47
G48
G61
G62
G63
G53
G54G57
G58
G22
G23
G29
Conditional jumps
Fixed cycles
G34
G35
G36
G37
G38
G80
G39
G72
G73
G74
G75
G81
Drilling cycle
G82
G59
G83
G84
Tapping cycle
G66
G85
Reaming cycle
G67
G86
Boring cycle
G87
G88
G17G19
G89
G76
G70
G77
G71
G78
G90
G79
G91
Automation: 7.
393
technology
Structure of NC block
G1 [X/XI/XA] [Y/YI/YA] [Z/ZI/ZA] [D] [AS] .. (selection)
Obligatory addresses:
X, XI, XA X coordinate of the target point
Y, Yl, YA Y coordinate of the target point
Z, Zl, ZA Z coordinate of the target point
Machining example
N10 ...
N15G1 X74Y16RN-12
;P2
N20 G1 D65 AS 120 RN+14 ;P3
Structure of NC block
G11 RP AP/AI [J/JA] [Z/ZI/ZA] [RN] .. (Auswahl)
Obligatory addresses:
RP polar radius
AP polar angle relative to the positive X axis
Al incremental polar angle
Optional addresses [..]:
I, IA
X coordinate of the polar center
J,JA
Y coordinate of the polar center
Z, Zl, ZA infeed in Z direction
RN transition to the next contour element
RN+ rounding radius RN-chamfer width
TC selection of the offset memory number
TR incremental change of the tool radius value
TL incremental change of the tool length offset
G2/G3
74
Machining example
P3
JA
hJr
IA
P2
P3
P4
P5
P2
Structure of NC block
G2 [X/XI/XA] [Y/YI/YA] [Z/ZI/ZA] ((l/IA [J/JA]) /
([l/lAj J/JA) / R / AO [RN] [O] [F] [S] [M]
G3 [X/XI/XA]
Machining example
shorter
arc (01)
N10...
N15G1 X38Y70RN+15
;P2
N20 G3 XA80 R30 A0135 RN-8 02 ;P3
Structure of NC block
G12 AP/AI [l/lA] [J/JA] [Z/ZI/ZA] [RN] [F] [S] [M]
G13 AP/AI [l/lA] [J/JA] [Z/ZI/ZA] [RN] [F] [S] [M]
Obligatory addresses:
AP polar angle of target point
Al incremental polar angle
Optional addresses [...]:
I, IA X coordinate of polar center
J, JA Y coordinate of the polar center
RN+ rounding radius RN- chamfer width
PU
JA
Machining
example
^/AP)
0
+Y'
i tx
IA
45
N15G1X60Y15
;P2
N20 G12 IA45 JA45 AP50 ;P3
394
Automation: 7.
technology
G46
Structure of NC block
G41/G42 G45 D [X/XI/XA] [Y/YI/YA] [Z/ZI/ZA]
[W] [E] [F] [S] [M]
G46G40D [Z/ZI/ZA] [W] [F] [S] [M]
Machining example
Obligatory addresses:
with G45: D distance to the first contour point,
unsigned
with G46: D length of the retracting motion,
unsigned
Optional addresses [..]:
X, XI, XA X coordinate of the first contour point
Y, Yl, YA Y coordinate of the first contour point
Z, Zl, ZA with G45: infeed at approach point in the Z axis
with G46: retracting motion at the end point
in the Z axis
W absolute position in fast motion in the infeed axis
E
feed rate for plunging
G47
G48
N10...
N15G42 G45 XO Y8 D13
N20 G1 X50
N25G1 Y40 AS80
N30 G40 G46D13
;P1
;P2
;P3
;P4
Structure of NC block
G41/G42 G47 R [X/XI/XA] [Y/YI/YA] [Z/ZI/ZA]
(W] [E] [F] [S] [M]
G48G40 R [Z/ZI/ZA] [W] [F] [S] [M]
Machining
example
Obligatory addresses:
with G47: R radius of the approach motion relative
to the center path of the cutter
with G48: R
;P1
;P2
;P3
;P4
Structure of NC block
G54 or G55 or G56 or G57
Explanatory notes:
The workpiece zero point W is determined by the
commands G54 to G57 and has a defined distance to
the machine zero point. The operator enters the shift
values into the zero point register of the controller
before starting the program. The zero point is always
specified in absolute coordinates (XA, YA, ZA) relative
to the machine zero point.
G59
N10 ...
N15G42 G47 XO Y8 R13
N20 G1 X50
N25G1 Y40 AS80
N30 G40 G48R13
workpiece
zero point W
machine
zero point M
Structure of NC block
G59 [XA] [YA] [ZA] [AR]
workpiece
zero point W2
machine
3 .
zero point M j
*x
i
\
L> / I
'+X'
XA
workpiece
zero point W1
N10 ..
N15G54
;W1
N20 G59 X20 Y40 Z30 AR45 ;W2
Automation: 7.
395
technology
Drilling cycle
Structure of NC block
G81 ZI/ZA V [W] [F] [S] [M]
Obligatory addresses:
Zl depth of bore in the feed axis
ZA absolute depth of bore relative to the
coordinate system of the workpiece
V
safety distance from the top edge of
the hole
Optional addresses [..]:
W retract level relative to the coordinate
system of the workpiece
G82
Machining example
GO rapid
motion
G1 feed
ZA
XI/YI
Zl
XI/YI
G83
N10 ...
N15 G81 ZI-18 V6 W15
N20G79X.. Y.. Z.. ;cycle call
Tapping cycle
Structure of NC block
G84 ZI/ZA F M V [W] [S]
G1 feed
Obligatory addresses:
Zl incremental depth from the top edge of the hole
ZA absolute depth in workpiece coordinates
F
thread pitch
M direction of tool rotation for plunging
M3 right-hand thread M4 left-hand thread
V
safety distance to the top edge of the hole
Optional addresses [..]:
W retract level relative to the coordinate
system of the workpiece
G85
Reaming cycle
Structure of NC block
G85 ZI/ZA [W] [E] [F] [S] [M]
Obligatory addresses:
ZI/ZA drilling depth in the infeed axis
Zl incremental depth from the top edge of the hole
ZA absolute depth in workpiece coordinates
V
safety distance from the top edge of the hole
Optional addresses [..]:
W retract level relative to the coordinate
system of the workpiece
E
feed speed of the retracting motion
r i
reaming
feed
Machining
example ZA
XI/YI
N10 ...
N15G85 ZI-17 V3 W8 E260
G79X.. Y.. Z.. ;cycle call
396
Automation: 7.
technology
Boring cycle
Structure of NC block
G86 ZI/ZA V [W] [DR] [F] [S] [M]
Machining example
Obligatory addresses:
ZI/ZA depth to be bored out
Zl
depth of bore in the infeed axis
ZA
absolute depth of bore relative to the coordinate
system of the workpiece
V
safety distance from the top edge of the hole
ZA
XA/YAi i
-a
W
;DRZl
XA/YA
EZ
XI/
Yl
N10 ...
N15G86ZI-9 V2 W10 DR2
N20 G79 X.. Y.. Z.. ;cycle call
Machining example
Xl/
ZA
ft XA/YA
Yl
(OJ
BG2
N10...
N15 G87 ZI-8,5 R10.92 D3 V3 W13 D3 BG2
N20G79X.. Y.. Z.. ;cycle call
Structure of NC block
G88 ZI/ZA DN D Q V [W] [BG] [F] [S] [M]
Obligatory addresses:
ZI/ZA depth of thread
Zl
incremental depth of thread from the top edge
ZA
absolute depth of thread relative to the
coordinate system of the workpiece
DN
nominal diameter of the internal thread
D
thread pitch
Q
number of thread grooves of the tool
V
safety distance from the top edge of the hole
Optional addresses [..]:
W
retract level relative to the
coordinate system of the workpiece
BG2 machining, clockwise
BG3 machining, counter clockwise
G89
&
119
Structure of NC block
G87 ZI/ZA R D V [W] [BG] [F] [S] [Ml
Obligatory addresses:
ZI/ZA depth of hole to be bored out
Zl
incremental depth from the top edge
absolute depth of bore relative to the
ZA
coordinate system of the workpiece
radius of the hole to be milled out
R
infeed per helical line
D
(pitch of the helical motion)
safety distance from the top edge of the hole
V
G88
ZA Zl
10
2 T Zl
Mzsi
>
ZA
Machining example
rfn
M24x2
N10...
N15 G88 ZA-16 DN24 D2 Q7 V1.5 W10 BG3 F..
N20 G79 X.. Y.. Z.. ;cycle call
Structure of NC block
G89 ZI/ZA DN D Q V [W] (BG] [F] [S] [M]
Obligatory addresses:
Zl
incremental depth of thread from the top edge
ZA absolute depth of thread relative to the
coordinate system of the workpiece
DN nominal diameter of the external thread
D
thread pitch
Q
number of thread grooves of the tool
V
safety distance to the top edge of the hole
Optional addresses [..]:
W
retract level
BG2 machining, clockwise
BG3 machining, counter clockwise
Machining example
ZA
XA/YAtq
IJ]L
XA/YA i : 3 r
13
Zl
8M0/YI
3-M20x1,5
BG3 +018.16
N10 ...
N15 G89 ZI-8 DN18.16 D1.5 07 V5 W13 BG3 F..
N20G79X.. Y.. Z.. ;cycle call
Automation: 7.
397
technology
Structure of NC block
G72 ZI/ZA LP BP D V [W] [RN] [AK] [AL] [EP]
[DB] [RH] [DH] [O] [Q] [H] [E] [F] [S] [M]
Machining example
Obligatory addresses:
ZI/ZA depth of the circular pocket in the infeed axis
Zl
incremental from the top edge of the pocket
ZA
absolute, relative to the coordinate system of
the workpiece
LP
length of the rectangular pocket in X direction
BP
width of the rectangular pocket in Y direction
D
maximum depth of cut
V
safety distance to the material surface
Optional addresses [..]:
AK
pocket edge finish allowance
AL
pocket bottom finish allowance
RN
corner radius
EPO, EP1, EP2, EP3 definition of the setpoint at cycle call
W
retract level, in fast motion
H
type of machining
H1 rough machining H4 finishing
H2 face roughing of the rectangular surface
H14 rough-machining and finishing with the same tool
E
feed rate for plunging
G73
Structure of NC block
G73 ZI/ZA R D V [W] [RZ] [AK] [AL] [DB]
[RH] [DH] [O] [Q] [H] [E] [F] [S] [M]
Obligatory addresses:
ZI/ZA depth of circular pocket in the feed axis
Zl
incremental from the top edge of the pocket
ZA
absolute, relative to the coordinate system
of the workpiece
D
maximum depth of cut
V
safety distance to the material surface
Optional addresses [..]:
RZ
radius of the optional spigot
AK
pocket edge finish allowance
AL
pocket bottom finish allowance
DB
cutter path overlap in %
W
retract level, in fast motion
H - E as with G72
G74
Machining example
+Y
Structure of NC block
G74 ZI/ZA R D V [W] [RZ] [AK] [AL] [DB]
[RH] [DH] [01 [Q] [H] [E] [F] [S] [M]
Obligatory addresses:
ZI/ZA depth of the slot in the infeed axis
Zl
incremental from the top edge of the slot
ZA
absolute, relative to the coordinate system of
the workpiece
LP
slot length
BP slot width
D
maximum depth of cut
V
safety distance
Machining
example
+Z
J
50
398
Automation: 7.
technology
Structure of NC block
G75 ZI/ZA BP RP AN/AO AO/AP D V (W] (AK] (AL]
[EP] [O] [Q] [H] [E] [F] [S] [M]
Obligatory addresses:
ZI/ZA slot depth
Zl incremental from the top edge of the slot
ZA absolute depth
BP slot width
RP slot radius
AN polar start angle relative to the positive X axis and the
center point of the slot's first end radius
AO polar aperture angle between the center points of the slot's
end radii
AP polar final angle relative to the positive X axis and the
center point of the slot's second end radius
Machining example
(only 2 of the 3 polar angles need to be defined)
D
maximum depth of cut
V
safety distance
Optional addresses [..]:
EP definition of the calling point for the slot cycle
EPO center of the circular slot
EP1 center of the right or top semicircle at the rear end
EP3 center of the left or bottom semicircle at the rear end
W retract level, in fast motion
AK slot edge finish allowance
AL slot bottom finish allowance
Q direction of motion
01 climb milling
02 conventional milling
H
type of machining
H1 rough machining
H4 finishing
N15 G75 ZA-15 BP12 RP80 AN70 A0120 AK0.3 AL0.5 EP3 D5 V3 W6
H14 rough machining and finishing
N20 G79 X64 Y30 ;cycle call for G75 at EP3
feed rate for plunging
G76
Structure of NC block
G76 [X/XI/XA] [Y/YI/YA] [Z/ZI/ZA] AS D O [AR] [W] [H]
Obligatory addresses:
AS angle of the straight line relative to the first geometry axis
+ counter clockwise
- clockwise
D
spacing of the cycle calls on the line
O
number of cycle calls on the line
Optional addresses [..]:
X, XI, XA X coordinate of the first point
X absolute or incremental X coordinate (G90, G91)
XI difference in coordinates between the current tool
Machining example
position and the first point on the line
longitudinal slot with G74
XA absolute coordinate input of the starting point
Y, Yl, YA Y coordinate of the first point
Y
absolute or incremental Y coordinate (G90, G91)
Yl difference in coordinates between the current tool
position and the first point on the line
YA absolute coordinate input of the starting point
Z, Zl, ZA Z coordinate of the first point
181
Z
absolute or incremental Z coordinate (G90, G91)
+x
Zl
difference in coordinates between the current tool
126
-o
position and the first point on the line
ZA absolute coordinate input of the starting point
N15 G74 ZA-5 LP34 BP20.... /definition of longitudinal slot with
AR angle of rotation relative to the positive X axis
G74 N20 G76 X126 Y18 ZO AS120 D42 03 AR-30 ;cycle call
W retract level, absolute
H
reversing position
H1 tool travels to safety distance between two positions and to
the retract level after the last position
H2 tool travels to the retract level between two positions
Automation: 7.
399
technology
Structure of NC block
G77 [l/lA] [J/JA] [Z/ZI/ZA] R AN/AI AI/AP O [AR] [W] [H] [FP]
Obligatory addresses:
R
radius of pitch circle
AN polar angle of first object
Al constant segment angle
AP polar angle of last object
O number of objects on the pitch circle
Optional addresses [..]:
difference in X coordinates between the circle center and the starting point
I
IA absolute X coordinate of the circle center
Machining example
J
difference in Y coordinates between the circle center and the starting point
JA absolute Y coordinate of the circle center
Z
absolute or incremental input via G90/G91
Zl difference in Z coordinates between the current tool position and the
pitch circle center
ZA absolute coordinate of the target point
AR angle of rotation in direction of the positive first geometry axis
Q orientation of the object to be processed
01 forced rotation of the object 02 fixed orientation of the object
W retract level, absolute
H retracting motion
H1 the tool travels to the safety distance V after completion
of the machining process
H2 the tool travels to the retract level W
after completion of the machining process
N15 G74 ZA-5 LP34 BP20 .... longitudinal slot with G74
H3 like H1, but the tool travels to the next position
N20 G77 R40 AN-65 AI60 AR40 05 IA80 JA60 ;cycle call
on the pitch arc
G78
Structure of NC block
G78 [l/lA] [J/JA] RP AP [Z/ZI/ZA] [AR] [W]
Obligatory addresses:
I, IA X coordinate of the center of rotation
J, JA Y coordinate of the center of rotation
RP radius of the rotation circle
AP angle of rotation relative to the X axis
Optional addresses [..]:
Z, Zl, ZA Z coordinate of the top edge
AR angle of rotation of the object
relative to the X axis
W retract level
G79
Machining example
^ A R
.; l A
Y>
Mr x
IA
T
t
}
rx^s
Structure of NC block
G79 [X/XI/XA] [Y/YI/YA] [Z/ZI/ZA] [AR] [W]
Optional addresses [..]:
X, XI, XA X coordinate of the first point
Y, Yl, YA Y coordinate of the first point
Z, Zl, ZA Z coordinate of the first point
AR angle of rotation of the object relative to the X axis
W retract level, absolute in workpiece coordinates
G61
Machining
example
Structure of NC block
G61 [XI/XA] [YI/YA] [Z/ZI/ZA] [D] [AT] [AS] [RN] [H] [O]
Optional addresses [..]:
XI, XA
X coordinate of the target point
Yl, YA
Y coordinate of the target point
Z, Zl, ZA infeed in the Z axis
D
travelling distance AT transition angle
AS ascent angle relative to the X axis
RN+ rounding radius
R- chamfer width
H1 small ascent angle H2 larger ascent angle
01 short distance
02 longer distance
400
Automation: 7.
technology
Structure of NC block
G35 T D [V] [TC] [TR] [TL] [DM] [DB]
[RH] [DH] [O] [Q] [E] [F] [S] [M]
G36
Structure of NC block
G36 T D [V] [TC] [TR] [TL] [DM] [DB]
[RH] [DH] [O] [Q] [E] [F] [S] [M]
G37
-AP \
\
AS P1,
y
AT
ir
N15G1 X... Y...
;P1
N20 G63 R+40 AS-45 RN15 ;P2
N25 G61 Y75 AS130
;P3
G35
Machining example
Structure of NC block
G37 T D [V] [TC] [TR] [TL] [DB] [RH]
[DH] [O] [Q] [H] [E] [F] [S] [M]
Machining example
P4/P5
pocket
island
N5 G54
N10 T1 M.. G97 S.. G94 F..
G80
401
Numbering systems
Decimal system
Base 10
Numbers: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Decimal number n 1 0
205
i
2
Place value
Value
2100 =
Total
value
/i10 =
200
(decimal)
TT
200
10 = 10
10= 1
0-10 = 0
5-1=5
H-
Numbers: 0, 1
1010
10 = 100
Base 2
Binary number n2
23 = 8
Place value
= 205
22 = 4
21 = 2
2= 1
Value
1-8 = 8 0-4 = 0 1-2 = 2 0 - 1 = 0
Total
value
/?i o = 8
f
0
-h 2 H- 0
= 10
(decimal)
Place value
161 = 16
Number value
16 = 1
Value
10-256 = 2560 2-16 = 32 1 5 - 1 = 1 5
Total
value
/7 10 =
2560
h
32
-h
15
= 2607 Binary number n2
(decimal)
I
I
A2F
-TTL
10
15
1010
0010
I
1111
10100010 1111
CD
5
*-
w
'
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
U
0
n
u
1
n
U
16
10
17
11
18
12
19
13
20
14
21
15
22
16
23
17
24
18
25
19
26
1A
27
1B
28
1C
29
1D
30
1E
31
1F
32
20
33
21
34
22
35
23
36
24
37
25
38
26
39
27
40
28
41
29
42
2A
43
2B
44
2C
45
2D
46
2E
47
2F
b2 <>1
be b t 6 bs b4
1st tetrad
2nd tetrad No.
0
n
u
1
I
1 0
1 0
n
u
n
u
n
u
n
u
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
"10
"16
00
1
01
2
02
3
03
4
04
5
05
6
06
7
07
8
08
9
09
10
OA
11
0B
12
OC
13
0D
14
0E
15
OF
n
u
n
u
n
u
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
\
n
n
1
1
0
1
0
0
U
u
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
Bit pattern (binary numbers) } r
Decimal numbers and hexadecimal numb ers
48 64 80
96 112 128 144 160 r 6 192
60 70 80 90 AO B0 CO
30 40 50
97 113 129 145 161 i ; 1 193
49 65 81
31 41 51
61 71 81 91 A1 B1 C1
50 66 82
98 114 130 146 162 1 J 8 194
32 42 52
62 72 82 92 A2 B2 C2
99 115 131 147 163 179 195
51 67 83
33 43 53
63 73 83 93 A3 B3 C3
52 68 84 100 116 132 148 164 180 196
34 44 54
64 74 84 94 A4 B4 C4
53 69 85 101 117 133 149 165 181 197
35 45 55
65 75 85 95 A5 B5 C5
54 70 86 102 118 134 150 166 182 198
66 76 86 96 A6 B6 C6
36 46 56
55 71 87 103 119 135 151 167 183 199
37 47 57
67 77 87 97 A7 B7 C7
56 72 88 104 120 136 152 168 184 200
38 48 58
68 78 88 98 A8 B8 C8
57 73 89 105 121 137 153 169 185 201
39 49 59
69 79 89 99 A9 B9 C9
58 74 90 106 122 138 154 170 186 202
3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A AA BA CA
59 75 91 107 123 139 155 171 187 203
3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B AB BB CB
60 76 92 108 124 140 156 172 188 204
3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C 9C AC BC CC
61 77 93 109 125 141 157 173 189 205
3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D 9D AD BD CD
62 78 94 110 126 142 158 174 190 206
3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E 9E AE BE CE
63 79 95 111 127 143 159 175 191 207
3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F 9F AF BF CF
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
208
DO
209
D1
210
D2
211
D3
212
D4
213
D5
214
D6
215
D7
216
D8
217
D9
218
DA
219
DB
220
DC
221
DD
222
DE
223
DF
224
E0
225
E1
226
E2
227
E3
228
E4
229
E5
230
E6
231
E7
232
E8
233
E9
234
EA
235
EB
236
EC
237
ED
238
EE
239
EF
240
F0
241
F1
242
F2
243
F3
244
F4
245
F5
246
F6
247
F7
248
F8
249
F9
250
FA
251
FB
252
FC
253
FD
254
FE
255
FF
Example of reading from table: Binary number n 2 = 10110010 corresponds to decimal number n 1 0 = 178 or hexadecimal number n-16 = B2.
402
ASCII code1)
7-Bit ASCII Code
Dec Hex Char.
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 A
11 B
12 C
13 D
14 E
15 F
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
OS
RS
US
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
SP
!
a
%
&
(
)
+
i
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
i
<
>
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
w
X
Y
z
[
\
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
\
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
I
m
n
0
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
P
q
r
s
t
u
V
w
X
y
z
{
I
}
~
DEL
Char.
Name
Dec
Char.
0
1
2
3
4
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
NULL
START OF HEADING
START OF TEXT
END OF TEXT
END OF TRANSMISSION
17
18
19
20
21
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
DEVICE CONTROL 1
DEVICE CONTROL 2
DEVICE CONTROL 3
DEVICE CONTROL 4
NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE
5
6
7
8
9
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
ENQUIRY
ACKNOWLEDGE
BELL
BACKSPACE
HORIZONTAL TABULATION
22
23
SYN
ETB
SYNCHRONOUS IDLE
END OF TRANSMISSION BLOCK
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
LINE FEED
VERTICAL TABULATION
FORM FEED
CARRIAGE RETURN
SHIFT-OUT
SHIFT-IN
DATA LINK ESCAPE
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
CANCEL
END OF MEDIUM
SUBSTITUTE CHARACTER
ESCAPE
FILE SEPERATOR
GROUP SEPERATOR
RECORD SEPERATOR
31
32
127
US
SP
DEL
UNIT SEPERATOR
SPACE
DELETE
Name
Char.
!
"
&
'
(
)
*
Name
space
exclamation point
quotes
number symbol
dollar symbol
percent
business 'And'
apostrophe
parenthesis open
parenthesis closed
asterisk
Dec
Char.
43
44
45
46
47
58
59
60
61
62
63
+
-
/
:
/
<
=
>
Name
plus
comma
minus, dash
period, decimal point
forward slash
colon
semicolon
less than
equal to
greater than
question mark
Dec
Char.
64
91
92
93
94
95
96
123
124
125
126
@
[
)
A
{
I
Name
at
bracket open
back slash
bracket closed
circumflex
underline
accent grave
curly bracket open
vertical line
curly bracket closed
tilde
Control symbols (0-32 and 127 decimal) cannot be seen on monitor or printer; they are for transmitting system commands.
Numbers 128-255 (decimal) in expanded ASCII code are either coded like symbols 0-127 or they are used for
special symbols (cursive symbols, graphic symbols, user defined code). For example, number 128 is the EURO
symbol .
1)
403
Sequence block
Repeating block
with starting condition
Repeating block
with end condition
Starting condition:
Repeat, if...
Instruction 1
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 4
Instruction 3
Alternative
Simple alternative
Alternative
Conditional alternative
Condition
satisfied
^ ^
End condition:
If ..., then repeat
Alternative
Multiple alternatives
Condition
not
satisfied
satisfied
Condition
not
satisfied
Condition
1
Instruction
Instruction
No
instruction
(empty)
Condition
2
Condition
3
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
404
Nassi-Shneiderman diagram
Program: circle calculation
Begin ^
Clear screen
Value assignment PI = 3.1415927
Clear screen
Value assignment PI
Initial value W$
Loop
D1 diameter of the
smallest circle
D2 diameter of the
largest circle
S
increment
Output error
Value assignment D = D1
Repeat, until D > D2
Calculation
C = D * PI
A = D A 2 * PI/4
Output D, C, A
Increment value of D by S
Input W$
Program end
BASIC program
Loop
until D > D2
Processing C, A
Output D, C, A
Increment value of D
End of loop
Input W$
End of loop
C^D
C circumference
A area
REM
* * * Circle Calculation Program * * *
REM
* * * for circumference and area of circle * * *
CLS
PRINT
CONST PI = 3.1415927 #
W$= "n"
REM
* * * Input value * * *
DO UNTIL W$ = " j "
PRINT "Diameter initial value:";
INPUT D1
PRINT "Diameter end value:";
INPUT D2
PRINT "Increment:";
INPUTS
IF D1 < 0 OR D1 > D2 OR S < = 0
THEN
PRINT "Invalid input"
END IF
REM * * * Processing and Output * * *
PRINT "D", "C", " A "
D = D1
DO UNTIL D> D2
C = D * PI
A = D A 2 * PI/4
PRINT D, C, A
D = D+S
LOOP
REM * * * End * * *
PRINT "End program? (y/n)";
INPUT W$
LOOP
END
405
Explanation
Command
Explanation
Insert Menu
File Menu
New
Open
Close
Save
Break
Page Numbers
AutoText
Save as
Symbol
Page setup
Index and
Tables
Print Preview
Picture
Inserts graphics.
Text Box
Exit
Ends MS-Word.
File
Inserts a file.
Object
Hyperlink
Edit Menu
Undo
Repeat
Cut
Copy
Paste
Select All
Find
Replace
Goto
View Menu
Normal
Print layout
Outline
Toolbars
Arrange All
Split
1 Document 1
Tools Menu
Spelling and
grammar
Language
Letters and
Mailings
Macro
Shows/hides toolbars.
Customize
Ruler
Shows/hides ruler.
Options
Header and
Footer
Zoom
Table Menu
Format Menu
Font
Paragraph
Bullets and
Numbering
Borders and
Shading
Tabs
Text direction
Insert Table
Creates a table.
Insert
Delete
Select
Merge Cells
Split cells
Convert
406
Explanation
1 File Menu
New
Command
Explanation
Insert Menu
Inserts individual cells.
Close
Save
Chart
Save as
Page Break
Page setup
Function
Print Area
Picture
Inserts graphics.
Object
Hyperlink
Exit
Ends Excel.
Open
Print Preview
Edit Menu
Window Menu
New Window
Arrange
Copy
Split
Paste
Freeze Panes
Fill
1 Workbook 1
Undo
Repeat
Cut
Delete Sheet
Move or Copy
Sheet
Find
Replace
1 Data Menu
Sort
Import External
Data
View Menu
Share workbook
Protection
Formula
Auditing
Macro
Customize
Options
Format Menu
Page Break
Preview
Toolbars
Ruler
Header and
Footer
Zoom
Cells
Rows
Columns
Sheet
Conditional
Formatting
407
USA
France
Japan
Sweden
AFNOR
JIS
SS
U. K.
Standard
DIN, DIN EN
BS
1.0035
A 283 (A)
1449 15 HR; HS
A 33
1300
S235JR
1.0037
1015, A 283
Fe 360 B
E 24-2
STKM 12 A; C
1311
S235JRG1
1.0036
A 283 (C)
Fe 360 B 4360-40 B
1311,1312
S235JRG2
1.0038
A550.36
E 24-2 NE
Fe 360 B;
6323-ERW 3; CEW 3
STKM 12A; C
1312
S235J0
1.0114
4360-40 C
E 24-3, E 24-4
S235J2G3
1.0116
A 515 (55)
Fe 360 D 1 FF
E 24-3, E 24-4
1312,1313
S235J2G4
1.0117
1513
A2
E 36-4
S275JR
1.0044
1020
Fe 430 B FU
E 28-2
S275J0
1.0143
A 572 (42)
4360-43 C
E 28-3, E 28-4
S275J2G3
1.0144
E 28-3, E 28-4
SM 400 A; B; C
STK 400
2172
1414-01
S355JR
1.0045
4360-50 B
E 36-2
S355J0
1.0553
A 678 (C)
A3
320-560 M
1606
S355J2G3
1.0570
1024; 1524
E 36-3, E 36-4
STK 500
S355J2G4
1.0577
A 738 (A; C)
Fe 510 D2 FF
A 52 FP
2174
S355K2G3
1.0595
A 678 (C)
224-430
S355K2G4
1.0596
A 678 (C)
224-430
E295
1.0050
A 570 (50)
Fe 490-2 FN
A 50-2
SS 490
1550,2172
E335
1.0060
A 572(65)
Fe 590-2 FN
A 60-2
SM 570
1650
E360
1.0070
Fe 590-2 FN
SM 570
1650
1.0490
A 516(60)
S275M
1.8818
A 715 (7)
S355N
1.0545
A 714 (III)
4360-50 E
E 355 R
2334-01,2134-01
S355M
1.8823
A 715 (7)
1.8902
A 633 m
E 420 R
S420M
1.8825
S460N
1.8901
A 633 m
E 460 R
S460M
1.8827
A 734(B)
1.8906
4360-55 F
S 460 Q, T
SM 520 B, C
2143
S500QL
1.8909
S 500 T
S620QL
1.8927
S 620 T
S960QL
1.8933
S 960 T
1.1121
1010
C 10, CX 10
S 9 CK, S 10 C
1265
C10R
1.1207
1011
E 355 C
C15E
1.1141
1015
S 15, S 15 CK
1370
C15R
1.1140
1016
080 A 20
1.7131
5115
527 M 17
16 MC 5, 16 Mn Cr 5
2173
16MnCrS5
1.7139
5115
620-440
16MC5
2127
18CrMo4
1.7243
5120/5120 H
527 M 20
20 MC 5
Scr 420 M
2523
18CrMoS4
1.7244
5120/5120 H
527 M 20
20 MC 5
Scr 420 M
2523
20MoCr4
1.7321
K12220
20MoCrS4
1.7323
K12220
15NiCr13
1.5752
3310
655 H 13
12 NC 15
SNC 815(H)
20NiCrMo2-2
1.6523
8620 H
805 H 20
20 NCD 2
SNCM 220 H
2506
20NiCrMoS2-2
1.6526
8620/8620 H
20 NCD 2
SNCM 220 M
2506
17NiCrMo6-4
1.6566
815 M 17
18 NCD 6
2523
408
USA
U.K.
France
Japan
Sweden
AFNOR
JIS
SS
Standard
DIN, DIN EN
BS
17NiCrMoS6-4
1.6569
4718/47 18 H
20MnCr5
1.7147
5120
527 M 20
20MC5
SMn C 420 H
20MnCrS5
1.7149
5120/5120 H
527 M 20
20 MC 5
Scr 420 M
2523
14NiCrMo13-4
1.6657
9310
832 M 13
16NCD13
18CrNiMo7-8
1.6687
18NCD6
1.0402
1020
055 M 15
AF 42 C 20
S 20 C, S 22 C
1450
C22E
1.1151
1023
055 M 15
2 C 22, XC 18, XC 25
S 20 C
1450
C25
1.0406
1025
070 M 26
1 C25
C25E
1.1158
1025
(070 M 26)
2 C 25, XC 25
S 25 C, S 28 C
1450
C35
1.0501
1035
060 A 35
C 35, 1 C 35
S 35 C, S 35 CM
1572, 1550
C35E
1.1181
1035
080 A 35
C 35
S 35 C
1550, 1572
C45
1.0503
1045
080 A 46
C 45
S 45 C, S 45 CM
1672, 1650
C45E
1.1191
1042, 1045
080 M 46
XC 42 H 1
S 45 C
1672
C60
1.0601
1060
060 A 62
C 60
S 58 C
C60E
1.1221
1064
2 C 60
S 58 C, S 60 CM,
S 65 CM
C30
1.0528
G 10300
080 A 30
XC 32
S 30 C
C35
1.0501
1035
060 A 35
C40
1.0511
1040
080 M 40
AF 60 C 40
C50
1.0540
G 10500
080 M 50
XC 50
S 50 C
C55
1.0535
1055
C 54; 1 C 55
S 55 C, S 55 CM
1655
1665, 1678
F. 114A
1.7003
120 M 36
38 C 2, 38 Cr 2
38CrS2
1.7023
5140
530 A 40
42 C 4
Scr 440 M
2245
46Cr2
1.7006
5045
42 C 2, 46 Cr 2
46CrS2
1.7025
A 768(95)
SNB 5
34Cr4
1.7033
5132
530 A 32
32 C 4, 34 Cr 4
SCr 430(H)
34CrS4
1.7037
4340/4340 H
818 M 40
35 NCD 6
SNCM 439
37Cr4
1.7034
5135
530 A 36
37 Cr4, 38 C 4
37CrS4
1.7038
5135/5135 H
38 Cr 4
Scr 435 H
25CrMo4
1.7218
4118
708 M 25
25 CD 4
SCM 420
2225
24CrMoS4
1.7213
4130/4130 H
CDS 110
30 CD 4
SCM 430 M
2223-01
41Cr4
1.7035
5140
530 A 40
41 Cr 4, 42 C 4
41CrS4
1.7039
L1
524 A 14
2092
34CrMo4
1.7220
4137
708 A 37
35 CD 4
SCM 432
2234
42CrMo4
1.7225
4140
708 M 40
42 CD 4
2244
50CrMo4
1.7228
4150,4147
708 A 47
50 Cr Mo 4
2512
51CrV4
1.8159
6150
735 A 50
50 CV 4
SUP 10
2230
36CrNiMo4
1.6511
9840
817 M 37
36 CrNiMo 4, 35 NCD 5,
40 NCD 3
34CrNiMoS4
1.6582
4337, 4240
SNCM 447
2541
30NiCrMo8
1.6580
823 M 30
30 CrNiMo 8
SNCM 431
36NiCrMo16
1.6773
5135/5135 H
38 Cr 4
Scr 435 M
31CrMo12
1.8515
722 M 24
30 CD 12
2240
34CrAIMo5-10
1.8507
A 355 CI.D
30 CAD 6.12
40CrAIMo7-10
1.8509
E 7140
905 M 39, En 41 B
40 CAD 6.12
2940
40CrMoV13-9
1.8523
897 M 39
Nitriding steels
1.1193
1045
XC 42 H 1 TS
S 45 C, S 45 CM
1672
42Cr4
1.7045
5140
530 A 40
42 C 4 TS
Scr440
2245
41CrMo4
1.7223
4142
42 CD 4 TS
2244
Cf35
1.1183
1035
080 A 35
XC 38 H 1 TS
S 35 C, S 35 CM
1572
409
USA
U. K.
Japan
France
Sweden
Standard
DIN, DIN EN
Cf53
1.1213
Cf70
1.1249
1050
BS
AFNOR
JIS
SS
070 M 55
XC 48 H 1 TS
S 50 C, S 50 CM
1674
1912
SUM 22
S 250 Pb
SUM 23 L
1914
S 300
SUM 25
12 L 14
S 300 Pb
1926
1108,1109
(210 M 15)
10 F 2
11SMn30
1.0715
1213
11SMnPb30
1.0718
12 L 13
11SMn37
1.0736
1215
11SMnPb37
1.0737
10S20
1.0721
230 M 07
10SPb20
1.0722
10 Pb F 2
35S20
1.0726
1140
212 M 36
35MF6
1957
46S20
1.0727
1146
En 8 DM
45MF4
SUM 43
1.1525
W 108
C 80 E 2 U, Y-| 80
C105U
1.1545
W1
BW 1 A
Y 105
SK 3
1880
2710
1.2542
S1
BS 1
45 WCrV 8
S1
60WCrV8
1.2550
S1
BS 1
55 WC 20
100MnCrW4
1.2510
O1
BO 1
90 MnWCrV 5
SKS 3
90MnCrV8
1.2842
02
BO 2
90 Mn V 8, 90 MV 8
X210Cr12
1.2080
P3
BD 3
Z 2 0 0 C 12
SKD 12
2710
102Cr6
1.2067
L3
(BL 3)
100 Cr 6, Y 100 C 6
SUJ2
45NiCrMo16
1.2767
BP 30
Y 35 NCD 16
X153CrMoV12
1.2379
D2
BD 2
Z 160 CDV 12
SKD 12
2260
X100CrMoV51
1.2363
A2
BA2
Z100 CDV 5
SKD 12
2260
X40CrMoV51
1.2344
H 13
BH 13
Z 40 CDV 5
SKD 61
2242
X210CrW12
1.2436
D4 (D6)
BD 6
Z 210 CW 12-01
SKD 2
2312
55NiCrMoV7
1.2714
SKS 51
X37CrMoV5-1
1.2343
H 11
BH 11
Z 38 CDV 5
SKD 6
32CrMoV12-28
1.2365
H 10
BH 10
32 CDV 12-28
HS6-5-2C
1.3343
M 2
BM 2
HS 6-5
SKH 51
2722
HS6-5-2-5
1.3243
M 35
BM 35
Z 85 WDKCV 06-05-04-02
SKH 55
2723
HS 10-4-3-10
1.3207
BT 42
HS 10-4-3-10
SKH 57
HS2-9-2
1.3348
M 7
HS 2-9-2,
Z 100 DCWV 09-04-02-02
2782
HS2-9-1-8
1.3247
M 42
BM 42
HS 2-9-1-8
SKH 59
2716
S2-9-2-8
1.3249
M 42
BM 34
Z 12 CN 18-09
SUS 301
2331
SUS F 304 L
1.4310
301
301 S 21/22
X2CrNi18-9
1.4307
F 304 L
304 L
X5CrNi18 9
1.4350
304
304 S 31
Z 5 C N 18.09
SUS 304
2332
X2CrNiN19-11
1.4306
304 L
304/305 S 11
Z 2 CN 18-10
2352
X2CrNi18-10
1.4311
304 LN
304 S 61
Z 3 CN 18-07 Az
SUS 304 LN
2371
X5CrNi18-10
1.4301
304
304 S 17
Z 5 CN 17-08
SUS 304
2332, 2333
X8CrNiS18-9
1.4305
303
303 S 22/31
Z 8 CNF 18-09
SUS 303
2346
X6CrNiTi18-10
1.4541
321
321 S 31/51
Z 6 CNT 18-10
SUS 321
2337
X4CrNi18-12
1.4303
305/308
Z 5 CN 18-11 FF
X5CrNiMo17-12-2
1.4401
316
316 S 13/17/19
Z 3 C N D 17-11-01
SUS 316
2347
X6CrNiMoTl 17-12-2
1.4571
31671
320 S 18/31
Z 6 CNDT 17-12
SUS 316 71
2350
X2CrNiMo18-14-3
1.4435
316 L
316 S 11/13/14
Z 3 C N D 17-12-03/
Z 3 C N D 18-14-03
SUS 316 L
2353
410
USA
U. K.
Japan
France
Sweden
Standard
DIN, DIN EN
Mat. No.
X2CrNiMoN 17-13-3
1.4429
316 LN
326 S 63
Z 3 C N D 17-12 Az
X2CrNiMoN17-13-5
1.4439
316 L
316S 11
Z 2 C N D 17-12
SUSF316L
2348
X1 NiCrMoCu25-20-5
1.4539
USN N 08904
Z 2 NCDU 25-20
2562
AISI/SAE
BS
AFNOR
JIS
SS
2375
1.4003
A 268
X6Cr13
1.4000
403
403 S 17
Z 8 C 12, Z 8 C 13 FF
SUS 403
2301
X6Cr17
1.4016
430
430 S 15
Z 8 C 17
SUS 430
2320
X2CrTi12
1.4512
409
409 S 19
Z3CT12
SUH 409
X6CrMo17-1
1.4113
434
434 S 17
Z 8 CD 17.01
SUS 434
X2CrMoTi18-2
1.4521
443/444
SUS 444
2326
1.4005
416
2380
X12Cr13
1.4006
410
410 S 21
Z 10 C 13
SUS 410
2302
X20Cr13
1.4021
420
420 S 37
Z 2 0 C 13
SUS 420 J 1
2303
X30Cr13
1.4028
420 F
420 S 45
Z 3 0 C 13
SUS 420 J 2
2304
X46Cr13
1.4034
(420 S 45)
Z 44 C 14, Z 38 C 13 M
SUS 420 J2
2304
X39CrMo17-1
1.4122
5925
X3CrNiMo13-4
1.4313
CA 6-NM
425 C 11
Z 4 C N D 13.4 M
SCS 5, SCS 6
2384
1.5023
41 Si 7
46Si7
1.5024
9255
51 S 7, 51 Si 7
2090
55Cr3
1.7176
5155
525 A 58
55 Cr 3, 55 C 3
2253
61SiCr7
1.7108
9261,9262
61 SC 7
51CrV4
1.8159
6150
735 A 50
55 Cr V 4
SUP 10
2230
1.0347
A 619
1449 3 CR
CR 2
1146
DC04
1.0338
A 620 (1008)
1449 2 CR; 3 CR
ES
SPCE; HR 4
1147
EN-JL-1010 A 48 20 B
Ft 10 D
G 5501 FC 10
0110-00
EN-GJL-150
EN-JL-1020 A 48 25 B
0115-00
EN-GJL-200
EN-JL-1030 A 48 30 B
0120-00
EN-GJL-250
EN-JL-1040 A 48 40 B
0125-00
EN-GJL-300
EN-JL-1050 A 48 45 B
G 5501 FC 30
0130-00
EN-GJL-350
EN-JL-1060 A 48 50 B
0135-00
EN-JS-1010
0717-15
EN-GJS-500-7
0727-02
EN-GJS-600-3
0732-03
EN-GJS-700-2
0737-01
EN-GJMW-350-4
EN-JM 1010
86681 W 35-04
A 32-701 MB 35-7
EN-GJMW-400-5
EN-JM 1030
6681 W 40-05
A 32-701 MB 40-05
EN-GJMW-450-7
EN-JM 1040
6681 45-07
A 32-701 MB 450-7
EN-GJMB-350-10
310 B 340/12
A 32-702 MN 350-10
0815-00
EN-GJMB-450-6
EN-JM 1140
6681 P 45-06
A 32-703 MP 50-5
0854-00
EN-GJMB-550-4
EN-JM 1160
6681 P 55-04
A 32-703 MP 60-3
0856-00
EN-GJMB-650-2
EN-JM 1180
6681 P 65-02
0862-03
EN-GJMB-700-2
6681 P 70-02
A 32-703 MP 70-2
0862-03
411
USA
France
Japan
Sweden
AFNOR
JIS
SS
U. K.
Standard
DIN, DIN EN
Mat. No.
AISI/SAE
BS
1.0420
GS-45
1.0446
A 27
SC 360
SC 450
1504-161 Gr. B
1.0619
A 216 Grade
WCC
G17CrMo5-5
1.7357
A 217 Grade
WC 6
new old
Al 99.5
1050 A
1050 A
1B
1050 A A-5
Al Mn1
3103
3103
N 3
Al M n l C u
3003
3003
Al Mg1
5005 A
5005 A
N 41
Al Mg2
5251
5251
N4
Al Mg3
5754
5754
A-G 3 M
Al Mg5
5019/5119
5019/5119
A-G 5
Al Mg3Mn
5454
5454
N 51
5454 A-G 3 MC
Al Mg4.5Mn0.7
5083
5083
N 8
AlCuPbMgMn
2007
2007
A-U 4 PB
4335
Al Cu4PbMg
2030
2030
Al MgSiPb
6012
6012
A-SGPB
Al Cu4SiMg
2014
2014
H 15
Al Cu4MgSi
2017
2017
A 2017
Al Cu4Mg1
2024
2024
2 L 97/9
Al MgSi
6060
6060
H9
3103
new
1050 A A 1050
(3103) A-M 1
4007
4054
3003 A 3003
5005 A 5005
4106
5251 A-G 2 M
5251
5754
4125
5454 A 5454
A 5083
(2014 A) A-U 4 SG
A-U 4 G
2024 A - U 4 G 1
(6063) A-GS
2024 A 2024
6060 A 6063
4103
4212
Al S i l M g M n
6082
6082
H 30
6082
Al Zn4.5Mg1
7020
7020
H 17
7020 A-Z 5 G
7020 (A 7 N 01)
Al Zn5Mg3Cu
7022
7022
Al Zn5.5MgCu
7075
7075
2 L 95/96
A 356
L M 25
A-Z4GU
7075 A-Z 5 GU
4140
4425
7075 A 7075
AC-AISi7Mg
AC-42000
A-S 7 g
3.3520
M 1A
MAG-E-101
G-M2
MgAI3Zn
3.5312
AZ 31 B
MAG-E-111
G-A 3 Z 1
MgAI6Zn
3.5612
AZ 61 A
MAG-E-121
G-A 6 Z 1
MgAI8Zn
3.5812
AZ 80 A
G-A 7 Z 1
Ti1
3.7025
TA 1
Ti2
3.7035
TA 2
T1AI6V4
3.7165
T A 10-13, 28, 56
TiAIMo4Sn2
3.7185
T A 45-51, 57
The publisher and its affiliates have taken care to collect the above data to the best of their ability. However, no
responsibility is accepted by the publisher or any of its affiliates regarding its content or any statement herein or
omission there from which may result in any loss or damage to any party using the data shown above.
412
Page
No.
Page
DIN
DIN
13
74
76
82
204
224
89
91
824
835
908
910
66
219
219
219
103
125 1)
126 1)
158
172
207
233
234
205
247
929
935
938
939
962
232
232
219
219
210
173
179
202
228
250
247
247
202
242, 243
65
962
974
981
10131}
10141)
Designation of nuts
Counterbores
Lock nuts for roller bearings
Hot rolled round steel bar
Hot-rolled square steel bar
227
225
268
144
144
319
323
332
336
406
Ball knobs
Preferred numbers
Center holes
Drill diameter for clearance holes
Dimensioning
248
65
91
204
75-82
10171)
1025
1026
1301
1302
433 1)
434
435
461
466
Flat washers
Washers for channels
Washers for I-beams
Coordinate systems
Knurled nuts, high form
234
235
235
62, 63
232
1304
1414
1445
1587
16511'
Symbols, mathematical
Twist drills
Clevis pins with threaded stud end
Hexagon acorn nuts, high form
Free cutting steels
19
301
238
231
134
467
471
472
475
508
232
269
269
223
250
17001)
17071)
1732
1850
174
334
326
262
2080
2093
2098
2211
2215
2215
2403
3760
37711>
4760
V-belts, cogged
Pipelines, identification
Radial seals
O-rings
Form deviations
4844
4983
4987
5406
5412
5418
5419
338-341
Safety signs
297
Tool holders, designation
296
Indexable inserts, designation
268
Lock washers
266
Cylindrical roller bearings
Roller bearings, mounting dimensions 265-267
270
Felt seals
Undercuts
Metric buttress threads
Eye bolts
Eye nuts
Hexagon head bolts and screws
92
207
219
231
214
616
617
623
625
628
264
268
264
265
265
650
711
720
780
787
820
T-slots
Axial deep groove ball bearings
Tapered roller bearings
Module series for gears
Bolts and screws for T-slots
Standardization
250
266
267
257
250
8
509
513
580
582
609
1)
The standard was withdrawn. Replacement standard, if available, is given on the cited book page.
144
149,150
146
17,20-22
19
242, 243
246
245
254
253
253
343
270
270
98
Page
No.
5520
6311
6319
6321
110 17221^
172231'
318 173501'
248 17860
250 19225
249
6323
6332
6335
6336
6771 1)
250
248
249
249
66
6773
6780
67841>
6785
6796
97
83
88
88
235
6799
6885
6886
6887
6888
Circlips
Feather keys
269 53804
240 55350
239 66001
239 66025
240 66217
6914 1)
6915 1)
6935
7157
7500
214
230
318,319
111
218
7719
7721
253
253, 255
253
185 439
253, 254 440
485
253
499 1)
215 515
234
216 573
Keys
Gib-head keys
Woodruff keys
H n u h l p \/-hplt<;
7726
7753
L/UUUIC V UCILO
Foam materials
Narrow V-belts
7867
7984
7989
7991
7999
V-ribbed belt
Cap screws, socket head
Washers for steel constructions
Countersunk head screws
85541>
9713 1)
9715
9812
9816
Pillar presses
9819
Pillar presses
O
OCi 1
yob
Punches
16901
Plastic molded parts, tolerances
172111) Nitriding steels
172121' Steels for flame hardening
1)
Page
DIN
DIN
5425
Spring steel
Steel wire for springs
Tool steels
Titanium, titanium alloys
Controllers
138
138
135
172
347-349
19226
346-349
19227
30910
40719 1)
50125
346, 347
178
358-360
190
50141
51385
51502
51519
51524
Shear test
Machining coolants
Lubricants, designation
ISO viscosity grades
Hydraulic oils
191
292
271,272
271
368
Statistical analysis
Quality inspection and testing
Program flow charts, symbols
CNC machines, program structure
CNC machines, coordinates
277, 278
276
403
382-385
381
66261
69871
69893
70852
70952
214 754
754
324 755
171 7751>
172
252
1044
252 1045
1089
252
1089
OKI
ZD 1
1173
186
134
134, 156
403
243
243
231
231
DIN EN
Inert gas
Wire electrodes
Wrought aluminum alloys
Rod electrodes
Material condition of Al alloys
325
325
166, 167
327
165
165
166, 167
169, 170
166, 167
380
Brazing
Flux for brazing
Compressed-gas cylinders
Gas cylinders - Identification
Copper alloys, material conditions
333
334
324
331,332
174
The standard was withdrawn. Replacement standard, if available, is given on the cited book page.
414
Page
No.
Page
DIN EN
DIN EN
161
142
142
141
175
174
158
160
161
160
10293
10297
10305
10327
12163
Cast steel
Tubes, machine construction
Precision steel tube
Hot dip coated sheet
Copper-zinc alloys
230
168
172
168
174, 176
12164
12413
12536
12844
12890
Copper-zinc-lead alloys
Grinding, maximum speeds
Gas welding rods
High-grade zinc casting alloys
Patterns
175
308
324
176
162, 163
13237
14399-4
14399-4
14399-6
20273
Equipment in EX area
Hexagon nuts, heavy
Hexagon head bolts, heavy
Flat washers
Clearance holes for bolts
357
230
214
233, 235
211
131
131
131
121-125
191
20898
22339
22340
22341
22553
141
146
147, 148
144
144
24015
24766
27434
27435
28738
213
220
220
220
235
10060
10083
10084
10085
10087
144
133, 156
132, 155
134, 157
134, 157
29454
29692 1)
60445
60446
60529
334
323
353
353
357
10088
10089
101131>
10130
101371'
Stainless steels
Spring steel
Fine grain structural steels
Sheet metal, cold-rolled
Quenched and tempered structural
steels
136, 137
138
131
140
131
60617
60848
60893
60947
610821'
350-352
358-360
184
355
354
61131
PLC
373-375
101421)
10210
10213
10219
10226
141
151
161
151
206
10268
10270
10270
10277
10278
140
138
244
145
145
1412
1560
1561
1562
1563
1661
1706
1753
1780
1982
6506
10002
100031)
10020
10025-2
10025-3
10025-4
10025-6
10027
10045
10051
10055
10056
10058
10059
1)
192
190
192
120
130
The standard was withdrawn. Replacement standard, if available, is given on the cited book page.
228
237
238
238
93-95
Page
No.
Page
DIN EN ISO
DIN EN ISO
217
217
7090
7091
7092
7200
7225
8673
8674
8675
Title blocks
Hazardous substance labels
Hexagon nuts, fine thread
Hexagon nuts, fine thread
Hexagon nuts, low form
66
331
229
229
230
183
183 8676
217 8734
217 8740
8741
195 8742
213
237
238
238
238
Dowel pins
Rod electrodes
Fonts
Three-letter codes for countries
Property classes of bolts and screws
237
327
64
203
211
8743
8744
8745
8746
8747
238
238
238
238
238
3506
4014
4017
4026
4027
228
212
212
220
220
8752
8765
9000
9001
9004
237
213
274, 275
274
274
4028
4032
4033
4035
4063
220
228
229
229
322
9013
9453
9692
9787
10218
Thermal cutting
Soft solder alloys
Weld preparation
Industrial robots
Work safety with robots
330
334
323
378, 379
380
4287
4288
4759
4762
4957
Surface finish
Surface finish
Product grades for bolts and screws
Cap screws, socket head
Tool steels
98
98, 99
211
215
135, 155
10512
10642
13337
13920
14526
230
216
237
322
184
5457
6506
6507
6508
6947
66
192
193
193
322
14527
14539
14577
15065
15785
184
380
194
224
96
7040
7046
230
217
15977
241
128
216
527
868
898
Lines
Paper formats
Tensile properties of plastics
Hardness test by Shore
Property classes of bolts and screws
1043
1101
1207
1234
1302
Basic polymers
Geometric tolerancing
Cap screws, slotted
Cotter pins
Indication of surface finish
1872
1873
2009
2010
2039
PE molding compounds
PP molding compounds
Countersunk head screws, slotted
Raised head countersunk screws,
slotted
Hardness test on plastics
2338
2560
3098
3166
3506
7047
1)
67
66
195
195
211
180
112-114
216
232
99, 100
7050
7051
15978
18265
20482
217
21269
The standard was withdrawn. Replacement standard, if available, is given on the cited book page.
233
234
234
241
194
191
216
416
Page
No.
Page
BGV
DIN ISO
14
128
228
273
286
241 A8
67-75 B3
206 D12
225
102-109
338-341
Safety signs
344
Noise Protection Regulations (German)
308
Grinding tools, application
513
525
848
965
965
1219
1832
2162
2203
2768
67/548
363-365 67/548
296
87
84
80, 110 60479
R-Phrases, S-Phrases
Danger symbols
2859
3040
4379
4381
4382
Acceptance sampling
Designation on cones
Plain bearing bushings
Plain bearing materials
Plain bearing materials
5455
5456
5599
6410
6411
Scales
Projection methods
5-way pneumatic valves
Screw threads, representation
Center bores, representation
6413
6691
6753
7049
8062
Representation of splines
Plain bearing materials
Plates for cutting tools
Pan head tapping screws
Dimensional tolerances for castings
8826
9222
10242
13715
280
304
262
2229
261
2740
261
2880
3258
65
3368
69, 70
3411
364
79, 90
91
87
261
251
218
163
24569
DGQ
EWG guidelines
Safety measures
Automatic cutout fuses
1>
356
VDI
Bonded joints, preparatory treatment
Grippers
PLC applications
Machine running time
Punch dimensions
Abrasive bonds
336
380
375
285
316
309,311
VDMA
Hydraulic fluids, degradable
85
86
251
88
356
356
199, 200
198, 342
IEC
DIN VDE
0100-410
0100-430
281
278
197
The standard was withdrawn. Replacement standard, if available, is given on the cited book page.
368
Subject index
417
Subject index
Abrasives
ABS (acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
copolymers)
309
181,187
164
326
184
Acceleration
34
Analog controllers
36
AND operation
348
350,375,376
36
265
280
222
Acceptance sampling
280
Aramide fibers
187
Acceleration force
78
344
Arc welding
332
203
Area graphs
185
382
Adhesive bonding
336
ASCII code
402
Adhesives, microencapsulated
222
Austenite
153
369
Austenitic steels
Air pressure
Automation
42
327, 328
328
63
332
70
136
345-406
157
Auxiliary dimensions
81
168
35
168
169-171
169
Aluminum tubes
171
Axonometric representation
266
69
B
Ball bearings
Ball knobs
Basic dimensions
Basic geometrical constructions
Basic hole
Basic polymers, designation
Basic quantities
265, 266
248
81
Bending
209-221
210
180
223
20
20
39
103
Basic units
Bearing forces
116,117
250
58-61
103
Basic shaft
Beam cutting
Boiling temperature
329, 330
329
37
259
318,319
209, 210
221
336
96
337
337
88
BR (butadiene rubber)
185
Bending load
47
Brazing materials
333
Bending stress
47
Breakeven point
286
192
318
318,319
Buckling, load
46
319
Buoyant force
42
258
Buttress threads
Binary logic
350
401
Binomial formula
Blind rivet
Block and tackle
15
241
39
207
418
Subject index
Subject index
c
Cabinet projection
69
15
117
116, 117
Captive fastener
222
Coefficients of friction
332
135
Carbon fibers
187
155
Combination signs
341
62
41
132
Combined dimensioning
82
155
Composite materials
177
Case-hardening
154
Compressed-gas cylinders
324
176
332
159,160
Compression springs
245
159, 160
Compressive load
45
159
Compressive stress
45
158
Conductor resistance
53
163
30
Cast steel
Casting tolerance grade
Castle nuts
Conical seats
250
163
235
232
Continuous controllers
348
159,161
Contribution margin
286
181
394
Cavalier projection
69
181
Control dimensions
81
Centrifugal force
37
Controlled systems
349
Centroids, lines
32
Controllers
32
Ceramic materials
177
Coordinate dimensioning
346-349
381
82
78
381
Change in volume
51
Copper-tin alloys
175
Character sizes
64
Copper-zinc alloys
175
64
Corrosion
196
Chamfers, dimensioning
Character types
Chemicals used in metal technology
119
Corrosion protection
185
Cosine
Circle, area
Circle, circumference
Circle, finding the center of
Circlips
Circuit diagrams
196
11,13
10,27
Cost accounting
284
27
Cost calculation
284
60
286
269
Cotangent
354
Cotter pins
12, 13
232
365, 367
365, 366
Circuits, electrical
351-354
Counter nut
222
384, 385
225
289
28
28
28
225
224
224, 225
217
102
216
211
CR (chloroprene rubber)
185
Clevis pins
238
Cross-section area
346
34, 35
Cube root
15
197
Current density
54
204
Currents
356
301
73
116,117
Subject index
419
Subject index
Cutting data, grinding
308,311
300
299
312
305
298
302
300
302
298
303
298
46
298
35
294, 295
D
D-controllers
348
Differential indexing
307
Danger criteria
342
Digital controllers
349
342
Dimension lines
Danger symbols
Data processing, graphical symbols
Deceleration force
403, 404
36
76
Dimension numbers
76
Dimensioning rules
77
Decimal system
393
Dimensioning systems
321
Direct costing
286
320
Direct costs
284
321
320
Direct indexing
307
321
Discontinuous controllers
349
321
Disk springs
246
320
Disposal of substances
197
265
Dividing head
307
321
Divisions, dimensioning
281
Drain plugs
219
47
Drill bushings
247
116,117
Drilling cycles
389
Defect chart
Deflection
Density, values
75
55, 351
79
Description of hazards
342
Drilling screws
210
222
301
102
299
78
Drilling, problems
306
69
289
Dry machining
293
198, 199
Energy, kinetic
38
318, 319
Energy, potential
38
Elastomers
179, 185
Deviations
Diameter, dimensioning
Diametric projection
Die clearance
316
Die dimensions
316
E
EC Directive on Hazardous Substances
Electric current
Electrical circuit symbols
Electrical circuits
Electrical conductance
Electrical engineering, fundamentals
Electricity, quantities and units
53, 54
Equations, solving
185
15
351,352
Equipment, electrical
353
353, 354
191
340
53
53-55
22
Euclidean theorem
Eutectic
23
153
196
Eutectoid
153
Electrohydraulic controls
367
EXCEL, commands
406
Electropneumatic controls
366
Extension lines
Electrochemical series
76
Ellipse, area
28
Extrusion
Ellipse, constructing
60
Eye bolts
219
187
Eye nuts
231
38
186
Subject index
420
Subject index
Face milling, cutting force and cutting power
300
334
Fatigue test
189
Foam materials
185
239
Feather keys
240
Fonts
64
36
270
Forces
36
Ferrite
153
36
Ferritic steels
137
Forces, representation
Fiberglass
187
Filler metals
334
Form deviations
35
Fine threads
Foundry technology
204
marking
36
112-114
98
332
162,163
134
343
157
340
Freezing temperature
117
277
96
102
Frequency, relative
Fits, r e c o m m e n d e d
111
Friction
41
Fixed costs
286
Friction power
41
330
Frictional moment
41
329
Frictional work
38
373, 374
217
Function charts
358-360
145
Function diagrams
361,362
144
Fundamental deviations
102
350, 352
105
Flow rates
371
Fluorocaoutchouc (FKM)
185
Fluted knobs
249
Fundamental tolerances
103
334
Fuses
356
358
104
102,103
G
Gas cylinders, color coding
331
331
Gage pressure
42
Graphs
325, 326
324
Greek alphabet
117
Grinding
Gear winch
General tolerances
General tolerances, weldments
Geometric tolerancing
Geometrical areas, calculating
39
64
308-311
310
322
112-114
26-28
32
20
62,63
110
403, 404
239
308, 311
291
Grippers
380
238
Grooved pins
238
248
38, 39
H
Handling systems, job safety
380
Hardness limits
97
Hard milling
293
97
293
97
Hard turning
Hardening
153,154
Hardness test
188-195
Subject index
421
Subject index
Hardness values, conversion table
194
214
145
Hatching, representation
73
75
176
198
High-performance grinding
311
198
High-speed machining
293
High-speed steels
135
Hazardous substances
198-200
197
155
247
High-temperature plastics
187
52
Histogram
277
Heat of combustion
52
Hoisting winch
Heat of fusion
52
Heat of vaporization
52
Heat transfer
22
Heat transmission
52
Homogenizing anneal
153
52
312
289
312
Hazardous waste
Headed drill bushings
Heat flux
153-157
97
Hooke's law
153-157
61
39
29
243
36
135
332
155
401
293
212-214
363, 364
213
Hydraulic fluids
368
214
Hydraulic oils
368
Hydraulic press
370
228-231
Hexagon, constructing
59
231
Hydraulics
363-372
Hydrostatic pressure
42
Hyperbola, constructing
61
I, J
I-beams, medium width
I-beams, wide
l-controller
Ideal gas law
Imperial threads
Incline, dimensioning
Inclined plane
Indexing
Industrial robots
Inert gas
Information signs
Information technology
Injection molding
149
Injection pressure
186
149,150
Instruction List IL
373, 375
Interference fit
348
42
203
78
IR (isoprene rubber)
39
307
Isobutene-isoprene rubber
378, 379
102
73
61
185
153
104-109
185
325
Isometric projection
341
282
289
Knurls
Krypton cylinders, color coding
91
332
330
401-406
186
69
K
Keys, feather keys, woodruff keys
Kinetic energy
Knurled nuts
239
38
232
L
Labels for hazardous goods
331
374
184
Laminate materials
330
116,117
422
Subject index
Subject index
Law of cosines
14
Law of sines
14
Lines, centroid
77
Leader lines
67, 68
32
117
Ledeburite
153
Load cases
43
Left-hand threads
202
Load types
43
Lock nuts
231
25
268
Length, units
20
222
Lever
37
268
Lever principle
37
231
Lifting work
38
222
208
222
Limits
102
Locking fasteners
222
272
Length, calculating
Length, effective
24, 25
Linear expansion
51
Lubricants
Linear function
16
Lubricating greases
272
Lubricating oils
271
384, 385
M
Machine capability
281
Melting temperature
116,117
285
Memory (Flip-flop)
350,352
251
Machining coolants
292
Metric tapers
204
242, 243
172
153
172
326
305
300
Magnetism
Malleable cast iron
22
159,161
Mandatory signs
340
Manufacturing costs
284
181
Martens hardness
194
Milling, problems
Martensitic steels
137
392-400
306
290
38
Minimum clearance
102
Mass, calculation
31
Minimum dimension
102
211
Minimum interference
102
293
257
Modulus of elasticity
mass density
Material characteristics
31, 152
116,117
313
46
Material science
115-200
Material testing
188-195
184
188-189
Molecular groups
119
Mathematical symbols
Mathematics
19
9-32
Morse taper
34
34
187
Maximum clearance
102
Motion, uniform
102
Maximum interference
102
278
279
44, 45
20, 21
242, 243
Motion, accelerated
Motion, circular
Maximum dimension
183
34
202
Subject index
423
Subject index
N
350
NOR operation
350
Narrow V-belts
254
Normal distribution
278
Nassi-Shneiderman diagrams
395
Normalizing
Needle bearings
268
NOT operation
332
191
NPSM threads
203
NAND operation
52
153, 154
350
Nitriding
154
NPT threads
203
Nitriding steels
134
NPTF threads
203
157
NR (natural rubber)
185
Noise
344
381-400
344
Nuts
226-232
344
250
Nominal dimensions
102
Nuts, designation
227
Non-ferrous metals
164-176
Nuts, overview
165, 174
226, 227
228
270
53
346, 347
Orientation tolerance
113
Overhead
284
332
PI (Proportional-integral) controller
348
350
P
PA (polyamide) plastics
PAL drilling cycles (German association)
180-182
389
392-400
Pillar presses
389-391
Pins
252
236-238
Parabola, constructing
61
Pins, locating
Parallel circuit
54
Pins, overview
236
Parallel dimensioning
82
Pins, seating
249
Parallelogram area
26
343
Pipe threads
206
71
Piston speeds
371
383
Plain bearing
162
180, 181
261
329
186
Pareto diagram
Partial views in drawings
Path correction in CNC machining
Patterns, color coding
PC (polycarbonate) plastics
281
187
187
PD controller
348
PE (polyethylene) plastics
PE molding materials
Pearlite
Percentage, calculating
180-182
Plastics
183
Plastics testing
153
Plastics, cutting
18
249
261, 262
262
186
179-187
195
301-305
181
195
118
181
Plastics, identification
181
184
195
PF molding materials
184
195
pH value
119
179
184
Plateau honing
312
184
Physics
33-56
PLC, controls
251
373-377
Subject index
424
Subject index
373-376
Probability network
277
373-376
Process capability
281
Process steps
280
Production costs
284
PLC, programming
PLC, programming languages
363, 364
369
Production engineering
369
289
369
289
291
289
362-371
273-344
63
82
Polyblends
187
290
Polyetheretherketone (PEEK)
187
289
Polygon, constructing
59
287
Polygon, irregular
27
287
Polygon, regular
27
288
404
187
Polystyrene plastics
187
180-182
Prohibitive signs
187
Projection methods
Position tolerances
114
382
373-377
338
69, 70
211
81
Proportion, calculating
18
Positional tolerances
114
Proportional controller
348
343
Potential energy
Pour point
38
368
Proximity sensors
PTFE
355
181, 187
Power factor
56
Pulley, fixed
39
Power, electrical
56
Pulley, movable
39
Power, mechanical
40
Pumping capacity
371
Powers (exponentiation)
15
Pumps, power
371
Punch dimensions
316
PP (polypropylene) plastics
181, 182
PP molding materials
183
251
187
317
Punches
251
372
185
142
181
Preferred numbers
65
Pure aluminum
164,166
96
181, 182
Pressure
42
182
Pressure intensifier
370
29
Pressure units
42
Pyramid, volume
29
98
Pythagorean theorem
23
23
Prime cost
284
Probability
276
16
275
281
274
Quality control
276
Quality planning
276
279
Quantity of heat
51
276
276
Quadratic function
274-281
133
154
Subject index
425
Subject index
R
Robot axes
270
Radius
65
Radius, dimensioning
78
217
217
218
280
Random samples
278
278
Raw data
277
279
302
289
200
Recrystallization annealing
153
Rectangle, area
26
Reference lines
77
381
Reinforcing fibers
187
Retaining rings
269
87
Rhomboid, area
26
Rhombus, area
26
378
193
327
110
Roller bearings
Roller bearings, designation
263-268
264
264
263
85
263
Rolling friction
41
Roman numerals
64
Roots, extracting
15
38
81
303
Roughness parameters
98
98
145
145
144
350,352
Rubbers
185
276
Run-out tolerances
114
Running dimensioning
82
S
Safety colors
338
Safety factors
44
220
220
380
81
284
315
181,182
315
185
Scales
65
Shear load
46
Shear strength
46
Shear stress
SCARA robots
379
Shear test
221
Shearing
87
338-341
180-182,187
Serrations, representation
46
191
316,317
90
315
203
316
202-208
316
Seals, representation
86
316
49
317
316
Sectional views
73, 74
317
111
316
Sensors
355
139
Sequential charts
359
140
141
141
141
Sequential control
Series circuit
Serrated lock washers
50
426
Subject index
Subject index
Shewhart quality control chart
Shore hardness test
Shrinkage
279
Square, dimensioning
195
Stainless steels
51
Standard deviation
Shrinkage allowances
163
Shrinkage chucks
243
Star knob
20
Static friction
77
136,137
278
8
249
41
185
Statistical analysis
277
Simple indexing
307
279
145
144
48
Steel channel
146
41
Sine
Sintered metals
Size factor
Sliding friction
11,13
178
143
247
Steel sheet
139-141
Slot tenons
250
Steel tubes
142, 372
Slots, dimensioning
Software controllers
Soldering
Solders
Solid lubricants
79
151
349
142, 372
335
151
138
134
333, 334
272
129
Sound level
344
Steels, classification
120
Sound, definitions
344
279
382
Steels, overview
402
298
Strength of materials
43-50
116,117
Stress concentration
48
Stress limits
43
Solids, characteristics
116, 117
260
122-125
121
126,127
242
Speeds of machines
35
Sphere, dimensioning
78
Stress, allowable
30
30
317
130
250
Spiral, construction
60
241
Splines, representation
87
153,154
41, 48
139,140
131
128, 129
146
Spreadsheets
406
319
203
Studs
219
Spring force
36
222
Sub-dividing lengths
Spring pins
237
Surface profile
Spring rate
244, 245
138
138
Surface finish
Spring washers
222
Surface indications
Springs, representation
Springs: tension, compression, disk
Sprockets, representation
Spur gears, calculating
Square prism, area
Square prism, volume
Square root
Square steel bar, hot-rolled
Square, area
87
244-246
84
256, 257
373,374
24
98
29, 30
48
99
99, 100
45
Surface protection
196
101
Switching controllers
349
29
Symbols, mathematical
29
Synchronous belts
255
Synchronous pulleys
255
103
10,15
144
26
19-22
Subject index
427
Subject index
T-slots
250
Three-phase power
Tally sheet
277
Three-point controller
349
Thrust pads
248
Tangent
12
56
218
204
Tolerance class
102
Taper pins
237
Tolerance grade
102
Taper turning
304
Tapered keys
239
Tolerances of form
113
267
Tolerances of position
114
205
Tolerances, dimensioning
Tapered threads
Tapers, dimensioning
78
103
304
204
Torque
202
Torsion, loading
Total run-out tolerances
217, 218
80
297
80
Tapers, nomenclature
66
37
47
114
Transformers
56
51
Transition fit
102
14
Transmission ratios
259
Thermal conduction
52
Trapezoid, area
52
Technical drawing
Temperature
57-114
116, 117
51
22,51,52
179, 182, 183
26
207
Triangle, area
26
60
60
Triangle, equilateral
27
30
Thermoplastics, amorphous
179
Thermoplastics, semi-crystalline
179
184
Tubes
142, 151
Thermoset plastics
179
Turning cycles
388-391
287
288
218
303
302
298
Thread runouts
89
302
Thread tolerance
208
30
(German association)
388-391
Turning, problems
306
287
89
303
Threads, dimensioning
79
Types of adhesives
336
202
Threads, representation
90
202, 203
18
Three-phase current
55
U
UF (urea formaldehyde) resin
180, 181
Units of measurement
20
UF molding materials
184
184
180, 181
UF/MF-PMC plastics
184
181,182
203
Undercuts
92
203
203
Unit prefixes
17, 22
203
184
428
Subject index
Subject index
v
V-belt
V-belt pulleys
Variable costs
Velocity
Vibration test
Vickers hardness test
Views in drawings
Viscosity grade
253,254
254
Viscosity, kinematic
286
Voltage
271
368
53, 54
Voltage drop
54
222
31
193
Volume, calculating
31
Volume, units
20
34,308
71, 72
W
Warning signs
Washers
339
233-235
Welding positions
322
322
159
223
234
235
235
77
233, 234
Wire electrodes
325
234, 235
Wire, electrical
353
197
Woodruff keys
240
316
Word processing
405
39
Work, electrical
56
Weight
36
Work, mechanical
38
328
258
232
259
Weld preparation
323
165
131
167
165
Welding
Welding and soldering, dimensioning
322-330
95,96
176
172
93-95
326
Welding methods
322
X
Xenon cylinders, color coding
332
176